Canon IJ Printer Driver

MG7500 series

Online Manual

Read Me First

Useful Functions Available on the Machine

Overview of the Machine

Printing

Copying

Scanning

Troubleshooting

English

Contents

Read Me First. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

How to Use the Online Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Trademarks and Licenses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Search Tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Notes on Operation Explanations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Useful Functions Available on the Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Connect Wirelessly with Ease in "Access Point Mode". . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Print Photos Easily Using My Image Garden. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Create and Print Personalized Disc Labels (CD/DVD/BD) Easily and Beautifully. . . . . . . 31

Download a Variety of Content Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Print Items with Easy-PhotoPrint+ (Web Application). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Print/Scan by Placing a Smartphone over the Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Connection Methods Available on the Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Connection without Using an Access Point (Windows XP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Restrictions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Notice for Web Service Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Use PIXMA Cloud Link. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Using PIXMA Cloud Link from Your Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Before Using PIXMA Cloud Link from Your Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Preparing to Use PIXMA Cloud Link from Your Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Application Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Using PIXMA Cloud Link. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Cloud Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Cloud Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Using PIXMA Cloud Link from Your Smartphone, Tablet, or Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Before Using Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Requirements for Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Preparations Before Using Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Printing Your Printer registration ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Using Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Adding a Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Troubleshooting Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Printing with Google Cloud Print. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Preparations for Printing with Google Cloud Print. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Printing from Computer or Smartphone with Google Cloud Print. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Printing from AirPrint Compliant Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Android Print. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Checking Printer Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Online Storage Integration Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

How to Use Print from E-mail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Preparing to Use Print from E-mail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Timezone List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Print Easily from a Smartphone or Tablet with PIXMA Printing Solutions. . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Printing with Windows RT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Overview of the Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Safety Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Safety Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Regulatory and Safety Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Main Components and Basic Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Main Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Front View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Rear View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Inside View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Operation Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

About the Power Supply of the Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Confirming that the Power Is On. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Turning the Machine On and Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Notice for the Power Plug/Power Cord. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Notice for Unplugging the Power Cord. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Using the Operation Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Loading Paper / Originals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Loading Paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Paper Sources to Load Paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Loading Small Size Paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Loading Large Size Paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Loading Envelopes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Media Types You Can Use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Paper Load Limit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Media Types You Cannot Use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Before Printing on Art Paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Printing Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Printing Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Other Sizes than Letter, Legal, Envelopes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Letter, Legal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Sizes for Art Paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Envelopes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Printable Discs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Placing a Printable Disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Cautions When Printing on a Printable Disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Before Placing a Printable Disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Placing a Printable Disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Removing a Printable Disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

How to Detach / Attach the Disc Tray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Loading Originals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Loading Originals on the Platen Glass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

How to Load Originals for Each Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Originals You Can Load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

How to Detach / Attach the Document Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Inserting the Memory Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Before Inserting the Memory Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Inserting the Memory Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Removing the Memory Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Replacing an Ink Tank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Replacing an Ink Tank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Checking the Ink Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Checking the Ink Status with the Touch Screen on the Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Checking the Ink Status with the Ink Lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Maintenance Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Cleaning the Print Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Cleaning the Print Head Deeply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Aligning the Print Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Aligning the Print Head Manually. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Performing Maintenance from a Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Cleaning the Print Heads from Your Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Aligning the Print Head Position from Your Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Aligning the Print Head Position Manually from Your Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Use Your Computer to Print a Nozzle Check Pattern. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Cleaning the Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Cleaning the Exterior of the Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Cleaning the Inside of the Machine (Bottom Plate Cleaning). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Cleaning the Pad in the Cassette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Changing the Machine Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Changing the Print Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Managing the Printer Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Reducing the Printer Noise. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Changing the Printer Operation Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Changing the Machine Settings Using the Operation Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Changing the Machine Settings Using the Operation Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Print settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

LAN settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Device user settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

PictBridge print settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Language selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Home screen background color. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Firmware update. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Cassette settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Reset setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

About ECO settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

About Quiet setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Using the Machine with the Access Point Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Setting Up the Card Slot as the Memory Card Drive of the Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Setting Up the Card Slot as the Memory Card Drive of the Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Information about Network Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Useful Information about Network Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Default Values Set at Factory (Network). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Connecting the Machine to the Computer Using a USB Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

When Detecting the Printers Have the Same Name during Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Connecting to Other Computer with LAN/Changing the Connection Method from USB to LAN. . 295

Printing Out Network Setting Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

About Network Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Changing and Confirming Network Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

IJ Network Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Changing the Settings in the Wireless LAN Sheet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Changing the WEP Detailed Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

Changing the WPA/WPA2 Detailed Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Changing the Settings in the Wired LAN Sheet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Changing the Settings in the Admin Password Sheet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Monitoring Wireless Network Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Initializing the Network Settings of the Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

Viewing the Modified Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Screens for Network Connection of IJ Network Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Canon IJ Network Tool Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

Configuration Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Wireless LAN Sheet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Search Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

WEP Details Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

WPA/WPA2 Details Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

Authentication Type Confirmation Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

PSK:Passphrase and Dynamic Encryption Setup Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Setup Information Confirmation Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

Wired LAN Sheet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Admin Password Sheet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

Network Information Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

Access Control Sheet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

Edit Accessible MAC Address Screen/Add Accessible MAC Address Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

Edit Accessible IP Address Screen/Add Accessible IP Address Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Other Screens of IJ Network Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

Canon IJ Network Tool Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

Status Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

Connection Performance Measurement Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

Maintenance Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

Network Setup of the Card Slot Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

Associate Port Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

Network Information Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

Appendix for Network Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

Using the Card Slot over a Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

When the Printer Driver Is Not Associated with a Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

About Technical Terms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

Restrictions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

About Firewall. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

Tips for Ensuring Optimal Printing Quality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

Useful Information about Ink. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Key Points to Successful Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Be Sure to Check Paper Settings before Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

Be Sure to Set Cassette Paper Information after Loading Paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

Canceling a Print Job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Key to Enjoying Consistent Printing Quality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

Precautions for Safe Transport of the Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

Legal Limitations on Use of Your Product and Use of Images. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

About the Administrator Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

Printing from a Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

Printing with Application Software that You are Using (Printer Driver). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Printing with Easy Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Media Type). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Paper Size). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

Various Printing Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

Setting a Page Size and Orientation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

Setting the Stapling Margin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

Execute Borderless Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

Fit-to-Page Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

Scaled Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

Page Layout Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

Tiling/Poster Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

Booklet Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

Duplex Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

Stamp/Background Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

Registering a Stamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418

Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

Setting Up Envelope Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424

Printing on Postcards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426

Displaying the Print Results before Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428

Setting Paper Dimensions (Custom Size). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

Editing the Print Document or Reprinting from the Print History. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431

Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434

Setting the Print Quality Level (Custom). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435

Printing a Color Document in Monochrome. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437

Adjusting Tone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439

Specifying Color Correction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444

Printing with ICC Profiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

Interpreting the ICC Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

Adjusting Color Balance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450

Adjusting Color Balance Using Sample Patterns (Printer Driver). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452

Adjusting Brightness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456

Adjusting Intensity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458

Adjusting Contrast. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460

Adjusting Intensity/Contrast Using Sample Patterns (Printer Driver). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462

Overview of the Printer Driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466

Canon IJ Printer Driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467

How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468

Canon IJ Status Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469

Checking the Ink Status from Your Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470

Canon IJ Preview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471

Deleting the Undesired Print Job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472

Instructions for Use (Printer Driver). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473

Printer Driver Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475

Quick Setup tab Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476

Main tab Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482

Page Setup tab Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489

Maintenance tab Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501

Canon IJ Preview Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507

Canon IJ XPS Preview Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510

Canon IJ Status Monitor Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519

Updating the MP Drivers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522

Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523

Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524

Before Installing the MP Drivers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525

Installing the MP Drivers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526

Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527

Printing Photo Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528

Printing Photographs Saved on a Memory Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529

About Advanced photo Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534

Printing Photo with Trimming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535

Setting Items for Photo Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537

Using Useful Display Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540

Using the Slide Show Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542

Printing Photo While Viewing the Slide Show. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543

Printing Template Forms Such As Lined Paper or Graph Paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545

Printing Documents (PDF File) Saved on a Memory Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548

About Disc Label Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551

Copying the Label Side of Disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552

Printing Photo from a Memory Card onto the Disc Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555

Printing with Web Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558

Notice for Web Service Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559

Downloading and Printing Template Forms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560

Printing from a Digital Camera. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561

Printing Photographs Directly from a PictBridge (Wireless LAN) Compliant Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562

About PictBridge (Wireless LAN) Print Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564

Paper setting for Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567

Copying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570

Making Copies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571

Displaying the Preview Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574

Setting Items for Copying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575

Reducing or Enlarging a Copy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578

Two-Sided Copying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580

About Special Copy Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582

Copying Thick Originals Such as Books. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583

Copying without Borders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584

Copying Photos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585

Copying Two Pages to Fit onto a Single Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587

Copying Four Pages to Fit onto a Single Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590

Scanning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593

Scanning from a Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594

Scanning with IJ Scan Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595

What Is IJ Scan Utility (Scanner Software)?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596

Starting IJ Scan Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598

Easy Scanning with Auto Scan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599

Scanning Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600

Scanning Photos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601

Scanning with Favorite Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602

Scanning Items Larger than the Platen (Image Stitch). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603

Scanning Multiple Items at One Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607

Saving after Checking Scan Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610

Sending Scanned Images via E-mail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613

Extracting Text from Scanned Images (OCR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616

IJ Scan Utility Screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619

IJ Scan Utility Main Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620

Settings Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622

Save Settings Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669

Image Stitch Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672

Scanning with Application Software that You are Using (ScanGear). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677

What Is ScanGear (Scanner Driver)?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678

Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear (Scanner Driver). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680

Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681

Scanning in Basic Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682

Scanning in Advanced Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685

Scanning Multiple Documents from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder) in Advanced Mode. 687

Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver). . . . . . . . . . . 689

Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear (Scanner Driver). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693

Correcting Images (Unsharp Mask, Reduce Dust and Scratches, Fading Correction, etc.). 694

Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698

Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700

Adjusting Brightness and Contrast. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702

Adjusting Histogram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704

Adjusting Tone Curve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708

Setting Threshold. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711

ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712

Basic Mode Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713

Advanced Mode Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721

Input Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727

Output Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 730

Image Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733

Color Adjustment Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738

Preferences Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741

Scanner Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742

Preview Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745

Scan Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747

Color Settings Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 748

Placing Items (When Scanning from a Computer). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750

Adjusting Cropping Frames (ScanGear). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753

General Notes (Scanner Driver). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757

Useful Information on Scanning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759

Adjusting Cropping Frames in the Image Stitch Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760

Resolution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761

Data Formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763

Color Matching. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764

IJ Network Scanner Selector EX Menu and Setting Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765

Uninstalling IJ Network Scanner Selector EX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768

Other Scanning Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769

Scanning with WIA Driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770

Scanning Using the Control Panel (Windows XP Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774

Placing Items (When Scanning from a Computer). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776

Scanning from the Operation Panel of the Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778

Forwarding Scanned Data to the Computer Using the Operation Panel of the Machine. . . . . . . . . . . 779

Attaching the Scanned Data to E-mail Using the Operation Panel of the Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784

Setting Items for Scanning Using the Operation Panel of the Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 787

Network Scan Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789

Selecting a Response to Commands from the Operation Panel Using IJ Scan Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . 793

Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797

Problems with Network Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798

Problems with the Machine While Using with Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 799

The Machine Stopped Working Suddenly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800

Ink Remaining Level Is Not Displayed on Printer Status Monitor of the Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . 804

Printing Speed Is Slow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805

Cannot Use the Card Slot via Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806

Cannot Mount the Card Slot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807

Cannot Access to the Card Slot Because of Some Security Settings on the Computer. . . . 809

Cannot Use the Card Slot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812

Cannot Use the Machine on Replacing an Access Point or Changing Its settings. . . . . . . . . . . . 813

Cannot Detect a Machine on a Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814

Cannot Detect the Machine When Setting up Network Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815

Cannot Detect the Machine during Wireless LAN Setup: Check 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816






Cannot Detect the Machine during Wired LAN Setup: Check 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 822






The Machine Cannot Be Detected in the Wireless LAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 828

The Machine Cannot Be Detected in the Wired LAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830

Other Problems with Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831

Forgot an Access Point Name, SSID, or a Network Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 832

The Message Is Displayed on the Computer Screen During Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833

The Administrator Password Set to the Machine Was Forgotten. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 834

Checking Information about the Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835

Packets Are Sent Steadily. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837

Date Modified of Files Changes When Saving Them on the Memory Card over Network. . . . . . 838

How to Restore the Machine's Network Settings to Factory Default. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839

Problems with Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 840

Printing Does Not Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841

Paper Jams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 844

Paper Does Not Feed Properly/"No Paper" Error Occurs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845

Cannot Print on the Disc Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 847

Cannot Print Properly with Automatic Duplex Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 849

Copying/Printing Stops Before It Is Completed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 850

Problems with Printing Quality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851

Print Results Not Satisfactory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852

Cannot Print to End of Job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 854

Part of the Page Is Not Printed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 855

No Printing Results/Printing Is Blurred/Colors Are Wrong/White Streaks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856

Lines Are Misaligned. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859

Line Does Not Print or Prints Partially. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860

Image Does Not Print or Prints Partially. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861

Printed Paper Curls or Has Ink Blots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862

Paper Is Smudged/Printed Surface Is Scratched. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863

Back of the Paper Is Smudged. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866

Vertical Lines Are Printed on the Sides of the Printout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 867

Colors Are Uneven or Streaked. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 868

Ink Is Not Ejected. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 870

Problems with Scanning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 871

Problems with Scanning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 872

Scanner Does Not Work. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 873

ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Does Not Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 874

Error Message Appears and the ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screen Does Not Appear. . . . . . . 875

Cannot Scan Multiple Items at One Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 876

Cannot Scan Properly with Auto Scan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 877

Slow Scanning Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 878

"There is not enough memory." Message Is Displayed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 879

Computer Stops Operating during Scanning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880

Scanner Does Not Work after Upgrading Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 881

Scanned Image Does Not Open. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 882

Scan Results Not Satisfactory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883

Scan Quality (Image Displayed on the Monitor) Is Poor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884

Scanned Image Is Surrounded by Extra White Areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 885

Cannot Scan at the Correct Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 886

Position or Size of the Image Cannot be Detected Correctly When Scanning from the Operation

Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 887

Item Is Placed Correctly, but the Scanned Image Is Slanted. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 888

Scanned Image Is Enlarged (Reduced) on the Computer Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 889

Software Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890

13

The E-mail Client You Want to Use Does Not Appear in the Screen for Selecting an E-mail Client. .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 891

Problems with the Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 892

The Machine Cannot Be Powered On. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893

The Machine Turns Off Unintentionally. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 894

Cannot Connect to Computer with a USB Cable Properly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 895

Cannot Communicate with the Machine with USB Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 896

The Display on the Touch Screen Cannot Be Seen At All. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 897

An Unintended Language Is Displayed on the Touch Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 898

Cannot Remove a Memory Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 899

Print Head Holder Does Not Move to the Position for Replacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900

Printer Status Monitor Is Not Displayed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901

If the Output Tray Extension Comes Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 902

Cannot Print/Scan from NFC Compliant Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 903

Problems with Installation/Downloading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 904

Cannot Install the MP Drivers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905

Easy-WebPrint EX Does Not Start Up or Easy-WebPrint EX Menu Does Not Appear. . . . . . . . . . . . . 907

How to Update MP Drivers in Network Environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 908

Uninstalling IJ Network Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 909

About Errors/Messages Displayed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 910

If an Error Occurs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 911

A Message Is Displayed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 912

Error Message Appears on a PictBridge (Wireless LAN) Compliant Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 918

If You Cannot Resolve the Problem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 920

Support Code List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921

Support Code List (When Paper Is Jammed). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923

1300. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 924

1304. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 925

1311. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 928

1312. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 931

1313. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 933

1315. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 936

1316. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939

Paper Is Jammed inside the Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 942

In Other Cases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945

1001. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 946

1002. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 947

1007. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 948

1008. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949

1200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 950

1250. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 951

1253. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952

1254. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 953

1255. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 954

1256. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 955

1257. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 956

1310. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 957

1401. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 958

1403. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 959

1405. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 960

1410. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 961

1411. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 962

1412. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 963

1413. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 964

1414. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 965

1415. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 966

1600. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 967

1660. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 968

1680. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 969

1681. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 970

1683. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971

1684. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 972

1688. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 973

1700. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 974

1701. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975

1710. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 976

1711. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 977

1830. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 978

1850. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 979

1851. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 980

1855. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 981

1856. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 982

1857. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 983

1858. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 984

1872. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985

1873. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 986

2111. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987

2112. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 990

2121. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 993

2122. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994

2500. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 995

2700. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 996

4100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997

4101. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998

4103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 999

5011. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000

5012. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001

5100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1002

5101. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003

5200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1004

5400. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1005

5B00. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1006

5B01. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1007

5B10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1008

5B11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1009

5C00. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1010

5C20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1011

6000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1012

6001. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1013

6003. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014

6500. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1015

6502. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1016

6800. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1017

6801. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1018

6900. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1019

6901. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1020

6902. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1021

6910. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1022

6911. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1023

6920. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1024

6921. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1025

6930. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1026

6931. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1027

6932. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1028

6933. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1029

6934. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1030

6935. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1031

6936. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1032

6937. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1033

6938. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034

6940. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1035

6941. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1036

6942. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1037

6943. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1038

6944. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1039

6945. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1040

6946. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1041

6950. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1042

6B20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1043

B202. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1044

B203. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1045

B204. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1046

C000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1047

Read Me First

Notes on Online Manual Usage

How to Print

Notes on Online Manual Usage

• Reproduction, diversion or copying of any text, photo or image published in the Online Manual

(hereinafter referred to as "this guide"), in whole or in part, is prohibited.

• In principle, Canon shall change or delete the contents of this guide without prior notice to customers.

In addition, Canon may suspend or stop the disclosure of this guide due to unavoidable reasons.

Canon shall not be liable for any damage suffered by customers as a result of changes in or deletion of information in this guide, or suspension/stoppage of disclosure of this guide.

• Although the contents of this guide have been prepared with utmost care, please contact the service center if you find any incorrect or missing information.

• In principle, the descriptions in this guide are based on the product at the time of its initial sale.

• This guide does not disclose the manuals of all the products sold by Canon. See the manual supplied with the product when using a product that is not described in this guide.

How to Print

Use the print function of your Web browser to print this guide.

To set to print background colors and images, follow the steps below.

Note

• In Windows 8, print in the desktop version.

• In Internet Explorer 9, 10, or 11

1. Select (Tools) > Print > Page setup....

2. Select the Print Background Colors and Images checkbox.

• In Internet Explorer 8

1. Press the Alt key to display the menus.

Alternatively, from Tools, select Toolbars > Menu Bar to display the menus.

2. Select Page Setup... from the File menu.

3. Select the Print Background Colors and Images checkbox.

• In Mozilla Firefox

1. Press the Alt key to display the menus.

Alternatively, click Firefox, then select Menu Bar from the right arrow of Options to display the menus.

2. Select Page Setup... from the File menu.

3. Select the Print Background (colors & images) checkbox in Format & Options.

• In Google Chrome

1. Select (Chrome Menu) > Print....

2. Select the Background colors & images checkbox in Options.

18

How to Use the Online Manual

Symbols Used in This Document

Warning

Instructions that, if ignored, could result in death or serious personal injury caused by incorrect operation of the equipment. These must be observed for safe operation.

Caution

Instructions that, if ignored, could result in personal injury or material damage caused by incorrect operation of the equipment. These must be observed for safe operation.

Important

Instructions including important information. To avoid damage and injury or improper use of the product, be sure to read these indications.

Note

Instructions including notes for operation and additional explanations.

Basic

Instructions explaining basic operations of your product.

Note

• Icons may vary depending on your product.

Touch-enabled Device Users

For touch actions, you need to replace "right-click" in this document with the action set on the operating system. For example, if the action is set to "press and hold" on your operating system, replace "right-click" with "press and hold."

19

Trademarks and Licenses

• Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

• Windows is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.

• Windows Vista is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.

• Internet Explorer is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.

• Mac, Mac OS, AirPort, Safari, Bonjour, iPad, iPhone and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc.

• IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license.

• Google Cloud Print, Google Chrome, Android, Google Play and Picasa are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Google Inc.

• Adobe, Photoshop, Photoshop Elements, Lightroom, Adobe RGB and Adobe RGB (1998) are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.

• Photo Rag is a trademark of Hahnemühle FineArt GmbH.

• Bluetooth is a trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc., U.S.A. and licensed to Canon Inc.

Note

• The formal name of Windows Vista is Microsoft Windows Vista operating system.

Copyright (c) 2003-2004, Apple Computer, Inc. All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. Neither the name of Apple Computer, Inc. ("Apple") nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY APPLE AND ITS CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS

OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO

EVENT SHALL APPLE OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,

INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT

LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR

PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF

LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR

OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF

THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Apache License

Version 2.0, January 2004 http://www.apache.org/licenses/

TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION

20

1. Definitions.

"License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by

Sections 1 through 9 of this document.

"Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the License.

"Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control, are controlled by, or are under common control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition, "control" means

(i) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity.

"You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this

License.

"Source" form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications, including but not limited to software source code, documentation source, and configuration files.

"Object" form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source form, including but not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation, and conversions to other media types.

"Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form, made available under the License, as indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work (an example is provided in the Appendix below).

"Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form, that is based on (or derived from) the Work and for which the editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes of this License,

Derivative Works shall not include works that remain separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the Work and Derivative Works thereof.

"Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship, including the original version of the Work and any modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to

Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner. For the purposes of this definition, "submitted" means any form of electronic, verbal, or written communication sent to the Licensor or its representatives, including but not limited to communication on electronic mailing lists, source code control systems, and issue tracking systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving the Work, but excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise designated in writing by the copyright owner as "Not a

Contribution."

"Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has been received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work.

2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable copyright license to reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of, publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the Work and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form.

3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable (except as stated in this section) patent license to make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work, where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their Contribution(s) alone or by combination of

21

their Contribution(s) with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was submitted. If You institute patent litigation against any entity (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the

Work or a Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct or contributory patent infringement, then any patent licenses granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date such litigation is filed.

4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works thereof in any medium, with or without modifications, and in Source or Object form, provided that You meet the following conditions:

1. You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License; and

2. You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files; and

3. You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute, all copyright, patent, trademark, and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works; and

4. If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its distribution, then any Derivative Works that

You distribute must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such

NOTICE file, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed as part of the Derivative

Works; within the Source form or documentation, if provided along with the Derivative Works; or, within a display generated by the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party notices normally appear. The contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the License. You may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed as modifying the License.

You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different license terms and conditions for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or for any such Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated in this License.

5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, any Contribution intentionally submitted for inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of this License, without any additional terms or conditions. Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any separate license agreement you may have executed with

Licensor regarding such Contributions.

6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade names, trademarks, service marks, or product names of the Licensor, except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file.

7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and each Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT

WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions of TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or

FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License.

8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, whether in tort (including negligence), contract, or otherwise, unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts) or agreed to in writing, shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages, including any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages of any character arising as a result of this

License or out of the use or inability to use the Work (including but not limited to damages for loss of

22

goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all other commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor has been advised of the possibility of such damages.

9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works thereof,

You may choose to offer, and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity, or other liability obligations and/or rights consistent with this License. However, in accepting such obligations,

You may act only on Your own behalf and on Your sole responsibility, not on behalf of any other

Contributor, and only if You agree to indemnify, defend, and hold each Contributor harmless for any liability incurred by, or claims asserted against, such Contributor by reason of your accepting any such warranty or additional liability.

END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS

23

Enter keywords in the search window and click (Search).

You can search for target pages in this guide.

Search Tips

You can search for target pages by entering keywords in the search window.

Note

• The displayed screen may vary.

• When searching from this page or the "Home" page without entering your product's model name or your application's name, all products supported by this guide will be considered for the search.

If you want to narrow down the search results, add your product's model name or your application's name to the keywords.

• Searching for Functions

Enter your product's model name and a keyword for the function you want to learn about

Example: When you want to learn how to load paper

Enter "(your product's model name) load paper" in the search window and perform a search

• Troubleshooting Errors

Enter your product's model name and a support code

Example: When the following error screen appears

Enter "(your product's model name) 1000" in the search window and perform a search

24

Note

• The displayed screen varies depending on your product.

• Searching for Application Functions

Enter your application's name and a keyword for the function you want to learn about

Example: When you want to learn how to print collages with My Image Garden

Enter "My Image Garden collage" in the search window and perform a search

• Searching for Reference Pages

Enter your model name and a reference page title*

* You can find reference pages more easily by entering the function name as well.

Example: When you want to browse the page referred to by the following sentence on a scanning procedure page

Refer to "Color Settings Tab" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for details.

Enter "(your product's model name) scan Color Settings Tab" in the search window and perform a search

25

Notes on Operation Explanations

In this guide, most of the operations are described based on the windows displayed when Windows 8.1

operating system (called Windows 8.1 below) or Windows 8 operating system (called Windows 8 below) is used.

26

Useful Functions Available on the Machine

Connect Wirelessly with Ease in "Access Point Mode"

Print Photos Easily Using My Image Garden

Create and Print Personalized Disc Labels (CD/DVD/BD) Easily and Beautifully

Download a Variety of Content Materials

Print Items with Easy-PhotoPrint+ (Web Application)

Print/Scan by Placing a Smartphone over the Machine

Connection Methods Available on the Machine

Notice for Web Service Printing

Use PIXMA Cloud Link

Printing with Google Cloud Print

Printing from AirPrint Compliant Device

Checking Printer Information

Online Storage Integration Function

How to Use Print from E-mail

Print Easily from a Smartphone or Tablet with PIXMA Printing Solutions

Printing with Windows RT

27

Connect Wirelessly with Ease in "Access Point Mode"

The machine supports "access point mode" in which you can connect to the machine wirelessly from a computer or smartphone even in an environment without an access point or wireless LAN router.

Switch to "access point mode" with simple steps to enjoy scanning and printing wirelessly.

When you use the machine with the access point mode, be sure to specify the access point name of the machine and the security setting in advance.

Using the Machine with the Access Point Mode

28

Print Photos Easily Using My Image Garden

Organize Images Easily

In My Image Garden, you can register the names of people and events to photos.

You can organize photos easily as you can display them not only by folder but also by calendar, event, and person. This also allows you to find the target photos easily when you search for them later on.

<Calendar View>

<People View>

Display Recommended Items in Slide Shows

Based on the information registered to photos, Quick Menu automatically selects the photos on your computer and creates recommended items such as collages and cards. The created items appear in slide shows.

If there is an item you like, you can easily print it in just two steps.

1. In Image Display of Quick Menu, select the item you want to print.

2. Print the item with My Image Garden.

29

Place Photos Automatically

Delightful items are created easily as the selected photos are placed automatically according to the theme.

Other Various Functions

My Image Garden has many other useful functions.

Refer to "What You Can Do with My Image Garden" for details.

30

Create and Print Personalized Disc Labels (CD/DVD/BD) Easily and

Beautifully

Print without a Computer

You can enjoy disc label printing easily even without using a computer.

Refer to " About Disc Label Printing " for details.

Create Items with Applications and Print Them

Use My Image Garden to combine your favorite photos with preset themes to create and print personalized disc labels.

Refer to "Printing Disc Labels (CD/DVD/BD)" for details.

31

Download a Variety of Content Materials

CREATIVE PARK

A "printing materials site" where you can download all the printing materials for free.

Various types of content such as seasonal cards and paper crafts that can be made by assembling paper parts are provided.

It is easily accessible from Quick Menu.

CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM

A service where customers using models that support PREMIUM Contents can download exclusive printing materials.

PREMIUM Contents can be downloaded easily via My Image Garden. Downloaded PREMIUM Contents can be printed directly with My Image Garden.

To download PREMIUM Contents, make sure that genuine Canon ink tanks/ink cartridges are installed for all colors on a supported printer.

Note

• The designs of PREMIUM Contents provided in this page are subject to change without prior notice.

32

Print Items with Easy-PhotoPrint+ (Web Application)

You can easily create and print personalized items such as calendars and collages, anytime and anywhere, by simply accessing Easy-PhotoPrint+ on the web from a computer or tablet.

By using Easy-PhotoPrint+, you can create items in the latest environment without going through the trouble of installation.

Moreover, you can use various photos for your item through integration with social networks such as

Facebook, or with online storage, web albums, etc.

Refer to "Easy-PhotoPrint+ Guide" for details.

33

Print/Scan by Placing a Smartphone over the Machine

The machine supports NFC (Near Field Communication), a short-range wireless communication technology.

By placing an NFC-enabled Android smartphone over the NFC mark on the operation panel of the machine, you can print photos and documents saved on the smartphone or scan items placed on the platen of the machine.

Before Using the NFC Function on the Machine

Download and install "PIXMA Printing Solutions".

Download free from Google Play.

Important

• May not be available depending on your country or region.

• The application can be downloaded for free; however, Internet connection fees apply.

Printing with the NFC Function

1. Start "PIXMA Printing Solutions".

2. Select Photo Print or Document Print.

3. Select the photo or document you want to print, then set the paper size, etc. as needed.

4. Place the smartphone over the machine.

Printing starts.

Important

• If printing does not start, change the position over which to place the smartphone.

Scanning with the NFC Function

1. Place the item on the platen of the machine.

2. Start "PIXMA Printing Solutions".

34

3. Select Scan, then set the item size, etc. as needed.

4. Place the smartphone over the machine.

Scanning starts.

Important

• If scanning does not start, change the position over which to place the smartphone.

Troubleshooting

Cannot Print/Scan from an NFC-enabled Device

35

Connection Methods Available on the Machine

The following connection methods are available on the machine.

Wireless Connection

With an access point

Without an access point

Wired Connection

USB Connection

Wireless Connection

There are two methods for connecting the printer to your device (such as a smartphone). One method is to connect using an access point, and the other method is to connect without using an access point.

The two connection methods cannot be used at the same time.

If you have an access point (or wireless network router), it is recommended that you use the method described in Connection Using an Access Point.

When connecting another device while a device is already connected to the printer, connect it using the same connection method as the connected device.

If you connect using a different connection method, the connection to the device in use will be disabled.

Connection Using an Access Point

• Connect the printer and a device using an access point.

• Connection methods vary depending on the access point type.

• You can change network settings such as the SSID and security protocol on the printer.

36

• When the connection between a device and an access point is completed and (Wi-Fi icon) is displayed in the device's screen, you can connect the device to the printer using the access point.

Connection without Using an Access Point

• Connect the printer and a device without using an access point. Connect a device and the printer directly using the printer's access point mode function.

• When establishing a connection in access point mode, Internet connection may become unavailable.

In that case, web services for the printer cannot be used.

• If you connect a device connected to the Internet via an access point to the printer that is in access point mode, the connection between the device and access point will be disabled. In that case, the connection of the device may switch to a mobile data connection automatically depending on your device. Transmission fees for connecting to the Internet using a mobile data connection apply.

• In access point mode, you can connect up to five devices at the same time. If you try to connect a sixth device while five devices are already connected, an error will appear.

If an error appears, disconnect a device that does not use the printer, then configure settings again.

• Network settings such as the SSID and security protocol can be changed on the printer.

When Using Windows XP:

Connection without Using an Access Point (Windows XP)

Restrictions

(Appears in a new window)

Wired Connection

Connect the printer and a hub or router with an Ethernet cable. Prepare an Ethernet cable.

USB Connection

Connect the printer and a computer with a USB cable. Prepare a USB cable.

37

Connection without Using an Access Point (Windows XP)

Restrictions

(Appears in a new window)

1. If the HOME button (A) on the printer is lit, touch the HOME button.

2. Flick the screen left or right, then tap the Setup.

3. Flick the screen up or down, then tap Device settings.

4. Tap LAN settings.

5. Tap Change LAN.

38

6. Tap Access point mode active.

7. Check the SSID displayed in the printer screen.

8. Tap Details, check the Password (network key), then tap OK.

You will use the SSID and Password (network key) in the subsequent steps.

9. Tap OK.

10. Right-click the Wireless Network Connection icon in the notification area of the taskbar on the computer, then select View Available Wireless Networks.

39

11. Select the network name (SSID) you want to use, then click Connect.

12. Enter the Password (Network key), then click Connect.

13. When connection is complete, click Back until the screen below appears.

Proceed with the setup.

40

Restrictions

When connecting another device while a device (such as a smartphone) is already connected to the printer, connect it using the same connection method as the connected device.

If you connect using a different connection method, the connection to the device in use will be disabled.

Connection Using a Wired Network cannot be performed on printers that do not support a wired connection.

Connection Using an Access Point

• Make sure that a device and an access point (or wireless network router) are connected. For details on how to check the settings, refer to the manual supplied with the access point or contact its manufacturer.

As for a device already connected to the printer without using an access point, reconnect it via an access point.

• The configuration, router functions, setup procedures and security settings of the network device vary depending on your system environment. For details, refer to the manual of your network device or contact its manufacturer.

• Check if your device supports IEEE802.11n (2.4 GHz), IEEE802.11g or IEEE802.11b.

• If your device is set to the "IEEE802.11n only" mode, WEP or TKIP cannot be used as a security protocol. Change the security protocol for your device to something other than WEP and TKIP or change the setting to something other than "IEEE802.11n only."

The connection between your device and the access point will be temporarily disabled while changing the setting. Do not operate the screen of this guide until the setup is complete.

• For office use, consult your network administrator.

• Take added care when connecting to a network that is not protected with security measures, as there is a risk of disclosing data such as your personal information to a third party.

Connection without Using an Access Point

Important

• If you connect a device connected to the Internet via an access point to the printer that is in access point mode, the connection between the device and access point will be disabled. In that case, the connection of the device may switch to a mobile data connection automatically depending on your device. When you connect to the Internet using a mobile data connection, charges may apply depending on your contract.

• When you connect a device and the printer in access point mode, the connection information will be saved to Wi-Fi settings. The device may be connected to the printer automatically even after disconnecting it or connecting it to another access point.

• You cannot connect to an access point and the printer that is in access point mode at the same time. If you have an access point, it is recommended that you use the access point to connect to the printer.

• To prevent automatic connection to the printer that is in access point mode, change the connection mode after using the printer, or set not to connect automatically in the Wi-Fi settings of the device.

For details on how to change the settings of a device, refer to the manual supplied with the device or contact its manufacturer.

41

• When connecting a device and the printer in access point mode, Internet connection may become unavailable. In that case, web services for the printer cannot be used.

• In access point mode, you can connect up to five devices at the same time. If you try to connect a sixth device while five devices are already connected, an error will appear.

If an error appears, disconnect a device that does not use the printer, then configure settings again.

• Devices connected to the printer in access point mode cannot communicate with each other.

• Firmware updates for the printer are not available while using the access point mode.

• When a device has been connected to the printer without using an access point and you want to set it up again using the same connection method, disconnect it first. Disable the connection between the device and printer in the Wi-Fi setting screen.

Connection Using a Wired Network

• This printer cannot be used over wireless and wired connections at the same time.

• When using a router, connect the printer and a device to the LAN side (same network segment).

42


When Using Web Service

• Canon does not guarantee the continuity and reliability of the web services provided, the availability of site access, or permission to download the materials.

• Canon may at any time update, change, or delete the information provided through the web service, or may suspend or discontinue the service without prior notice. Canon shall not be held responsible for any damages resulting from such actions.

• In no event shall Canon be liable for any damages whatsoever resulting from the use of the web services.

• User registration is necessary before using the photo sharing site.

When you use the photo sharing site, observe the conditions of use of the site and use the service within your own responsibility.

• All or part of the web service may not be available depending on the country or region you live in.

• Depending on your network environment, some functions on web service are not available. Even if they are available, it may take a while to print or display the contents, or communication may be interrupted while operation is in progress.

• When you use web service, your machine's name, information of your region or country, your selected language, and what kind of service you use (e.g. photo sharing site) are sent to and saved in our server. Canon is unable to identify specific customers using this information.

• Your login name and password for the photo sharing site are saved in the machine's memory (not encrypted).

If you hand over the machine to anyone or dispose of it, delete your login name and password from the machine's memory in advance.

• The account information will be sent to Canon Inc. server (located in Japan), then forwarded to the service provider's server.

• Canon handles your account information as follows:

◦ Your account information will be used in personal identification process of the selected service.

◦ Canon will not provide your account information to any third party without your consent, except for sending to the service provider or providing based on laws and regulations.

◦ After the conclusion of non-disclosure agreement, Canon may deposit your account information to the contractor to achieve the purpose of use.

◦ Canon endeavors to secure the safety of your account information.

◦ It is at your option to enter and send your account information. However, the service that requires to enter your account information is not available unless you enter and send it.

◦ Your account information does not remain in Canon Inc. server. At the latest, it will be deleted when you have disconnected your printer from LAN.

◦ For details, contact a Canon-authorized sales representative in the country or region you live in.

To Those Living in Mainland China

• PIXMA/MAXIFY Cloud Link, Easy-PhotoPrint+, and some functions of PIXMA/MAXIFY Printing

Solutions, which are included with this machine, are provided by Canon Inc.

However, as the server is installed outside of mainland China, some of these services may not be available yet.

43

Copyrights and Rights of Publicity

When printing from the photo sharing site:

• Observe the conditions of use of the photo sharing site when you use photos on the site.

• It is unlawful to reproduce or edit the copyrighted work of another person without permission from the copyright holder, except for personal use, use within the home, or other use within the limited scope as defined by the copyright. Additionally, reproducing or editing photographs of people may infringe on Rights of Publicity.

When printing downloaded template forms:

1. The copyright of each material (photos, illustrations, logos, or documents: hereinafter referred to as

"the materials") provided on the web template printing service belongs to their respective owners.

Issues pertaining to Rights of Publicity may arise regarding the use of any of people or characters displayed on the web template printing service.

Except as otherwise permitted (please see "2" below), copying, modifying or distributing all or a portion of any of the materials contained on the web template printing service without prior consent of the respective rights (Rights of Publicity and Copyright) holder is strictly prohibited.

2. All of the materials provided on the web template printing service can be freely used for personal and non-commercial purposes.

44

Use PIXMA Cloud Link

By using PIXMA Cloud Link, you can connect your printer to a cloud service, such as CANON iMAGE

GATEWAY, Evernote, or Twitter, and use the following functions without using a computer:

• Print images from a photo-sharing service

• Print documents from a data management service

• Save scanned images to a data management service.

• Use Twitter to report the printer status, such as no paper or low ink levels.

In addition, you can use various functions by adding and registering apps that are linked with various cloud services.

Using PIXMA Cloud Link from Your Printer

Using PIXMA Cloud Link from Your Smartphone, Tablet, or Computer

Important

• In certain countries, PIXMA Cloud Link may not be available or the available apps may be different.

• Some apps require that you have an account before you use those apps. For such apps, please set up an account beforehand.

• To find out which models support PIXMA Cloud Link check the Canon homepage.

• The screen display may change without prior notice.

45

Using PIXMA Cloud Link from Your Printer

Before Using PIXMA Cloud Link from Your Printer

Preparing to Use PIXMA Cloud Link from Your Printer

Using PIXMA Cloud Link

Cloud Troubleshooting

46

Before Using PIXMA Cloud Link from Your Printer

First, check the following content:

• Precautions

If you plan to use the web service to print documents, be sure to check these precautions beforehand.

• Network environment

The printer must be connected to a LAN and to the Internet.

If your printer is not connected to a LAN, see here and set one up.

For information on the LAN and Internet settings, see the manual of your network devices or contact the manufacturer.

Important

• The user will bear the cost of Internet access.

Preparing to Use PIXMA Cloud Link from Your Printer

Copyright c 1991-2013 Unicode, Inc. All rights reserved. Distributed under the Terms of Use in http:// www.unicode.org/copyright.html.

This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.

THE BASIC LIBRARY FUNCTIONS

Written by: Philip Hazel

Email local part: ph10

Email domain: cam.ac.uk

University of Cambridge Computing Service, Cambridge, England.

Copyright (c) 1997-2008 University of Cambridge All rights reserved.

THE "BSD" LICENCE

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

* Neither the name of the University of Cambridge nor the name of Google Inc. nor the names of their contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND

ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE

DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR

ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES

(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS

OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY

THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING

NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN

IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

47

Preparing to Use PIXMA Cloud Link from Your Printer

Follow the steps described below to register the printer information to the cloud service server.

1. Check that the printer is connected to the Internet

2. From the printer home screen, select Cloud

3. When the registration completed screen appears, select OK

4. On the confirmation screen, select Next

5. In the License agreement and Privacy statement windows, read the statements, and then select Agree if you agree

<License agreement>

<Privacy statement>

48

Note

• If you select Disagree, a confirmation screen of canceling the user information registration appears. If you select Yes, the user information registration is canceled, and you return to the

Home screen.

Even if you select Disagree, you can still use this service by selecting Agree from the registration screen later.

• You can print the displayed information by pressing the Start button.

6. On the Time zone screen, select the time closest to your region, and then select Next

7. In the time zones list, select the region closest to you

For some regions, a screen for applying the daylight saving time setting may appear.

8. When a message appears notifying that the app is now available, select Open list

49

The registration of printer information is completed, and a list of apps is displayed.

See here for the description of the apps list screen.

After you complete the registration, you can print photos and documents that have been uploaded to apps on the linked cloud service and add/delete/sort apps .

Using PIXMA Cloud Link

50

Application Management

This section explains how to add , delete , and sort apps.

Add apps

You can add your favorite apps to the printer.

Follow the steps described below to add apps.


2. On the cloud's Main screen, select Add/delete

3. Select Register apps

4. From the list, select the category of the app

5. From the displayed apps list, select the app that you want to register

51

Note

• Description of displayed icons

: Can be used with genuine Canon ink.

6. Select Register

The registration is completed and the app is added to the apps list.

To register another app, repeat the procedure from step 5.

To end the app registration, select Back and return to the cloud's Main screen.

Important

• Some apps may require a linked app account before you can use the app. If this is the case, set up an account beforehand.

Delete apps

You can delete unnecessary apps from the apps list.

Follow the steps described below to delete apps.



52

3. Select Delete registered apps

4. From the apps list, select the app that you want to delete

Note


: Cannot be used because it is not yet released, not available in your region, or does not support your model.


5. Select Delete

When the deletion is finished, the app will be deleted from the apps list on the main screen.

To delete another app, repeat the procedure from step 4.

To end the app deletion, select Back and return to the cloud's Main screen.

Sort apps

You can sort apps displayed on the apps list.

Follow the steps described below to sort apps.


53


3. Select Sort

4. On the apps list, select the app that you want to sort

Note




5. Use / buttons to move the app

6. Select Done

54

Sorting is complete.

To continue the sorting, repeat the procedure from step 4.

To end the sorting, select Back and return to the cloud's Main screen.

55

Using PIXMA Cloud Link

This section introduces the photo printing procedure by using CANON iMAGE GATEWAY as an example.

Important

• The available functions differ depending on the app.

• The printing procedure differs depending on the app.

• You need to get the account and register photo and other data beforehand.

• The following file formats can be printed: jpg, jpeg, pdf, docx, doc, xlsx, xls, pptx, ppt, and rtf.

The file formats that can be printed differ depending on the app.

• Before you print, check that printer is on and is connected to the network. Then start.

Note

• You can use CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to print jpg and jpeg file formats.

1. On the Main screen , select the app to be used

2. Enter the information according to the instructions on the authentication screen, and then select Log in

Important

• Some apps may not be fully displayed in the display area. If this is the case, scroll up, down, right, and left to change the display area.

: Visible area

• The Login screen may vary between apps.

• After logging in, you may be asked from an external service to agree to use their app. Agree if you are using the app.

3. In the displayed album list, select the album of your choice

56

4. In the displayed image list, select the image that you want to print, and then select Next

5. Make the necessary print settings, and then select Color

A message that indicates the completion of issuing print job appears, and printing starts.

To continue printing, select Continue, and perform the operation from Step 3.

To end the printing, select Apps. The screen returns to the apps list screen.

Important

• If a print job is not printed within 24 hours after the print job is issued, the print job will expire and cannot be printed.

• With premium apps that limit the number of print jobs, print jobs that cannot be printed due to expiration and other reasons are also included in the print count.

57

Note

• To leave a usage history of this service, from the Home window on the operation panel, select

Setup -> Web service setup -> Web service connection setup -> IJ Cloud Printing Center

setup -> History setting for this service -> Save.

Cloud Troubleshooting

58

Cloud Windows

This section describes the Main screen of Cloud and the services available on the Main screen.

About the Main screen

When using the Cloud function, follow the steps described below first and display the Main screen.

When you select Cloud from the printer home screen, the cloud's Main screen appears.

You can use areas shown below to perform various functions, including printing photos and documents, and adding, starting, and managing apps.

(1) Display area

(2) Add/delete button

(3) Manage button

Important

• Some apps may require you to have an account before using the app. If this is the case, get the account beforehand.

• After selecting the app, some apps may not be fully displayed in the display area. If this is the case, scroll up, down, right, and left to change the display area.

: Visible area

• The app is not displayed if it is not yet released, or if the language not available in your region is selected in the display language setting.

(1) Display area

The display changes based on the menu you select.

Immediately after the cloud's Main screen appears, a list of the registered apps appears.

To start an app, select the app that you want to use on the list.

59

Note




(2) Add/delete button

Use this button to add, delete, and sort apps.

Register apps

Select this to add your favorite apps.

See here for details on how to add apps

Delete apps

Select this to delete registered apps.

See here for details on how to delete apps

Sort

Select this to sort the apps list.

See here for details on how to sort the apps list

(3) Manage button

Use this button to manage jobs, log out of an app, show the license agreement and privacy statement, and set the time zone.

60

Manage jobs

From the Status list window, you can check the status of a job.

Settings

Select this to set the Time zone.

Select your region on the list. For some regions, you can set whether or not to apply the daylight saving time setting.

Important

• If you cannot find your region on the list, select the one closest to your region.

Legal information

This shows the License agreement and Privacy statement.

Press the Start button to print the displayed information.

Log out of all apps

You can log out at the same time from all apps that you are logged into.

Note

• Some apps may not allow you to log out when you are logged on. If you want to log in with a different account, you need to use this function to log out first.

• Once you log out, you need to log in again. You may lose the settings with some apps.

61

Cloud Troubleshooting

If you cannot print

Check the following if you cannot print.

• Check that the printer is connected to the Internet.

• Check that the printer is connected to a LAN and the LAN environment is connected to the Internet.

• Check that no error message is displayed on the printer's LCD monitor.

• If printing does not start even after you wait awhile, go to the printer home screen and run

Setup -> Web service inquiry. If printing does not start, run the inquiry several times.

If the problem is not resolved, use the printer driver from your computer to perform the print job and check whether the data can be printed normally on the printer.

If you still cannot print, see the troubleshooting page for your model on the Home of the Online Manual.

Note

• With a wireless LAN connection, after the printer is turned on, it may take several minutes before communication is possible. Check that your printer is connected to the wireless network, and wait a while before you start printing.

• If the printer is not turned on or is not connected to the Internet, and consequently a print job is not processed within 24 hours after it was submitted, the print job is automatically canceled. If this happens, check the printer power and the Internet connection, and then re-submit the print job.

62

Using PIXMA Cloud Link from Your Smartphone, Tablet, or

Computer

Before Using Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center

Preparations Before Using Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center

Using Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center

Adding a Printer

Troubleshooting Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center

63

Before Using Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center

Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center is a service that links with the cloud function of the printer and allows you to perform operations such as registering and managing apps from your smartphone or tablet device, and checking the print status, print error, and ink status of the printer. You can also print app photos and documents from your smartphone or tablet.

First, check the following content:

• Precautions

If you plan to use the web service to print documents, be sure to check these precautions beforehand.

• Printer specification

Check that Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center supports the printer.


The printer must be connected to a LAN and to the Internet.

Important


• Operating requirements

For computers, smartphones, and tablet devices, see " Requirements for Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing

Center operation ".

Important

• This service may not be available in certain countries or regions. Also even if the service is available, there are apps that cannot be used in certain regions.

Preparations Before Using Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center

64

Requirements for Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center operation

Computer

CPU

RAM

x86 or x64 1.6 GHz or higher

2 GB or higher

Monitor display

Resolution 1024 x 768 pixels or higher

Number of display colors 24 bits (true-color) or higher

Windows 7

OS

Windows XP SP3 or later

Windows Vista SP1 or later

Browser

Internet Explorer 8*

Mozilla Firefox

Google Chrome

Internet Explorer 8*, 9

Mozilla Firefox

Google Chrome

Internet Explorer 8*, 9, 10, 11

Mozilla Firefox

Google Chrome

Windows 8

Windows 8.1

Internet Explorer 10

Mozilla Firefox

Google Chrome

Internet Explorer 11

Mozilla Firefox

Google Chrome

Mac OS X v10.6-OS X Mavericks v10.9 Safari 5.1, 6, 7

* When you use Internet Explorer 8, the web pages may not display correctly. Canon recommends that you upgrade to Internet Explorer 9 or later, or use another browser.

Smartphone or tablet

OS Browser Resolution

iOS 5.1 or later

Android 2.3.3 or later

OS standard browser

320 x 480 (HVGA) or higher

480 x 800 (HVGA) or higher

*Android3.x is not supported.

Important

• On the browser you are using, enable JavaScript and cookies.

• If you use the zoom function or change the font size on your browser, the web pages may not display correctly.

• If you use the translation function of Google Chrome, the web pages may not display correctly.

• If you use a proxy server outside of your country, the service may not be able to determine the correct region.

65

• In an in-house network environment, the 5222 port must be released. For confirmation instructions, contact the network administrator.

66

Preparations Before Using Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center

To use the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center, you need to follow the steps described below and register the user information.

Print registration information from the printer

1. From the home window, select Setup -> Web service setup -> Web

service connection setup -> IJ Cloud Printing Center setup -> Register with this

service

2. In the registration confirmation window, Select Yes

3. In the print settings, select the display language

4. Follow the instructions displayed in the window, and print the URL of the authentication site and the

Printer registration ID

Set A4 size or Letter size plain paper and select OK.

The authentication URL and Printer registration ID are printed.

67

Note

• You will use this printed page in the next step.

Important

• The operation to complete the registration should be done within 60 minutes.

Access the URL on the printed page, and then enter the e-mail address and other necessary information

Important

• Do not use the Back button of the web browser while an operation is processing. The screen may not transition properly.

1. Use the web browser on your PC, smartphone, tablet, or other devices to access the authentication URL

68

2. On the Login screen, select Create new account

3. Enter the E-mail address and Printer registration ID of the printer's owner, and then select OK

The registration page URL is sent to the e-mail address entered.

69

Important

• There are character restrictions for the e-mail address, as shown below.

• You can use up to 255 alphanumeric characters consisting of single-byte characters and symbols (!$'*/^_{}|~.-@).

• Multibyte characters cannot be used.

You will get an error if the e-mail address you enter contains a character that cannot be used.

• If you registered a different e-mail address by mistake, you can cancel the registration by going to the printer's Home screen and selecting Setup (or by pressing the Setup button on the operation panel) -> Web service setup -> Connection setup -> IJ Cloud Printing Center

setup (IJCloudPrintingCtr) -> Delete from this service.

• You may not be able to receive the notification if you are using a spam filter. If you have a setting to receive only the e-mails from certain domains, be sure to change the setting to allow receiving e-mails from "[email protected]".

There will be no error display even if you could not receive the e-mail because of the spam filter setting or if you entered an incorrect e-mail address.

Access the URL in the e-mail, register the information, and complete the user registration

1. When an e-mail with the subject "Information on Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center" is sent to the e-mail address that you entered, select the URL

2. In the License agreement and Privacy statement windows of Canon Inkjet Cloud

Printing Center, read the statements, and select Agree if you agree

70

3. In the user information entry screen, enter your Password, and select Next

Enter your password for logging in to the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center.

71

Important

• There are character restrictions for the Password, as shown below.

• The password needs to be between 8 and 32 characters long, using single-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols (!"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>?@[\]^_`{|}~). (Alphabets are case-sensitive)

4. Enter the User name

Enter the name that identifies the user.

Important

• The User name entry field has the following character restrictions:

72

• The user name needs to be between 1 and 20 characters long, using single-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols (!"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>?@[\]^_`{|}~). (Alphabets are case-sensitive)

5. Specify the Time zone setting, and select Next

Select your region on the list. If you cannot find your region on the list, select the one closest to your region.

Apply daylight saving time

This appears only when there is a daylight saving time in the Time zone that you selected.

Select whether or not to apply the daylight saving time.

6. Enter the Security code and select Done

Enter the code for authenticating the user.

73

Important

• The Security code entry field has the following character restrictions:

• Single-byte numbers

The registration is complete. A registration completion message is displayed.

When you select the OK button in the message, the login screen is displayed.

Enter the registered e-mail address and password, and log in to the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center.

Using Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center

74

Printing Your Printer registration ID

To add a printer by using Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center, you will need a Printer registration ID.

From the operation panel of this printer, print the URL of the authentication site and your Printer

registration ID. The procedure is as follows:

1. Check that the printer is connected to the Internet

Important

• To use this function, you must connect this printer to the Internet.

2. From the home window, select Setup -> Web service setup -> Web service

connection setup -> IJ Cloud Printing Center setup -> Register with this service

3. In the registration confirmation window, Select Yes

4. In the print settings, select the display language

5. Follow the instructions displayed in the window, and print the URL of the authentication site and your Printer registration ID

When you set A4 size or Letter size plain paper and select OK, the authentication site URL and your

Printer registration ID are printed.

Important

• The operation to complete the registration should be done within 60 minutes.

75

Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center window

This section describes the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center screens that are displayed on your smartphone, tablet device, or computer.

Description of the Login screen

Description of the Main screen

Description of the Login screen

This section provides the description of the Login screen of Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center.

Important

• You have 5 tries to enter your password. If you fail, you will not be able to log in for about the next hour.

• You remain logged in for an hour after the last access.

Language

Select the language you will be using.

E-mail address

Enter the e-mail address that you entered in the user registration.

Important

• The e-mail address is case-sensitive. Make sure the case is correct.

Password

Enter the password that you entered in the user registration.

Keep login info

When you select the check box, the login screen is skipped for 14 days since the last day that the service screen was accessed.

Reset password from here

Select this if you forgot the password.

Reset your password by following the instructions on the screen.

76

Create new account

A new registration will be added to the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center.

For a new registration, you need the


.

System requirements

This displays the system requirements for the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center.

Help/legal notices (smartphone and tablet devices only)

The description of the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center screen and various reminders are displayed.

Software license info

The licensing information of Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center is displayed.

About this service

This displays the descriptions of this service.

Description of the Main screen

When you log in to the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center, the Main screen appears.

With this service, the functions available to Standard user of the printer are different from those available to the printer Administrator.

Standard user can only use the functions marked by an asterisk (*).

You can use areas shown below to start*, add, and manage apps.

If you are using a smartphone or a tablet, you can also print photos and documents.

If you are using a smartphone or tablet

If you are using a PC

If you are using a smartphone or tablet

(1) Left context menu

77

(2) Printer name area

(3) Right context menu

(4) Display area

(5) Menu area

(1) Left context menu

When you select , the Mng. printer screen of the Manage users screen appears.

For general users, the Select printer screen appears.

Mng. printer screen (Select printer screen)

From the Mng. printer screen (Select printer screen), you can check* and update* printer information registered to the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center, change printer names , delete printers , add printers , and copy apps .

• Check the printer information*

The registered printer name is displayed.

indicates the currently selected printer.

indicates that an error occurred on the printer.

• Display update date/time of the printer information*

78

This displays the date and time the printer information was last updated.

refreshes the information.

• Copy apps

Select this to copy apps added in the selected printer to another printer.

When you select , the screen shown below appears.

Set the Destination printer and the Source printer. Then select OK.

• Change the printer name

When you select , a screen to change the printer name appears.

Follow the instructions on the screen to change the name.

Note

• The printer name entry has the following character limitation:

• Up to 128 characters

• Delete printers

When you select , the printer is deleted from the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center.

When transferring the ownership of the printer, select Clear the information saved on the printer.

• Add printers

Select this to add printers to be used in the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center.

You need a Printer registration ID to add a printer.

Note

• Up to 16 printers are guaranteed to operate for each e-mail address.

79

Manage users screen

From the Manage users screen, you can check user information registered to the Canon Inkjet Cloud

Printing Center, delete users , add users , and change the Administrator and Standard user settings .

• User deletion

Select the check box of the user to be deleted, and select Delete.

However, you cannot delete yourself. To delete yourself, cancel your membership from the user information screen.

• Adding a user

Select Add user. The user registration screen appears.

• Changing Administrator and Standard user settings

You can change the privileges of the Administrator and Standard users.

(2) Printer name area

The registered name of the printer selected is displayed.

The Administrator can change the printer name .

(3) Right context menu

When you select , the context menu appears.

The information displayed depends on the menu currently selected in the menu area.

The symbol indicates that there is a new unread notice.

80

•

Sort

This displays the screen to sort registered apps.

You can use the buttons to change the display order of apps. When you finish sorting, press the Done button to confirm the order.

•

Latest notices*

This displays the latest notices. The symbol indicates that there is a new unread notice.

•

User information*

This displays the User information screen.

You can change the registered e-mail address, password, language, time zone, and other settings.

81

•

Help/legal notices*

The description of the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center screen and various reminders are displayed.

•

Log out*

This opens the Log out screen of the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center.



(5) Menu area

The following 4 menu buttons are displayed:

•

Apps*

This displays the list of registered apps in the Display area .

•

Config

This displays the Register apps screen in the Display area .

The display can be toggled between Registered and Search apps.

The Registered screen lists registered apps.

You can check the information of these apps or deregister them.

82

On the Search apps screen, the apps that you can register by using the Canon Inkjet Cloud

Printing Center are displayed by category.

◦ When you select , the details of the app are displayed.

When you select / , you can choose to register or unregister the app.

Note




83

•

Properties*

This screen displays the status of the printer that is currently selected.

You can check how much ink is remaining or details about an error that occurred. You can also access the ink purchasing site and the Online Manual.

Important

• The Properties displayed may differ from the actual status at the display time, depending on the printer status.

•

Manage jobs*

This screen displays the print status and the print history.

You can check the print status by looking at Status list, and the print history by looking at History.

You can also cancel print jobs and delete history information.

To cancel or delete a job, select that job and then select Cancel or Delete.

If you are using a PC

(1) Mng. printer (Select printer) button

(2) Manage users button

(3) Printer name area

(4) Menu area

(5) Notices area

(6) Information area

(7) Global navigation area

84

(8) Display area

(1) Mng. printer (Select printer) button

When you select the Mng. printer (Select printer) button, the Mng. printer (Select printer) screen appears.

From the Mng. printer screen (Select printer screen), you can check* and update* printer information registered to the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center, change printer names , delete printers , add printers , and copy apps .

• Check the printer information*

The registered printer name is displayed.

indicates the currently selected printer.

indicates that an error occurred on the printer.

• Display update date/time of the printer information*

This displays the date and time the printer information was last updated.

refreshes the information.

85

• Change the printer name

When you select , a screen to change the printer name appears.

Follow the instructions on the screen to change the name.

Note

• The printer name entry has the following character limitation:

• Up to 128 characters

• Delete printers

When you select , the printer is deleted from the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center.

When transferring the ownership of the printer, select Clear the information saved on the printer.

• Add printers

Select this to add printers to be used in the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center.

You need a


to add a printer.

Note

• Up to 16 printers are guaranteed to operate for each e-mail address.

• Copy apps

Select this to copy apps added in the selected printer to another printer.

When you select , the screen shown below appears.

Set the Destination printer and the Source printer. Then select OK.

(2) Manage users button

When you select the Manage users button, the Manage users screen appears.

86

From the Manage users screen, you can check user information registered to the Canon Inkjet Cloud

Printing Center, delete users , add users , and change the Administrator and Standard user settings .

• User deletion

Select the check box of the user to be deleted, and select Delete.

However, you cannot delete yourself. To delete yourself, cancel your membership from the user information screen.

• Adding a user

Select Add user. The user registration screen appears.

• Changing Administrator and Standard user settings

You can change the privileges of the Administrator and Standard users.

(3) Printer name area

The registered name of the printer selected is displayed.

The Administrator can use the Mng. printer functions to change the printer name .

(4) Menu area

The following 4 menu buttons are displayed:

•

Sort (Apps)

This displays the list of registered apps in the Display area .

Drag the app to change the order.

87

When you finish sorting, press the Set sort order button and confirm the order.

•

Config

This displays the Register apps screen in the Display area .

The display can be toggled between Registered and Search apps.

The Registered screen lists registered apps.

You can check the information of these apps or deregister them.

On the Search apps screen, the apps that you can register by using the Canon Inkjet Cloud

Printing Center are displayed by category.

◦ When you select , the details of the app are displayed.

When you select / , you can choose to register or unregister the app.

Note


: Cannot be used because it is not yet released, not available in your region, or does

88

not support your model.


•

Properties*

This screen displays the status of the printer that is currently selected.

You can check how much ink is remaining or details about an error that occurred. You can also access the ink purchasing site and the Online Manual.

Important

• The Properties displayed may differ from the actual status at the display time, depending on the printer status.

•

Manage jobs*

This screen displays the print status and the print history.

You can check the print status by looking at Status list, and the print history by looking at History.

You can also cancel print jobs and delete history information.

To cancel or delete a job, select that job and then select Cancel or Delete.

(5) Notices area

This displays the latest notice. Nothing is displayed in this area if there is no notice.

When you select Notice list, you can display up to 40 items.

(6) Information area

This display other information, including the privacy statement and other companies' licensing information.

(7) Global navigation area

The User information*, Instructions*, and Log out* buttons are displayed.

Press the User information to change the settings.

89



90

Using Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center

When the user registration is completed, you can log in to the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center and use the service.

1. From your PC, smartphone, or tablet, access the service login URL (http://cs.c-ij.com/)

2. On the Login screen, enter the E-mail address and Password, and then select Log in

Important

• The e-mail address and password are case-sensitive. Make sure the case is correct.

E-mail address

Enter the e-mail address that you entered in the user registration.

Password

Enter the password that you entered in the user registration.

Keep login info

When you select the check box, the login screen is skipped for 14 days since the last day that the service screen was accessed.

Important

• If you fail to log in five straight times, you will not be able to login again for an hour.

• You remain logged in for an hour after the last access.

• The service may not function properly if you log in from multiple devices at the same time.

After logging in, you can use useful services such as adding/managing apps that work in conjunction with this product's cloud functionality and checking the ink status.

For screen descriptions and operation instructions, see " Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center window ".

Printing procedure

This section introduces the photo printing procedure by using CANON iMAGE GATEWAY as an example.

91

Important

• The available functions differ depending on the app.

• The printing procedure differs depending on the app.

• You need to get the account and register photo and other data beforehand.

• The following file formats can be printed: jpg, jpeg, pdf, docx, doc, xlsx, xls, pptx, ppt, and rtf.

The file formats that can be printed differ depending on the app.

• Before you print, check that printer is on and is connected to the network. Then start.

• This is available if you are using a smartphone or tablet.

Note

• You can use CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to print jpg and jpeg file formats.

1. On the Main screen, select the app to be used

2. Enter the information according to the instructions on the authentication screen, and then select Log in

3. In the displayed album list, select the album of your choice

92

4. In the displayed image list, select the image that you want to print, and then select Next

5. Make the necessary print settings, and then select Print

93

6. A print job completion message appears, and printing starts

To continue printing, select Continue, and perform the operation from Step 3.

To end the printing, select Apps. The screen returns to the apps list screen.

Important

• If a print job is not printed within 24 hours after the print job is issued, the print job will expire and cannot be printed.

• With premium apps that limit the number of print jobs, print jobs that expire and cannot be printed are also included in the print count.

Adding a Printer

94

Adding a Printer

With one account, you can use the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center services on multiple printers.

The procedure for adding a printer is as follows:

1. Print the registration information from the printer to be added

2. From the browser on your smartphone, tablet, or computer, access the authentication site

URL

3. Select Add printer

4. When the confirmation message is displayed, select OK

5. Enter your Printer registration ID, and select OK

95

Note

• When you access the service from Remote UI, the Printer registration ID is entered automatically.

Printer addition is completed.

Troubleshooting Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center

96

Troubleshooting Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center

If an app cannot be installed

If the registered app is not in the Apps list

If the information is not updated when you press the Update button

If you do not receive the registration e-mail

If you cannot print

Printing starts on its own even if you do not do anything

If you are unable to log in correctly even after entering the correct password in iOS or Mac

If an app cannot be installed

Check the country or region where the printer was purchased.

If the printer is taken outside the country or region where it was purchased, apps cannot be installed.

If the registered app is not in the Apps list

Check the display language of Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center.

If the display language is switched to a language that does not support an app, the app will not be displayed in the apps list but will continue to be registered.

If you switch back to the target language of the app, it will be displayed in the apps list and you will be able to start, register, or unregister the app.

If the information is not updated when you press the Update button

Because the Properties screen requires network connection with this product, the information may not be reflected immediately. Please wait awhile, and then try updating the information again.

If the information is still not updated, then check that the product is connected to the Internet.

If you do not receive the registration e-mail

You may have entered a different e-mail address during the user registration of Canon Inkjet Cloud

Printing Center.

On the printer's Home screen, select Setup -> Web service setup -> Web service

connection setup -> IJ Cloud Printing Center setup -> Delete from this service to delete the service registration.

After resetting the printer, repeat the user registration of Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center from the beginning.

If you cannot print

Check the following if you cannot print.

• Check that the printer is connected to the Internet.

• Check that the printer is connected to a LAN and the LAN environment is connected to the Internet.

• Check that no error message is displayed on the printer's LCD monitor.

97

• If printing does not start even after you wait awhile, go to the printer home screen and run

Setup -> Web service inquiry. If printing does not start, run the inquiry several times.

If the problem is not resolved, use the printer driver from your computer to perform the print job and check whether the data can be printed normally on the printer.

If you still cannot print, see the troubleshooting page for your model on the Home of the Online Manual.

Note

• With a wireless LAN connection, after the printer is turned on, it may take several minutes before communication is possible. Check that your printer is connected to the wireless network, and wait a while before you start printing.

• If the printer is not turned on or is not connected to the Internet, and consequently a print job is not processed within 24 hours after it was submitted, the print job is automatically canceled. If this happens, check the printer power and the Internet connection, and then re-submit the print job.

Printing starts on its own even if you do not do anything

A third party may be able to illegally use the Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center services.

On the printer's Home screen, select Setup -> Web service setup -> Web service

connection setup -> IJ Cloud Printing Center setup -> Delete from this service to delete the service registration.

After resetting the printer, repeat the user registration of Canon Inkjet Cloud Printing Center from the beginning.

If you are unable to log in correctly even after entering the correct password in iOS or Mac

If you are using iOS or Mac, and the password contains the ¥ symbol, enter a backslash instead. For instructions on entering a backslash, see the OS help.

98

Printing with Google Cloud Print

The printer is compatible with Google Cloud Print™ (Google Cloud Print is a service provided by Google

Inc.).

By using Google Cloud Print, you can print from anywhere with applications or services supporting Google

Cloud Print.

1.

Preparations for Printing with Google Cloud Print

2.

Printing from Computer or Smartphone with Google Cloud Print

Important

• LAN connection with the printer and Internet connection are required to register the printer and to print with Google Cloud Print. Internet connection fees apply.

• This function may not be available depending on the country or region you live in.

99

Preparations for Printing with Google Cloud Print

To print with Google Cloud Print, you need to get Google account and register the printer with Google Cloud

Print in advance.

Getting Google Account

If you already have Google account, register the printer.

Registering the Printer with Google Cloud Print

Getting Google Account

First, get your Google account in order to register the printer with Google Cloud Print.

Access to Google Cloud Print with the web browser on the computer or the mobile device, then register the required information.

* The screen above may change without prior notice.

Registering the Printer with Google Cloud Print

Register the printer with Google Cloud Print.

If the firmware version is Ver. 2.010 or later, registration is possible from Google Chrome on your computer, smartphone, or tablet device.

Registration Using Google Chrome

For earlier versions, register the information from the printer.

Registration from the Printer

Important

• For instructions on checking the firmware version and updating the firmware, refer to " Firmware

Update ".

• After you update the firmware, you must re-register the printer even if it was already registered.

100

• When you register a printer, the printer must be connected to the LAN and the LAN environment must be connected to the Internet. Note that the customer is responsible for all Internet connection fees.

• When the printer owner changes, delete the printer registration from Google Cloud Print .

Registration Using Google Chrome

1. Start the Google Chrome browser on your computer, smartphone, or tablet device.

Then from account

(Chrome menu), select Sign in to Chrome..., and log in to your Google

2. From (Chrome menu), select Settings

3. Click Show advanced settings... to display the information. Then for Google Cloud

Print, select Manage

4. Select Add printers for the printer to be added

5. When the confirmation message for registering the printer appears, select OK

Printer registration is complete.

Registration from the Printer

The authentication procedure using the web browser on the computer or the mobile device is required in the process of registering. Because the authentication URL is printed from printer when the authentication process is performed, prepare A4 or Letter-sized plain paper.

1. Make sure that the printer is turned on

2. From the Home screen, select Setup

3. Select Web service setup -> Connection setup -> Google Cloud Print setup ->

Register with Google Cloud Print

Note

• If you have already registered the printer with Google Cloud Print, the confirmation message to re-register the printer is displayed.

4. When the confirmation screen to register the printer is displayed, select Yes

5. Select a display language on the print setting screen of Google Cloud Print

The confirmation message to print the authentication URL is displayed.

6. Load A4 or Letter-sized plain paper, then select OK

101

The authentication URL is printed.

7. Ensure that the authentication URL is printed, select Yes

8. Perform the authentication process using the web browser on the computer or the mobile device

Access to the URL using the web browser on the computer or the mobile device and perform the authentication process following the on-screen instructions.

Note

• Perform the authentication process with your Google account which you have gotten in advance.

9. When the message that the registration is complete is displayed on the LCD of the printer, select OK

When authentication process is complete properly, the registration items are displayed. When authentication process is complete, you can print the data with Google Cloud Print .

When authentication process is not complete properly and the error message is displayed, select

OK. When the confirmation message to print the authentication URL is displayed, print the authentication URL, then perform the authentication process on the computer again.

Deleting the Printer from Google Cloud Print

To change the printer owner or to re-register the printer, first delete the printer from Google Cloud Print by using the respective procedure.

Deletion from Google Chrome

Deletion from the Printer

Deletion from Google Chrome

1. Start the Google Chrome browser on your computer, smartphone, or tablet device.

Then from account

(Chrome menu), select Sign in to Chrome..., and log in to your Google

2. From (Chrome menu), select Settings

3. Click Show advanced settings... to display the information. Then for Google Cloud

Print, select Manage

4. Select Delete for the printer to be deleted

5. When the confirmation message for deleting the printer appears, select OK

102

Deletion from the Printer



3. Select Web service setup -> Connection setup -> Google Cloud Print setup ->

Delete from Google Cloud Print

4. When the confirmation screen to delete the printer is displayed, select Yes

103

Printing from Computer or Smartphone with Google Cloud Print

When you send print data with Google Cloud Print, the printer receives the print data and prints it automatically if the printer is turned on.

When printing from a smartphone, tablet, computer, or other external device by using Google Cloud Print, load paper into the printer in advance.

Sending the Print Data with Google Cloud Print


Note

• If you want to send the print data from an outside location, turn on the printer in advance.

2. Send print data from your smartphone, tablet, or computer

The figure below is an example of when printing from the web browser corresponding with Google

Cloud Print. The screen differs depending on the applications or services supporting Google Cloud

Print.

When the preparation for printing with Google Cloud Print is complete and when the printer is turned on, the printer receives the print data and prints it automatically.

Note

• If the firmware version is Ver. 2.010 or later, you can select which printer to use.

For the printing method, you can also select using the local network or using the cloud.

• Depending on the communication status, it may take a while to print the print data or the printer may not receive the print data.

• While printing with Google Cloud Print, the printing may be canceled depending on the printer's status, such as when the printer is being operated or an error has occurred. To resume printing, check the printer's status, then print with Google Cloud Print again.

• For print settings:

104

• If you select the media type other than plain paper or if you select the paper size other than A4/

Letter/B5/A5-size, the print data is printed in single-sided even when you select the duplex print setting. (* The paper size differs depending on the model of your printer. For information about the supported paper sizes, go to the Online Manual home page, and refer to the "Cannot Print

Properly with Automatic Duplex Printing" for your model.)

• If you select plain paper as media type or if you select B5/A5-size as paper size, the print data is printed with border even when you select the borderless print setting.

• The print results may differ from the print image depending on the print data.

• Depending on the device sending the print data, you may not select the print settings when sending the print data with Google Cloud Print.

When you want to print from Google Cloud Print immediately

When the printer cannot receive the print data, or you want to start printing immediately, you can check whether there is a print job on the Google Cloud Print and start printing manually.

Follow the steps below.

Important

• Depending on your printer model, this function may not be available.



3. Select Web service inquiry

Note

• If you have not registered the printer with Google Cloud Print, Web service inquiry is not displayed.

Register the printer with Google Cloud Print .

4. Select Print from Google Cloud Print

The confirmation screen to check is displayed.

5. Select Yes

If there is the print data, the printer receives the print data and prints it.

105

Printing from AirPrint Compliant Device

This document explains how to use AirPrint to print wirelessly from your iPad, iPhone and iPod touch to a

Canon printer.

AirPrint enables you to print photos, email, Web pages and documents from your Apple device directly to your printer without installing a driver.

Checking Your Environment

First, check your environment.

• AirPrint Operation Environment

To use AirPrint, you will need one of the following Apple devices running the latest version of iOS:

◦ iPad (all models)

◦ iPhone (3GS or later)

◦ iPod touch (3rd generation or later)

• Network Environment

The Apple device (iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch) and this printer must be connected to the same Wi-Fi network or connected in AP mode.

Printing with AirPrint

1. Check that this printer is turned on and the Apple device and this printer is connected to the LAN or connected in AP mode.

2. From the app of your Apple device, tap the operation icon to display the menu options.

106

3. From the menu options, tap Print.

4. From Printer Options, select the model that you are using.

Important

• Because some app does not support AirPrint, Printer Options may not be displayed. If an app does not let you use printer options, you cannot print from that app.

Note

• The Printer Options differ depending on the app and model you are using.

107

5. When printing a file type that has multiple pages, such as a PDF file, click Range and then click All Pages or select the range of pages to be printed.

6. For 1 Copy, click + or - to set the number of required copies.

7. For Duplex Printing, click On to enable duplex printing or click Off to disable the function.

8. Tap the Print.

When you execute printing, the printer prints according to the specified settings.

Paper Size

With AirPrint, the paper size is selected automatically according to the app being used on the Apple device and the region in which AirPrint is used.

When Apple's photo app is used, the default paper size is L size in Japan, and 4"x6" or KG in other countries and regions.

When documents are printed from Apple's Safari app, the default paper size is letter size in the U.S.

region, and A4 in Japan and Europe.

Important

• Your app may support different paper sizes.

Checking the Print Status

During printing, a Print Center icon is displayed in the list of recently used apps, and you can use it to check the print progress.

Press the Home button on the Apple device twice to set the Multitasking mode. Then swipe to the right to display the Print Center icon and a Print Summary.

108

Deleting a Print Job

To delete a print job with AirPrint, use one of the following two methods:

• From the printer: If your printer has a LCD monitor, use the operation panel to cancel the print job.

If you printer does not have a LCD monitor, press the Stop button on the printer to cancel the print job.

• From an Apple device: Press the Home button on the Apple device twice to set the Multitasking mode, and then swipe to the right. Tap the Print Center icon to display a Print Summary. Tap the print job to be canceled, and then tap Cancel Printing.

AirPrint Troubleshooting

If the document does not print, check the following:

1. Check that the printer power is on. If the printer power is on, turn it off and then back on again, and check whether the issue is resolved.

2. Check that the printer is connected by LAN to the same network subnet as the device on which iOS is installed.

3. Check that the printer has enough paper and ink.

4. If your printer has a LCD monitor, check that no error message is displayed on the LCD monitor.

If the problem persists, use the printer driver on your computer to execute printing and check whether the document can be printed normally on the printer.

If the document cannot be printed, refer to the Online Manual for your model.

109

Note

• After you turn on the printer, it may take few minutes before the printer can communicate through a wireless LAN connection. Confirm that the printer is connected to the wireless LAN, and then try printing.

• If Bonjour on the printer is disabled, AirPrint cannot be used. Check the LAN settings on the printer, and enable Bonjour.

Note

• The windows used in the explanations may differ from those displayed by your Apple product or app.

110

Android Print

Use the Canon printing plugin

Canon Print Service is a printing plug-in for Android 4.4 available for free on Google Play. Installing and activating the plug-in enables your Android smartphone or tablet to print wirelessly to a Canon printer.

Printing via Mopria

You can print wirelessly to a Canon printer from a Mopria compatible Android smartphone or tablet.

See the Mopria homepage (http://www.mopria.org) for details including supported devices.

111

Checking Printer Information

You can use your smartphone, tablet, or computer to check the Printer status and execute utility functions from apps such as Canon Inkjet Print Utility and PIXMA Printing Solutions.

You can also use the convenient web services presented by Canon.

1. Selecting Printer Information in an Apps Screen

Note

• You can also enter IPv4 address directly in the web browser to display printer information.

1. From the home window, select Setup -> Device settings -> LAN settings ->

Confirm LAN settings -> WLAN setting list or LAN setting list. Then from the displayed window, check the IP address.

2. From your computer, smartphone, or tablet device, open the Web browser, and enter the following URL: http:// <Printer IP address>

For <Printer IP address>, enter the IP address that you checked in the previous procedure.

2. Entering Username and Administrator's Password

From the authentication screen, enter the Username and Password.

Username: ADMIN

Password: See " About the Administrator Password ."

Note

• The Username display may differ depending on your browser.

3. Displaying Printer Information

The top screen for printer information is displayed.

112

Printer status

This function displays printer information such as the remaining ink amount, the status, and detailed error information.

You can also connect to the ink purchase site or support page, and use Web Services.

Utilities

This function allows you to set and execute the printer utility functions such as cleaning.

AirPrint settings

This function allows you to specify the Apple AirPrint settings, such as position information.

Google Cloud Print setup

This function allows you to register this printer to Google Cloud Print or delete the printer.

Print from E-mail setup

Allows you to register printers, check print addresses, and delete registered printers.

IJ Cloud Printing Center setup

Allows you to register to IJ Cloud Printing Center or to delete a registration.

Security

Allows you to set the Administrator's password and Operation restrictions for the machine.

Important

• For the initial Password, see " About the Administrator Password ."

For Security reasons, we recommend that you change the Password to an individual password.

• The following character restrictions apply to the password that you enter:

• Set the password by using 0 to 32 characters.

• The allowed characters are single-byte alphanumeric characters.

Firmware update

This function allows you to update the firmware and check version information.

Manual (Online)

This function displays the Online Manual.

113

Online Storage Integration Function

The printer can integrate with online storage services such as Evernote.

Integration with Online Notetaking Service "Evernote"

If an Evernote client application is installed on your computer, you can import scanned images into the application and upload them to the Evernote server.

The uploaded images can be browsed from other computers, smartphones, etc.

To use Evernote, you need to create an account. See the "CREATE ACCOUNT" page of Evernote for account creation.

• Settings

In the Settings Dialog Box of IJ Scan Utility, select the item you want to set, then select Evernote for

Send to an application in Application Settings.

Refer to "Settings Dialog Box" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for details.

Important

• The Evernote service features are subject to change or termination without prior notice.

114

How to Use Print from E-mail

By using Print from E-mail, you can easily print a photo or document saved on your smartphone, tablet, or computer just by attaching it to an e-mail.

You can print simply from outside like a travel destination. Also, your family or friends can print by registering beforehand.

You can use Print from E-mail on any Canon printer that supports the service.

Checking Your Environment

First, check your environment.


This product needs to be connected to a LAN with an Internet connection.

Important


• This function may not be available in some countries/regions.

• Depending on your printer model, this function may not be available.

Preparing to use Print from E-mail

To use Print from E-mail, you need to register the printer by entering information about the printer's owner.

1. Print the printer registration page's URL and the PIN code

2. Access the URL and enter the owner's e-mail address and other required information

3. Check if an e-mail has been sent to the e-mail address you entered

115

4. Access the URL provided in the e-mail and complete the printer registration process

Note

• The e-mail address that appears on the screen when you have finished registering is the e-mail address that will be used just for the Print from E-mail function.

For details about the registration procedure, see here

Printing from Your Smartphone, Tablet, or Computer

1. Prepare a file that you want to print

The file format, number of files, and file size that this printing function supports are provided below.

Supported File Formats

• Adobe PDF files

• JPEG files

• .doc/.docx/.xls/.xlsx/.ppt/.pptx files

Important

• Only files that are attached to e-mail can be printed. E-mail messages cannot be printed.

• Adobe PDF files and .doc/.docx/.xls/.xlsx/.ppt/.pptx files that are encrypted, passwordprotected, or set to print disabled cannot be printed.

• Files that are attached as compressed files cannot be printed.

• Files other than Adobe PDF files, JPEG files and .doc/.docx/.xls/.xlsx/.ppt/.pptx files cannot be printed.

Supported Number of Files and File Sizes

• Up to 10 attachment files can be printed.

• The maximum size of an e-mail with attachment files is 10 MB.

Note

• The size of an e-mail is determined based on the size of the entire transmission file, including the e-mail message and the header. Therefore sometimes an attachment file cannot be printed even if the size of the attachment file is less than 10 MB.

• If the size of an attached JPEG file is less than 10 KB, the file cannot be printed.

2. Attach the file that you want to print from your smartphone, tablet, or computer to the email and send it to the e-mail address for printing

To check the print address, from the operation panel of this printer, display the home window and select Setup -> Web service setup -> Web service connection setup -> Print from

E-mail setup -> Check address for printing.

Important

• You will not be able to use the service during periods when the service is undergoing maintenance.

116

Use the Service With More Than One Person

To allow multiple users to use this function, register users (other than the printer's owner) as members.

1. The printer's owner uses his/her smartphone, tablet, or computer to access the service's login URL (https://pr.mp.c-ij.com/po) and logs in

2. Select the printer name that you want to add the member. Click Member Settings ->

Add to enter the member's e-mail address, and click Add

A URL of the member registration page is sent to the e-mail address of the newly registered member.

3. Registered member accesses to the URL that is included in the e-mail, and complete the registration

You can use this service from registered e-mail address.

Note

• You can register up to 500 members.

Print from E-mail Troubleshooting

The Document Does Not Print

If You Cannot Register to the Service or Delete the Service

If You Cannot Print after the Printer Is Repaired

The Document Does Not Print

If the document does not print, check the following:

• Check that the printer power is on.

If the printer power is on, turn it off and then back on again, and check whether the issue is resolved.

• Check that the printer is connected to the network.

• Check that the printer is connected to a LAN and the LAN has an Internet connection.

• Look at the printer LCD monitor and check that no error message is displayed.

If the problem persists, use the printer driver on your computer to execute printing and check whether the document can be printed normally on the printer.

If the document cannot be printed, refer to the Online Manual for your printer.

• Check that the file attached to the e-mail is an Adobe PDF file, a JPEG file, or a .doc/.docx/.xls/.xlsx/.ppt/.pptx file.

• Check whether the e-mail address of the send destination is correct.

To check the print address, from the operation panel of this printer, display the home window and select Setup -> Web service setup -> Web service connection setup -> Print from

E-mail setup -> Check address for printing.

• Check that the user's e-mail address for using this service is registered.

If you want to check the error details, the printer owner have to access the login URL (https://pr.mp.cij.com/po).

• In the Print Status screen, click Go to Print History Screen and check the history of jobs that were sent. You can check the error details.

117

If you want to check the error details, the printer owner have to access the login URL (https://pr.mp.cij.com/po).

Note

• For a wireless LAN connection, after the printer is turned on, it may take a few minutes before communication becomes possible. Confirm that your printer is connected to the wireless LAN, and then try printing.

If You Cannot Register to the Service or Delete the Service

If You Cannot Register to the Service

• If the printer operation panel display the message "Failed to register with "Print from E-mail".", the registration to Print from E-mail may not have been completed in time. Select OK to release the error, and start over again from the beginning.

• Check that the firmware version of the printer has been updated.

If You Do Not Receive the URL to Complete the Registration by E-mail

• An incorrect e-mail address may have been entered. Wait about 30 minutes, and operate the printer operation panel to print the printer registration URL and PIN code. Then re-register from the beginning.

If You Cannot Delete the Service

• If the printer operation panel display the message "Failed to connect to "Print from E-mail". Only

the information on the printer was deleted." is displayed, it could be that the registration information on the service could not be deleted even though the Print from E-mail information stored on this printer was deleted.

Select OK to release the error, and then access the service's login URL (https://pr.mp.c-ij.com/po) to delete the registration information.

• If the Print from E-mail information stored on this printer could not be deleted even though the registration information on the service was deleted, from the operation panel of this printer, display the home window and select Setup -> Web service setup -> Web service

connection setup -> Print from E-mail setup -> Delete registered printer, and delete the registration information.

If You Cannot Print after the Printer Is Repaired

Re-registering the printer and the printer owner

• When the printer is repaired, all of the registered information is deleted and Print from E-mail can no longer be used.

If you want to use this service again, you must re-register the printer and the printer owner.

For information about the re-registration procedure, see " Preparing to Use Print from E-mail ".

Even if users other than the owner were registered as members, repeat the registration starting from here .

118

Preparing to Use Print from E-mail

To use this service to print a photo or document, you need to follow the procedure provided below and register the printer.

Print the Printer Registration Page's URL and the PIN Code

First, print the printer registration page's URL and the PIN code.

Check that there is sufficient amount of ink in the printer, and then print using the printer's operation panel.

1. Check that the printer is connected to the network

Important

• This product needs to be connected to a LAN with an Internet connection.

2. From the operation panel of this printer, display the home window and select

Setup -> Web service setup -> Web service connection setup -> Print from E-

mail setup -> Register printer.

3. Follow the instructions on the screen and print the printer registration URL and PIN code

Important

• Do not turn off the power on the printer until the registration process is completed.

Access the printed URL and log in within 25 minutes.

• If you canceled the registration before it is completed, repeat the procedure from printing the registration information.

Access the Printed URL and Enter the Owner's E-mail Address and Other

Required Information

Next, enter the owner's e-mail address and other required information.

1. Access the printed URL by using the browser on your smartphone, tablet, or computer, and select Log In

2. In the use agreement window, select Agree

Important

• If you do not select Agree in the use agreement window, you will not able to register as the printer owner.

3. Enter the printer owner's e-mail address, and select Next

119

Important

• An e-mail is sent with the required information for completing the registration to the e-mail address entered for the printer's owner.

• If domain-specific reception is set, change the setting so that mail can be received from

"[email protected]"

Note

• The e-mail address of the printer owner cannot be changed once the printer owner is registered.

To change the e-mail address, delete the registration of the registered printer, and re-register the printer owner by using the new e-mail address. In this case, all previously registered information will be deleted.

• The notification is sent automatically to the registered e-mail address when the printing or service maintenance starts.

4. In the Printer Owner Registration window, enter the information shown below, and click

Next

User Name

Enter any name.

The name that you enter is displayed at login.

Important

• The maximum number of characters that can be entered is 30.

Language

Select the language that you are using.

The language that you select is used in notification e-mails such as print start notices.

Time Zone

Refer to this section , and select the standard time of the city that is nearest to the region where you live.

Date/Time Display Format

Select the format of your choice.

The format that you select is applied to the date/time information in the screens and notification emails of this service.

Daylight Saving Time

This setting is combined with the Time Zone setting, and applied to the date/time information in the screens and notification e-mails of this service.

When you select ON, 1 hour is added to the Time Zone setting when the date/time information is displayed.

5. In the Printer Registration window, enter the Printer Name, and select Confirm

Enter any name that will allow you to identify the printer.

120

Important

• The maximum number of characters that can be entered is 30.

6. In the Confirm Owner Registration window, check the registration information, and select Register

A temporary password will be displayed.

Important

• The temporary password that appears is not included in the notification e-mail. Be sure to write down the temporary password before closing the screen.

Check if an E-mail Has Been Sent to the E-mail Address You Entered

A URL is notified to complete the registration to the e-mail address that for the registered printer's owner.

Access the URL in the E-mail and Complete the Printer Registration

1. Access the URL provided in the e-mail

Important

• You have to complete the registration within 30 minutes.

2. Enter the registered e-mail address of the printer's owner, the temporary password, and select Log In

3. Set a password of your choice, and select Register

When the password setting process is completed, the printer's e-mail address and the service's URL are displayed, and the printer's registration process is completed.

Important

• When you enter the password, the following character restrictions apply.

• Set a password that has 8 or more characters.

• The characters that you can use are single-byte uppercase letters, single-byte lowercase letters, and single-byte numbers.

• In the password, combine all of the different types of characters that can be used.

• The displayed printer's e-mail address and the URL of the login page are not sent. Be sure to write down the printer's e-mail address and the URL of the login page before closing the screen.

121

Timezone List

(UTC-12:00) International Date Line West

(UTC-11:00) Midway Island

(UTC-10:00) Hawaii

(UTC-09:00) Alaska

(UTC-08:00) Tijuana, Baja California, Pacific Time (US & Canada)

(UTC-07:00) Arizona, Chihuahua, La Paz, Mazatlan, Mountain Time (US & Canada)

(UTC-06:00) Guadalajara, Mexico City, Monterrey, Saskatchewan, Central America, Central Time (US & Canada)

(UTC-05:00) Indiana (East), Bogota, Lima, Quito, Eastern Time (US & Canada), Caracas

(UTC-04:00) Asuncion, Santiago, Georgetown, La Paz, San Juan, Manaus, Atlantic Time (Canada), Newfoundland

(UTC-03:00) Cayenne, Greenland, Buenos Aires, Brasilia, Montevideo

(UTC-02:00) Mid-Atlantic

(UTC-01:00) Azores, Cape Verde Is.

(UTC+00:00) Casablanca, Dublin, Edinburgh, Lisbon, London, Monrovia, Reykjavik, Coordinated Universal Time

(UTC+01:00)

Amsterdam, Berlin, Bern, Rome, Stockholm, Vienna, Sarajevo, Skopje, Warsaw, Zagreb, Brussels,

Copenhagen, Madrid, Paris, Belgrade, Bratislava, Budapest, Ljubljana, Prague, West Central Africa

(UTC+02:00)

Athens, Bucharest, Istanbul, Amman, Windhoek, Jerusalem, Cairo, Harare, Pretoria, Beirut, Helsinki,

Kyiv, Riga, Sofia, Tallinn, Vilnius, Minsk

(UTC+03:00) Kuwait, Riyadh, Tbilisi, Nairobi, Baghdad, Moscow, St. Petersburg, Volgograd, Tehran

(UTC+04:00) Abu Dhabi, Muscat, Yerevan, Baku, Port Louis, Kabul

(UTC+05:00)

Islamabad, Karachi, Ekaterinburg, Tashkent, Sri Jayawardenepura, Chennai, Kolkata, Mumbai, New

Delhi, Kathmandu

(UTC+06:00) Astana, Dhaka, Almaty, Novosibirsk, Yangon (Rangoon)

(UTC+07:00) Krasnoyarsk, Bangkok, Hanoi, Jakarta

(UTC+08:00) Irkutsk, Ulaan Bataar, Kuala Lumpur, Singapore, Perth, Taipei, Beijing, Chongqing, Hong Kong, Urumqi

(UTC+09:00) Seoul, Yakutsk, Osaka, Sapporo, Tokyo, Adelaide, Darwin

(UTC+10:00) Vladivostok, Canberra, Melbourne, Sydney, Guam, Port Moresby, Brisbane, Hobart

(UTC+11:00) Magadan, Solomon Is., New Caledonia

(UTC+12:00) Auckland, Wellington, Fiji, Marshall Is., Petropavlovsk-Kamchatsky

(UTC+13:00) Samoa, Nuku'alofa

122

Print Easily from a Smartphone or Tablet with PIXMA Printing

Solutions

Use PIXMA Printing Solutions to easily print photos saved on a smartphone or tablet wirelessly.

You can also receive scanned data (PDF or JPEG) directly on a smartphone or tablet without using a computer.

PIXMA Printing Solutions can be downloaded from App Store and Google Play.

123

Printing with Windows RT

When you use Windows RT, printing is easy because you simply connect this printer to the network.

For information about connecting to the network, see the setup URL (http://www.canon.com/ijsetup) for using this product from your computer, smartphone, or tablet device.

When the connection is complete, the Canon Inkjet Print Utility software, which allows you to specify detailed print settings, is downloaded automatically.

By using Canon Inkjet Print Utility, you can check the Printer status and specify detailed print settings. (The available functions will differ depending on your usage environment and connection method.)

124

Overview of the Machine

Safety Guide

Safety Precautions

Regulatory and Safety Information

Main Components and Basic Operations

Main Components

About the Power Supply of the Machine

Using the Operation Panel

Loading Paper / Originals

Loading Paper

Placing a Printable Disc

Loading Originals

Inserting the Memory Card

Replacing an Ink Tank

Replacing an Ink Tank

Checking the Ink Status from Your Computer

Checking the Ink Status

Maintenance

When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect

Performing Maintenance from a Computer

Cleaning the Machine

Changing the Machine Settings

Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer

Changing the Machine Settings Using the Operation Panel

Setting Up the Card Slot as the Memory Card Drive of the Computer

Information about Network Connection

Useful Information about Network Connection

About Network Communication

Changing and Confirming Network Settings

Screens for Network Connection of IJ Network Tool

Other Screens of IJ Network Tool

Appendix for Network Communication

Tips for Ensuring Optimal Printing Quality

Useful Information about Ink

Key Points to Successful Printing

Be Sure to Check Paper Settings before Printing

Be Sure to Set Cassette Paper Information after Loading Paper

Canceling a Print Job

Key to Enjoying Consistent Printing Quality

Precautions for Safe Transport of the Machine

Legal Limitations on Use of Your Product and Use of Images

Specifications

125

Safety Guide

Safety Precautions

Regulatory and Safety Information

126

Safety Precautions

Choosing a location

• Do not install the machine in a location that is unstable or subject to excessive vibration.

• Do not install the machine in locations that are very humid or dusty, in direct sunlight, outdoors, or close to a heating source.

To avoid the risk of fire or electric shocks, use the machine under the operating environment specified in the On-screen Manual.

• Do not place the machine on a thick rug or carpet.

• Do not place the machine with its back attached to the wall.

Power supply

• Ensure that the area around the power outlet is kept clear at all times so you can easily unplug the power cord if necessary.

• Never remove the plug by pulling on the cord.

Pulling the cord may damage the power cord, leading to possible fire or electrical shock.

• Do not use an extension lead/cord.

Working around the machine

• Never put your hands or fingers in the machine while it is printing.

• When moving the machine, carry the machine at both ends. In case the machine weighs more than

14 kg, it is recommended to have two people lifting the machine. Accidental dropping of the machine causes injury. For the machine's weight, refer to the On-screen Manual.

• Do not place any object on the machine. Especially do not place metal objects (paper clips, staples, etc.) or containers of flammable solvents (alcohol, thinners, etc.) on top of the machine.

• Do not transport or use the machine on a slant, vertically or upside-down, as the ink may leak and damage the machine.

Working around the machine (For the multifunction printer)

• When loading a thick book on the Platen Glass, do not press hard on the Document Cover. The

Platen Glass may break and cause injury.

Print Heads/ink tanks and FINE Cartridges

• Keep ink tanks out of the reach of children. In case ink* is accidentally licked or swallowed, rinse out mouth or give one or two glasses of water to drink. If irritation or discomfort occurs, obtain medical advice immediately.

* Clear Ink contains nitrate salts (For models containing Clear Ink).

• In case ink gets in contact with eyes, rinse with water immediately. In case ink gets in contact with skin, wash with soap and water immediately. If irritation to eyes or skin persists, obtain medical advice immediately.

• Never touch the electrical contacts on a Print Head or FINE Cartridges after printing.

The metal parts may be very hot and could cause burns.

• Do not throw ink tanks and FINE Cartridges into fire.

• Do not attempt to disassemble or modify the Print Head, ink tanks, and FINE Cartridges.

127

Regulatory and Safety Information

For models containing lithium battery

• Dispose of used batteries according to the local regulations.

• Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type.

Users in the U.S.A.

FCC Notice (U.S.A. Only)

For 120V, 60Hz model

Model Number: K10406 (Contains FCC ID: AZDK30357)

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.

However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

Use of a shielded cable is required to comply with Class B limits in Subpart B of Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise specified in the manual. If such changes or modifications should be made, you could be required to stop operation of the equipment.

FCC ID:AZDK30357

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate equipment.

This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

The equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits for at uncontrolled equipment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance at least 20cm between the radiator and persons body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles) and must not be colocated or operated with any other antenna or transmitter.

Canon U.S.A., Inc.

One Canon Park

Melville, New York 11747

1-800-652-2666

128

Users in Canada

This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20cm or more away from person's body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles).

Pour les usagers résidant au Canada

Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes :

(1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.

Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux rayonnements énoncées pour un environnement non contrôlé et respecte les règles d'exposition aux fréquences radioélectriques (RF)

CNR-102 de l'IC. Cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé en gardant une distance de 20 cm ou plus entre le dispositif rayonnant et le corps (à l'exception des extrémités : mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles).

Users in Jordan

This printer contains WLAN Module approved by TRC/LPD/2013/130

Name of WLAN Module : K30357

Only for European Union and EEA (Norway, Iceland and Liechtenstein)

This symbol indicates that this product is not to be disposed of with your household waste, according to the WEEE Directive (2012/19/EU) and national legislation. This product should be handed over to a designated collection point, e.g., on an authorized one-for-one basis when you buy a new similar product or to an authorized collection site for recycling waste electrical and electronic equipment (EEE). Improper handling of this type of waste could have a possible negative impact on the environment and human health due to potentially hazardous substances that are generally associated with EEE. At the same time, your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product will contribute to the effective usage of natural resources. For more information about where you can drop off your waste equipment for recycling, please contact your local city office, waste authority, approved WEEE scheme or your household waste disposal service. For more information regarding return and recycling of WEEE products, please visit www.canoneurope.com/weee.

129

Korisnici u Srbiji

Ovaj simbol označava da ovaj proizvod ne sme da se odlaže sa ostalim kućnim otpadom, u skladu sa

WEEE Direktivom (2012/19/EU) i nacionalnim zakonima. Ovaj proizvod treba predati određenom centru za prikupljanje, npr. na osnovi "jedan-za-jedan" kada kupujete sličan novi proizvod, ili ovlašćenom centru za prikupljanje za reciklažu istrošene električne i elektronske opreme (EEE). Nepravilno rukovanje ovom vrstom otpada može da ima moguće negativne posledice po životnu sredinu i ljudsko zdravlje usled potencijalno opasnih materijala koji se uglavnom vezuju za EEE. U isto vreme, vaša saradnja na ispravnom odlaganju ovog proizvoda će doprineti efikasnom korišćenju prirodnih resursa. Za više informacija o tome gde možete da predate vašu staru opremu radi recikliranje, vas molimo, da kontaktirate lokalne gradske vlasti, komunalne službe, odobreni plan reciklaže ili Gradsku čistoću. Za više informacija o vraćanju i recikliranju WEEE proizvoda, posetite stranicu www.canon-europe.com/weee.

India only.

This product is not to be disposed of with your household waste, according to the e-waste (Management and Handling) Rules, 2011.

This product should be handed over to a designated collection point, e.g., to an authorized collection site for recycling waste electrical and electronic equipment (EEE). Improper handling of this type of waste could have a possible negative impact on the environment and human health due to potentially hazardous substances that are generally associated with EEE. At the same time, your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product will contribute to the effective usage of natural resources. For more information regarding return and recycling of WEEE products, please visit http://www.canon.co.in/environment/.

Also, this product complies with the "India E-waste Rule 2011" and prohibits use of lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in concentrations exceeding 0.1 % by weight and 0.01 % by weight for Cadmium, except for the exemptions set in Schedule

II of the Rule.

Environmental Information

Reducing your environmental impact while saving money

Power Consumption and Activation Time

The amount of electricity a device consumes depends on the way the device is used. This product is designed and set in a way to allow you to reduce your electricity costs. After the last print it switches to

Ready Mode. In this mode it can print again immediately if required. If the product is not used for a time, the device switches to its Power Save Mode. The devices consume less power (Watt) in these modes.

If you wish to set a longer Activation Time or would like to completely deactivate the Power Save Mode, please consider that this device may then only switch to a lower energy level after a longer period of time or not at all.

Canon does not recommend extending the Activation Times from the optimum ones set as default.

130

Energy Star

®

The Energy Star

®

programme is a voluntary scheme to promote the development and purchase of energy efficient models, which help to minimise environmental impact.

Products which meet the stringent requirements of the Energy Star

®

programme for both environmental benefits and the amount of energy consumption will carry the Energy Star

®

logo accordingly.

Paper types

This product can be used to print on both recycled and virgin paper (certified to an environmental stewardship scheme), which complies with EN12281 or a similar quality standard. In addition it can support printing on media down to a weight of 64g/m

2

, lighter paper means less resources used and a lower environmental footprint for your printing needs.

Regulatory Model Code (RMC) is for identification and proof that the product complies with the regulations. Please note that RMC is different from the marketing model number of the product.

131

Main Components and Basic Operations

Main Components

About the Power Supply of the Machine

Using the Operation Panel

132

Main Components

Front View

Rear View

Inside View

Operation Panel

133

Front View

(1) operation panel

Use to change the settings of the machine or to operate it. Also, lift and open it to replace an ink tank, to check the ink lamp, or to remove jammed paper inside the machine.

Operation Panel

(2) document cover

Open to load an original on the platen glass.

(3) paper output tray

Opens automatically when printing or copying starts and printed paper is ejected. Also, you need to open it to insert a memory card.

(4) disc tray guide

Open by pulling it out to attach the disc tray. Use only when printing onto a printable disc. Keep closed for normal operation.

(5) output tray extension

Opens automatically when you open the paper output tray, and supports ejected paper.

(6) paper output support

Extend to support ejected paper.

134

(7) cassette 1

Load 4" x 6" (10 x 15 cm) or 5" x 7" (13 x 18 cm) size photo paper into the cassette, and insert it into the machine. Two or more papers of the same size and media type can be loaded at the same time, which are fed automatically one sheet at a time.

Loading Small Size Paper

The disc tray can be stored in the back of the cassette 1.

How to Detach / Attach the Disc Tray

(8) cassette 2

Load A4, B5, A5, or Letter-sized plain paper or photo paper and envelopes into the cassette, and insert it into the machine. Two or more papers of the same size and media type can be loaded at the same time, which are fed automatically one sheet at a time.

Loading Large Size Paper

Loading Envelopes

(9) platen glass

Load an original here.

135

Rear View

(1) rear cover

Detach to remove jammed paper.

(2) power cord connector

Plug in the supplied power cord.

(3) USB port

Plug in the USB cable to connect the machine with a computer.

(4) wired LAN connector

Plug in the LAN cable to connect the machine to a LAN.

Important

• Do not touch the metal casing.

• Do not plug in or unplug the USB cable or LAN cable while the machine is printing or scanning originals with the computer.

136

Inside View

(1) card slot

Insert a memory card.

Before Inserting the Memory Card

(2) Access lamp

Lights or flashes to indicate the memory card status.


(3) ink lamps

Lights or flashes to indicate the ink tank status.

Checking the Ink Status with the Ink Lamps

(4) print head holder

The print head is pre-installed.

Note

• For details on replacing an ink tank, see Replacing an Ink Tank .

137

Operation Panel

* All buttons and lamps on the operation panel are shown lit in the figure below for explanatory purposes.

Only available buttons will be lit.

(1) ON button

Turns the power on or off. Before turning on the power, make sure that the document cover is closed.

Turning the Machine On and Off

(2) POWER lamp

Lights after flashing when the power is turned on.

(3) HOME button

Used to display the HOME screen.


(4) touch screen

Displays messages, menu items, and the operational status. Directly touch the screen lightly with your finger tip to select a menu item or displayed button. You can also preview photos on a memory card before printing.

Basic Operation of the touch screen

(5) Black button

Starts black & white copying, scanning, etc.

(6) Color button

Starts color copying, scanning, etc.

(7) Stop button

Cancels operation when print, copy, or scan job is in progress.

(8) NFC (Near Field Communication) mark

Pass an NFC-enabled smartphone, etc. with a Canon NFC-compliant application installed on it over this mark to perform printing and other operations.

(9) Alarm lamp

Lights or flashes when an error occurs.

(10) Back button

Returns the screen to the previous screen.

(11) Wi-Fi lamp

Lights or flashes to indicate the wireless LAN status.

138

Lights:

Wireless LAN connection is enabled.

Flashes:

Printing or scanning over wireless LAN. Also flashes while configuring the wireless LAN connection.

Note

• When buttons on the operation panel are touched, the machine generates keypad or alarm sounds as necessary. The sound volume can be adjusted in Sound control of Device user settings.

Device user settings

139

About the Power Supply of the Machine

Confirming that the Power Is On

Turning the Machine On and Off

Notice for the Power Plug/Power Cord

Notice for Unplugging the Power Cord

140

Confirming that the Power Is On

The POWER lamp is lit when the machine is turned on.

Even if the buttons on the operation panel and the touch screen display are off, if the POWER lamp is lit, the machine is on.

Note

• It may take a while for the machine to start printing immediately after you turn on the machine.

• The buttons on the operation panel and the touch screen display will turn off if the machine is not operated for about 5 minutes. To restore the display, touch the touch screen. The touch screen display will be restored, and the available buttons also displayed. The print operation from a computer can also restore the display.

141

Turning the Machine On and Off

Turning on the machine

1. Touch the ON button to turn on the machine.

The POWER lamp flashes and then remains lit.

Confirming that the Power Is On

Note

• It may take a while for the machine to start printing immediately after you turn on the machine.

• If the Alarm lamp lights up or flashes and an error message is displayed on the touch screen, see A Message Is Displayed .

• You can set the machine to automatically turn on when a print or scan operation is performed from a computer connected by USB cable or network. This feature is set to off by default. For details on the auto power on feature, see below.

From the machine

About ECO settings

From the computer

Managing the Printer Power

Turning off the machine

1. When the POWER lamp stops flashing, the machine is turned off.

Important

• When you unplug the power cord after turning off the machine, be sure to confirm that the

POWER lamp is off.

142

Note

• You can set the machine to automatically turn off when no operations are performed or no print jobs are sent to the machine for a certain interval. This is the default setting. For details on the auto power off feature, see below.

From the machine

About ECO settings

From the computer


143

Notice for the Power Plug/Power Cord

Unplug the power cord once a month to confirm that the power plug/power cord does not have anything unusual described below.

• The power plug/power cord is hot.

• The power plug/power cord is rusty.

• The power plug/power cord is bent.

• The power plug/power cord is worn.

• The power plug/power cord is split.

Caution

• If you find anything unusual with the power plug/power cord described above, unplug the power cord and call for service. Using the machine with one of the unusual conditions above may cause a fire or an electric shock.

144

Notice for Unplugging the Power Cord

To unplug the power cord, follow the procedure below.

Important

• When you unplug the power cord, touch the ON button, then confirm that the POWER lamp is off.

Unplugging the power cord while the POWER lamp is lit or flashing may cause drying or clogging of the print head and print quality may be reduced.

1. Touch the ON button to turn the machine off.

2. Confirm that the POWER lamp is off.

3. Unplug the power cord.

The specification of the power cord differs depending on the country or region of use.

145

Using the Operation Panel

The operation panel consists of the touch screen (A) and buttons (B) that light up.

Touch the HOME screen on the touch screen with your finger tip to select menus for copying, scanning, and other functions.

The HOME screen comprises three separate screens.

(A) touch screen

Lightly touch a menu, button, or icon on the screen with your finger tip.

Basic Operation of the touch screen

(B) Buttons on the operation panel

Lightly touch the buttons (B) on the operation panel with your finger tip.

Only buttons on the operation panel available for the current screen light up.

Important

• Do not place any object (especially metallic objects or objects containing moisture) on the operation panel. Doing so may cause the machine to malfunction.

• Precious metals, such as in rings and bracelets, may cause malfunction of the machine. When using the operation panel, keep such metals at least 0.8 inch (2 cm) away from the operation panel.

Basic Operation of the touch screen

Touch the touch screen lightly with your finger tip or move your finger to access various functions or settings.

Important

• When operating the touch screen, make sure to avoid the followings, which may cause the machine to malfunction or damage the machine.

• Strongly pressing the touch screen.

146

• Pressing the touch screen with other than your finger (especially with sharpened tips, such as on ballpoint pens, pencils, or nails).

• Touching the touch screen with wet or dirty hands.

• Placing any objects on the touch screen.

Tap

Touch lightly with your finger tip and immediately release.

Use to select an item or photo on the screen.

Touch

Touch lightly with your finger tip.

To move forward (or go back) menus or photos continuously, keep touching the forward (or back) mark.

Flick

Flick your finger on the screen up, down, left, or right.

Use to switch menus or move forward or backward through photos.

Drag

While lightly touching the screen, move your finger up, down, left, or right.

Use to view lists of items or move sliders.

147

An Operation Example of the touch screen

Example: The touch screen operation on the photo selection screen in Photo print

Flick your finger left or right on a photo to display the next or previous photo.

You can also tap the marks (C) to do the same. To move continuously forwards or backwards through photos, hold your touch on either of the marks (C).

Tap (D) to switch to a screen that displays multiple photos.

Drag the slide bar (H) left or right to change the number of photos displayed on the screen. Tapping (I) or

(J) also changes it.

Tap (E) to display the To most recent date screen.

148

Flick left or right and tap the date of photos to display.

Tap (F) to enlarge/reduce the photo.

Tap (K) to enlarge the photo and (L) to reduce it.

Drag your finger on the photo to display the part you want to see.

Tap (G) to display the Settings screen.

Drag the screen up or down and tap an item to select.

149

This opens another list of items. Drag it in the same manner and tap a setting.

150

Loading Paper / Originals

Loading Paper

Placing a Printable Disc

Loading Originals

Inserting the Memory Card

151

Loading Paper

Paper Sources to Load Paper

Loading Small Size Paper

Loading Large Size Paper

Loading Envelopes

Media Types You Can Use

Media Types You Cannot Use

Before Printing on Art Paper

Printing Area

152

Paper Sources to Load Paper

The machine has two paper sources for feeding paper, the cassette 1 and cassette 2.

The paper source used depends on the page size and media type.

Media Types You Can Use

Note

• When printing, select the correct page size and media type. If you select the wrong page size or media type, the machine may feed paper from the wrong paper source or may not print with the proper print quality.

For details on how to load paper in each paper source, see below.



Loading Envelopes

Loading Small Size Photo Paper in the cassette 1

When using small size photo paper, such as 4" x 6" (10 x 15 cm) or 5" x 7" (13 x 18 cm), load it in the cassette 1.

The machine feeds photo paper from the cassette 1 automatically if you select a page size such as 4" x 6"

(10 x 15 cm) or 5" x 7" (13 x 18 cm) in the print settings at the operation panel or the printer driver.

(A) Photo paper (4" x 6" (10 x 15 cm) or 5" x 7" (13 x 18 cm) size)

Loading Large Size Photo Paper / Plain Paper or Envelopes in the cassette

2

When using large size photo paper or plain paper, such as A4, B5, A5, or Letter, load it in the cassette 2.

You can also load envelopes in the cassette 2.

The machine feeds paper from the cassette 2 automatically if you select a page size such as A4, B5, A5, or Letter in the print settings at the operation panel or the printer driver.

153

(B) Photo paper (A4, 8" x 10" (20 x 25 cm), or Letter size)

(C) Plain paper (A4, B5, A5, Letter, or Legal size)

(D) Envelopes

Loading Paper with the Print Side Facing Down

If paper has print side (front or back), such as photo paper, load it with the whiter side (or glossy side) facing down.

(E) cassette 1

(F) cassette 2

154

Loading Small Size Paper

You can load 4" x 6" (10 x 15 cm) or 5" x 7" (13 x 18 cm) size photo paper in the cassette 1.

Load large sizes of paper in the cassette 2.


Important

• If you cut plain paper into small size such as 4" x 6" (10 x 15 cm) or 5" x 7" (13 x 18 cm) to perform trial print, it can cause paper jams.

Note

• We recommend Canon genuine photo paper for printing photos.

For details on the Canon genuine paper, see Media Types You Can Use .

1. Prepare paper.

Align the edges of paper. If paper is curled, flatten it.

Note

• Align the edges of paper neatly before loading. Loading paper without aligning the edges may cause paper jams.

• If paper is curled, hold the curled corners and gently bend them in the opposite direction until the paper becomes completely flat.

For details on how to flatten curled paper, see "Load the paper after correcting its curl." in Paper Is

Smudged/Printed Surface Is Scratched .

• When using Photo Paper Plus Semi-gloss SG-201, even if the sheet is curled, load one sheet at a time as it is. If you roll up this paper to flatten, this may cause cracks on the surface of the paper and reduce the print quality.

2. Load paper.

1. Pull out the cassette 1 from the machine.

155

2. Slide the paper guide (A) in front and (B) on the right to open the guides.

3. Load the paper stack WITH THE PRINT SIDE FACING DOWN, and place it in the center of the cassette 1.

Important

• Always load paper in the portrait orientation (C). Loading paper in the landscape orientation (D) can cause paper jams.

Note

• Align the paper stack with the edge of the cassette 1 as shown in the figure below.

If the paper stack is in contact with the protrusions (E), the paper may not be fed properly.

• If paper has print side (front or back), such as photo paper, load it with the whiter side (or glossy side) facing down.

156

4. Align the paper guide (A) in front with the paper stack.

For standard sizes, align the paper guide (A) with where it clicks into place.

5. Slide the paper guide (B) on the right to align the right and left guides with both sides of the paper stack.

Do not slide the paper guides too hard against the paper. The paper may not be fed properly.

Note

• Do not load sheets of paper higher than the load limit mark (F).

• Keep the paper stack height below the tabs (G) of the paper guides.

6. Insert the cassette 1 into the machine.

Push the cassette 1 all the way into the machine.

After inserting the cassette into the machine, the paper information registration screen for the cassette is displayed on the touch screen.

157

7. Select the size and type of the loaded paper in the cassette 1 at Page size and Type, then tap Register.

If a message is displayed on the screen, follow the directions in the message to complete registration.

Paper setting for Printing

3. Open the paper output tray.

1. Holding both sides of the paper output tray, gently open it.

The output tray extension opens automatically when the paper output tray is opened.

Note

• When printing, select the size and type of the loaded paper on the print settings screen of the operation panel or printer driver.

158

Loading Large Size Paper

You can load A4, B5, A5, 8" x 10" (20 x 25 cm), Letter, or Legal-sized photo paper or plain paper in the cassette 2.

You can also load envelopes in the cassette 2.

Loading Envelopes

Load small sizes of paper in the cassette 1.


Note

• We recommend Canon genuine photo paper for printing photos.

For details on the Canon genuine paper, see Media Types You Can Use .

• You can use general copy paper.

For the page size and paper weight you can use for this machine, see Media Types You Can Use .

1. Prepare paper.

Align the edges of paper. If paper is curled, flatten it.

Note

• Align the edges of paper neatly before loading. Loading paper without aligning the edges may cause paper jams.

• If paper is curled, hold the curled corners and gently bend them in the opposite direction until the paper becomes completely flat.

For details on how to flatten curled paper, see "Load the paper after correcting its curl." in Paper Is

Smudged/Printed Surface Is Scratched .

• When using Photo Paper Plus Semi-gloss SG-201, even if the sheet is curled, load one sheet at a time as it is. If you roll up this paper to flatten, this may cause cracks on the surface of the paper and reduce the print quality.

2. Load paper.


159


3. Load the paper stack WITH THE PRINT SIDE FACING DOWN, and place it in the center of the cassette 2.

Important

• Always load paper in the portrait orientation (C). Loading paper in the landscape orientation (D) can cause paper jams.

Note

• Align the paper stack with the edge of the cassette 2 as shown in the figure below.

If the paper stack is in contact with the protrusion (E), the paper may not be fed properly.

• If paper has print side (front or back), such as photo paper, load it with the whiter side (or glossy side) facing down.

160

4. Align the paper guide (A) in front with the paper stack.

For standard sizes, align the paper guide (A) with where it clicks into place.

5. Slide the paper guide (B) on the right to align the right and left guides with both sides of the paper stack.

Do not slide the paper guides too hard against the paper. The paper may not be fed properly.

Note

• Do not load sheets of paper higher than the load limit mark (F).

• Keep the paper stack height below the tabs (G) of the paper guides.

Note

• To load paper larger than A4 size in the cassette 2, press down the lock (H) on the cassette 2, then extend the cassette 2.

161

The cassette 2 sticks out of the machine when correctly set. Do not force the cassette 2 into the machine any further.

This can damage the machine or cassette 2.


Push the cassette 2 into the machine until it stops.


7. Select the size and type of the loaded paper in the cassette 2 at Page size and Type, then tap Register.



162




2. Extend the paper output support.

Note

• When printing, select the size and type of the loaded paper on the print settings screen of the operation panel or printer driver.

163

Loading Envelopes

You can load Envelope DL and Envelope Com 10.

The address is automatically rotated and printed according to the envelope's direction by specifying with the printer driver properly.

Important

• Printing of envelopes from the operation panel or from a digital camera is not supported.

• Do not use the following envelopes. They could jam in the machine or cause the machine to malfunction.

• Envelopes with an embossed or treated surface

• Envelopes with a double flap

• Envelopes whose gummed flaps are already moistened and adhesive

1. Prepare envelopes.

• Press down on all four corners and edges of the envelopes to flatten them.

• If the envelopes are curled, hold the opposite corners and gently twist them in the opposite direction.

• If the corner of the envelope flap is folded, flatten it.

Important

• The envelopes may jam in the machine if they are not flat or the edges are not aligned. Make sure that no curl or puff exceeds 0.1 inch (3 mm).

• Do not flatten the leading edge of envelopes. Otherwise, the printing position may shift out of place.

2. Load envelopes.


164


3. Load the envelopes WITH THE PRINT SIDE FACING DOWN, and place them in the center of the cassette 2.

The folded flap of the envelope will be faced up on the left side.

(C) Rear side

(D) Address side

Up to 10 envelopes can be loaded at once.

Note

• Align the envelope stack with the edge of the cassette 2 as shown in the figure below.

If the envelopes are in contact with the protrusion (E), the envelopes may not be fed properly.

165

4. Align the paper guide (A) in front with the envelopes.

5. Slide the paper guide (B) on the right to align the right and left guides with both sides of the envelopes.

Do not slide the paper guides too hard against the envelopes. The envelopes may not be fed properly.

Note

• Do not load envelopes higher than the load limit mark (F).

• Keep the envelope stack height below tabs (G) of the paper guides.


Push the cassette 2 into the machine until it stops.


7. Select the size and type of the loaded envelopes in the cassette 2 at Page size and Type, then tap Register.


166





Note

• When printing, select the size and type of the loaded envelopes on the print settings screen of the printer driver.

167

Media Types You Can Use

Choose paper suitable for printing, for the best print results. Canon provides you various types of paper to enhance the fun of printing, such as stickers as well as papers for photo or document. We recommend the use of Canon genuine paper for printing your important photos.

Media Types

Commercially available papers

• Plain Paper (including recycled paper)

• Envelopes *1

Canon genuine papers

The Model Number of Canon genuine paper is shown in brackets. Refer to the instruction manual supplied with the paper for detailed information on the printable side and notes on handling paper. For information on the page sizes available for each Canon genuine paper, access our website.

Note

• You may not be able to purchase some Canon genuine papers depending on the country or region of purchase. Paper is not sold in the US by Model Number. Purchase paper by name.

Paper for printing photos:

• Photo Paper Pro Platinum <PT-101>

• Glossy Photo Paper "Everyday Use" <GP-501/GP-601>

• Photo Paper Glossy <GP-601>

• Photo Paper Plus Glossy II <PP-201>

• Photo Paper Pro Luster <LU-101>

• Photo Paper Plus Semi-gloss <SG-201>

• Matte Photo Paper <MP-101>

Paper for printing business documents:

• High Resolution Paper <HR-101N> *1

Paper for creating your own prints:

• T-Shirt Transfers <TR-301> *1

• Photo Stickers <PS-101>

*1 Printing to this paper from the operation panel or from a digital camera is not supported.

Paper Load Limit

Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Media Type)

Note

• You can print onto a printable disc using the disc tray supplied with the machine.


• When printing photos saved on a PictBridge compliant device, you must specify the page size and media type.

Printing from a Digital Camera

168

• You can use non-Canon genuine art paper. For details, access our website.

You cannot print in the top and bottom 1.38 inch (35 mm) margins of the paper (in the printing direction).

Sizes for Art Paper

Before Printing on Art Paper

Page Sizes

You can use the following page sizes.

Note

• You can load the page sizes as follows.

• cassette 1: 4" x 6" (10 x 15 cm) and 5" x 7" (13 x 18 cm)

• cassette 2: A4, B5, A5, Letter, Legal, 8" x 10" (20 x 25 cm), Envelope DL, and Envelope Com 10

• Printing on the following page sizes from the operation panel or from a digital camera is not supported.

• Legal and Envelopes

Standard sizes:

• Letter

• Legal

• A5

• A4

• B5

• 4" x 6" (10 x 15 cm)

• 5" x 7" (13 x 18 cm)

• 8" x 10" (20 x 25 cm)

• Envelope DL

• Envelope Com 10

Non-standard sizes:

You can print on non-standard size paper within the following ranges.

• cassette 1

- Minimum size: 3.50 x 5.00 inches (89.0 x 127.0 mm)

- Maximum size: 7.87 x 7.28 inches* (200.0 x 184.9 mm*)

• cassette 2

- Minimum size: 3.54 x 7.29 inches* (90.0 x 185.0 mm*)

- Maximum size: 8.50 x 14.00 inches (215.9 x 355.6 mm)

* Paper may be fed from a different paper source depending on the operating system of your computer.

Paper Weight

You can use paper in the following weight range.

• 17 to 28 lb (64 to 105 g /m

2

) (plain paper except for Canon genuine paper)

169

* You can use non-Canon genuine specialty paper that is up to 53 lb (200 g /m

2

).

Do not use heavier or lighter paper (except for Canon genuine paper), as it could jam in the machine.

Notes on Storing Paper

• Take out only the necessary number of paper from the package, just before printing.

• To avoid curling, when you do not print, put unused paper back into the package and keep it on a level surface. And also, store it avoiding heat, humidity, and direct sunlight.

170

Paper Load Limit

Commercially Available Papers

Media Name

Plain Paper (including recycled paper) *1

Envelopes

N/A *2

N/A *2

Cassette 1 Cassette 2

Approx. 125 sheets

10 envelopes

Paper Output Tray

Approx. 50 sheets

*3

Canon Genuine Papers

Note

• We recommend that you remove the previously printed sheet from the paper output tray before continuously printing to avoid blurs and discoloration (except for High Resolution Paper <HR-101N>).

Paper for printing photos:

Media Name <Model No.>

Photo Paper Pro Platinum <PT-101> *4

Cassette 1

20 sheets: 4" x 6" (10 x 15 cm)

Glossy Photo Paper "Everyday Use" <GP-501/GP-601> *4 20 sheets: 4" x 6" (10 x 15 cm)

Photo Paper Glossy <GP-601> *4

Photo Paper Plus Glossy II <PP-201> *4

20 sheets: 4" x 6" (10 x 15 cm)

10 sheets: 5" x 7" (13 x 18 cm)

20 sheets: 4" x 6" (10 x 15 cm)

Photo Paper Pro Luster <LU-101> *4

Photo Paper Plus Semi-gloss <SG-201> *4

N/A *2

10 sheets: 5" x 7" (13 x 18 cm)

20 sheets: 4" x 6" (10 x 15 cm)

Matte Photo Paper <MP-101> 20 sheets: 4" x 6" (10 x 15 cm)

Paper for printing business documents:


High Resolution Paper <HR-101N> N/A *2

Cassette 1

Paper for creating your own prints:


T-Shirt Transfers <TR-301>

Photo Stickers <PS-101>

Cassette 2

65 sheets

N/A *2

1 sheet

Cassette 1

Cassette 2

10 sheets: A4, Letter, and 8" x 10" (20 x 25 cm)

10 sheets: A4 and Letter






Paper Output Tray

50 sheets

Cassette 2

1 sheet

N/A *5

171

*1 Proper feeding of paper may not be possible at the maximum capacity depending on the type of paper or environmental conditions (either very high or low temperature or humidity). In such cases, reduce the number of paper you load at a time to less than half.

*2 Feeding paper from the cassette 1 can damage the machine. Always load in the cassette 2.

*3 We recommend that you remove the previously printed envelope from the paper output tray before continuously printing to avoid blurs and discoloration.

*4 When loading paper in stacks, the print side may become marked as it is fed or paper may not feed properly. In this case, load one sheet at a time.

*5 Feeding paper from the cassette 2 can damage the machine. Always load in the cassette 1.

172

Media Types You Cannot Use

Do not use the following types of paper. Using such paper will cause not only unsatisfactory results, but also the machine to jam or malfunction.

• Folded, curled, or wrinkled paper

• Damp paper

• Paper that is too thin (weighing less than 17 lb (64 g /m

2

))

• Paper that is too thick (plain paper weighing more than 28 lb (105 g /m

2

), except for Canon genuine paper)

• Paper thinner than a postcard, including plain paper or notepad paper cut to a small size (when printing on paper smaller than A5)

• Picture postcards

• Postcards affixed with photos or stickers

• Envelopes with a double flap

• Envelopes with an embossed or treated surface

• Envelopes whose gummed flaps are already moistened and adhesive

• Any type of paper with holes

• Paper that is not rectangular

• Paper bound with staples or glue

• Paper with adhesives

• Paper decorated with glitter, etc.

173

Before Printing on Art Paper

When using art paper, dust is liable to be generated. It is therefore recommended that paper dust be removed on art paper just before printing.

You will need a soft hair brush (or similar brush used to clean office automation equipment).

The wider the brush, the more effective it will be.

OK - soft brush made from material such as polypropylene, polyethylene, horse hair or goat hair.

Important

• Be sure not to use brushes as shown below. The printing surface may be damaged.

Not OK - brush made from hard material, cloth or washcloth, sticky and abrasive materials.

Paper dust removal procedure:

1. Check that the brush is not wet and free from dust or dirt.

2. Brush the overall printing surface carefully in one direction.

Important

• Be sure to brush all the way across the paper; do not start brushing at the middle or stop halfway.

• Be careful not to touch the printing surface as much as possible.

3. To complete the removal of paper dust, brush the paper in the other direction from top to bottom.

174

175

Printing Area

Printing Area

Other Sizes than Letter, Legal, Envelopes

Letter, Legal

Sizes for Art Paper

Envelopes

Printable Discs

176

Printing Area

To ensure the best print quality, the machine allows a margin along each edge of media. The actual printable area will be the area inside these margins.

Recommended printing area : Canon recommends that you print within this area.

Printable area : The area where it is possible to print. However, printing in this area can affect the print quality or the paper feed precision.

Note

• With performing Automatic Duplex Printing and Duplex (Two-sided) Copying, the printable area will be

0.08 inch (2 mm) smaller at the top margin.

• When performing borderless copying or borderless printing from a printed photo, select Extended copy

amount in Print settings of Device settings to specify the amount of images that extends off the paper.

Print settings

• By selecting Borderless Printing option, you can make prints with no margins.

• When performing Borderless Printing, slight cropping may occur at the edges since the printed image is enlarged to fill the whole page.

• For Borderless Printing, use the following paper:

• Photo Paper Pro Platinum <PT-101>

• Glossy Photo Paper "Everyday Use" <GP-501/GP-601>

• Photo Paper Glossy <GP-601>

• Photo Paper Plus Glossy II <PP-201>

• Photo Paper Pro Luster <LU-101>

• Photo Paper Plus Semi-gloss <SG-201>

• Matte Photo Paper <MP-101>

Performing Borderless Printing on any other type of paper may substantially reduce printing quality and/or result in printouts with altered color hues.

Borderless Printing on plain paper may result in printouts with reduced quality. Use them only for test printing. Borderless Printing onto plain paper from the operation panel or from a digital camera is not supported.

• Borderless Printing is not available for legal, A5, or B5 sized paper, envelopes, or non-Canon genuine art paper.

• Depending on the type of paper, Borderless Printing may reduce the print quality at the top and bottom edges of the paper or cause these parts to become smudged.

177

Other Sizes than Letter, Legal, Envelopes

Size

A5

A4

B5

4" x 6" (10 x 15 cm)

5" x 7" (13 x 18 cm)

8" x 10" (20 x 25 cm)

Printable Area (width x height)

5.56 x 7.95 inches (141.2 x 202.0 mm)

8.00 x 11.38 inches (203.2 x 289.0 mm)

6.90 x 9.80 inches (175.2 x 249.0 mm)

3.73 x 5.69 inches (94.8 x 144.4 mm)

4.73 x 6.69 inches (120.2 x 169.8 mm)

7.73 x 9.69 inches (196.4 x 246.0 mm)

Recommended printing area

(A) 1.59 inches (40.4 mm)

(B) 1.47 inches (37.4 mm)

Printable area

(C) 0.12 inch (3.0 mm)

(D) 0.20 inch (5.0 mm)

(E) 0.13 inch (3.4 mm)

(F) 0.13 inch (3.4 mm)

178

Letter, Legal

Letter

Legal

Size Printable Area (width x height)

8.00 x 10.69 inches (203.2 x 271.4 mm)

8.00 x 13.69 inches (203.2 x 347.6 mm)


(A) 1.59 inches (40.4 mm)

(B) 1.47 inches (37.4 mm)

Printable area

(C) 0.12 inch (3.0 mm)

(D) 0.20 inch (5.0 mm)

(E) 0.25 inch (6.4 mm)

(F) 0.25 inch (6.3 mm)

179

Sizes for Art Paper

A limit is set to prevent printing along a 1.38 inch (35 mm) margin on the top and bottom edges when a paper size for art paper is selected in the printer driver. We recommend checking the printing area in the preview screen before printing.

A4

Size

A4 (art paper, 1.38 inch (35 mm) margin)

Recommended Printing Area (width x height)

8.00 x 8.94 inches (203.2 x 227.0 mm)


(A) 1.38 inches (35.0 mm)

(B) 1.38 inches (35.0 mm)

(C) 0.13 inch (3.4 mm)

(D) 0.13 inch (3.4 mm)

Letter

Size

Letter (art paper, 1.38 inch (35 mm) margin)

Recommended Printing Area (width x height)

8.00 x 8.24 inches (203.2 x 209.4 mm)


(A) 1.38 inches (35.0 mm)

(B) 1.38 inches (35.0 mm)

(C) 0.25 inch (6.4 mm)

180

(D) 0.25 inch (6.3 mm)

181

Envelopes

Envelope DL

Envelope Com 10

Size Recommended Printing Area (width x height)

3.88 x 7.07 inches (98.8 x 179.6 mm)

3.68 x 7.90 inches (93.5 x 200.9 mm)


(A) 0.12 inch (3.0 mm)

(B) 1.47 inches (37.4 mm)

(C) 0.22 inch (5.6 mm)

(D) 0.22 inch (5.6 mm)

182

Printable Discs

The printing area of the printable disc is from 0.67 inch (17 mm) of the internal diameter to 0.04 inch (1 mm) from the external diameter of the printing surface.


(A) 0.67 inch (17.0 mm)

(B) 0.04 inch (1.0 mm)

183


Cautions When Printing on a Printable Disc

Before Placing a Printable Disc


Removing a Printable Disc

How to Detach / Attach the Disc Tray

184

Cautions When Printing on a Printable Disc

• Be sure to use the disc tray supplied with this machine. It has a "J" on the upper side.

• Do not print on printable discs that are not compatible with inkjet printing. The ink will not dry and may cause problems with the disc itself or devices which the disc is loaded onto.

• Do not print on the printable discs' recording surface. Doing so will make data recorded on discs unreadable.

• Hold the printable discs by their edges. Do not touch either the label surface (printing surface) or recording surface.

• Remove any dirt from the disc tray before placing printable discs on the disc tray. Loading discs in a dirty disc tray may scratch the recording surface of the discs.

• After printing, allow the printing surface of the disc to dry naturally. Do not use hairdryers or expose the disc to direct sunlight to dry the ink. Do not touch the printing surface until the ink has dried.

• Do not attach the disc tray while the machine is in operation.

• Do not remove the disc tray while printing on printable discs. Doing so may damage the machine, the disc tray, or the disc.

• Do not get dirt or scratches on the reflectors of the disc tray. The machine may not be able to recognize loading of the printable disc, or printing may become misaligned. If the reflectors on the disc tray become dirty, wipe the reflector clean with a soft and dry cloth, taking care not to scratch the plate.

• The disc tray may become dirty if software other than My Image Garden is used.

• Always close the disc tray guide after printing on printable discs.

• To keep the print quality at an optimal level, it is recommended to stop printing discs once every ten discs when printing more than ten discs continuously.

To stop the printing operation, detach the disc tray from the machine, then close the disc tray guide.

After approximately three minutes have elapsed, open the disc tray guide, attach the disc tray to the machine, then resume printing.

185

Before Placing a Printable Disc

The following items are needed to print onto the printable disc:

• disc tray (supplied with the machine)

* Use the disc tray with "J" on the surface.

The disc tray is attached in the back of the cassette 1.


• 4.72 inches (12 cm) printable disc

Obtain a printable disc with a label surface compatible with inkjet printing.

Note

• A "printable disc" differs from regular disc (BD/DVD/CD, etc.) in that its label surface has been specially processed to be printed on by an inkjet printer.

186


To print onto a printable disc, place it on the disc tray supplied with the machine, then insert it into the machine.

This procedure also applies to printing from a computer.

Important

• Do not attach the disc tray until the message asking you to load the printable disc is displayed. Doing so can damage the machine.

1. Detach the disc tray from the cassette 1.


Note

• If a message is displayed on the screen after inserting the cassette into the machine, tap

Register.

2. Holding both sides of the paper output tray (A), gently open it.

3. When the message asking you to load the printable disc is displayed, open the disc tray guide (B) and push it down all the way to the bottom.

4. Place the printable disc with the printable surface facing up.

Important

• Make sure that there is no dirt on the disc tray before placing a printable disc on the disc tray.

• When placing a printable disc on the disc tray, do not touch the printing surface of the disc or the reflectors (C) on the disc tray.

187

5. Attach the disc tray to the machine.

Note

• The disc tray may be ejected after a specified period of time has elapsed. In this case, follow the on-screen instructions to attach the disc tray.

1. Place the disc tray on the disc tray guide.

2. Insert the disc tray straight until the arrow ( ) on the disc tray guide is almost aligned with the arrow ( ) on the disc tray.

Important

• Do not insert the disc tray beyond the arrow ( ) on the disc tray guide.

188

Removing a Printable Disc

1. Pull out the disc tray.

2. Close the disc tray guide.

Important

• If the disc tray guide is opened, you cannot print on paper as it will not feed properly. Make sure that the disc tray guide is closed.

3. Remove the printable disc from the disc tray.

Important

• Do not touch the printing surface when removing the disc from the disc tray.

Note

• Dry the printing surface sufficiently before removing the disc. If you see printing on the disc tray or the transparent parts on inner or outer diameter of the printable disc, wipe them off after the printing surface has dried.

189

4. Close the paper output tray.

5. Attach the disc tray onto the cassette 1.


Note


Register.

190

How to Detach / Attach the Disc Tray

Detaching the disc tray

Slide the disc tray to the side on the back of the cassette 1 and raise it to detach.

Important

• Be sure to remove all orange shipping tapes on the disc tray.

Attaching the disc tray

Align the holes of the disc tray with the hooks on the back of the cassette 1 and slide it to attach.

Important

• Be sure to align each hole of the disc tray with its corresponding hook on the back of the cassette 1.

If the disc tray is not attached properly, the disc tray may be damaged during insertion of the cassette

1 into the machine.

191

Loading Originals

Loading Originals on the Platen Glass

How to Load Originals for Each Function

Originals You Can Load

How to Detach / Attach the Document Cover

192

Loading Originals on the Platen Glass

1. Load an original on the platen glass.

1. Open the document cover.

2. Load the original WITH THE SIDE TO SCAN FACING DOWN on the platen glass.

Originals You Can Load

How to Load Originals for Each Function

Important

• Be sure to observe the following when loading the original on the platen glass.

• Do not place any objects weighing 4.4 lb (2.0 kg) or more on the platen glass.

• Do not put any pressure of 4.4 lb (2.0 kg) or more on the platen glass, such as pressing down the original.

Failure to observe the above may cause the scanner to malfunction or the platen glass to break.

2. Close the document cover gently.

Important

• After loading the original on the platen glass, be sure to close the document cover before starting to copy or scan.

193

How to Load Originals for Each Function

Load the original in the correct position according to the function to use. If you do not load the original correctly, it may not be scanned properly.

Loading the Original to Be Aligned with the alignment mark

• Load originals to copy

• In Scan,

◦ select Auto scan for Doc.type to scan text documents, magazines, or newspapers

◦ select Document or Photo for Doc.type and specify a standard size (A4, Letter, etc.) for Scan

size to scan originals

• With a software application on a computer,

◦ scan text documents, magazines, or newspapers

◦ select a standard size (A4, Letter, etc.) to scan originals

Place the original WITH THE SIDE TO SCAN FACING DOWN on the platen glass and align it with the alignment mark . Portions placed on the diagonally striped area cannot be scanned.

Important

• The machine cannot scan the striped area (A) (0.04 inch (1 mm) from the edges of the platen glass).

Loading Only One Original in the Center of the platen glass

• Scan only one disc in Copy label to disc label

• Scan only one printed photo in Photo copy

• In Scan,

◦ select Auto scan for Doc.type to scan one printed photo, postcard, business card, or disc

194

◦ select Photo for Doc.type and specify Auto scan for Scan size to scan one original

• Scan one printed photo, postcard, business card, or disc with a software application on a computer

Place the original WITH THE SIDE TO SCAN FACING DOWN, with 0.4 inch (1 cm) or more space between the edges (diagonally striped area) of the platen glass. Portions placed on the diagonally striped area cannot be scanned.

Loading Two or More Originals on the platen glass

• Scan two or more printed photos in Photo copy

• In Scan,

◦ select Auto scan for Doc.type to scan two or more printed photos, postcards, or business cards

◦ select Photo for Doc.type and specify Auto multi scan for Scan size to scan two or more originals

• Scan two or more printed photos, postcards, or business cards with a software application on a computer

Place the originals WITH THE SIDE TO SCAN FACING DOWN. Allow 0.4 inch (1 cm) or more space between the edges (diagonally striped area) of the platen glass and the originals, and between the originals. Portions placed on the diagonally striped area cannot be scanned.

You can place up to 12 items.

(A) More than 0.4 inch (1 cm)

Note

• The Skew Correction function automatically compensates for the originals placed at an angle of up to approximately 10 degrees. Slanted photos with a long edge of 7.1 inches (180 mm) or more cannot be corrected.

• Non-rectangular or irregular shaped photos (such as cut out photos) may not be scanned properly.

195

Originals You Can Load

Types of originals

Item Details

- Text document, magazine, or newspaper

- Printed photo, postcard, business card, or disc (BD/DVD/CD, etc.)

Size (width x height)

Max. 8.5 x 11.7 inches (216 x 297 mm)

Note

• When loading a thick original such as a book on the platen glass, you can load it by removing the document cover from the machine.

How to Detach / Attach the Document Cover

196

How to Detach / Attach the Document Cover

Detaching the document cover:

Hold up the document cover vertically and then tip it back.

Attaching the document cover:

Fit both hinges (A) of the document cover into the holder (B) and insert both hinges of the document cover vertically as illustrated below.

197


Before Inserting the Memory Card


Removing the Memory Card

198

Before Inserting the Memory Card

The following types of memory cards and image data are compatible with the machine.

Important

• If you took and saved photos on a type of memory card that does not guarantee the operation on your digital camera, the image data may be unreadable on the machine or damaged. For information on memory cards that your digital camera guarantees operation, refer to the instruction manual supplied with your digital camera.

• Format the memory card with a digital camera compliant with the Design rule for Camera File system

(Exif 2.2/2.21/2.3 compliant), TIFF (Exif 2.2/2.21/2.3 compliant). The memory card may not be compatible with the machine if it is formatted on a computer.

Memory Cards that Do Not Require a Card Adapter

• SD Secure Digital memory card, SDHC memory card

• Memory Stick Duo, Memory Stick PRO Duo

Memory Cards that Require a Card Adapter

Important

• Be sure to attach the special card adapters to the following memory cards before inserting to the card slot.

If one of the following memory cards is inserted without the card adapter, you may not be able to remove the memory card.

Cannot Remove a Memory Card

• miniSD Card, miniSDHC Card

Use the special "SD Card Adapter".

• microSD Card, microSDHC Card

Use the special "SD Card Adapter".

• Memory Stick Micro

Use the special Duo size adapter.

199

Printable Image Data

• This machine accepts images taken with a camera compliant with the Design rule for Camera File system (Exif 2.2/2.21/2.3 compliant), TIFF (Exif 2.2/2.21/2.3 compliant). Other image or movie types such as RAW images cannot be printed.

• The machine accepts images scanned and saved with the machine when Doc.type is set to Photo and Format is set to JPEG (file extension ".jpg").

Note

• This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.

200


Important

• When a memory card is inserted into the card slot, the Access lamp is lit. When the Access lamp is flashing, the machine is accessing the memory card. In this case, do not touch the area around the card slot.

Note

• When Read/write attribute is set to Writable from USB PC or Writable from LAN PC, you cannot print image data from the memory card using the operation panel of the machine. After using the card slot as the memory card drive of a computer, remove the memory card, select Device user settings in

Device settings, then set Read/write attribute to Not writable from PC.


• When you use a computer to edit or enhance photos saved on a memory card, be sure to print them from the computer. If you use the operation panel, the photos may not be printed properly.

1. Prepare your memory card.

Attach a special card adapter if your memory card requires one.

Before Inserting the Memory Card

2. Turn on the power, then, holding both sides of the paper output tray, gently open it.

3. Insert only one memory card into the card slot.

The location to insert a memory card varies depending on each type of memory card. Insert your memory card straightforward WITH THE LABELED SIDE FACING TO THE LEFT into the card slot, according to the insert location in the figure below.

When the memory card is inserted properly, the Access lamp (A) will light up.

Be sure to attach the card adapter for memory card with the mark (asterisk), and then insert it into the card slot as shown below.

Insert the following types of memory cards into the upper card slot:

• Memory Stick Duo, Memory Stick PRO Duo

• Memory Stick Micro (with the Duo size adapter)

201

Insert the following types of memory cards into the lower card slot:

• SD Secure Digital memory card, SDHC memory card

• miniSD Card , miniSDHC Card

• microSD Card , microSDHC Card

Important

• Part of the memory card will protrude from the card slot, but do not force it into the slot any further.

This can damage the machine or the memory card.

• Make sure that the memory card is correctly oriented before inserting it into the card slot. If you force the memory card into the card slot in the wrong orientation, the memory card or the machine can be damaged.

• Do not insert more than one memory card at a time.


202

Removing the Memory Card

Important

• If you used the card slot as the memory card drive of a computer, you must perform the "safe removal" operation on your computer before physically removing the memory card from the machine.



2. Make sure that the Access lamp is lit, and remove the memory card.

Hold the part of the memory card that is protruding and remove it straightforward from the machine.

Important

• Do not remove the memory card while the Access lamp is flashing. The Access lamp flashes while the machine is reading or writing data from/to the memory card. If you remove the memory card or turn off the power while the Access lamp is flashing, the data saved on the memory card can be damaged.


203



Checking the Ink Status

204


When remaining ink cautions or errors occur, the message will appear on the touch screen to inform you of the error. Take appropriate action according to the message.

A Message Is Displayed

Note

• If print results become faint or white streaks appear despite sufficient ink levels, see Maintenance

Procedure .

Replacing Procedure

When you need to replace an ink tank, follow the procedure below.

Important

• If you remove an ink tank, replace it immediately. Do not leave the machine with the ink tank removed.

• Use a new ink tank for replacement. Installing a used ink tank may cause the nozzles to clog.

Furthermore, with such an ink tank, the machine will not be able to inform you when to replace the ink tank properly.

• Once an ink tank has been installed, do not remove it from the machine and leave it out in the open.

This will cause the ink tank to dry out, and the machine may not operate properly when it is reinstalled. To maintain optimal printing quality, use an ink tank within six months of first use.

Note

• Color ink may be consumed even when printing a black-and-white document or when black-andwhite printing is specified.

Every ink is also consumed in the standard cleaning and deep cleaning of the print head, which may be necessary to maintain the performance of the machine. When an ink tank is out of ink, replace it immediately with a new one.

Useful Information about Ink

1. Make sure that the power is turned on, then, holding both sides of the paper output tray, gently open it.

2. Lift the operation panel and open until it stops.

The print head holder moves to the replacement position.

205

Caution

• Do not hold the print head holder to stop or move it forcibly. Do not touch the print head holder until it stops completely.

Important

• When opening or closing the operation panel, do not touch the buttons and touch screen on the operation panel. Doing so may result in an unexpected operation.

• Do not touch the metallic parts or other parts inside the machine.

• If the operation panel is left open for more than 10 minutes, the print head holder moves to the right. In this case, close and reopen the operation panel.

3. Remove the ink tank with the lamp flashing fast.

Push the tab (A) and lift the ink tank to remove.

Important

• Do not touch other parts besides the ink tanks.

• Handle the ink tank carefully to avoid staining of clothing or the surrounding area.

• Discard the empty ink tank according to the local laws and regulations regarding disposal of consumables.

Note

• Do not remove two or more ink tanks at the same time. Be sure to replace ink tanks one by one when replacing two or more ink tanks.

• For details on ink lamp flashing speed, see Checking the Ink Status with the Ink Lamps .

4. Prepare a new ink tank.

1. Take a new ink tank out of its package, remove the orange tape ( ) completely, then remove the protective film ( ) completely.

206

Important

• Handle an ink tank carefully. Do not drop or apply excessive pressure to it.

• If the orange tape remains on the Y-shape air hole (B), ink may splash or the machine may not print properly.

2. Hold the ink tank with the orange protective cap (C) pointing up while being careful not to block the Y-shape air hole (B).

3. Lift up the tab on the orange protective cap (C) to remove it off GENTLY.

207

Important

• Do not push the sides of the ink tank. If you push the sides of the ink tank with the Y-shape air hole (B) blocked, ink may splash.

• Do not touch the inside of the orange protective cap (C) or the open ink port (D). The ink may stain your hands if you touch them.

• Do not reattach the protective cap (C) once you have removed it. Discard it according to the local laws and regulations regarding disposal of consumables.

5. Install the new ink tank.

1. Insert the front end of the ink tank into the print head at a slant.

Make sure that the position of the ink tank matches the label.

2. Press on the top of the ink tank until the ink tank snaps firmly into place.

Make sure that the ink lamp lights up.

Important

• You cannot print if the ink tank is installed in the wrong position. Be sure to install the ink tank in the correct position according to the label on the print head holder.

• You cannot print unless all the ink tanks are installed. Be sure to install all the ink tanks.

208

6. Close the operation panel gently.

Caution

• When closing the operation panel, be careful not to get your fingers caught.

Important

• When opening or closing the operation panel, do not touch the buttons and touch screen on the operation panel. Doing so may result in an unexpected operation.

Note

• If the error message appears after the operation panel is closed, take appropriate action.


• When you start printing after replacing the ink tank, the machine starts cleaning the print head automatically. Do not perform any other operations until the machine completes the cleaning of the print head.

• If the print head is out of alignment, as indicated by misaligned printed ruled lines or similar symptoms, align the print head .

• The machine may make noise during operation.

209

Checking the Ink Status

Checking the Ink Status with the Touch Screen on the Machine

Checking the Ink Status with the Ink Lamps

You can also check the ink status on the computer screen.

Checking the Ink Status from Your Computer

210

Checking the Ink Status with the Touch Screen on the Machine

1. Make sure that the power is turned on, and display the HOME screen.

If the HOME screen is not displayed, touch the HOME button to display it.

2. Flick the HOME screen, then tap


The setup menu screen will appear.

Setup.

3. Tap Estimated ink levels.

A symbol appears in the area (A) if there is any information about the remaining ink level.

Example:

Ink tank is running low. Prepare a new ink tank.

Note

• The above screen shows estimated ink levels.

• To display and print the model number of the ink tank, tap Ink number.

• You can also check the ink status on a screen of the touch screen displayed while printing.

• You can also check the ink status on the computer screen.


211

Checking the Ink Status with the Ink Lamps

1. Make sure that the power is turned on, then, holding both sides of the paper output tray, gently open it.

2. Lift the operation panel and open until it stops.

Replacing Procedure

3. Check the ink lamp.

Close the operation panel after checking the ink lamp status.

Replacing Procedure

• The ink lamp is on.

The ink tank is correctly installed.

• The ink lamp is flashing.

Flashing slowly (at around 3-second intervals)

...... Repeats

Ink tank is running low. Prepare a new ink tank.

Flashing fast (at around 1-second intervals)

...... Repeats

- The ink tank is installed in the wrong position.

Or

- The ink has run out.

Make sure that the ink tank is installed in the correct position as indicated by the label on the print head holder. If the position is correct but the lamp flashes, there has been an error and the machine cannot print. Check the error message displayed on the touch screen.


• The ink lamp is off.

The ink tank is not installed properly or the function for detecting the remaining ink level is disabled. If the ink tank is not firmly in place, make sure that the orange protective cap has been removed from the bottom of the ink tank, then press on the top of the ink tank until the ink tank clicks into place.

212

If the ink lamp is still off after reinstalling the ink tank, there has been an error and the machine cannot print. Check the error message displayed on the touch screen.


Note

• You can also check the ink status on the computer screen.


213

Maintenance

When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect

Performing Maintenance from a Computer

Cleaning the Machine

214

When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect

Maintenance Procedure

Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern

Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern

Cleaning the Print Head

Cleaning the Print Head Deeply

Aligning the Print Head

Aligning the Print Head Manually

215

Maintenance Procedure

If print results are blurred, colors are not printed correctly, or print results are unsatisfactory (e.g. misaligned printed ruled lines), perform the maintenance procedure below.

Important

• Do not rinse or wipe the print head and ink tank. This can cause trouble with the print head and ink tank.

Note

• Make sure that the orange protective tape does not remain on the ink tank.

• Open the operation panel and make sure that the lamp on the ink tank is lit. If the lamp is flashing or off, take appropriate action.


• Increasing the print quality in the printer driver settings may improve the print result.

Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data

When the Print Results Are Blurred or Uneven:

Step1

Print the nozzle check pattern.

From the machine

Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern

From the computer

Use Your Computer to Print a Nozzle Check Pattern

Step2

Examine the nozzle check pattern

.

If there are missing lines or horizontal white streaks in the pattern:

Step3

Clean the print head.

From the machine

Cleaning the Print Head

From the computer

216

Cleaning the Print Heads from Your Computer

After cleaning the print head, print and examine the nozzle check pattern: Step1

If the problem is not resolved after performing from step 1 to step 3 twice:

Step4

Clean the print head deeply.

From the machine

Cleaning the Print Head Deeply

From the computer


Note

• When you have performed the procedure until step 4 and the problem has not been resolved, turn off the power and clean the print head deeply again after 24 hours.

If the problem is still not resolved, the print head may be damaged. Contact the service center.

When the Print Results Are Not Even such as the Ruled Lines Are

Misaligned:

Step

Align the print head.

From the machine

Aligning the Print Head

From the computer

Aligning the Print Head Position from Your Computer

217

Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern

Print the nozzle check pattern to determine whether the ink ejects properly from the print head nozzle.

Note

• If the remaining ink level is low, the nozzle check pattern will not be printed correctly. Replace the ink tank whose ink is low.

You need to prepare: a sheet of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper

1. Make sure that the power is turned on.

2. Load a sheet of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper in the cassette 2.

After inserting the cassette into the machine, the paper information registration screen is displayed on the touch screen. Select A4 or Letter for Page size and Plain paper for Type, then tap Register.




The output tray extension will open automatically when the paper output tray is opened.


Important

• If the disc tray guide is open, close it.

4. Print the nozzle check pattern.




Setup.

2. Tap Maintenance.

The Maintenance screen will appear.

218

3. Tap Print nozzle check pattern.

The confirmation screen will appear.

4. Tap Yes.

The nozzle check pattern will be printed and two pattern confirmation screens will appear on the touch screen.

5.

Examine the nozzle check pattern .

219

Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern

Examine the nozzle check pattern, and clean the print head if necessary.

1. Check if there are missing lines in the pattern (C) or horizontal white streaks in the pattern

(D).

(A) No missing lines/No horizontal white streaks

(B) Lines are missing/Horizontal white streaks are present

(E) Number of sheets printed so far

2. Select the pattern that is closer to the printed nozzle check pattern on the confirmation screen.

220

For (A) (no missing lines or no horizontal white streaks) in both the pattern (C) and pattern (D):

1. The cleaning is not required. Tap All A.

2. Confirm the message, then tap OK.

The screen will return to the Maintenance screen.

For (B) (lines are missing or horizontal white streaks are present) in the pattern (C) or pattern (D), or in both patterns:

1. The cleaning is required. Tap Also B.

The cleaning confirmation screen will appear.

2. Tap Yes.

The machine starts cleaning the print head.

Cleaning the Print Head

Note

• The total number of sheets printed so far is shown in increments of 50 sheets on the printout of the nozzle check pattern.

221

Cleaning the Print Head

Clean the print head if lines are missing or if horizontal white streaks are present in the printed nozzle check pattern. Cleaning unclogs the nozzles and restores the print head condition. Cleaning the print head consumes ink, so clean the print head only when necessary.










Important


4. Clean the print head.




Setup.



3. Tap Cleaning.

222


4. Tap Yes.

The machine starts cleaning the print head.

Do not perform any other operations until the machine completes the cleaning of the print head. This takes about 2 to 3 minutes.

The pattern print confirmation screen will appear.

5. Tap Yes.

The nozzle check pattern will be printed.

5.


Note

• If the problem is not resolved after cleaning the print head twice, clean the print head deeply .

223

Cleaning the Print Head Deeply

If print quality does not improve by the standard cleaning of the print head, clean the print head deeply.

Cleaning the print head deeply consumes more ink than the standard cleaning of the print head, so clean the print head deeply only when necessary.










Important


4. Clean the print head deeply.




Setup.



3. Tap Deep cleaning.

224


4. Tap Yes.

The machine starts cleaning the print head deeply.

Do not perform any other operations until the machine completes the deep cleaning of the print head. This takes about 2 to 3 minutes.

The pattern print confirmation screen will appear.

5. Tap Yes.

The nozzle check pattern will be printed.

6. When the completion message appears, tap OK.

5.


If a particular color is not printed properly, replace the ink tank of that color.

If the problem is not resolved, turn off the power and clean the print head deeply again after 24 hours.

If the problem is still not resolved, the print head may be damaged. Contact the service center.

225

Aligning the Print Head

If printed ruled lines are misaligned or print results are otherwise unsatisfactory, adjust the print head position.

Note

• If the remaining ink level is low, the print head alignment sheet will not be printed correctly.

Replace the ink tank whose ink is low.

You need to prepare: a sheet of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper (including recycled paper)*

* Be sure to use paper that is white and clean on both sides.









Important


4. Adjust the print head position automatically.




Setup.

226



3. Tap Auto head alignment.


4. Tap Yes.

The print head alignment sheet will be printed and the print head position will be adjusted automatically.

This takes about 3 to 4 minutes.

Important

• Do not open the operation panel while printing is in progress.

Note

• If the automatic adjustment of the print head position has failed, the error message appears on the touch screen.



Note

• If the print results are still not satisfactory after adjusting the print head position as described above, align the print head manually .

You can also align the print head manually from a computer.

Aligning the Print Head Position Manually from Your Computer

227

Aligning the Print Head Manually

If printed ruled lines are misaligned or print results are still not satisfactory after adjusting the print head position automatically, adjust the print head position manually.

Note

• For details on adjusting the print head position automatically, see Aligning the Print Head .

You need to prepare: three sheets of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper


2. Load three sheets of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper in the cassette 2.







Important


4. Print the print head alignment pattern.




Setup.



228

3. Tap Manual head alignment.


Note

• To print and check the current head position adjustment values, select Print the head alignment

value.

4. Tap Yes.

The print head alignment pattern is printed.

Important


5. When the message "Did the patterns print correctly?" appears, confirm that the pattern is printed correctly, tap Yes.

6. Confirm the message, then tap Next.

The input screen for the head position adjustment values will appear.

5. Look at the first pattern and adjust the print head position.

1. Tap A to check the printed patterns, and tap the number of the pattern in column A that has the least noticeable vertical streaks.

229

Note

• If it is difficult to pick the best pattern, pick the setting that produces the least noticeable vertical streaks.

(A) Unnoticeable vertical streaks

(B) Noticeable vertical streaks

2. Repeat the same procedure until you finish inputting the pattern number for columns B to H, then tap OK.

For columns G and H, pick the setting that produces the least noticeable horizontal streaks at the position indicated by an arrow.

Note

• If it is difficult to pick the best pattern, pick the setting that produces the least noticeable horizontal streaks.

(C) Unnoticeable horizontal streaks

(D) Noticeable horizontal streaks


The second pattern is printed.

230

Important


6. Look at the second pattern and adjust the print head position.

1. Tap I to check the printed patterns, and tap the number of the pattern in column I that has the least noticeable vertical streaks.

Note


(E) Unnoticeable vertical streaks

(F) Noticeable vertical streaks

2. Repeat the same procedure until you finish inputting the pattern number for columns J to P, then tap OK.


The third pattern is printed.

Important


7. Look at the third pattern and adjust the print head position.

231

1. Tap a to check the printed patterns, and tap the number of the pattern in column a that has the least noticeable horizontal stripes.

Note

• If it is difficult to pick the best pattern, pick the setting that produces the least noticeable horizontal stripes.

(G) Unnoticeable horizontal stripes

(H) Noticeable horizontal stripes

2. Repeat the same procedure until you finish inputting the pattern number for columns b to h, then tap OK.

The manual adjustment of the print head position is complete.


232

Performing Maintenance from a Computer

Cleaning the Print Heads from Your Computer

Aligning the Print Head Position from Your Computer

Use Your Computer to Print a Nozzle Check Pattern

233

Cleaning the Print Heads from Your Computer

The print head cleaning function allows you to clear up clogged print head nozzle. Perform print head cleaning if printing is faint or a specific color fails to print, even though there is enough ink.

The procedure for cleaning the print head is as follows:

Cleaning

1. Open the printer driver setup window

2. Click Cleaning on the Maintenance tab

When the Print Head Cleaning dialog box opens, select the ink group for which cleaning is to be performed.

Click Initial Check Items to display the items you need to check before performing cleaning.

3. Execute cleaning

Make sure that the printer is on and then click Execute.

Print head cleaning starts.

Important

• Do not close the paper output tray until the cleaning is complete.

4. Complete cleaning

The Nozzle Check dialog box opens after the confirmation message.

5. Check the results

To check whether the print quality has improved, click Print Check Pattern. To cancel the check process, click Cancel.

If cleaning the head once does not resolve the print head problem, clean it once more.

Important

• Cleaning consumes a small amount of ink.

Cleaning the print head frequently will rapidly deplete your printer's ink supply. Consequently, perform cleaning only when necessary.

Deep Cleaning

Deep Cleaning is more thorough than cleaning. Perform deep cleaning when two Cleaning attempts do not resolve the print head problem.


234

2. Click Deep Cleaning on the Maintenance tab

When the Deep Cleaning dialog box opens, select the ink group for which deep cleaning is to be performed.

Click Initial Check Items to display the items you need to check before performing deep cleaning.

3. Execute deep cleaning

Make sure that the printer is on and then click Execute.

Click OK when the confirmation message appears.

Print head deep cleaning starts.

Important

• Do not close the paper output tray until the deep cleaning is complete.

4. Complete deep cleaning

The Nozzle Check dialog box opens after the confirmation message.

5. Check the results

To check whether the print quality has improved, click Print Check Pattern. To cancel the check process, click Cancel.

Important

• Deep Cleaning consumes a larger amount of ink than Cleaning.

Cleaning the print head frequently will rapidly deplete your printer's ink supply. Consequently, perform cleaning only when necessary.

Note

• If there is no sign of improvement after Deep Cleaning, turn off the printer, wait 24 hours, and then perform Deep Cleaning again. If there is still no sign of improvement, the ink may have run out or the print head may be worn. For details on the remedial action to be taken, see " Ink Is Not Ejected ."

Related Topic


235

Aligning the Print Head Position from Your Computer

Print head alignment corrects the installation positions of the print head and improves deviated colors and lines.

This printer supports two head alignment methods: automatic head alignment and manual head alignment.

Normally, the printer is set for automatic head alignment.

If the printing results of automatic print head alignment are not satisfactory, perform manual head alignment .

The procedure for performing automatic print head alignment is as follows:

Note


• The pattern is printed only in black and blue.

Print Head Alignment


2. Click Print Head Alignment on the Maintenance tab

The Start Print Head Alignment dialog box opens.

3. Load paper in the printer

Load one sheet of A4 size or Letter size plain paper into the cassette 2.

Note

• The number of sheets to be used differs when you select the manual head alignment.

4. Execute head alignment

Make sure that the printer is on and click Align Print Head.

Follow the instruction in the message.

Important


Note

• Wait until printing ends before performing other operations. Printing takes about 3 to 4 minutes to complete.

Note

• To print and check the current setting, open the Start Print Head Alignment dialog box, and click Print

Alignment Value.

236

Aligning the Print Head Position Manually from Your Computer


This printer supports two head alignment methods: automatic head alignment and manual head alignment.

Normally, the printer is set for automatic head alignment.

If the printing results of automatic print head alignment are not satisfactory, perform manual head alignment.

The procedure for performing manual print head alignment is as follows:

Note


• The pattern is printed only in black and blue.



2. Click Custom Settings on the Maintenance tab

The Custom Settings dialog box opens.

Note

• If the printer is off or if communication between the printer and the computer is disabled, an error message may appear because the computer cannot collect the printer status.

If this happens, click OK to display the most recent settings specified on your computer.

3. Switch head alignment to manual

Check the Align heads manually check box.

4. Apply the settings

Click OK and when the confirmation message appears, click OK.

5. Click Print Head Alignment on the Maintenance tab

The Start Print Head Alignment dialog box opens.


Load three sheets of A4 size or Letter size plain paper into the cassette 2.

7. Execute head alignment

Make sure that the printer is on and click Align Print Head.

Follow the instruction in the message.

Important


237

8. Check the printed pattern

Enter the numbers of the patterns with the least noticeable streaks in the associated boxes.

Even if the patterns with the least noticeable streaks are clicked in the preview window, their numbers are automatically entered in the associated boxes.

When you have entered all the necessary values, click OK.

Note


(A) Least noticeable vertical streaks

(B) Most noticeable vertical streaks

• If it is difficult to pick the best pattern, pick the setting that produces the least noticeable horizontal streaks.

(A) Least noticeable horizontal streaks

(B) Most noticeable horizontal streaks

9. Confirm the displayed message and click OK

The second pattern is printed.

Important



238

Enter the numbers of the patterns with the least noticeable streaks in the associated boxes.

Even if the patterns with the least noticeable streaks are clicked in the preview window, their numbers are automatically entered in the associated boxes.


Note


(A) Least noticeable vertical streaks

(B) Most noticeable vertical streaks

11. Confirm the displayed message and click OK

The third pattern is printed.

Important



Enter the numbers of the patterns with the least noticeable stripes in the associated boxes.

Even if the patterns with the least noticeable stripes are clicked in the preview window, their numbers are automatically entered in the associated boxes.

239


Note

• If it is difficult to pick the best pattern, pick the setting that produces the least noticeable horizontal stripes.

(A) Least noticeable horizontal stripes

(B) Most noticeable horizontal stripes

Note

• To print and check the current setting, open the Start Print Head Alignment dialog box, and click

Print Alignment Value.

240

Use Your Computer to Print a Nozzle Check Pattern

The nozzle check function allows you to check whether the print head is working properly by printing a nozzle check pattern. Print the pattern if printing becomes faint, or if a specific color fails to print.

The procedure for printing a nozzle check pattern is as follows:

Nozzle Check


2. Click Nozzle Check on the Maintenance tab

The Nozzle Check dialog box opens.

Click Initial Check Items to display the items that you need to check before printing the nozzle check pattern.


Load one sheet of A4 size or Letter size plain paper into the cassette 2..

4. Print a nozzle check pattern

Make sure that the printer is on and click Print Check Pattern.

Printing of the nozzle check pattern begins.


The Pattern Check dialog box opens.

5. Check the print result

Check the print result. When the print result is normal, click Exit.

If the print result is smudged or if there are any unprinted sections, click Cleaning to clean the print head.

Related Topic


241

Cleaning the Machine

Cleaning the Exterior of the Machine

Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document Cover

Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller

Cleaning the Inside of the Machine (Bottom Plate Cleaning)

Cleaning the Pad in the Cassette

242

Cleaning the Exterior of the Machine

Be sure to use a soft and dry cloth such as eyeglasses cleaning cloth and wipe off dirt on the surface gently.

Smooth out wrinkles on the cloth if necessary before cleaning.

Important

• Be sure to turn off the power and unplug the power cord before cleaning the machine.

• Do not use tissue paper, paper towels, rough-textured cloth, or similar materials for cleaning so as not to scratch the surface. Paper tissue powder or fine threads may remain inside the machine and cause problems such as print head blockage and poor printing results.

• Never use volatile liquids such as thinners, benzene, acetone, or any other chemical cleaner to clean the machine, as this may cause a malfunction or damage the surface of the machine.

• Use a soft cloth soaked in water and wrung well to wipe off stains on the operation panel. Do not turn on the power until the surface of the operation panel has completely dried.

243

Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document Cover

Important


• Do not use tissue paper, paper towels, rough-textured cloth, or similar materials for cleaning so as not to scratch the surface. Paper tissue powder or fine threads may remain inside the machine and cause problems such as print head blockage and poor printing results.

• Never use volatile liquids such as thinners, benzene, acetone, or any other chemical cleaner to clean the machine, as this may cause a malfunction or damage the surface of the machine.

With a soft, clean, lint-free and dry cloth, wipe the platen glass (A) and the inner side of the document cover

(white sheet) (B) gently. Make sure not to leave any residue, especially on the glass surface.

Important

• The inner side of the document cover (white sheet) (B) is easily damaged, so wipe it gently.

244

Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller

If the paper feed roller is dirty or paper powder is attached to it, paper may not be fed properly.

In this case, clean the paper feed roller. Cleaning will wear out the paper feed roller, so perform this only when necessary.

You need to prepare

For the cassette 1: A single sheet of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper (to be cut for use)

For the cassette 2: Three sheets of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper


2. Select Roller cleaning.




Setup.



3. Tap Roller cleaning.


4. Tap Yes.

5. Tap the paper source to clean (Cassette 1 or Cassette 2).

3. Clean the paper feed roller without paper.

1. Follow the message to remove any paper from the paper source you selected in (5) of step 2.

2. Tap OK.

The paper feed roller will rotate as it is cleaned.

245

4. Clean the paper feed roller with paper.

1. Make sure that the paper feed roller has stopped rotating, then follow the message to load plain paper as follows in the paper source you selected in (5) of step 2.

Loading paper in the cassette 1:

Cut a single sheet of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper into four pieces.

Load them in the cassette 1 with the top and bottom edges (A) towards the back side of the cassette 1.

Loading paper in the cassette 2:

Load three or more sheets of A4 or Letter-sized paper in the cassette 2.




Important


4. Tap OK.

The machine starts cleaning. The cleaning will be complete when the paper is ejected.


If the problem is not resolved after cleaning the paper feed roller, contact the service center.

246

Cleaning the Inside of the Machine (Bottom Plate Cleaning)

Remove stains from the inside of the machine. If the inside of the machine becomes dirty, printed paper may get dirty, so we recommend performing cleaning regularly.

You need to prepare: a sheet of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper*

* Be sure to use a new piece of paper.


2. Clean the inside of the machine.




Setup.



3. Tap Bottom plate cleaning.


4. Tap Yes.

5. Follow the message to remove any paper from the cassette 2, then tap OK.

6. Fold a single sheet of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper in half widthwise, then unfold the paper.

7. Fold one side of the opened paper in another half, aligning the edge with the center crease, unfold the paper, then tap OK.

247

8. Load only this sheet of paper in the cassette 2 with the ridges of the creases facing up and the edge of the half with no crease facing to the far side.




Important


11. Tap OK.

The paper cleans the inside of the machine as it feeds through the machine.

Check the folded parts of the ejected paper. If they are smudged with ink, perform Bottom Plate Cleaning again.


Note

• When performing Bottom Plate Cleaning again, be sure to use a new piece of paper.

If the problem is not resolved after performing cleaning again, the protrusions inside the machine may be stained. Wipe off any ink from the protrusions using a cotton swab or the like.

Important


248

Cleaning the Pad in the Cassette

If the pad in a cassette is smeared with paper powder or dirt, two or more sheets of paper may be ejected.

Follow the procedure below to clean the pad in a cassette.

You need to prepare: cotton swab

1. Pull out the cassette 1 or cassette 2 from the machine, then remove all the paper.

2. Clean the pad (A) sideways with a moistened cotton swab.

Important

• After cleaning the smeared pad, dry it completely.

For the cassette 1:

For the cassette 2:

3. Reload the paper in the cassette, then insert it into the machine.

Note


Register.

If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center.

249

Changing the Machine Settings

Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer

Changing the Machine Settings Using the Operation Panel

Setting Up the Card Slot as the Memory Card Drive of the Computer

250

Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer

Changing the Print Options

Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile

Managing the Printer Power

Reducing the Printer Noise

Changing the Printer Operation Mode

251

Changing the Print Options

You can change the detailed printer driver settings for print data that is sent from an application software.

Specify this option if you encounter print failures such as part of an image data being cut off.

The procedure for changing the print options is as follows:


2. Click Print Options... on the Page Setup tab

The Print Options dialog box opens.

Note

• When you use the XPS printer driver, the functions available to you are different.

3. Change the individual settings

If necessary, change the setting of each item, and then click OK.

The Page Setup tab is displayed again.

252

Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile

You can register the frequently used printing profile to Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup tab.

Unnecessary printing profiles can be deleted at any time.

The procedure for registering a printing profile is as follows:

Registering a Printing Profile


2. Set the necessary items

From Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup tab, select the printing profile to be used and if necessary, change the settings after Additional Features.

You can also register necessary items on the Main and Page Setup tabs.

3. Click Save...

The Save Commonly Used Settings dialog box opens.

4. Save the settings

Enter a name in the Name field. If necessary, click Options..., set the items, and then click OK.

In the Save Commonly Used Settings dialog box, click OK to save the print settings and return to the

Quick Setup tab.

The name and icon are displayed in Commonly Used Settings.

253

Important

• To save the page size, orientation, and number of copies that was set in each sheet, click Options..., and check each item.

Note

• When you re-install the printer driver or upgrade the printer driver version, the print settings that are already registered will be deleted from Commonly Used Settings.

Registered print settings cannot be saved and preserved. If a profile is deleted, register the print settings again.

Deleting Unnecessary Printing Profile

1. Select the printing profile to be deleted

Select the printing profile you want to delete from the Commonly Used Settings list on the Quick

Setup tab.

2. Delete the printing profile

Click Delete. When the confirmation message appears, click OK.

The selected printing profile is deleted from the Commonly Used Settings list.

Note

• Printing profiles that are registered in the initial settings cannot be deleted.

254

Managing the Printer Power

This function allows you to manage the printer power from the printer driver.

The procedure for managing the printer power is as follows:

Power Off

The Power Off function turns off the printer. When you use this function, you will not be able to turn the printer on from the printer driver.


2. Execute power off

Click Power Off on the Maintenance tab. When the confirmation message appears, click OK.

The printer power switches off, and the Maintenance tab is displayed again.

Auto Power

Auto Power allows you to set Auto Power On and Auto Power Off.

The Auto Power On function automatically turns on the printer when data is received.

The Auto Power Off function automatically turns off the printer when there are no operations from the printer driver or the printer for a specified period of time.


2. Make sure that the printer is on and then click Auto Power on the Maintenance tab

The Auto Power Settings dialog box opens.

Note



3. If necessary, complete the following settings:

Auto Power On

Specifying Enable from the list will turn the printer on upon receipt of print data.

Auto Power Off

Specify the time from the list. When this time lapses without any operations from the printer driver or the printer, the printer is turned off automatically.


255

Click OK. When the confirmation message appears, click OK.

The Maintenance tab is displayed again.

The setting is enabled after this. When you want to disable this function, select Disable from the list according to the same procedure.

Note

• When the printer is turned off, the Canon IJ Status Monitor message varies depending on the Auto

Power On setting.

When the setting is Enable, "Printer is standing by" is displayed. When the setting is Disable,

"Printer is offline" is displayed.

Important

• If you connect this printer to a network and use it, you can set Auto Power Off but the power will not be turned off automatically.

256

Reducing the Printer Noise

The silent function allows you to reduce the operating noise of this printer. Select when you wish to reduce the operating noise of the printer at night, etc.

Using this function may lower the print speed.

The procedure for using the quiet mode is as follows:

Quiet Settings


2. Click Quiet Settings on the Maintenance tab

The Quiet Settings dialog box opens.

Note


3. Set the quiet mode

If necessary, specify one of the following items:

Do not use quiet mode

Select this option when you wish to use the printer with volume of normal operating noise.

Always use quiet mode

Select this option when you wish to reduce the operating noise of the printer.

Use quiet mode during specified hours

Select this option when you wish to reduce the operating noise of the printer during a specified period of time.

Set the Start time and the End time of the quiet mode you wish to be activated. If both are set to the same time, the quiet mode will not function.

Important

• You can set the quiet mode from the operation panel of the printer, the printer driver, or

ScanGear (scanner driver).

No matter how you use to set the quiet mode, the mode is applied when you perform operations from the operation panel of the printer or printing and scanning from the computer.

• If you specify a time for Use quiet mode during specified hours, quiet mode is not applied to operations (copy, direct print, etc.) performed directly from the printer.


Make sure that the printer is on and click OK.


The settings are enabled hereafter.

257

Note

• The effects of the quiet mode may be less depending on the print quality settings.

258

Changing the Printer Operation Mode

If necessary, switch between various modes of printer operation.

The procedure for configuring Custom Settings is as follows:

Custom Settings


2. Make sure that the printer is on, and then click Custom Settings on the Maintenance tab

The Custom Settings dialog box opens.

Note



3. If necessary, complete the following settings:

Detects a printable disc in the disc tray

Detects whether a printable disc is loaded on the disc tray during disc label printing and displays a message if a disc is not loaded. Check this check box to print with detecting whether a printable disc is loaded.

Uncheck this check box to print without detecting whether a printable disc is loaded.

Important

• If you leave this check box unchecked, the printer may print to the disc tray even if a printable disc is not loaded on the disc tray. Therefore, you should check this check box under normal circumstances.

• If you load a printable disc that has already been printed onto the disc tray, the printer may detect that no printable disc is loaded on the disc tray. In this case, uncheck this check box.

Prevent paper abrasion

The printer can increase the gap between the print head and the paper during high-density printing to prevent paper abrasion.

Check this check box to prevent paper abrasion.

Align heads manually

Usually, the Print Head Alignment function on the Maintenance tab is set to automatic head alignment, but you can change it to manual head alignment.


Check this check box to perform the manual head alignment. Uncheck this check box to perform the automatic head alignment.

Rotate 90 degrees left when orientation is [Landscape]

On the Page Setup tab, you can change the rotation direction of the Landscape in the

Orientation.

259

To rotate the print data 90 degrees to the left during printing, select this item. To rotate the print data 90 degrees to the right during printing, clear this item.

Important

• Do not change this setting while the print job is displayed in the print wait list. Otherwise, characters may be omitted or the layout may become corrupt.

Don't detect mismatch of paper settings when printing from computer

When you print documents from your computer and the paper settings on the printer driver and the cassette paper information registered on the printer do not match, this setting disables the message display and allows you to continue printing.

To disable detection of paper setting mismatches, select this check box.

Ink Drying Wait Time

You can set the length of the printer rest time until printing of the next page begins. Moving the slider to the right increases the pause time, and moving the slider to the left decreases the time.

If the paper gets stained because the next page is ejected before the ink on the printed page dries, increase the ink drying wait time.

Reducing the ink drying wait time speeds up printing.


Click OK and when the confirmation message appears, click OK.

The printer operates with the modified settings hereafter.

260



Print settings

LAN settings

Device user settings

PictBridge print settings

Language selection

Home screen background color

Firmware update

Cassette settings

Reset setting

About ECO settings

About Quiet setting

Using the Machine with the Access Point Mode

261


This section describes the procedure to change the settings in the Device settings screen, taking the steps to specify Extended copy amount as an example.

1.

Make sure that the machine is turned on.



Setup.

3. Tap Device settings.

The Device settings screen is displayed.

4. Tap the setting item to adjust.

The setting screen for the selected item is displayed.

5. Tap the setting item.

6. Tap the setting to specify.

262

You can select the setting menus below.

Print settings

LAN settings


PictBridge print settings

Language selection

Home screen background color

Firmware update

Cassette settings

Reset setting

Note

• You can use the machine considering the environment, such as setting 2-sided printing as default or enabling the machine to turn on/off automatically.

About ECO settings

• You can reduce the operating noise when printing at night.

About Quiet setting

263

Print settings

• Prevent paper abrasion

Use this setting only if the print surface becomes smudged.

Important

• Be sure to set this back to OFF after printing since it may result in lower printing speed or lower print quality.

• Extended copy amount

Selects the amount of image that extends off the paper when printing in borderless (full).

Slight cropping may occur at the edges since the copied image is enlarged to fill the whole page. You can change the width to be cropped from the borders of the original image as needed.

Cropped area will be larger if Extended amount: Large is selected.

Important

• This setting can be applied under the following conditions:

- Performing borderless copying

- Borderless is selected for Border when copying printed photos

Note

• If printouts contain margins even though you are printing in Borderless, specifying Extended

amount: Large for this setting may help solve the problem.

• Adjust disc print area

You can adjust the disc printing area if the image is not aligned with the printable disc.

You can adjust the printing area in increments of 0.003 inches/0.1 mm between -0.03 inches/-0.9 mm and +0.03 inches/+0.9 mm.

• Auto photo fix setting

When ON is selected, you can select whether to print photos using the Exif information recorded in the image files in the following cases.

◦ Auto photo fix is selected for Photo fix when printing from a memory card.

◦ The print setting on the PictBridge (Wireless LAN) compliant device is set to Default* or On when printing with a PictBridge (Wireless LAN) compliant device.

* When Default is selected for the print setting on the PictBridge (Wireless LAN) compliant device, select Auto photo fix for Photo fix in PictBridge print settings.

• Adjust horizontal print position

Adjusts the print position when the left/right margins are not aligned.

You can adjust the left/right margins in increments of 0.003 inches/0.1 mm between -0.1 inches/-3 mm and +0.1 inches/+3 mm centered on the horizontal center of the paper.

264

Important

• For Letter-sized or Legal-sized paper, you can adjust the left/right margins between -0.05

inches/-1.5 mm and +0.05 inches/+1.5 mm even if you specify the value over 0.05 inches/1.5 mm.

265

LAN settings

• Change LAN

Enables either wireless LAN, wired LAN, or access point mode. You can also disable all.

• Wireless LAN setup

Selects the setup method for wireless LAN connection.

Note

• You can also enter this setting menu by selecting WLAN on the HOME screen. In this case, enable wireless LAN.

When this menu is selected, the machine starts searching for a WPS-compatible access point. If the machine detects the access point, follow the on-screen instructions to set up wireless LAN. If an access point is not detected or if you select another setup method, select one of the setup methods below.

◦ Standard setup

Select when you perform settings for wireless LAN manually using the operation panel of the machine.

◦ WPS (Push button method)

Select when you perform settings for wireless LAN using an access point supporting a Wi-Fi

Protected Setup (WPS) push button method. Follow the on-screen instructions during setup.

◦ Other setup

Select Advanced setup if you perform settings by entering the access point's settings directly on the machine. Select Cableless setup if you specify the settings of the access point information to the machine directly from a device (such as a smartphone) without operating the access point.

Follow the on-screen instructions of the connecting device for the setup procedure.

Advanced setup

Select when you perform settings for wireless LAN manually. You can specify multiple WEP keys.

WPS (PIN code method)

Select when you perform settings for wireless LAN using an access point supporting a Wi-Fi

Protected Setup (WPS) PIN code method. Follow the on-screen instructions during setup.

Cableless setup

Select if you specify the settings of the access point information to the machine directly from a device (such as a smartphone) without operating the access point. Follow the on-screen instructions of the connecting device for the setup procedure.

• Confirm LAN settings

The list of wireless/wired LAN settings or the access point mode of this machine is displayed on the touch screen.

You can print the list from this setting menu.

◦ WLAN setting list

The list of wireless LAN settings of this machine is displayed on the touch screen.

The following setting items are displayed.

Items Setting

266

Connection

SSID

Communication mode

Channel

Wireless LAN security

Active/Inactive

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

Infrastructure

XX

Inactive/WEP(64bit)/WEP(128bit)/WPA-PSK(TKIP)/WPA-PSK(AES)/WPA2-

PSK(TKIP)/WPA2-PSK(AES)

XXX. XXX. XXX. XXX

IPv4 address

IPv4 subnet mask

IPv4 default gateway

IPv6 address

XXX. XXX. XXX. XXX

XXX. XXX. XXX. XXX

XXXX: XXXX: XXXX: XXXX:

XXXX: XXXX: XXXX: XXXX

IPv6 subnet prefix length XXX




MAC address

IPsec settings

XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX

Enable (ESP)/Enable (ESP & AH)/Enable (AH)/Disable

Pre-shared key

Printer name

Bonjour service name

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

XXXXXXXXXXXXX

XXXXXXXXXXXXX

XXXXXXXXXXXXX

XXXXXXXXXXXXX

("XX" represents alphanumeric characters.)

◦ LAN setting list

The list of wired LAN settings of this machine is displayed on the touch screen.


Items Setting

Connection

IPv4 address

Active/Inactive

XXX. XXX. XXX. XXX



IPv6 address

XXX. XXX. XXX. XXX

XXX. XXX. XXX. XXX




267


MAC address

IPsec settings

Pre-shared key

Printer name




XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX

Enable (ESP)/Enable (ESP & AH)/Enable (AH)/Disable

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

XXXXXXXXXXXXX

XXXXXXXXXXXXX

XXXXXXXXXXXXX

XXXXXXXXXXXXX


◦ AP mode setting list

The list of access point mode settings of this machine is displayed on the touch screen.


Items Setting

Connection

SSID

Password


Channel

Active/Inactive

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

XXXXXXXXXX

Access point mode

3


IPv4 address



IPv6 address

Inactive/WPA2-PSK(AES)

XXX. XXX. XXX. XXX

XXX. XXX. XXX. XXX

XXX. XXX. XXX. XXX







MAC address

IPsec settings

Pre-shared key

Printer name

XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX

Disable

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

268


XXXXXXXXXXXXX

XXXXXXXXXXXXX

XXXXXXXXXXXXX

XXXXXXXXXXXXX


◦ Print LAN details

You can print out the network settings of the machine such as its IP address and SSID.

For more information on the machine's network setting is printed out:

Printing Out Network Setting Information

Important

• This printout contains valuable information about your computer. Handle it with care.

• Other settings

Important

• You cannot select the items below when Disable LAN is selected for Change LAN.

◦ Set printer name

Specifies the printer name. You can use up to 15 characters for the name.

Note

• You cannot change this setting with the memory card inserted in the card slot.

• You cannot use the same printer name as that already used for other LAN connected devices.

• You cannot use a hyphen for the initial or last character of the printer name.

◦ TCP/IP settings

Performs IPv4 or IPv6 setting.

◦ Set memory card sharing

Selects whether to share the card slot with a LAN connected computer.

Note

• You cannot change this setting with the memory card inserted in the card slot.

WSD setting

Setting items when you use WSD (one of the network protocols supported in Windows 8.1,

Windows 8, Windows 7, and Windows Vista).

Enable/disable WSD

Selects whether WSD is enabled or disabled.

Note

• When this setting is enabled, the printer icon is displayed on the Network Explorer in Windows

8.1, Windows 8, Windows 7, and Windows Vista.

WSD scan from this device

Selecting Enable allows you to transfer the scanned data to the computer using WSD.

269

Timeout setting

Specifies the timeout length.

◦ Bonjour settings

Setting items for LAN using Bonjour for Mac OS.

Enable/disable Bonjour

Selecting Enable allows you to use Bonjour to perform the network settings.

Service name

Specifies the Bonjour service name. You can use up to 48 characters for the name.

Note

• You cannot use the same service name as that already used for other LAN connected devices.

◦ LPR protocol setting

Activates/deactivates the LPR setting.

◦ PictBridge communication

Setting items for printing from a PictBridge (Wireless LAN) compliant device.

Enable/disable communication

Selecting Enable allows you to print from a PictBridge (Wireless LAN) compliant device.

Timeout setting

Specifies the timeout length.

◦ Wireless LAN DRX setting

Selecting Enable allows you to activate discontinuous reception when using wireless LAN. It allows you to save electricity.

Note

• Depending on the access point you are using, discontinuous reception may not be activated even though Enable is selected.

• Discontinuous reception is activated only while the machine is on standby. (The touch screen is in the screen saver mode.)

◦ Wired LAN DRX setting

Selecting Enable allows you to activate discontinuous reception when the machine is connected to a device compatible with wired LAN. It allows you to save electricity.

◦ Access point mode settings

When you use the machine as an access point, specify the access point name and the security setting.

Using the Machine with the Access Point Mode

270

Device user settings

• Date display format

Changes the display format of dates when printed.

Note

• When ON is selected for Print date on the print settings screen in printing from a memory card, the date is printed in the date display format you selected.

Setting Items for Photo Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine

• Read/write attribute

Selects whether to allow data to be written onto memory cards from a computer.

Important

• Remove the memory card before changing this setting.


• If you set this setting to Writable from USB PC or Writable from LAN PC, you cannot print photos on a memory card using the operation panel of the machine. After you finish operation of the memory card dedicated drive, be sure to set it back to Not writable from PC. When you turn off the machine, Writable from USB PC or Writable from LAN PC will be canceled and the setting is returned to Not writable from PC when you turn on the machine next time.

• When Writable from USB PC or Writable from LAN PC is selected, the auto power off setting is inactive.

For details on the auto power off setting:

About Quiet setting

• Sound control

Selects the volume.

◦ Keypad volume

Selects the beep volume when tapping the touch screen or the buttons on the operation panel.

◦ Alarm volume

Selects the alarm volume.

• Device info sending setting

Selects whether you will send the printer usage information to Canon server. The information sent to

Canon will be utilized to develop better products. Select Agree to send the printer usage information to

Canon server.

• NFC setting

If you select Enable, you can print or scan using NFC (Near Field Communication).

271

PictBridge print settings

You can change the print settings when printing from a PictBridge (Wireless LAN) compliant device.

Set the print settings to Default on the PictBridge (Wireless LAN) compliant device when you want to print according to the settings on the machine.

PictBridge print settings Screen

Disc label print setting Screen

To change print settings from the PictBridge (Wireless LAN) compliant device:

Settings on a PictBridge (Wireless LAN) Compliant Device

PictBridge print settings Screen

Select the print quality, when printing directly from a PictBridge (Wireless LAN) compliant device.

1. Page size

Select the paper size when printing directly from a PictBridge (Wireless LAN) compliant device.

When you perform PictBridge (Wireless LAN) settings from the machine, set Paper size to Default on the PictBridge (Wireless LAN) compliant device.

2. Type (Media type)

Select the media type when printing directly from a PictBridge (Wireless LAN) compliant device.

When you perform PictBridge (Wireless LAN) settings from the machine, set Paper type to Default on the PictBridge (Wireless LAN) compliant device.

3. Print qlty (Print quality)

Select the print quality when printing directly from a PictBridge (Wireless LAN) compliant device.

4. Border (Bordered/Borderless print)

Select the bordered/borderless layout.

When you perform PictBridge (Wireless LAN) settings from the machine, set Layout to Default on the

PictBridge (Wireless LAN) compliant device.

5. Photo fix

When Auto photo fix is selected, the scene or person's face of a shot photo is recognized and the most suitable correction for each photo is made automatically. It makes a darkened face by backlight

272

brighter to print. It also analyzes a scene such as scenery, night scene, person, etc. and corrects each scene with the most suitable color, brightness, or contrasts automatically to print.

Note

• As a default, photos on a PictBridge (Wireless LAN) compliant device are printed with auto correction applied.

• If No correction is selected, photos are printed without correction.

6. Red-EyeCorrection

Select ON to correct red eyes in portraits caused by flash photography.

Depending on the type of the photo, red eyes may not be corrected or parts other than the eyes may be corrected.

7. Tap to specify the print settings.

Disc label print setting Screen

The Set disc print area screen is displayed, and you can perform settings for printing on a printable disc from a PictBridge (Wireless LAN) compliant device.

Follow the procedure below to perform disc label print setting.

1. Adjust the printing area (the outer/inner diameter of the printable disc).

A. Tap to specify the outer diameter.

B. Tap to specify the inner diameter.

C. Tap to specify the printing area.

Note

• Measure the outer and inner diameters of the printing surface of the printable disc and make sure you set a value smaller than the measured value for the outer diameter, and a value larger than the measured value for the inner diameter.

• Contact the manufacturers of printable discs for details.

2. Select the type of the printable disc you use.

273

Note

• If your printable disc is the recommended disc, tap Recommended disc for the suitable density printing. If not, tap Other disc.

274

Language selection

Changes the language for the messages and menus on the touch screen.

275

Home screen background color

Selects the background color of the HOME screen. You can select black or white.

276

Firmware update

You can update the firmware of the machine, check the firmware version, or perform settings of a notification screen, a DNS server and a proxy server.

Note

• Only Check current version is available when Disable LAN is selected for Change LAN in LAN

settings.

• Install update

Performs the firmware update of the machine. If you select Yes, the firmware update starts. Follow the on-screen instructions to perform update.

Important

• When you use this function, make sure that the machine is connected to the Internet.

Note

• If the firmware update is not complete, check the following and take an appropriate action.

• When using wired LAN, make sure that the machine is connected to the computer with a LAN cable properly.

• Check the network settings such as an access point or a router.

• If Cannot connect to the server. is displayed on the touch screen, tap OK, then try again after a while.

• Check current version

You can check the current firmware version.

• Update notification setting

When Yes is selected and the firmware update is available, the screen to inform you of the firmware update is displayed on the touch screen.

• DNS server setup

Performs settings for a DNS server. Select Auto setup or Manual setup. If you select Manual setup, follow the display on the touch screen to perform settings.

• Proxy server setup

Performs settings for a proxy server. Follow the display on the touch screen to perform settings.

277

Cassette settings

By registering the paper size and the media type loaded in the cassette, you can prevent the machine from misprinting by displaying the message before printing starts when the paper size or the media type of the loaded paper differs from the print settings.

For details:

Paper Setting for Printing

• Register cassette paper info

Registers the paper size and the media type you load in the cassette.

Note

• When you register the paper size and the media type, the screen to select whether you apply the settings to those for copying is displayed. Select Yes to apply the registered settings to copying.

• For details on the proper combination of paper settings you can specify by the printer driver or on the touch screen:

Setting the Media Type with the Printer Driver and on the Printer

Setting the Paper Size with the Printer Driver and on the Printer

• Detect paper setting mismatch

If you select Yes, the machine detects whether the paper size and the media type are identical with those registered in Register cassette paper info. If printing starts with the settings that do not match, an error message is displayed on the touch screen.

Note

• When No is selected, Register cassette paper info or Detect cassette reinsertion is disabled.

• Detect cassette reinsertion

If you select Yes, the machine detects the cassette is reinserted. When the Register cassette paper

info screen is displayed, register the paper size and the media type.

278

Reset setting

You can change the settings back to the default.

• Web service setup only

Reverts the Web service settings back to the default.

• LAN settings only

Reverts the LAN settings other than the administrator password specified by IJ Network Tool back to the default.

• Settings only

Reverts the settings such as the paper size or media type back to the default.

• Device info sending setting only

Reverts only the device information sending settings.

• Reset all

Reverts all settings you made to the machine back to the default. The administrator password specified by IJ Network Tool reverts to the default setting.

Note

• You cannot change the following setting items back to the default:

• The language displayed on the touch screen

• The background color of the HOME screen

• The current position of the print head

• The Read/write attribute setting

279

About ECO settings

This setting allows you to use automatic duplex printing as a default to save paper and to turn the machine on/off automatically to save electricity.

Using Duplex Printing

Using Power Saving Function

Using Duplex Printing

Follow the procedure below to use duplex printing.

1.




3. Tap Two-sided printing setting.

4. Specify the settings as necessary.

ECO settings.

A. Tap to select two-sided copying as a default.

B. Tap to select duplex printing PDF files saved on a memory card as a default.

C. Tap to select two-sided printing of template forms on the machine as a default.

D. Tap to specify the print settings.

Note

• When duplex printing is selected, the printing on each print setting screen.

icon is displayed on the setting items for duplex

Using Power Saving Function

Follow the procedure below to use power saving function.

1.


280



3. Tap Energy saving settings.


ECO settings.

A. Tap to specify the length of time to turn the machine off automatically when no operation is made or no printing data is sent to the machine.

Note

• The Auto power off setting is invalid under the following conditions.

• When using the machine via a network and the network connection is enabled

You can check the connection status from WLAN setting list in Confirm LAN

settings under LAN settings.

• When Writable from USB PC or Writable from LAN PC is selected for Read/write

attribute under Device user settings.

B. Tap to select the setting.

Selecting ON enables the machine to turn on automatically when a scanning command from a computer or printing data is sent to the machine.

C. Tap to confirm the settings.

281

About Quiet setting

Enables this function on the machine if you want to reduce the operating noise, such as when printing at night.

Follow the procedure below to perform setting.

1.




3. Tap Use quiet mode.

Quiet setting.

The confirmation screen is displayed, then the icon appears as the Quiet setting menu icon.

Activate this setting to reduce the operating noise while printing is in progress.

Important

• Operating speed may be reduced compared to when Do not use quiet mode is selected.

• This function may not be so effective depending on the machine's setting. Furthermore, certain noise, such as when the machine is preparing for printing, is not reduced.

Note

• You can set the quiet mode from the operation panel of the machine, the printer driver, or

ScanGear (scanner driver). No matter how you set the quiet mode, the mode is applied when you perform operations from the operation panel of the machine or printing and scanning from the computer.

282

Using the Machine with the Access Point Mode

By using the machine as an access point in an environment that does not have wireless LAN router or access point, or by using the machine as an access point temporarily in an environment that has wireless

LAN router or access point, you can connect the machine to an external device such as a computer or a smartphone and print/scan from them.

This section describes how to enable the access point mode, the access point name of the machine, and the security setting.

How to enable the Access Point Mode

Printing/Scanning with the Access Point Mode

How to terminate the Access Point Mode

Setting of the Access Point Mode

Important

• Before using the machine with the access point mode, confirm the usage restrictions then switch the machine to the access point mode.

Restrictions

• If you use the machine with the access point mode for the long time, it is recommended that you change the default access point name and the default password to the combination of numbers and letters with the point of view of security.

How to enable the Access Point Mode

Enable the access point mode following the procedure below.

1.




Setup.




6. Tap Access point mode active.

The access point name (SSID) that set currently is displayed. (When using the machine for the first time, the default setting is displayed.)

When detecting the machine from the external device such as a computer or a smartphone, you can detect with the access point name (SSID).

283

Note

• Tapping Details displays the security setting.

The password required when connecting from the external device is also displayed.

• You can specify the access point name (SSID) and the security setting optionally.

Setting of the Access Point Mode

7. Tap OK to start the connection.

The access point mode is enabled and the machine can be used as an access point.

Printing/Scanning with the Access Point Mode

Print/Scan with the access point mode following the procedure below.

1. Connect an external device such as a computer or a smartphone to the machine via wireless LAN.

Perform wireless LAN settings with your external device, then assign the access point name specified for the machine as a destination.

Note

• For details on how to perform wireless LAN settings with an external device, refer to the device's instruction manual.

• When a WPA2-PSK (AES) password is valid on the machine, entering the password is required to connect an external device to the machine via wireless LAN. Enter the password specified for the machine.

2. Start printing or scanning from an external device such as a computer or a smartphone.

Note

• For details on how to print or scan from an external device such as a computer or a smartphone via wireless LAN, refer to the device's or application's instruction manual.

How to terminate the Access Point Mode

In environments that the machine is connected with the computer over the wireless LAN usually, set the machine to the wireless LAN connection following the procedure below when you finish using the machine with the access point mode temporarily.



Setup.


284



5. Tap Wireless LAN active.

If you do not use the machine over wireless LAN, select Wired LAN active or Disable LAN.

Setting of the Access Point Mode

Specify the settings for the access point mode following the procedure below.

1.




Setup.



5. Tap Other settings.

6. Tap Access point mode settings.

The screen to enter the access point name (SSID) is displayed.

7. Tap the touch screen.

8. Enter the access point name (up to 32 characters).

Enter the access point name when you use the machine as an access point.

9. Tap OK to finish entering the name.

10. Tap OK to finish specifying the access point name.

11. Select the security setting.

Disable

Finishes the access point settings without specifying the security setting.

WPA2-PSK (AES)

Specifies the security setting applying WPA2-PSK (AES). Proceed to the next step when the screen to specify the password is displayed.

12. Tap the touch screen.

285

13. Enter the password (8 to 10 characters).

14. Tap OK to finish entering the password.

15. Tap OK to finish specifying the password setting.

Note

• If you change the access point mode setting of the machine, also change the access point setting of the external device such as a computer or a smartphone.

286

Setting Up the Card Slot as the Memory Card Drive of the

Computer

Setting Up the Card Slot as the Memory Card Drive of the Computer

287

Setting Up the Card Slot as the Memory Card Drive of the

Computer

The card slot of the machine can also be used as the memory card drive of the computer.

Note

• When you use the machine over LAN, the card slot of the machine can be used as the network drive.

Using the Card Slot over a Network

Important

• When Read/write attribute in Device user settings under Device settings is set to Writable from

USB PC or Writable from LAN PC using the operation panel of the machine, you cannot print photos on a memory card using the operation panel of the machine. After using the card slot as the memory card drive of the computer, remove the memory card, then be sure to set Read/write attribute to Not

writable from PC. When you turned off the machine, Writable from USB PC or Writable from LAN

PC will be canceled and the setting is returned to Not writable from PC when you turn on the machine next time.

1.


2. Make sure that the memory card is not set.

If the memory card is set, remove it from the card slot.




Setup.


5. Tap Device user settings.

6. Tap Read/write attribute.

7. Check the message that is displayed, then tap OK.

8. Tap a read/write attribute to specify the setting.

Writable from USB PC

The card slot is used as the memory card drive of a computer connected to the machine via USB.

Data can be written on the memory card from the computer.

Writable from LAN PC

The card slot is used as the memory card drive of a computer connected to the machine via a network. Data can be written on the memory card from the computer.

288

Not writable from PC

The card slot is used only for reading. Be sure to select this mode when printing photos from a memory card.

Important

• When Writable from USB PC or Writable from LAN PC is selected, the auto power off setting is inactive.

For details on the auto power off setting:

About ECO settings

Important

• If you use the card slot as the memory card drive of the computer, you need to perform a "safe removal" operation on your computer before physically removing the memory card from your machine.

Right-click the Removable Disk icon and click Eject. If Eject is not displayed on the screen, confirm that the Access lamp is not flashing and remove the memory card.

Over a network, the removal operation is not needed.

289

Information about Network Connection

Useful Information about Network Connection

290

Useful Information about Network Connection

Default Values Set at Factory (Network)

Connecting the Machine to the Computer Using a USB Cable

When Detecting the Printers Have the Same Name during Setup

Connecting to Other Computer with LAN/Changing the Connection Method from USB to LAN

Printing Out Network Setting Information

291

Default Values Set at Factory (Network)

Default Values of the LAN Connection

Item

Change LAN

SSID

The default

Disable LAN

BJNPSETUP



IP address (IPv4)

IP address (IPv6)

Infrastructure

Disable

Auto setup

Auto setup

Set memory card sharing Enable

Set printer name* XXXXXXXXXXXX

Enable/disable IPv6

Enable/disable WSD

Timeout setting

Enable

Enable

1 minute

Enable/disable Bonjour

Service name

Enable

Canon MG7500 series

LPR protocol setting Enable

PictBridge communication Enable

Wireless LAN DRX setting Enable

Wired LAN DRX setting Enable


* The default value in this item varies by machine. You can check the value in this item using the operation panel on the machine.

LAN settings

Default Values of the Access Point Mode

Item The default

SSID (access point name) XXXXXX-MG7500series

Wireless LAN security WPA2-PSK (AES)

Password

Serial number of the machine

(XXXXXX is the last six digits of MAC address of the machine.)

292

Connecting the Machine to the Computer Using a USB Cable

Connect the machine and the computer using a USB cable as the illustration below. The USB port is located on the rear of the machine.

293

When Detecting the Printers Have the Same Name during Setup

When the printer is detected during setup, you may see multiple printers of the same name on the detection result screen.

Select a printer with checking the MAC address or the serial number set to the printer against that on the detection result screen.

Note

• A serial number may not be displayed on the detection result screen.

To check the MAC address of the printer, print out the network setting information using the operation panel of the printer.


Additionally, you can check the network setting information on the touch screen of the printer. Select WLAN

setting list from Confirm LAN settings in LAN settings under Device settings, and check the item displayed on the touch screen.

LAN settings

294

Connecting to Other Computer with LAN/Changing the Connection

Method from USB to LAN

To add the computer connecting the machine with LAN or to change the connection method between the machine and the computer from USB to LAN, perform setup with the Setup CD-ROM or perform it according to the instructions on our website.

Connecting to Other Computer with LAN

To add the computer connecting the machine with LAN, perform setup with the Setup CD-ROM or perform it according to the instructions on our website.

Changing the Connection Method from USB to LAN

To change the connection method to LAN while you are using the machine with USB connection, perform setup again with the Setup CD-ROM or perform it again according to the instructions on our website and select Change Connection Method.

295

Printing Out Network Setting Information

You can print out the current network settings of the machine using the operation panel of the machine.

Important

• This print out contains valuable information about your computer. Handle it with care.

1.


2.

Load a sheet of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper.



The menu screen is displayed.

Setup.



6. Tap Confirm LAN settings.

7. Tap Print LAN details.

8. Tap Yes.

The machine starts printing the network setting information.

The following information on the machine's network setting is printed out.

Item Explanations of the item

Wireless LAN

Connection

MAC Address

SSID

Wireless LAN

Connection status

MAC Address

SSID

Setting

Enable/Disable

Active/Inactive

XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX

SSID of the wireless LAN/SSID of the access point mode

Password

Communication Mode

Channel *1

Encryption

WEP Key Length

Password

Communication Mode

Channel

Method of the Encryption

WEP Key Length

Password of the access point mode (8 to 10 alphanumeric characters)

Infrastructure/Access Point Mode

XX (1 to 13) none/WEP/TKIP/AES

Inactive/128/64

296

Authentication

Signal Strength

TCP/IP Version

IPv4 IP Address

IPv4 Default Gateway

Subnet Mask

IPv6 IP Address *2

Method of the Authentication

Signal Strength

TCP/IP Version

Selected IP Address (IPv4)

Default Gateway (IPv4)

Subnet Mask

Selected IP Address (IPv6) none/auto/open/shared/WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK

0 to 100 [%]

IPv4 & IPv6/IPv4

XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX

XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX

IPv6 Default Gateway *2 Default Gateway (IPv6)

Subnet Prefix Length *2 Subnet Prefix Length

IPsec *3 IPsec setting

Security Protocol *3

Wireless LAN DRX

Method of the Security Protocol

XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX

XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX

XXX

Active

ESP/ESP & AH/AH

Discontinuous reception (wireless

LAN)

Enable/Disable

Wired LAN

Connection

MAC Address

TCP/IP Version

IPv4 IP Address

IPv4 Default Gateway

Subnet Mask

IPv6 IP Address *2

Wired LAN

Status of the Wired LAN

MAC Address

TCP/IP Version


Default Gateway (IPv4)

Subnet Mask


IPv6 Default Gateway *2 Default Gateway (IPv6)

Enable/Disable

Active/Inactive

XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX

IPv4 & IPv6/IPv4

XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX

XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX

XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX

XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX

XXX Subnet Prefix Length *2 Subnet Prefix Length

IPsec *3

Security Protocol *3

Wired LAN DRX

IPsec setting

Method of the Security Protocol

Discontinuous reception (wired

LAN)

Other Settings

Printer Name

Other settings

Printer name

Active

ESP/ESP & AH/AH

Enable/Disable

-

Printer name (Up to 15 alphanumeric characters)

297

Shared Memory Card

WSD

WSD Timeout

Memory card sharing

WSD setting

Timeout

Enable/Disable

Enable/Disable

1/5/10/15/20 [min]

LPR Protocol

Bonjour

LPR protocol setting

Bonjour setting

Bonjour Service Name Bonjour service name

PictBridge Commun.

DNS Server

Primary Server

Enable/Disable

Enable/Disable

Bonjour service name (Up to 52 alphanumeric characters)

Enable/Disable PictBridge Communication

Getting DNS Server automatically Auto/Manual

Primary server address XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

Secondary Server

Proxy Server

Proxy Port

Proxy Address

Secondary server address

Proxy Server setting

Specifying Proxy Port

Proxy Address

XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

Enable/Disable

1 to 65535

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX


*1 Depending on the country or region of purchase, one of the channels from 1 to 11 is printed.

*2 Only when IPv6 is enabled, the status of the network is printed.

*3 Only IPv6 and the IPsec setting are enabled, the status of the network is printed.

298

About Network Communication

Changing and Confirming Network Settings

Screens for Network Connection of IJ Network Tool

Other Screens of IJ Network Tool

Appendix for Network Communication

299

Changing and Confirming Network Settings

IJ Network Tool

Changing the Settings in the Wireless LAN Sheet

Changing the WEP Detailed Settings

Changing the WPA/WPA2 Detailed Settings

Changing the Settings in the Wired LAN Sheet

Changing the Settings in the Admin Password Sheet

Monitoring Wireless Network Status

Initializing the Network Settings of the Machine

Viewing the Modified Settings

300

IJ Network Tool

IJ Network Tool is a utility that enables you to display and modify the machine network settings. It is installed when the machine is set up.

Important

• To use the machine over LAN, make sure you have the equipment necessary for the connection type, such as an access point or a LAN cable.

• Do not start up IJ Network Tool while printing.

• Do not print when IJ Network Tool is running.

• If the firewall function of your security software is turned on, a message may appear warning that

Canon software is attempting to access the network. If the warning message appears, set the security software to always allow access.

• IJ Network Tool has been verified to work on Windows XP, however, it does not support Fast User

Switching. It is recommended to exit IJ Network Tool when switching users.

Starting up IJ Network Tool

1. Start up IJ Network Tool as shown below.

• In Windows 8.1 or Windows 8, select IJ Network Tool on the Start screen to start IJ Network

Tool. If IJ Network Tool is not displayed on the Start screen, select the Search charm, then search for "IJ Network Tool".

• In Windows 7, Windows Vista, or Windows XP, click Start and select All programs, Canon

Utilities, IJ Network Tool, and then IJ Network Tool.

Depending on the printer you are using, an administrator password is already specified for the printer at the time of purchase. When you change the network settings, authentication by the administrator password is required.

For details:

About the Administrator Password

For improving security, it is recommended to change the administrator password.

Changing the Settings in the Admin Password Sheet

301

Changing the Settings in the Wireless LAN Sheet

To change the wireless network settings of the printer, connect the printer and the computer with a USB cable temporarily. If you modify the wireless network settings of the computer over wireless connection without USB connection, your computer may not be able to communicate with the machine after modifying the settings.

Note

• This screen is not available depending on the printer you are using.

• Activate the wireless LAN setting of the printer to change the settings in the Wireless LAN sheet.

1.

Start up IJ Network Tool.

2. Select the printer in Printers:.

When the printer is connected to the computer with a USB cable temporarily, select the printer with

"USBnnn" (where "n" is a number) appearing in the Port Name column.

3. Select Configuration... from the Settings menu.

4. Click the Wireless LAN tab.

The Wireless LAN sheet is displayed.

For details on the Wireless LAN sheet, see Wireless LAN Sheet .

5. Change the settings or confirm.

SSID:

Enter the same value that was set for the target access point.

When the printer is connected with USB, the Search screen appears by clicking Search.... Set the

SSID of the access point by selecting the one of the detected access points.

Search Screen

302

Note

• Enter the same SSID that the access point is configured to use. The SSID is case-sensitive.

Encryption Method:

Select the encryption method used over the wireless LAN.

You can change WEP settings with selecting Use WEP and clicking Configuration....

Changing the WEP Detailed Settings

You can change WPA/WPA2 settings with selecting Use WPA/WPA2 and clicking Configuration....

Changing the WPA/WPA2 Detailed Settings

Important

• If all encryption types of the access point, printer, or computer do not match, the printer cannot communicate with the computer. If the printer cannot communicate with the computer after the encryption type of the printer was switched, make sure that encryption types for the computer and the access point match that set to the printer.

• If you connect to a network that is not protected with security measures, there is a risk of disclosing data such as your personal information to a third party.

TCP/IP Setup:

Sets the IP address of the printer to be used over the LAN. Specify a value appropriate for your network environment.

6. Click OK.

After changing configuration, a screen is displayed asking you for confirmation before the settings are sent to the printer. If you click Yes, the settings are sent to the printer and the Transmitted Settings screen is displayed.

Note

• Changing the network settings with the USB cable temporarily may switch the default printer. In this case, reset Set as Default Printer.

303

Changing the WEP Detailed Settings

Note



1.







5. Select Use WEP in Encryption Method: and click Configuration....

The WEP Details screen is displayed.


When changing the password (WEP key), the same change must be made to the password (WEP key) of the access point.

1. WEP Key:

Enter the same key as the one set to the access point.

The number of characters and character type that can be entered differ depending on the combination of the key length and key format.

Key Length

64bit 128bit

5 characters 13 characters

Key Format ASCII

Hexadecimal (Hex) 10 digits 26 digits

304

2. Key Length:

Select either 64bit or 128bit.

3. Key Format:

Select either ASCII or Hex.

4. Key ID:

Select the Key ID (index) set to the access point.

5. Authentication:

Select the authentication method to authenticate the printer's access to the access point.

Normally, select Auto. If you want to specify the method manually, select Open System or

Shared Key according to the setting of the access point.

7. Click OK.

Important

• If the printer cannot communicate with the computer after the encryption type of the printer was switched, make sure that encryption types for the computer and the access point match that set to the printer.

Note


305

Changing the WPA/WPA2 Detailed Settings

Note



The example screenshots in this section refer to the WPA detailed settings.

1.







5. Select Use WPA/WPA2 in Encryption Method: and click Configuration....

The WPA/WPA2 Details screen is displayed.

If encryption is not set to the printer, the Authentication Type Confirmation screen is displayed. Go to step 7.

6. Click Change Settings....

7. Check the client authentication type and click Next>.

306

8. Enter the passphrase, then click Next>.

Enter the passphrase set to the access point. The passphrase should be a string of 8 to 63 alphanumeric characters or a 64-digit hexadecimal value.

If you do not know the access point passphrase, refer to the instruction manual provided with the access point or contact its manufacturer.

The dynamic encryption method is selected from either TKIP (basic encryption) or AES (secure encryption) automatically.

Important

• If Auto is not displayed on Dynamic Encryption Type:, select either TKIP(Basic Encryption) or

AES(Secure Encryption).

9. Click Finish.

307

Important

• If the printer cannot communicate with the computer after the encryption type of the printer was switched, make sure that encryption types for the computer and the access point match that set to the printer.

Note


308

Changing the Settings in the Wired LAN Sheet

Note


• Activate the wired LAN setting of the printer to change the settings in the Wired LAN sheet.

1.




4. Click the Wired LAN tab.

The Wired LAN sheet is displayed.

For details on the Wired LAN sheet, see Wired LAN Sheet .


Set the IP address of the printer to be used over the LAN. Specify a value appropriate for your network environment.

6. Click OK.

After changing configuration, a screen is displayed asking you for confirmation before the settings are sent to the printer. If you click Yes, the settings are sent to the printer and the Transmitted Settings screen is displayed.

309

Changing the Settings in the Admin Password Sheet

Note

• You cannot change the settings when using the access point mode.

1.




4. Click the Admin Password tab.

The Admin Password sheet is displayed.

For details on the Admin Password sheet, see Admin Password Sheet .


To use an administrator password, select the Use admin password check box and enter a password.

Important

• The password should consist of alphanumeric characters and be no longer than 32 characters.

The password is case-sensitive. Do not forget the password you set.

If you forget the administrator password you specified, initialize the printer to revert the password to the default setting.

6. Click OK.

A screen is displayed asking you for confirmation before the settings are sent to the printer. If you click

Yes, the settings are sent to the printer and the Transmitted Settings screen is displayed.

310

Monitoring Wireless Network Status

Note


• When using the machine over the wired LAN, you cannot monitor network status.

1.



3. Select Status from the View menu.

The Status screen is displayed and you can check the printer status and connection performance.

Important

• If the indicated value is low, move your printer closer to the wireless network device.

4. If you measure the connection performance in detail, click Advanced Measurement....

The Connection Performance Measurement screen is displayed.

5. Click Next>.

The measurement starts and the status displays. Measurement takes a few minutes.

311

6. Check the status.

When the measurement is complete, the status is displayed.

When is displayed in Connection Performance between the Printer and the Access Point:, the printer can communicate with the access point. Otherwise, refer to displayed comments and the following to improve the status of communication link, and click Remeasurement.

• Check that the printer and the access point are located within the wireless connectivity range with no obstacles between them.

• Check if the distance between the printer and the access point is not too far.

If they are too far, move them closer together (within 164 ft./50 m).

• Check that there is no barrier or obstacle between the printer and the access point.

In general, connection performance decreases for communications through walls or between different floors. Adjust the locations to avoid such situations.

• Check that there are no sources of radio interference near the printer and the access point.

The wireless connection may use the same frequency band as microwave ovens and other sources of radio interference. Try to keep the printer and the access point away from such sources.

• Check if the radio channel of the access point is close to that of other access points nearby.

If the radio channel of the access point is close to that of other access points nearby, the connection performance may become unstable. Be sure to use a radio channel that does not interfere with other access points.

• Check that the printer and the access point face each other.

Connection performance may depend on the orientations of the wireless devices. Replace the access point and the printer in another direction to achieve the best performance.

• Check whether other computers are not accessing the printer.

If appears in the result of the measurement, check whether other computers are not accessing the printer.

312

If still appears even if you have tried the above, finish the measurement, then restart the IJ Network

Tool to start over the measurement.

7. Click Finish.

Note

• If any messages appear on Overall Network Performance:, move the machine and access point as instructed to improve the performance.

313

Initializing the Network Settings of the Machine

Important

• Note that initialization erases all network settings on the machine, printing or scanning operation from a computer over network may become impossible. To use the machine over network, perform setup with the Setup CD-ROM or perform setup according to the instructions on our website.

1.



3. Select Maintenance... from the Settings menu.

The Maintenance screen is displayed.

4. Click Initialize.

5. When the confirmation screen is displayed, click Yes.

The network settings of the printer is initialized.

Do not turn off the printer during initialization.

Click OK when initialization is complete.

Performing initialization when connected over wireless LAN will break the connection, so perform setup with the Setup CD-ROM or perform setup according to the instructions on our website.

Note

• You can change the network settings of the printer using IJ Network Tool with USB connection after initializing the LAN settings. To change the network settings using Canon IJ Network Tool, activate wireless LAN in advance.

314

Viewing the Modified Settings

The Confirmation screen is displayed when you modified the printer settings on the Configuration screen.

When you click Yes on the Confirmation screen, the following screen is displayed for confirming the modified settings.

315

Screens for Network Connection of IJ Network Tool

Canon IJ Network Tool Screen

Configuration Screen

Wireless LAN Sheet

Search Screen

WEP Details Screen

WPA/WPA2 Details Screen

Authentication Type Confirmation Screen

PSK:Passphrase and Dynamic Encryption Setup Screen

Setup Information Confirmation Screen

Wired LAN Sheet

Admin Password Sheet

Network Information Screen

Access Control Sheet

Edit Accessible MAC Address Screen/Add Accessible MAC Address Screen

Edit Accessible IP Address Screen/Add Accessible IP Address Screen

316


This section describes the items and menus displayed on the Canon IJ Network Tool screen.

Items on the Canon IJ Network Tool Screen

Canon IJ Network Tool Menus

Items on the Canon IJ Network Tool Screen

The following item is displayed on the Canon IJ Network Tool screen.

1. Printers:

The printer name, status, printer model name, and port name are displayed.

A check mark next to the printer in the Name list indicates it is set as the default printer.

Configuration changes are applied to the selected printer.

2. Update

Performs printer detection again. Click this button if the target printer is not displayed.

Important

• To change the printer's network settings using IJ Network Tool, it must be connected via a LAN.

• If No Driver is displayed for the name, associate the port with the printer.

When the Printer Driver Is Not Associated with a Port

• If Not Found is displayed for the status, check the followings:

• The access point is turned on.

• When using wired LAN, the LAN cable is connected properly.

• If the printer on a network is not detected, make sure that the printer is turned on, then click

Update. It may take several minutes to detect printers. If the printer is not yet detected, connect the machine and the computer with a USB cable, then click Update.

• If the printer is being used from another computer, a screen is displayed informing you of this condition.

317

Note

• This item has the same function as Refresh in the View menu.

3. Configuration...

Click to configure settings of the selected printer.

Configuration Screen

Note

• You cannot configure a printer that has the status Not Found.

• This item has the same function as Configuration... in the Settings menu.

Canon IJ Network Tool Menus

The following menu is displayed from the Canon IJ Network Tool screen.

1. File menu

Exit

Exits IJ Network Tool.

2. View menu

Status

Displays the Status screen to confirm the printer connection status and wireless communication status.

In the access point mode, this item is grayed out and you cannot confirm the printer connection status.

Status Screen

Refresh

Updates and displays the contents of Printers: on the Canon IJ Network Tool screen to the latest information.

Important


318






• If the printer on a network is not detected, make sure that the printer is turned on, then select

Refresh. It may take several minutes to detect printers. If the printer is not yet detected, connect the machine and the computer with a USB cable, then select Refresh.


Note

• This item has the same function as Update in the Canon IJ Network Tool screen.

Network Information

Displays the Network Information screen to confirm the network settings of the printer and the computer.

Network Information Screen

Display Warning Automatically

Enables or disables automatic display of the instruction screen.

When this menu is selected, the instruction screen is displayed if one or more ports are unavailable for printing.

3. Settings menu

Configuration...

Displays the Configuration screen to configure settings of the selected printer.


Note

• This item has the same function as Configuration... in the Canon IJ Network Tool screen.

Enable switch printer function

When you cannot use your printer, you can use the same one on the network instead. When you enable this function and you cannot use your printer, the screen to confirm if you start searching the same printer as yours is displayed. Follow the message on the screen.

Note

• When this function is enabled, a check mark appears on the menu.

Associate Port...

Displays the Associate Port screen and you can associate a port with the printer.

Associate Port Screen

This menu is available when No Driver is displayed for the selected printer. Associating a port with the printer enables you to use it.

319

Maintenance...

Displays the Maintenance screen to revert the network settings of the printer to factory default and to mount the card slot as the network drive.

Maintenance Screen

Set up printer's wireless LAN...

You can change the access point mode settings. Perform settings following the message on the screen.

If you change the Encryption Method: setting and the Password: setting on the Set up printer's

wireless LAN screen, the changed settings are applied to the printer settings.

Note

• You can use this function only when you are using a computer compatible with the wireless LAN.

4. Help menu

Instructions

Displays this guide.

About

Displays the version of IJ Network Tool.

320

Configuration Screen

You can change the configuration of the printer selected on the Canon IJ Network Tool screen.

Click the tab to select the sheet to change the settings.

The following screen is the example to change the setting on the Wireless LAN sheet.

Note


For details on each sheet, see the following.

Wireless LAN Sheet

Wired LAN Sheet

Admin Password Sheet

321

Wireless LAN Sheet

Note


Allows you to set the printer with wireless LAN connection.

To display the Wireless LAN sheet, click the Wireless LAN tab on the Configuration screen.

1. Network Type:

Displays the wireless LAN mode currently selected.

Infrastructure

Connects the printer to the wireless LAN with an access point.

Access point mode

Connects external wireless communication devices (e.g. computers, smartphones, or tablets) to the printer using it as an access point.

Note

• When Access point mode is displayed on Network Type:, you cannot change the settings on the

Wireless LAN sheet or the Admin Password sheet.

• You can perform setting from Set up printer's wireless LAN... on the Settings menu when you use the printer with the access point mode.

Depending on the printer you are using, you can change the settings using the operation panel.

2. SSID:

The network name (SSID) of the wireless LAN currently used is displayed.

In the access point mode, the access point name (SSID) of the printer is displayed.

As the initial settings, the unique value is displayed.

Note

• Enter the same SSID that the access point is configured to use. The SSID is case-sensitive.

322

3. Search...

The Search screen is displayed to select an access point to connect to.

Search Screen

Note

• When IJ Network Tool runs over a LAN, the button is grayed out and cannot be selected. Connect the printer and the computer with a USB cable temporarily to change the settings.

4. Encryption Method:

Select the encryption method used over the wireless LAN.

Do not use

Select to disable encryption.

Use WEP

Transmission is encrypted using a WEP key you specified.

If a WEP key has not been set, the WEP Details screen is displayed automatically. To change WEP settings set before, click Configuration... to display the screen.


Use WPA/WPA2

Transmission is encrypted using a WPA/WPA2 key you specified.

The security has been strengthened more than WEP.

If a WPA/WPA2 key has not been set, the Authentication Type Confirmation screen is displayed automatically. To change WPA/WPA2 settings set before, click Configuration... to display the

WPA/WPA2 Details screen.



The detailed settings screen is displayed. The WEP or the WPA/WPA2 key selected in Encryption

Method: can be confirmed and changed.

For details on WEP setting:


For details on WPA/WPA2 setting:


6. TCP/IP Setup:


Get IP address automatically

Select this option to use an IP address automatically assigned by a DHCP server. DHCP server functionality must be enabled on your wireless LAN router or access point.

Use next IP address

Select this option if no DHCP server functionality is available in your setup where you use the printer, or you want to use a particular IP address or a fixed IP address.

323

Search Screen

Note


The access points detected are listed.

1. Detected Access Points:

The signal strength from the access point, encryption type, name of access point, and the radio channel can be confirmed.

Important


Note

• Signal strength is displayed as follows.

: Good

: Fair

: Poor

• Type of encryption is displayed as follows.

Blank: No encryption

WEP: WEP is set

WPA/WPA2: WPA/WPA2 is set

2. Update

Click to update the list of access points when your target access point is not detected.

If the target access point is set to the stealth mode, click Cancel to return to the previous screen and enter the access point's SSID in SSID: on the Wireless LAN sheet.

Wireless LAN Sheet

Note

• When detecting your target access point, make sure that the access point is turned on.

324

3. Set

Click to set the access point's SSID in SSID: on the Wireless LAN sheet.

Note

• The WEP Details screen or the WPA/WPA2 Details screen appears if the selected access point is encrypted. In this case, configure the details to use the same encryption settings set to the access point.

• Access points that cannot be used by this machine (including those configured to use different encryption methods) are displayed grayed out and cannot be configured.

325

WEP Details Screen

Note


Specify the printer WEP settings.

Note

• When changing the password (WEP key) of the printer, the same change must be made to the password (WEP key) of the access point.

1. WEP Key:

Enter the same key as the one set to the access point.

The number of characters and character type that can be entered differ depending on the combination of the key length and key format.

Key Length

64bit 128bit

5 characters 13 characters

Key Format ASCII

Hexadecimal (Hex) 10 digits 26 digits

2. Key Length:

Select either 64bit or 128bit.

3. Key Format:

Select either ASCII or Hex.

4. Key ID:

Select the Key ID (index) set to the access point.

5. Authentication:

Select the authentication method to authenticate the printer's access to the access point.

Select Auto or Open System or Shared Key.

326

WPA/WPA2 Details Screen

Note


Specify the printer WPA/WPA2 settings.

The value displayed on the screen differs depending on the present settings.

1. Authentication Type:

Displays the type of authentication used for client authentication. This machine supports the PSK authentication method.

2. Dynamic Encryption Type:

Displays the dynamic encryption method.

3. Change Settings...

Displays the Authentication Type Confirmation screen.

Authentication Type Confirmation Screen

327

Authentication Type Confirmation Screen

Note


Type of authentication used for client authentication is displayed.

1. Authentication Type

Type of authentication used for client authentication is displayed.

PSK

This machine supports the PSK authentication method.

This authentication type PSK uses a passphrase.

328

PSK:Passphrase and Dynamic Encryption Setup Screen

Note


Enter the passphrase and select the dynamic encryption method.

1. Passphrase:

Enter the passphrase set to the access point. The passphrase should be a string of 8 to 63 alphanumeric characters or a 64-digit hexadecimal value.

If you do not know the access point passphrase, refer to the instruction manual provided with the access point or contact its manufacturer.

2. Dynamic Encryption Type

The dynamic encryption method is selected from either TKIP (basic encryption) or AES (secure encryption) automatically.

329

Setup Information Confirmation Screen

Note


Displays the settings used for client authentication.

Confirm the settings and click Finish.

330

Wired LAN Sheet

Note


Allows you to set the printer with wired LAN connection.

To display the Wired LAN sheet, click the Wired LAN tab on the Configuration screen.

1. TCP/IP Setup:


Get IP address automatically

Select this option to use an IP address automatically assigned by a DHCP server. DHCP server functionality must be enabled on your router.

Use next IP address

Select this option if no DHCP server functionality is available in your setup where you use the printer, or you want to use a particular IP address or a fixed IP address.

331

Admin Password Sheet

Set a password for the printer to allow specific people to perform setup and configurations operation.

To display the Admin Password sheet, click the Admin Password tab on the Configuration screen.

1. Use admin password

Set an administrator password with privileges to set up and change detailed options. To use this feature, select this check box and enter a password.

2. Password:

Enter the password to set.

3. Password Confirmation:

Enter the password again for confirmation.

Important

• If you forget the administrator password you specified, initialize the printer to revert the password to the default setting.

332


Display the network information that is set for the printers and the computers.

To display the Network Information screen, select Network Information from the View menu.

1. OK

Returns to the Canon IJ Network Tool screen.

2. Copy All Information

All network information displayed is copied to the clipboard.

333

Access Control Sheet

Note


You can register the MAC addresses or the IP addresses of computers or network devices to allow access.

To display the Access Control sheet, click the Access Control tab on the Configuration screen.

1. Printer Access Control Type:

Select the type of access control with which to limit access of computers or network devices to the printer over a network.

The setting items may differ depending on the choice of access control methods.

When Selecting MAC address

When Selecting IP address

When Selecting MAC address

The accessible computers or network devices are specified by their MAC addresses. Computers or network devices whose MAC addresses appear on the list are allowed access.

334

1. Enable printer access control(MAC address)

Select to enable access control to the printer by MAC address.

Note

• The two types of access control (i.e., by MAC address and by IP address) can be enabled at the same time.

An access control type is enabled as long as the Enable printer access control check box is selected, regardless of the type currently displayed by selecting in Printer Access Control

Type:.

• When both access control types are enabled at the same time, a computer or a network device whose address is registered to either list will be allowed access to the printer.

2. Accessible MAC Addresses:

Shows the registered MAC addresses and any comments.

3. Edit...

The Edit Accessible MAC Address screen is displayed to edit the settings selected in Accessible

MAC Addresses:.

Edit Accessible MAC Address Screen/Add Accessible MAC Address Screen

4. Add...

The Add Accessible MAC Address screen is displayed to register the MAC address of a computer or a network device from which to access the printer over the network.

Important

• Add the MAC address of all computers or network devices within the network from which to access the printer. The printer cannot be accessed from a computer or a network device that is not on the list.

5. Delete

Deletes the selected MAC address from the list.

When Selecting IP address

The accessible computers or network devices are specified by their IP addresses. Computers or network devices whose IP addresses appear on the list are allowed access.

335

1. Enable printer access control(IP address)

Select to enable access control to the printer by IP address.

Note

• The two types of access control (i.e., by MAC address and by IP address) can be enabled at the same time.

An access control type is enabled as long as the Enable printer access control check box is selected, regardless of the type currently displayed by selecting in Printer Access Control

Type:.

• When both access control types are enabled at the same time, a computer or a network device whose address is registered to either list will be allowed access to the printer.

2. Accessible IP Addresses:

Shows the registered IP addresses and any comments.

3. Edit...

The Edit Accessible IP Address screen is displayed to edit the settings selected in Accessible IP

Addresses:.

Edit Accessible IP Address Screen/Add Accessible IP Address Screen

4. Add...

The Add Accessible IP Address screen is displayed to register the IP address of a computer or a network device from which to access the printer over the network.

Important

• Add the IP address of all computers or network devices within the network from which to access the printer. The printer cannot be accessed from a computer or a network device that is not on the list.

• Up to 16 IP addresses can be registered. IP addresses specified by Range Specification are counted as one address. Use Range Specification when you intend to register 17 or more IP addresses.

336

5. Delete

Deletes the selected IP address from the list.

337

Edit Accessible MAC Address Screen/Add Accessible MAC

Address Screen

Note


The example screenshots in this section refer to the Add Accessible MAC Address Screen.

1. MAC Address:

Enter the MAC address of a computer or a network device to allow access.

2. Comment:

Optionally enter any information to identify the device, such as the name of the computer.

Important

• Comments will be displayed only on the computer used to enter them.

338

Edit Accessible IP Address Screen/Add Accessible IP Address

Screen

Note


The example screenshots in this section refer to the Add Accessible IP Address Screen.

1. Specification Method:

Select either Single Address Specification or Range Specification to add the IP address(es).

Single Address Specification

Specify each IP address separately.

Range Specification

Specify a range of successive IP addresses.

2. IP Address:

Enter the IP address of a computer or a network device to allow access when you selected Single

Address Specification in Specification Method:.

An IP address is expressed as four values ranging from 0 to 255.

Start IP Address:

Enter the first IP address in the range of addresses of the computers or network devices to allow access when you selected Range Specification in Specification Method:.


End IP Address:

Enter the last IP address in the range of addresses of the computers or network devices to allow access when you selected Range Specification in Specification Method:.


Note

• The Start IP Address: must be a smaller value than the End IP Address:.

3. Comment:

Optionally enter any information to identify the device, such as the name of the computer.

Important

• Comments will be displayed only on the computer used to enter them.

339

Other Screens of IJ Network Tool


Status Screen

Connection Performance Measurement Screen

Maintenance Screen

Network Setup of the Card Slot Screen

Associate Port Screen


340


This section describes the items and menus displayed on the Canon IJ Network Tool screen.

Items on the Canon IJ Network Tool Screen

Canon IJ Network Tool Menus

Items on the Canon IJ Network Tool Screen

The following item is displayed on the Canon IJ Network Tool screen.

1. Printers:

The printer name, status, printer model name, and port name are displayed.

A check mark next to the printer in the Name list indicates it is set as the default printer.

Configuration changes are applied to the selected printer.

2. Update

Performs printer detection again. Click this button if the target printer is not displayed.

Important







• If the printer on a network is not detected, make sure that the printer is turned on, then click

Update. It may take several minutes to detect printers. If the printer is not yet detected, connect the machine and the computer with a USB cable, then click Update.


341

Note

• This item has the same function as Refresh in the View menu.


Click to configure settings of the selected printer.


Note

• You cannot configure a printer that has the status Not Found.

• This item has the same function as Configuration... in the Settings menu.

Canon IJ Network Tool Menus

The following menu is displayed from the Canon IJ Network Tool screen.

1. File menu

Exit

Exits IJ Network Tool.

2. View menu

Status

Displays the Status screen to confirm the printer connection status and wireless communication status.

In the access point mode, this item is grayed out and you cannot confirm the printer connection status.

Status Screen

Refresh

Updates and displays the contents of Printers: on the Canon IJ Network Tool screen to the latest information.

Important


342






• If the printer on a network is not detected, make sure that the printer is turned on, then select

Refresh. It may take several minutes to detect printers. If the printer is not yet detected, connect the machine and the computer with a USB cable, then select Refresh.


Note

• This item has the same function as Update in the Canon IJ Network Tool screen.

Network Information

Displays the Network Information screen to confirm the network settings of the printer and the computer.

Network Information Screen


Enables or disables automatic display of the instruction screen.

When this menu is selected, the instruction screen is displayed if one or more ports are unavailable for printing.

3. Settings menu

Configuration...

Displays the Configuration screen to configure settings of the selected printer.


Note

• This item has the same function as Configuration... in the Canon IJ Network Tool screen.

Enable switch printer function

When you cannot use your printer, you can use the same one on the network instead. When you enable this function and you cannot use your printer, the screen to confirm if you start searching the same printer as yours is displayed. Follow the message on the screen.

Note

• When this function is enabled, a check mark appears on the menu.

Associate Port...

Displays the Associate Port screen and you can associate a port with the printer.

Associate Port Screen

This menu is available when No Driver is displayed for the selected printer. Associating a port with the printer enables you to use it.

343

Maintenance...

Displays the Maintenance screen to revert the network settings of the printer to factory default and to mount the card slot as the network drive.

Maintenance Screen

Set up printer's wireless LAN...

You can change the access point mode settings. Perform settings following the message on the screen.

If you change the Encryption Method: setting and the Password: setting on the Set up printer's

wireless LAN screen, the changed settings are applied to the printer settings.

Note

• You can use this function only when you are using a computer compatible with the wireless LAN.

4. Help menu

Instructions

Displays this guide.

About

Displays the version of IJ Network Tool.

344

Status Screen

You can check the printer status and connection performance.

To display the Status screen, select Status from the View menu.

Note


• When using wired LAN, Signal Strength:, Link Quality: and Advanced Measurement... are not available.

1. Device Status:

The device status is displayed as Available or Unavailable.

2. Signal Strength:

Indicates the strength of the signal received by the printer, ranging from 0% to 100%.

3. Link Quality:

Indicates the signal quality excluding the noise while communicating, ranging from 0% to 100%.

4. Advanced Measurement...

To examine the connection performance between the printer and the access point or between the printer and the computer.

When you click, the Connection Performance Measurement is displayed.

Connection Performance Measurement Screen

345

Connection Performance Measurement Screen

Note


Displays to execute the connection performance measurement.

Connection Performance Measurement Screen (Initial Screen)

Connection Performance Measurement Screen (Completion Screen)

Connection Performance Measurement Screen (Initial Screen)

Click Next> to start measurement.

Connection Performance Measurement Screen (Completion Screen)

Displays when the measurement is finished.

346

1. Connection Performance between the Printer and the Access Point:

A mark indicates the result of the connection performance measurement between the printer and the access point.

: Good connection performance

: Unstable connection performance

: Cannot connect

: Measurement is canceled, or cannot measure

2. Remeasurement

Measures the connection performance again.

Note

• If any messages appear on Overall Network Performance:, move the machine and access point as instructed to improve the performance.

347

Maintenance Screen

Displays to perform Setting Initialization and Network Setup of the Card Slot.

To display the Maintenance screen, select Maintenance... from the Settings menu.

1. Setting Initialization

Reverts all the network settings of the printer to factory default. Click Initialize to display the Initialize

Settings screen and click Yes to initialize the network settings of the printer. Do not turn off the printer during initialization. Click OK when initialization is complete.

Performing initialization when connected over wireless LAN will break the connection, so perform setup with the Setup CD-ROM or perform setup according to the instructions on our website.

2. Network Setup of the Card Slot

Note

• This item is not available depending on the printer you are using.

Status displays whether the card slot is mapped as a network drive.

When you click, the Network Setup of the Card Slot is displayed.

Network Setup of the Card Slot Screen

348

Network Setup of the Card Slot Screen

Note


Displays settings of the card slot and allows you to map a card slot on the network as a network drive on the computer.

Displays when you click Setup on the Maintenance screen.

Network Setup of the Card Slot Screen (Setup Screen)

Network Setup of the Card Slot Screen (Setup Failed Screen)

Note

• You can change the network settings of the printer using IJ Network Tool with USB connection after initializing the LAN settings. To change the network settings using IJ Network Tool, activate the LAN settings in advance.

Network Setup of the Card Slot Screen (Setup Screen)

1. Drive:

Select the drive letter to assign to the network drive.

2. Update

Reloads the drive letters that are unassigned in Computer (My Computer in Windows XP) and displays them in the Drive: list.

Network Setup of the Card Slot Screen (Setup Failed Screen)

Display when the network setup of the card slot is failed.

349

1. Skip

Completes the setup without mapping a network drive to the card slot.

2. Retry

Returns to Network Setup of the Card Slot screen and re-executes the network drive mapping.

3. Cancel

Cancels the card slot setup. When IJ Network Tool is running over LAN, the Cancel button is displayed grayed out and cannot be clicked.

350

Associate Port Screen

Allows you to associate a created port with a printer driver.

Select the printer for which you want to change the association, then click OK.

Note

• You cannot print with the printer unless the printer driver is associated with the port.

1. Model:

Displays the name of device specified as a destination port.

It is blank if the name of device is not detected.

2. Printer:

Displays the printer driver installed in the computer.

Select the printer for which you want to change the association.

3. OK

Performs association.

351


Display the network information that is set for the printers and the computers.

To display the Network Information screen, select Network Information from the View menu.

1. OK

Returns to the Canon IJ Network Tool screen.

2. Copy All Information

All network information displayed is copied to the clipboard.

352

Appendix for Network Communication

Using the Card Slot over a Network

When the Printer Driver Is Not Associated with a Port

About Technical Terms

Restrictions

About Firewall

353

Using the Card Slot over a Network

Note


Mounting the Card Slot as the Network Drive

Restrictions on Card Slot Use over a Network

Mounting the Card Slot as the Network Drive

The card slot must be mounted to use it over a network.

To mount the card slot as the network drive, follow the procedure below.

1. Insert a memory card into the card slot of the machine.

2.


3. Select the machine in Printers:.

4. Select Maintenance... on the Settings menu.

5. Click Setup.

6. Specify the drive letter, then click OK.

354

7. Make sure that the card slot is mounted.

When the card slot is mounted, the following icon appears on Computer (or My Computer).

Restrictions on Card Slot Use over a Network

• The card slot can be shared by multiple computers, if the machine is connected to a network. Multiple computers can read files from a memory card in the card slot at the same time. However, while one computer is writing a file into a memory card, other computers cannot access the same file.

• If your computer joins a domain, the card slot may not be mounted as the network drive.

• If you use the memory card stored the large size files or many files, a large amount of card access may be generated. In this case, the operation in the memory card may be impossible or slow. Operate after the Access lamp of the machine is lit.

• When you access the network drive for the card slot over the network, file names consisting of eight or less lowercase letters (not including its extension) may be shown in uppercase.

For example, a file name such as "abcdefg.doc" will be "ABCDEFG.DOC", while a name such as

"AbcdeFG.doc" will appear the same.

The file is not actually renamed, but merely appears to be changed.

• When you enable a memory card in the card slot of the machine to be writable only from a USBconnected computer, you cannot access the network drive of the card slot. On the other hand, when you enable it to be writable only from a LAN-connected computer, the card slot is not detected via

USB. Make sure that the card slot setting is selected properly according to your connection method.

To read files from a memory card via USB and over a network, disable the function to write files to a memory card from a computer. You cannot write files to a memory card in either way with this setting.

• When you enable a memory card in the card slot of the machine to be writable only from a LANconnected computer, you can write files to a memory card from a computer connected to a network.

Note that it may increase the risk that the data on the memory card is infected by computer viruses or accessed illegally.

It is recommended to use the access control function of the machine or connect to the Internet via a router. For information on using a router, contact your Internet service provider or a network device manufacturer.

• If you write files to a memory card over a network when IJ Network Scanner Selector EX is not running, the Date Modified of the files may not be proper. Make sure to start up IJ Network Scanner

Selector EX before you write files to a memory card over the network. For details, refer to "IJ Network

Scanner Selector EX Menu and Setting Screen" from the HOME of your product's Online Manual.

355

When the Printer Driver Is Not Associated with a Port

If No Driver is displayed for the printer's name on the Canon IJ Network Tool screen, the printer driver is not associated with a created port.

To associate a port with a printer driver, follow the procedure below.

1.


2. Select the printer displayed as No Driver on Name.

3. Select Associate Port... on the Settings menu.

The Associate Port screen is displayed.

4. Select a printer to associate with a port.

The list of the printers that the printer driver is installed is displayed at Printer: on the Associate Port screen. Select a printer to associate with a created port.

5. Click OK.

356

About Technical Terms

T

U

R

S

W

O

P

L

M

I

K

D

F

In this section, technical terms used in the manual are explained.

A

B

C

A

• Access Point

A wireless transceiver or base station that receives information from wireless clients/the machine and rebroadcasts it. Required in an infrastructure network.

• Access point mode

The machine is used as an access point to connect external wireless communication devices (e.g.

computers, smartphones, or tablets) in an environment where no access point or wireless LAN router is available. You can connect up to 5 devices to the machine using the access point mode.

• Ad-hoc

Client computer and machine setting where wireless communication occurs on a peer-to-peer basis, i.e., all clients in with the same SSID/network name communicate directly with each other. No access point is required. This machine does not support ad-hoc communication.

• Admin Password

Administrator password in IJ Network Tool to restrict access to network users. It must be entered to access the printer and change printer settings.

• AES

An encryption method. It is optional for WPA/WPA2. Strong cryptographic algorithm adopted within

U.S. government organizations for information processing.

357

• Authentication Method

The method that an access point uses to authenticate a printer through a wireless LAN. The methods are agreeable each other.

When using WEP as an encryption method, the authentication method is able to fix to Open System or Shared Key.

For WPA/WPA2, authentication method is PSK.

◦ Auto

The printer automatically changes its authentication method to match the access point.

◦ Open System

In this authentication method, the communication partner is authenticated without using WEP key even if Use WEP is selected.

◦ Shared Key

In this authentication method, the communication partner is authenticated using the WEP key that was set for encryption.

B

• Bonjour

A service built into Mac OS X operating system to detect the connectable devices on a network automatically.

C

• Channel

Frequency channel for wireless communication. In the infrastructure mode, the channel is automatically adjusted to match that set to the access point. This machine supports channels 1 to 13.

(Channels 12 and 13 are not supported depending on the country or region of purchase.) Note that the number of channels that can be used for your wireless LAN varies depending on the region or country.

D

• Default Gateway

A relay device to connect to another network such as a router or a computer.

• DHCP server functionality

The router or the access point assigns an IP address automatically whenever the printer or the personal computer on a network starts up.

• DNS server

A server that converts device names into IP addresses. When specifying IP addresses manually, specify the addresses of both a primary and a secondary server.

358

F

• Firewall

It is a system that prevents an unlawful computer access in the network. To prevent, you can use the firewall function of a broadband router, the security software installed in the computer, or operation system for computer.

I

• IEEE 802.11b

International standard for wireless LAN using the 2.4 GHz frequency range with a throughput of up to

11 Mbps.

• IEEE 802.11g

International standard for wireless LAN using the 2.4 GHz frequency range with a throughput of up to

54 Mbps. Compatible with 802.11b.

• IEEE 802.11n

International standard for wireless LAN using the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz frequency ranges. Even when using two or more antennas simultaneously or obtaining a bigger transfer rate than before by using multiple communication channels at the same time, the transmission speed may be influenced by the connected apparatus.

At the maximum transfer rate of 600 Mbps, it is possible to communicate with multiple computer terminals within a dozen or so metre radius.

Compatible with 802.11b and 802.11g.

• Infrastructure

Client computer and machine setup where all wireless communications pass through an access point.

• IP Address

A unique number with four parts separated by dots. Every network device that is connected to the

Internet has an IP address. Example: 192.168.0.1

An IP address is usually assigned by an access point or a DHCP server of the router automatically.

• IPv4/IPv6

They are internetwork-layer protocol used on the internet. IPv4 uses 32-bit addresses and IPv6 uses

128-bit addresses.

K

• Key Format

Select either ASCII or Hex as the WEP key format. The character that can be used for the WEP key differs depending on the selected key formats.

◦ ASCII

Specify with a 5 or 13-character string that can include alphanumeric and underscore "_" characters. It is case-sensitive.

359

◦ Hex

Specify a 10-digit or 26-digit string that can contain hexadecimal (0 to 9, A to F, and a to f).

• Key Length

Length of the WEP key. Select either 64 bits or 128 bits. Longer key length allows you to set a more complex WEP key.

L

• Link Quality

The status of connection between the access point and the printer excluding noise (interference) is indicated with a value from 0 to 100%.

• LPR

A platform-independent printing protocol used in TCP/IP networks. It is not supported bidirectional communication.

M

• MAC Address

Also known as the physical address. A unique and permanent hardware identifier that is assigned to network devices by its manufacturer. MAC addresses are 48 bits long and are written as a hexadecimal number separated by colons, i.e., 11:22:33:44:55:66.

O

• Operation Status

Indicates the status on whether the printer can be used.

P

• Proxy server

A server that links a LAN-connected computer to the Internet. When using a proxy server, specify the address and the port number of the proxy server.

• PSK

An encryption method employed by WPA/WPA2.

R

• Router

A relay device to connect to another network.

360

S

• Signal Strength

The strength of the signal received by the printer from the access point is indicated with a value from

0 to 100%.

• SSID

Unique label for wireless LAN. It is often represented such as a network name or an access point name.

SSID distinguishes one wireless LAN from another to prevent interference.

The printer and all clients on a wireless LAN must use the same SSID in order to communicate with each other. The SSID can be up to 32 characters long, and is made up of alphanumeric characters.

The SSID may also be referred to by its network name.

• Stealth

In the stealth mode, an access point hides itself by not broadcasting its SSID. The client must specify the SSID set to the access point to detect it.

• Subnet Mask

IP address has two components, the network address and the host address. Subnet Mask used to calculate the Subnet Mask address from the IP address. A Subnet Mask is usually assigned by an access point or a DHCP server of the router automatically.

Example:

IP Address: 192.168.127.123

Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0

Subnet Mask Address: 192.168.127.0

T

• TCP/IP

Suite of communications protocols used to connect hosts on the Internet or the LAN. This protocol allows different terminals to communicate with each other.

• TKIP

An encryption protocol employed by WPA/WPA2.

U

• USB

Serial interface designed to enable you to "hot-swap" devices, i.e., by plugging and unplugging them without turning off the power.

361

W

• WCN (Windows Connect Now)

Users running Windows Vista or later can obtain the setting information directly via wireless network

(WCN-NET).

• WEP/WEP Key

An encryption method employed by IEEE 802.11. Shared security key used to encrypt and decrypt data sent over wireless networks. This printer supports key length of 64 bits or 128 bits, key format of

ASCII code or Hexadecimal, and key number of 1 to 4.

• Wi-Fi

International association that certifies interoperability of wireless LAN products based on the IEEE

802.11 specification.

This machine is a Wi-Fi authorized product.

• Wireless LAN

A network that, instead of being connected by physical wires, is connected by a wireless technology, such as Wi-Fi.

• WPA

Security framework announced by the Wi-Fi Alliance in October 2002. The security has been strengthened more than WEP.

◦ Authentication

WPA defines the following authentication methods: PSK that can be used without an authentication server, plus WPA-802.1x that do require an authentication server.

This machine supports WPA-PSK.

◦ Passphrase

This encrypted key is used to perform WPA-PSK authentication.

The passphrase should be a string of 8 to 63 alphanumeric characters or a 64-digit hexadecimal value.

• WPA2

Security framework released by the Wi-Fi Alliance in September 2004 as a later version of WPA.

Provides a stronger encryption mechanism through Advanced Encryption Standard (AES).

◦ Authentication

WPA2 defines the following authentication methods: PSK that can be used without an authentication server, plus WPA2-802.1x that do require an authentication server.

This machine supports WPA2-PSK.

◦ Passphrase

This encrypted key is used to perform WPA2-PSK authentication.

The passphrase should be a string of 8 to 63 alphanumeric characters or a 64-digit hexadecimal value.

362

• WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)

WPS is a standard for easy and secure establishment of a wireless network.

There are 2 primary methods used in the Wi-Fi Protected Setup:

PIN entry: a mandatory method of setup for all WPS certified devices

Push button configuration (PBC): an actual push button on the hardware or through a simulated push button in the software.

363

Restrictions

If you use a printer over the wireless LAN, the printer may recognize nearby wireless systems, you should set a network key (WEP or WPA/WPA2) to the access point to encrypt wireless transmission. Wireless communication with a product that does not comply with the Wi-Fi standard cannot be guaranteed.

Connecting with too many computers may affect the printer performance, such as printing speed.

364

About Firewall

A firewall is a function of the security software installed in the computer or operation system for computer, and is a system that is designed to prevent unauthorized access to a network.

Precautions When a Firewall Function is Enabled

• A firewall function may limit communications between a printer and a computer. This may disable printer setup and communications.

• During the printer setup, you may be prompted to enable or disable communications, depending on the firewall function of the security software or operation system. If so, choose to enable communications.

• When using IJ Network Tool, you may be prompted to enable or disable communications, depending on the firewall function of the security software. If so, choose to enable communications.

• If you cannot set up the printer, temporarily disable the firewall function of the security software or operation system.

Important

• If you disabled the firewall function, disconnect your network from the Internet.

• Some applications (like the network configuration software) override firewall settings. Check the application's settings beforehand.

• If the printer you use is set to Get IP address automatically, the IP address changes every time the printer connects to the network. This may disable printer setup and communications, depending on the firewall settings. In this case, either change the firewall settings or assign a fixed IP address to the printer. An IP address can be set using IJ Network Tool.

Changing the Settings in the Wireless LAN Sheet

Changing the Settings in the Wired LAN Sheet

When assigning a fixed IP address to the printer, you will need to specify an IP address with which the computer can communicate.

Note

• For the operation system firewall settings or the security software firewall settings, refer to the instruction manual of the computer or software, or contact its manufacturer.

365

Tips for Ensuring Optimal Printing Quality

Useful Information about Ink

Key Points to Successful Printing

Be Sure to Check Paper Settings before Printing

Be Sure to Set Cassette Paper Information after Loading Paper

Canceling a Print Job

Key to Enjoying Consistent Printing Quality

Precautions for Safe Transport of the Machine

366

Useful Information about Ink

How is ink used for various purposes other than printing?

Ink may be used for purposes other than printing.

When you use the Canon printer for the first time after you install the bundled ink tanks, the printer consumes a small amount of ink in the amount to enable printing by filling the nozzles of the Print Head with ink. For this reason, the number of sheets that can be printed with the first ink tanks is fewer than the succeeding ink tanks.

The printing costs described in the brochures or websites are based on the consumption data from not the first ink tank /ink cartridge but the succeeding ink tank /ink cartridge.

Ink is sometimes used to maintain the optimal printing quality.

To keep printer's performance, Canon printer performs cleaning automatically according to its condition.

When the printer performs cleaning, a small amount of ink is consumed. In this case, all colors of ink may be consumed.

[Cleaning function]

The cleaning function helps the printer to suck air bubbles or ink itself from the nozzle and thus prevents print quality degradation or nozzle clogging.

Does black-and-white printing use color ink?

Black-and-white printing may use ink other than black ink depending on the type of printing paper or the settings of the printer driver. So, color ink is consumed even when printing in black-and-white.

Why does the machine have two black ink tanks?

There are two kinds of black ink in the machine: dye ink (BK) and pigment ink (PGBK).

The dye ink is used mainly for printing photos, illustration, etc., and the pigment ink is used for text-based documents. Each has different purposes so that even if one runs out, another will not be used instead. If either of them runs out, the ink tank replacement is required.

These two inks are automatically used depending on the type of printing paper or the settings of the printer driver. You cannot change the usage of these inks yourself.

The ink lamp indicates when ink is running low.

The inside of the ink tank consists of (A) the part where ink is preserved and (B) the sponge with absorbed ink.

When the ink (A) runs out, the ink lamp flashes slowly to indicate that the ink is running low.

Then, when the ink (B) runs out, the ink lamp flashes fast to indicate that the ink tank needs to be replaced with a new one.

367


368

Key Points to Successful Printing

Check the machine status before printing!

• Is the print head OK?

If a print head nozzle is clogged, print will be faint and papers will be wasted. Print the nozzle check pattern to check the print head.

Maintenance Procedure

• Is the inside of the machine smeared with ink?

After printing large quantities of paper or performing borderless printing, the area where papers go through may get smeared with ink. Clean the inside of your machine with Bottom Plate Cleaning .

Check how to load the paper correctly!

• Is the paper loaded in the correct orientation?

To load paper in a cassette, load paper WITH THE PRINT SIDE FACING DOWN.

Loading Paper

(A) cassette 1

(B) cassette 2

• Is the paper curled?

The curled paper causes paper jam. Flatten the curled paper, then reload it.

"Load the paper after correcting its curl." in Paper Is Smudged/Printed Surface Is Scratched

369

Be Sure to Check Paper Settings before Printing

Before printing, make paper settings in the operation panel or the computer screen.

There are various types of paper, such as paper with a special surface coating for printing photos at optimal quality and paper suitable for documents.

Each media type has specific preset settings (how ink is used and sprayed, distance from nozzles, etc.), that allow you to print to that type with optimal image quality. The wrong paper settings may cause poor printout color quality or scratches on the printed surface.

If you notice blurring or uneven colors, increase the print quality setting and try printing again.

370

Be Sure to Set Cassette Paper Information after Loading Paper

When you insert a cassette into the machine after loading paper, the screen for setting the type and size of paper is displayed. Set the cassette paper information according to the type and size of loaded paper.

To prevent incorrect printing, this machine has a function that detects whether the information set for the paper loaded in the cassette matches the paper settings. Before printing, make paper settings in accordance with the cassette paper information. When this function is enabled, an error message is displayed if these settings do not match to prevent incorrect printing. When this error message is displayed, check and correct the paper settings.

To check cassette paper information, display the paper information screen on the operation panel.

371

Canceling a Print Job

Never touch the ON button!

If you touch the ON button while printing is in progress, the print data sent from the computer queues in the machine and you may not be able to continue to print.

Touch the Stop button to cancel printing.

372

Key to Enjoying Consistent Printing Quality

The key to printing with the optimal printing quality is to prevent the print head from drying or clogging.

Always observe the following rules for optimal printing quality.

Never unplug the power cord until the power is turned off!

If you touch the ON button to turn off the power, the machine caps the print head (nozzles) automatically to prevent from drying. If you unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before the POWER lamp is turned off, the print head will not be capped properly and this will cause drying or clogging.

When unplugging the power cord , make sure that the POWER lamp is not lit.

Print periodically!

Just as the tip of a felt pen becomes dry and unusable if it has not been used for a long time, even if it is capped, the print head too, may become dried or clogged if the machine has not been used for a long time.

We recommend you to use the machine at least once a month.

Note

• Depending on the type of paper, ink may blur if you trace the printed area with a highlight pen or paint-stick, or bleed if water or sweat comes in contact with the printed area.

373

Precautions for Safe Transport of the Machine

When relocating the machine, make sure of the following.

Important

• Pack the machine in a sturdy box so that it is placed with its bottom facing down, using sufficient protective material to ensure safe transport.

• With the print head and ink tank left installed in the machine, touch the ON button to turn off the power.

This allows the machine to automatically cap the print head, thus preventing it from drying.

• After packing, do not tilt the box containing the machine or turn it on its side or upside down. Doing so may cause the ink to leak during transport and cause damage to the machine.

• When a shipping agent is handling transport of the machine, have its box marked "THIS SIDE UP" to keep the machine with its bottom facing down. Mark also with "FRAGILE" or "HANDLE WITH CARE".

1. Turn the machine off.

2. Confirm that the POWER lamp is off and unplug the power cord .

Important

• Do not unplug the machine while the POWER lamp is lit or flashing, as it may cause malfunction or damage to the machine, making the machine unable to print.

3. Retract the paper output support, then close the paper output tray gently.

The output tray extension is retracted automatically when the paper output tray is closed.

4. Unplug the printer cable from the computer and from the machine, then unplug the power cord from the machine.

5. Use adhesive tape to secure all the covers on the machine to keep them from opening during transportation. Then pack the machine in the plastic bag.

6. Attach the protective material to the machine when packing the machine in the box.

Important

• We recommend to hold and carry out this machine as shown in the figure below. If you hold the cassette, it may fall out of the machine.

374

375

Legal Limitations on Use of Your Product and Use of Images

It may be unlawful to make copies of, scan, print, or use reproductions of the following documents.

The list provided is non-exhaustive. When in doubt, check with a legal representative in your jurisdiction.

• Paper money

• Money orders

• Certificates of deposit

• Postage stamps (canceled or uncanceled)

• Identifying badges or insignias

• Selective service or draft papers

• Checks or drafts issued by governmental agencies

• Motor vehicle licenses and certificates of title

• Traveler's checks

• Food stamps

• Passports

• Immigration papers

• Internal revenue stamps (canceled or uncanceled)

• Bonds or other certificates of indebtedness

• Stock certificates

• Copyrighted works/works of art without permission of copyright owner

376

Specifications

General Specifications

Printing resolution (dpi)

Interface

Print width

Operating environment

Storage environment

Power supply

Power consumption

External dimensions

Weight

9600* (horizontal) x 2400 (vertical)

* Ink droplets can be placed with a pitch of 1/9600 inch at minimum.

USB Port:

Hi-Speed USB *1

LAN Port:

Wired LAN: 100BASE-TX / 10BASE-T

Wireless LAN: IEEE802.11n / IEEE802.11g / IEEE802.11b *2

*1 A computer that complies with Hi-Speed USB standard is required. Since the Hi-Speed USB interface is fully upwardly compatible with USB 1.1, it can be used at USB 1.1.

*2 Setup possible through Standard setup, WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup), WCN

(Windows Connect Now) or Cableless setup.

USB and LAN can be used at the same time.

Wireless LAN and wired LAN cannot be used at the same time.

8 inches/203.2 mm

(for Borderless Printing: 8.5 inches/216 mm)

Temperature: 41 to 95 °F (5 to 35 °C)

Humidity: 10 to 90 % RH (no condensation)

* The performance of the printer may be reduced under certain temperature and humidity conditions.

Recommended conditions:



* For the temperature and humidity conditions of papers such as photo paper, refer to the paper's packaging or the supplied instructions.



AC 100-240 V, 50/60 Hz

Printing (Copy): Approx. 17 W

Standby (minimum): Approx. 1.0 W *1*2

OFF: Approx. 0.2 W *1

*1 USB connection to PC

*2 The wait time for standby cannot be changed.

Approx. 17.2 (W) x 14.6 (D) x 5.9 (H) inches

Approx. 435 (W) x 370 (D) x 148 (H) mm

* With the Paper Output Tray retracted.

Approx. 17.4 lb (Approx. 7.9 kg)

377

Print Head/Ink

* With the Print Head and ink tanks installed.

Total 6656 nozzles (PgBK 1024 nozzles, Y/DyeBK each 512 nozzles, C/M/GY each 1536 nozzles)

Copy Specifications

Multiple copy

Intensity adjustment

Reduction / Enlargement

max. 99 pages

9 positions, Auto intensity (AE copy)

25 % - 400 % (1 % unit)

Scan Specifications

Scanner driver

Maximum scanning size

Scanning resolution

Gradation (Input / Output)

Windows: TWAIN 1.9 Specification, WIA

Mac OS: ICA

A4/Letter, 8.5" x 11.7"/216 x 297 mm

Optical resolution (horizontal x vertical) max: 2400 x 4800 dpi *1

Interpolated resolution max: 19200 x 19200 dpi *2

*1 Optical Resolution represents the maximum sampling rate based on ISO

14473.

*2 Increasing the scanning resolution will limit the maximum possible scanning area.

Gray: 16 bit/8 bit

Color: 48 bit/24 bit (RGB each 16 bit/8 bit)

Network Specifications

Communication protocol

Wired LAN

TCP/IP

Supported Standards: IEEE802.3u (100BASE-TX) / IEEE802.3 (10BASE-T)

Transfer speed: 10 M/100 Mbps (auto switching)

Wireless LAN

Supported Standards: IEEE802.11n / IEEE802.11g / IEEE802.11b

Frequency bandwidth: 2.4 GHz

Channel: 1-11 or 1-13

* Frequency bandwidth and available channels differ depending on country or region.

Communication distance: Indoors 164 feet/50 m

* Effective range varies depending on the installation environment and location.

Security:

WEP (64/128 bits)

WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES)

WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES)

Setup:

378

Standard setup

WPS (Push button configuration/PIN code method)

WCN (WCN-NET)

Cableless setup

Other Features: Administration password

Minimum System Requirements

Conform to the operating system's requirements when higher than those given here.

Windows

Operating System

Browser

Hard Disk Space

Display

Windows 8, Windows 8.1

Windows 7, Windows 7 SP1

Windows Vista SP1, Windows Vista SP2

Windows XP SP3 32-bit only

Internet Explorer 8 or later

3 GB

Note: For bundled software installation.

The necessary amount of hard disk space may be changed without notice.

XGA 1024 x 768

Mac OS

Operating System

Browser

Hard Disk Space

Mac OS X v10.6.8 or later

Safari 5 or later

1.5 GB

Note: For bundled software installation.

The necessary amount of hard disk space may be changed without notice.

XGA 1024 x 768

Display

Other Supported OS

Some functions may not be available with each OS. Refer to the manual or the Canon web site for details on operation with iOS, Android, and Windows RT.

Mobile Printing Capability

Apple AirPrint

Google Cloud Print

Print from E-mail

PIXMA Cloud Link

• An internet connection is required to view the Online Manual.

379

• Windows: Operation can only be guaranteed on a computer with Windows 8.1, Windows 8,

Windows 7, Windows Vista or Windows XP pre-installed.

• Windows: A CD-ROM Drive or internet connection is required during software installation.

• Windows: Internet Explorer 8, 9, 10 or 11 is required to install Easy-WebPrint EX.

• Windows: Some functions may not be available with Windows Media Center.

• Windows: .NET Framework 4 or 4.5 must be installed to use the Windows software.

• Windows: XPS Essentials Pack is required to print on Windows XP.

• Windows: The TWAIN driver (ScanGear) is based on the TWAIN 1.9 Specification and requires the

Data Source Manager bundled with the operating system.

• Mac OS: Hard Disk must be formatted as Mac OS Extended (Journaled) or Mac OS Extended.

• Mac OS: For Mac OS, an internet connection is required during software installation.

• In an in-house network environment, the 5222 port must be open. Contact the network administrator for details.

Information in this guide is subject to change without notice.

380

About the Administrator Password

An administrator password "canon" is already specified for the printer at the time of purchase.

Important

• For security reasons, it is recommended to change the password before you use the printer.

• You can change the password using one of the tools below. (Some tools may not be available depending on the printer you are using.)

• operation panel of the printer

• IJ Network Tool

• printer information screen displayed on some Canon application software

• When you change the password, use 0 to 32 alphanumeric characters.

• If the password has been changed while you are sharing the printer and you do not know the password, ask the administrator of the printer you are using.

• The password reverts to the default setting by initializing the printer settings.

381

Printing

Printing from a Computer

Printing with Web Service

Printing Using the Operation Panel of the

Machine

Printing from a Digital Camera


382

Printing from a Computer

Printing with Application Software that You are Using (Printer Driver)

383

Printing with Application Software that You are Using (Printer

Driver)

Printing with Easy Setup

Basic

Various Printing Methods

Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data

Overview of the Printer Driver

Printer Driver Description

Updating the MP Drivers

384

Printing with Easy Setup

This section describes the simple procedure for setting the Quick Setup tab so that you can carry out appropriate printing on this printer.

1.

Check that the printer is turned on

2.

Load paper on the printer


4. Select a frequently used profile

In Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup tab, select a printing profile suited for the purpose.

When you select a printing profile, the Additional Features, Media Type, and Printer Paper Size settings are automatically switched to the values that were preset.

5. Select the print quality

For Print Quality, select High, Standard, or Draft according to your purpose.

385

Important

• The print quality settings that can be selected may differ depending on a printing profile.

6. Check the paper source

Check that Paper Source is set to Cassette.

Important

• The paper size determines whether the cassette 1 or cassette 2 is used. The cassette to be used is displayed below Paper Source.

7. Complete the setup

386

Click OK.

When you execute print, the document is printed with settings that match your purpose.

Important

• When you select the Always Print with Current Settings check box, all settings specified on the

Quick Setup, Main, and Page Setup tabs are saved, and you can print with the same settings from the next time as well.

• In the Commonly Used Settings window, click Save... to register the specified settings .

Note

• If the paper settings on the printer driver differ from the cassette paper information registered on the printer, an error may occur. For instructions on what to do if an error occurs, see " Paper setting for

Printing ."

For details about the cassette paper information to be registered on the printer, see the following:

• Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Media Type)

• Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Paper Size)

387

Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Media Type)

When you use this printer, selecting a media type and paper size that matches the print purpose will help you achieve the best print results.

You can use the following media types on this printer.

Commercially available papers

Media name Media Type in the printer driver

Cassette paper information registered on the printer

Plain Paper (including recycled paper)

Envelopes

Other Photo Paper

Plain Paper

Envelope

Other Photo Paper

Plain paper

Envelope

Other Photo Paper

Canon genuine papers (Photo Printing)

Media name <Model No.> Media Type in the printer driver


Photo Paper Plus Glossy II <PP-201>

Photo Paper Pro Platinum <PT-101>

Photo Paper Plus Glossy II

Photo Paper Pro Platinum

Plus Glossy II

Pro Platinum

Photo Paper Pro Luster <LU-101>

Photo Paper Pro Luster

Pro Luster

Photo Paper Plus Semi-gloss <SG-201> Photo Paper Plus Semi-gloss Plus Semi-gloss

Photo Paper Glossy <GP-501/GP-601> Glossy Photo Paper Glossy

Matte Photo Paper <MP-101>

Matte Photo Paper

Matte

Canon genuine papers (Business Letter Printing)

Media name <Model No.> Media Type in the printer driver


High Resolution Paper <HR-101N> High Resolution Paper High-Res Paper

Canon genuine papers (Original Products)

Media name <Model No.> Media Type in the printer driver Cassette paper information registered on the printer

T-Shirt Transfers <TR-301> T-Shirt Transfers Others

Photo Stickers <PS-101>

Glossy Photo Paper

Glossy

388

Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Paper Size)

When you use this printer, selecting a paper size that matches the print purpose will help you achieve the best print results.

You can use the following paper sizes on this printer.

Printer Paper Size in the printer driver

Letter 8.5"x11" 22x28cm

Letter (Art Paper Margin 35)

Legal 8.5"x14" 22x36cm

A5

A4

Art A4 (Margin 35)

B5

4"x6" 10x15cm

5"x7" 13x18cm

8"x10" 20x25cm

L 89x127mm

2L 127x178mm

Envelope Com 10

Envelope DL

Yougata 4 4.13"x9.25"

Yougata 6 3.86"x7.48"

Custom Size


Letter

Letter

Legal

A5

A4

A4

B5

KG/4"x6"(10x15)

2L/5"x7"(13x18)

8"x10"(20x25cm)

L(89x127mm)

2L/5"x7"(13x18)

Envelope Com 10

Envelope DL

Others

Others

Others

389

Various Printing Methods

Setting a Page Size and Orientation

Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order

Setting the Stapling Margin

Execute Borderless Printing

Fit-to-Page Printing

Scaled Printing

Page Layout Printing

Tiling/Poster Printing

Booklet Printing

Duplex Printing

Stamp/Background Printing

Registering a Stamp

Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background

Setting Up Envelope Printing

Printing on Postcards

Displaying the Print Results before Printing

Setting Paper Dimensions (Custom Size)

Editing the Print Document or Reprinting from the Print History

390

Setting a Page Size and Orientation

The paper size and orientation are essentially determined by the application software. When the page size and orientation set for Page Size and Orientation on the Page Setup tab are same as those set with the application software, you do not need to select them on the Page Setup tab.

When you are not able to specify them with the application software, the procedure for selecting a page size and orientation is as follows:

You can also set page size and orientation on the Quick Setup tab.


2. Select the paper size

Select a page size from the Page Size list on the Page Setup tab.

3. Set Orientation

Select Portrait or Landscape for Orientation. Check Rotate 180 degrees check box when you want to perform printing with the original being rotated 180 degrees.


Click OK.

When you execute print, the document will be printed with the selected page size and the orientation.

Note

• If Normal-size is selected for Page Layout, then Automatically reduce large document that the

printer cannot output is displayed.

Normally, you can leave the check box checked. During printing, if you do not want to reduce large documents that cannot be printed on the printer, uncheck the check box.

391

Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order

The procedure for specifying the number of copies and printing order is as follows:

You can also set the number of copies on the Quick Setup tab.


2. Specify the number of copies to be printed

For Copies on the Page Setup tab, specify the number of copies to be printed.

3. Specify the print order

Check the Print from Last Page check box when you want to print from the last page in order, and uncheck the check box when you want to print from the first page.

Check the Collate check box when you are printing multiple copies of a document and want to print out all pages in each copy together. Uncheck this check box when you want to print all pages with the same page number together.

• Print from Last Page: /Collate:



392



Click OK.

When you execute print, the specified number of copies will be printed with the specified printing order.

Important

• When the application software that you used to create the document has the same function, specify the settings on the printer driver. However, if the print results are not acceptable, specify the function settings on the application software. When you specify the number of copies and the printing order with both the application software and this printer driver, the number of copies may be multiplied numbers of the two settings or the specified printing order may not be enabled.

• Print from Last Page appears grayed out and is unavailable when Tiling/Poster is selected for Page

Layout.

• When Booklet is selected for Page Layout, Print from Last Page and Collate appear grayed out and cannot be set.

• When Duplex Printing is selected, Print from Last Page appears grayed out and cannot be set.

Note

• By setting both Print from Last Page and Collate, you can perform printing so that papers are collated one by one starting from the last page.

These settings can be used in combination with Normal-size, Borderless, Fit-to-Page, Scaled, and

Page Layout.

393

Setting the Stapling Margin

The procedure for setting the staple side and the margin width is as follows:


2. Specify the side to be stapled

Check the position of the stapling margin from Stapling Side on the Page Setup tab.

The printer analyzes the Orientation and Page Layout settings, and automatically selects the best staple position. When you want to change the setting, select from the list.

3. Set the margin width

If necessary, click Specify Margin... and set the margin width, and then click OK.

394

Note

• The printer automatically reduces the print area depending on the staple position margin.


Click OK on the Page Setup tab.

When you execute print, the data is printed with the specified staple side and margin width.

Important

• Stapling Side and Specify Margin... appear grayed out and are unavailable when:

• Borderless, Tiling/Poster, or Booklet is selected for Page Layout

• Scaled is selected for Page Layout (When Duplex Printing is also selected, only Stapling Side can be specified.)

395

Execute Borderless Printing

The borderless printing function allows you to print data without any margin by enlarging the data so that it extends slightly off the paper. In standard printing, margins are created around the document area.

However, in borderless printing function, these margins are not created. When you want to print data such as a photo without providing any margin around it, set borderless printing.

The procedure for performing borderless printing is as follows:

You can also set borderless printing in Additional Features on the Quick Setup tab.

Setting Borderless Printing


2. Set borderless printing

Select Borderless from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab.


When a message prompting you to change the media type appears, select a media type from the list and click OK.

3. Check the paper size

396

Check the Page Size list. When you want to change it, select another page size from the list. The list displays only sizes that can be used for borderless printing.

4. Adjust the amount of extension from the paper

If necessary, adjust the amount of extension using the Amount of Extension slider.

Moving the slider to the right increases the amount extending off the paper, and moving the slider to the left decreases the amount.

It is recommended to set the slider at the second position from the right for most cases.

Important

• When the Amount of Extension slider is set to the rightmost position, the back side of the paper may become smudged.


Click OK.

When you execute print, the data is printed without any margins on the paper.

Important

• When a page size that cannot be used for borderless printing is selected, the size is automatically changed to the valid page sizes for borderless printing.

• When Borderless is selected, the Printer Paper Size, Duplex Printing, Stapling Side settings, and the Stamp/Background... (Stamp...) button on the Page Setup tab appear grayed out and are unavailable.

• When Other Fine Art Paper, Envelope, High Resolution Paper, or T-Shirt Transfers is selected from the Media Type list on the Main tab, you cannot perform borderless printing.

• Depending on the type of the media used during borderless printing, the print quality may deteriorate at the top and bottom of the sheet or stains may form.

• When the ratio of the height to the width differs from the image data, a portion of the image may not be printed depending on the size of the media used.

In this case, crop the image data with an application software according to the paper size.

Note

• When Plain Paper is selected for Media Type on the Main tab, borderless printing is not recommended. Therefore, the message for media selection appears.

When you are using plain paper for test printing, select Plain Paper, and click OK.

Expanding the Range of the Document to Print

Setting a large amount of extension allows you to perform borderless printing with no problems. However, the portion of the document extending off the paper range will not be printed and for this reason, the subjects around the perimeter of a photo may not be printed.

When you are not satisfied with the result of borderless printing, reduce the amount of extension. The extension amount decreases as the Amount of Extension slider is moved to the left.

397

Important

• When the amount of extension is decreased, an unexpected margin may be produced on the print, depending on the size of the paper.

Note

• When the Amount of Extension slider is set to the leftmost position, image data will be printed in the full size. If you set this when printing the address side of a postcard, the postal code of the sender is printed in the correct position.

• When Preview before printing is checked on the Main tab, you can confirm whether there will be no margin before printing.

398

Fit-to-Page Printing

The procedure for printing a document that is automatically enlarged or reduced to fit the page size to be used is as follows:


2. Set fit-to-page printing

Select Fit-to-Page from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab.

3. Select the paper size of the document

Using Page Size, select the page size that is set with your application software.

4. Select the print paper size

Select the size of the paper loaded in the printer from the Printer Paper Size list.

When the Printer Paper Size is smaller than the Page Size, the page image will be reduced. When the

Printer Paper Size is larger than the Page Size, the page image will be enlarged.

The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver.

399


Click OK.

When you execute print, the document will be enlarged or reduced to fit to the page size.

400

Scaled Printing

The procedure for printing a document with pages enlarged or reduced is as follows:


2. Set scaled printing

Select Scaled from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab.

3. Select the paper size of the document

Using Page Size, select the page size that is set with your application software.

4. Set the scaling rate by using one of the following methods:

• Select a Printer Paper Size

When the printer paper size is smaller than the Page Size, the page image will be reduced. When the printer paper size is larger than the Page Size, the page image will be enlarged.

401

• Specify a scaling factor

Directly type in a value into the Scaling box.



Click OK.

When you execute print, the document will be printed with the specified scale.

Important

• When the application software which you used to create the original has the scaled printing function, configure the settings on your application software. You do not need to configure the same setting in the printer driver.

402

Note

• Selecting Scaled changes the printable area of the document.

403

Page Layout Printing

The page layout printing function allows you to print more than one page image on a single sheet of paper.

The procedure for performing page layout printing is as follows:


2. Set page layout printing

Select Page Layout from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab.




4. Set the number of pages to be printed on one sheet and the page order

If necessary, click Specify..., specify the following settings in the Page Layout Printing dialog box, and click OK.

404

Pages

To change the number of pages to be printed on a single sheet of paper, select the number of pages from the list.

Page Order

To change the page arrangement order, select a placement method from the list.

Page Border

To print a page border around each document page, check this check box.



When you execute print, the specified number of pages will be arranged on each sheet of paper in the specified order.

405

Tiling/Poster Printing

The tiling/poster printing function allows you to enlarge image data, divide it into several pages, and print these pages on separate sheets of paper. You can also paste the pages together to create a large print like a poster.

The procedure for performing tiling/poster printing is as follows:

Setting Tiling/Poster Printing


2. Set tiling/poster printing

Select Tiling/Poster from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab.




4. Set the number of image divisions and the pages to be printed

406

If necessary, click Specify..., specify the following settings in the Tiling/Poster Printing dialog box, and then click OK.

Image Divisions

Select the number of divisions (vertical x horizontal).

As the number of divisions increases, the number of sheets used for printing increases. If you are pasting pages together to create a poster, increasing the number of divisions allows you to create a larger poster.

Print "Cut/Paste" in margins

To leave out words "Cut" and "Paste", uncheck this check box.

Note

• This feature may be unavailable when certain printer drivers or operating environments are used.

Print "Cut/Paste" lines in margins

To leave out cut lines, uncheck this check box.

Print page range

Specifies the printing range. Select All under normal circumstances.

To reprint only a specific page, select Pages and enter the page number you want to print. To specify multiple pages, enter the page numbers by separating them with commas or by entering a hyphen between the page numbers.

Note

• You can also specify the print range by clicking the pages in the settings preview.



When you execute print, the document will be divided into several pages during printing.

Printing Only Specific Pages

If ink becomes faint or runs out during printing, you can reprint only the specific pages by following the procedure below:

1. Set the print range

In the settings preview on the left of the Page Setup tab, click the pages that do not need to be printed.

The pages that were clicked are deleted, and only the pages to be printed are displayed.

407

Note

• Click the deleted pages to display them again.

• Right-click the settings preview to select Print all pages or Delete all pages.


After completing the page selection, click OK.

When you execute print, only specified pages will be printed.

Important

• Since tiling/poster printing enlarges the document when printing it, the print results may become coarse.

408

Booklet Printing

The booklet printing function allows you to print data for a booklet. Data is printed on both sides of the paper. This type of printing ensures that pages can be collated properly, in page number order, when the printed sheets are folded and stapled at the center.

The procedure for performing booklet printing is as follows:


2. Set booklet printing

Select Booklet from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab.

The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the window.



4. Set the margin for stapling and the margin width

Click Specify... and specify the following settings in the Booklet Printing dialog box, and then click OK.

409

Margin for stapling

Select which side should the stapling margin be on when the booklet is completed.

Insert blank page

To leave one side of a sheet blank, check the check box, and select the page to be left blank.

Margin

Enter the margin width. The specified width from the center of the sheet becomes the margin width for one page.

Page Border

To print a page border around each document page, check the check box.



When you execute print, the document is automatically printed first on one side of a sheet of paper and then on the opposite side.

When the printing is complete, fold the paper at the center of the margin and make a booklet.

Important

• Booklet cannot be selected when a media type other than Plain Paper, Hagaki A, or Hagaki is selected for Media Type on the Main tab.

Note

• The stamp and background are not printed on the inserted blank sheets with the Insert blank page function of booklet printing.

410

Duplex Printing

The procedure for printing data on both sides of a sheet of paper is as follows:

You can also set duplex printing in Additional Features on the Quick Setup tab.

Performing Automatic Duplex Printing

You can perform the duplex printing without having to turn over the paper.


2. Set automatic duplex printing

Check the Duplex Printing check box on the Page Setup tab and confirm that Automatic is checked.

3. Select the layout

Select Normal-size, Fit-to-Page, Scaled, or Page Layout from the Page Layout list.

4. Set the print area

When you perform duplex printing, the print area of the document becomes slightly narrower than usual and the document may not fit on one page.

Click Print Area Setup..., select one of the following process methods, and then click OK.

411

Use normal-size printing

Print without reducing the page.

Use reduced printing

Reduce the page slightly during printing.


The best Stapling Side is selected automatically from the Orientation and Page Layout settings. To change the setting, select another stapling side from the list.





When you execute print, duplex printing will be started.

Performing Duplex Printing Manually

You can perform the duplex printing manually.


2. Set duplex printing

Check the Duplex Printing check box and uncheck the Automatic check box on the Page Setup tab.

412

3. Select the layout

Select Normal-size, Fit-to-Page, Scaled, or Page Layout from the Page Layout list.


The best Stapling Side is selected automatically from the Orientation and Page Layout settings. To change the setting, select another stapling side from the list.





When you execute print, the document is first printed on one side of a sheet of paper. After one side is printed, reload the paper correctly according to the message.

Then click Start Printing to print the opposite side.

Important

• When a media type other than Plain Paper, Hagaki A, or Hagaki is selected from the Media Type list on the Main tab, Duplex Printing appears grayed out and is unavailable.

• When Borderless, Tiling/Poster, or Booklet is selected from the Page Layout list, Duplex Printing and Stapling Side appear grayed out and are unavailable.

• Duplex Printing can be performed only when one of the following paper sizes is selected from Page

Size on the Page Setup tab.

• Letter 8.5"x11" 22x28cm, A5, A4, B5, Hagaki 100x148mm

• After printing the front page, there is an ink drying wait time before starting to print the back page

(Operation stops temporarily). Do not touch the paper during this time. You can change the ink drying wait time at Custom Settings on the Maintenance tab.

413

• When you use the automatic duplex printing function to print a postcard, print the address side first and then print the message side.

Related Topic

Changing the Printer Operation Mode

414

Stamp/Background Printing

Stamp or Background may be unavailable when certain printer drivers or operating environments are used.

The Stamp function allows you to print a stamp text or a bitmap over or behind document data. It also allows you to print date, time and user name. The Background function allows you to print a light illustration behind the document data.

The procedure for performing stamp/background printing is as follows:

Printing a Stamp

"CONFIDENTIAL," "IMPORTANT," and other stamps that are used often in companies are pre-registered.


2. Click Stamp/Background... (Stamp...) on the Page Setup tab

The Stamp/Background (Stamp) dialog box opens.

Note

• With the XPS printer driver, the Stamp/Background... button has become the Stamp... button and only the stamp function can be used.

415

3. Select a stamp

Check the Stamp check box, and select the stamp to be used from the list.

The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the Page Setup tab.

4. Set the stamp details

If necessary, specify the following settings, and then click OK.

Define Stamp... button

To change the stamp text, bitmap, or position , click this.

Place stamp over text

To print the stamp on the front of the document, check this check box.

Note

• The stamp is given priority because the stamp is printed over the document data in the sections where the stamp and the document data overlap. When this check box is unchecked, the stamp is printed behind the document data and may be hidden in the overlapping sections depending on the application software used.

• Place stamp over text cannot be used when the XPS printer driver is used.

When the XPS printer driver is used, the stamp is normally printed in the foreground of the document.

Print semitransparent stamp

Check this check box to print a semi-transparent stamp on the document.

This function is available only when the XPS printer driver is used.

Stamp first page only

To print the stamp only on the first page, check this check box.



When you execute print, the data is printed with the specified stamp.

Printing a Background

Two bitmap files are pre-registered as samples.


2. Click Stamp/Background... on the Page Setup tab

The Stamp/Background dialog box opens.

3. Select the background

Check the Background check box, and select the background to be used from the list.

The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the Page Setup tab.

4. Set the background details

If necessary, complete the following settings, and then click OK.

416

Select Background... button

To use another background or change the layout or density of a background , click this.

Background first page only

To print the background only on the first page, check this check box.



When you execute print, the data is printed with the specified background.

Important

• When Borderless is selected, the Stamp/Background... (Stamp...) button appears grayed out and is unavailable.

Note

• The stamp and background are not printed on blank sheets inserted with the Insert blank page function of booklet printing.

Related Topics

Registering a Stamp

Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background

417

Registering a Stamp

This feature may be unavailable when certain printer drivers or operating environments are used.

You can create and register a new stamp. You can also change and re-register some of the settings of an existing stamp. Unnecessary stamps can be deleted at any time.

The procedure for registering a new stamp is as follows:

Registering a New Stamp


2. Click Stamp/Background... (Stamp...) on the Page Setup tab

The Stamp/Background (Stamp) dialog box opens.

Note


3. Click Define Stamp...

The Stamp Settings dialog box opens.

418

4. Configure the stamp while viewing the preview window

• Stamp tab

Select Text, Bitmap, or Date/Time/User Name that matches your purpose for Stamp Type.

◦ For Text registration, the characters must already be entered in Stamp Text. If necessary, change the TrueType Font, Style, Size, and Outline settings. You can select the color of the stamp by clicking Select Color....

◦ For Bitmap, click Select File... and select the bitmap file (.bmp) to be used. If necessary, change the settings of the Size and Transparent white area.

◦ For Date/Time/User Name, the creation date/time and user name of the printed object are displayed in Stamp Text. If necessary, change the settings of TrueType Font, Style, Size, and Outline. You can select the color of the stamp by clicking Select Color....

Important

• Stamp Text appears grayed out and is unavailable when Date/Time/User Name is selected.

• Placement tab

Select the stamp position from the Position list. You can also select Custom from the Position list and specify coordinates for X-Position and Y-Position.

You can also change the stamp position by dragging the stamp in the preview window.

To change the stamp position angle, type a value in the Orientation box directly.

Important

• Orientation cannot be changed when Bitmap is selected for Stamp Type on the Stamp tab.

5. Save the stamp

Click the Save settings tab and enter a title in the Title box, and then click Save.


Note

• Spaces, tabs, and returns cannot be entered at the beginning or end of a title.

419


Click OK. The Stamp/Background (Stamp) dialog box opens again.

The registered title appears in the Stamp list.

Changing and Registering Some of Stamp Settings

1. Select the stamp for which the settings are to be changed

Select the Stamp check box in the Stamp/Background (Stamp) dialog box. Then from the list, select the title of the stamp to be changed.

2. Click Define Stamp...


3. Configure the stamp while viewing the preview window

4. Overwrite save the stamp

Click Save overwrite on the Save settings tab.

When you want to save the stamp with a different title, type a new title in the Title box and click Save.




The registered title appears in the Stamp list.

Deleting an Unnecessary Stamp

1. Click Define Stamp... in the Stamp/Background (Stamp) dialog box


2. Select the stamp to be deleted

Select the title of the stamp you want to delete from the Stamps list on the Save settings tab. Then click Delete.




420

Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background

This feature may be unavailable when certain printer drivers or operating environments are used.

You can select a bitmap file (.bmp) and register it as a new background. You can also change and register some of the settings of an existing background. An unnecessary background can be deleted.

The procedure for registering image data to be used as a background is as follows:

Registering New Background


2. Click Stamp/Background... on the Page Setup tab

The Stamp/Background dialog box opens.

Note

• With the XPS printer driver, the Stamp/Background... button has become the Stamp... button and Background cannot be used.

3. Click Select Background...

The Background Settings dialog box opens.

421

4. Select the image data to be registered to the background

Click Select File.... Select the target bitmap file (.bmp), and then click Open.

5. Specify the following settings while viewing the preview window

Layout Method

Select how the background image data is to be placed.

When Custom is selected, you can set coordinates for X-Position and Y-Position.

You can also change the background position by dragging the image in the preview window.

Intensity

Set the intensity of the background image data with the Intensity slider. Moving the slider to the right darkens the background, and moving the slider to the left lightens the background. To print the background at the original bitmap intensity, move the slider to the rightmost position.

6. Save the background

Click the Save settings tab and enter a title in the Title box, and then click Save.


Note



Click OK, then it returns to Stamp/Background dialog box.

The registered title appears in the Background list.

Changing and Registering Some Background Settings

1. Select the background for which the settings are to be changed

Select the Background check box in the Stamp/Background dialog box. Then from the list, select the title of the background you want to change.

2. Click Select Background...

422


3. Specify each item on the Background tab while viewing the preview window

4. Save the background

Click Save overwrite on the Save settings tab. When you want to save the background with a different title, enter a new title in the Title box and click Save.




The registered title appears in the Background list.

Deleting an Unnecessary Background

1. Click Select Background... in the Stamp/Background dialog box


2. Select the background to be deleted

Select the title of the background you want to delete from the Backgrounds list on the Save settings tab, and then click Delete.




423

Setting Up Envelope Printing

The procedure for performing envelope printing is as follows:

1.

Load envelope on the printer


3. Select the media type

Select Envelope from Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup tab.


When the Envelope Size Setting dialog box is displayed, select Envelope Com 10, Envelope DL,

Yougata 4 4.13"x9.25", or Yougata 6 3.86"x7.48", and then click OK.

5. Set the orientation

To print the addressee horizontally, select Landscape for Orientation.


Select High or Standard that matches your purpose for Print Quality.


Click OK.

When you execute print, the information is printed on the envelope.

424

Important

• When you execute envelope printing, guide messages are displayed.

To hide the guide messages, check the Do not show this message again check box.

To show the guide again, click the View Printer Status button on the Maintenance tab, and start the

Canon IJ Status Monitor.

Then click Envelope Printing from Display Guide Message of the Option menu to enable the setting.

Note


Printing ."




425

Printing on Postcards

This section describes the procedure for postcard printing.

1.

Load postcard on the printer


3. Select commonly used settings

Display the Quick Setup tab, and for Commonly Used Settings, select Standard.


For Media Type, select Hagaki A, Ink Jet Hagaki, Hagaki K, or Hagaki.

Important

• This printer cannot print on postcards that have photos or stickers attached.

• When you use the automatic duplex printing function to print a postcard, print the address side first and then print the message side.

• When printing on each side of a postcard separately, you will get cleaner printing if you print the message side first and then print the address side.

• The paper settings on the printer driver and the cassette paper information to register on the printer are different, depending on whether you are printing on the address side or the message side. For details about the cassette paper information to be registered on the printer, see the following:



• When you use the automatic duplex printing function, register the paper information for the side to be printed first.


For Printer Paper Size, select Hagaki 100x148mm or Hagaki 2 200x148mm.

Important

• Return postcards can be used only when you print them from the computer.

• When printing a return postcard, always set the paper size to Hagaki 2 200x148mm from your application software or the printer driver.

• Do not fold the return postcard. If a crease is formed, the printer will not be able to feed the postcard properly, and this condition will cause line shifts or a paper jam.

• With return postcards, automatic duplex printing and borderless printing cannot be used.

6. Set the print orientation

To print the address horizontally, set Orientation to Landscape.


For Print Quality, select High or Standard, whichever best suits the purpose.

426


Click OK.

When you execute printing, the data will be printed onto the postcard.

Important

• When you execute postcard printing, a guide message is displayed.

When the guide message is displayed, select Do not show this message again if you do not want any guide messages to be displayed.

To display guide messages again, open the Maintenance tab and click View Printer Status to start the

Canon IJ Status Monitor.

On the Option menu, choose Display Guide Message and click Hagaki Printing to enable the setting.

• When printing on media other than postcards, load the media according to usage method of that media, and click Start Printing.

427

Displaying the Print Results before Printing

If you are using the XPS printer driver, replace "Canon IJ Preview" with "Canon IJ XPS Preview" when reading this information.

You can display and check the print result before printing.

The procedure for displaying the print result before printing is as follows:

You can also set the print results display on the Quick Setup tab.


2. Set the preview

Check the Preview before printing check box on the Main tab.


Click OK.

When you execute print, the Canon IJ Preview opens and displays the print results.

Important

• In the Manual Color Adjustment dialog box, the Color Adjustment tab contains the Print a pattern

for color adjustment check box. When this check box is selected, the Preview before printing appears grayed out and is unavailable.

Related Topic

Canon IJ Preview

428

Setting Paper Dimensions (Custom Size)

You can specify the height and width of paper when its size cannot be selected from the Page Size. Such a paper size is called "custom size."

The procedure for specifying a custom size is as follows:

You can also set a custom size in Printer Paper Size on the Quick Setup tab.



Select Custom... for Page Size on the Page Setup tab.

The Custom Paper Size dialog box opens.

3. Set the custom paper size

Specify Units, and enter the Width and Height of the paper to be used. Then click OK.



When you execute print, the data is printed with the specified paper size.

429

Important

• If the application software that created the document has a function for specifying height and width values, use the application software to set the values. If the application software does not have such a function or if the document does not print correctly, perform the above procedure from the printer driver to set the values.

• Printing may be disabled depending on the size of the specified user-defined media.

For information about printable sizes for user-defined media, see " Media Types You Can Use ."

Note


Printing ."




430

Editing the Print Document or Reprinting from the Print History

This function is unavailable when the standard IJ printer driver is used.

In the Canon IJ XPS preview window, you can edit the print document or retrieve the document print history to print the document.

The procedure for using the Canon IJ XPS Preview is as follows:

Print

Combine Documents

Delete Document

Reset Documents

View Thumbnails

Move Document

Undo

Move Page

Delete Page

Note

• By clicking View Thumbnails, you can display or hide thumbnails of the print documents selected in the Document Name list.

• Clicking Undo reverses the change that just performed.

431

Editing and Printing a Print Document

When printing multiple documents or pages, you can combine documents, change the print sequence of the documents or pages, or delete documents or pages.


2. Set the preview

Check the Preview before printing check box on the Main tab.


Click OK.

The Canon IJ XPS Preview will start and the print result will be displayed before printing.

4. Editing print documents and print pages

• Combining print documents

You can combine multiple print documents to form a single document. By combining print documents, you can prevent blank pages from being inserted when you execute duplex printing or page layout printing.

From the Document Name list, select the documents to be combined. On the Edit menu, select

Combine Documents from Documents to combine the documents in the listed sequence.

To select multiple print documents, hold down the Ctrl key and click the documents to be merged, or hold down the Shift key and press the upper arrow or lower arrow key. You can also click a blank area in the document list and drag the mouse to select multiple documents.

When you combine documents, the documents selected before the combining are deleted from the list and the combined document is added to the list.

• Changing the sequence of print documents or print pages

◦ To change the sequence of the print documents, go to the Document Name list, and select the print document to be moved. Next, on the Edit menu, select Move Document from

Documents, and select the appropriate item. You can also click and drag a print document to change the print sequence.

◦ To change the sequence of the print pages, click View Thumbnails from the Option menu, and select the print page to be moved. Next, on the Edit menu, select Move Page from

Pages, and select the appropriate item. You can also click and drag a print page to change the print sequence.

• Deleting print documents and print pages

◦ To delete a print document, select the target document from the Document Name list, and on the Edit menu, choose Documents and then Delete Document.

◦ To delete a print page, click View Thumbnails from the Option menu, and select the print page to be deleted. Next, on the Edit menu, select Delete Page from Pages.

• Print page recovery

You can recover pages that were deleted with Delete Page.

To recover pages, select the View Deleted Pages check box from the Option menu, and select the pages to be recovered from among the displayed thumbnail pages. Then from the Edit menu chose Pages and then Restore Page.

432

After editing the print documents or print pages, you can change the print settings on the Page

Information, Layout and Manual Color Adjustment tabs as necessary.

Important

• To display the multiple documents in the list, open the preview and execute print again.

• To return the print documents to their original condition before they were edited in the preview, on the Edit menu, select Reset Documents from Documents.

• If the documents to be combined have different print settings, a message may be displayed.

Check the contents of the displayed message before combining the documents.

• If the documents to be combined have different output paper sizes and duplex printing or page layout printing is to be performed, the printer may not produce the expected print results for certain print pages.

Check the preview before printing.

• Depending on the print settings of the print document, some functions may not be available in the Canon IJ XPS preview.

Note

• You can rename Document Name to any name.

5. Executing print

Click Print.

When you execute print, the printer uses the specified settings to print the data.

Reprinting from the Print History

When you click Save Print History on the File menu to enable the setting, the document printed from the preview is saved, and you can reprint the document with the same settings.

1. Displaying the print history

Open the printer driver setup window . Then on the Maintenance tab, select View Print History.

The saved print document is displayed in the preview.

Important

• To limit the number of print history registrations, click History Entry Limit on the File menu.

• If the limit on the number of registration is exceeded, the print history registrations are deleted starting from the oldest one.

2. Selecting a print document

From the Document Name list, select the document to be printed.

3. Executing print

Click Print.

Related Topic

Displaying the Print Results before Printing

433

Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data

Setting the Print Quality Level (Custom)

Printing a Color Document in Monochrome

Adjusting Tone

Specifying Color Correction

Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data

Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver

Printing with ICC Profiles

Interpreting the ICC Profile

Adjusting Color Balance

Adjusting Color Balance Using Sample Patterns (Printer Driver)

Adjusting Brightness

Adjusting Intensity

Adjusting Contrast

Adjusting Intensity/Contrast Using Sample Patterns (Printer Driver)

434

Setting the Print Quality Level (Custom)

The print quality level can be set in the Custom.

The procedure for setting the print quality level is as follows:



On the Main tab, select Custom for Print Quality, and click Set....

The Custom dialog box opens.

3. Setting the print quality level

Drag the slider bar to select the print quality level and click OK.


Click OK on the Main tab.

When you execute print, the image data is printed with the selected print quality level.

Important

• Certain print quality levels cannot be selected depending on the settings of Media Type.

435

Related Topics

Specifying Color Correction

Adjusting Color Balance

Adjusting Brightness

Adjusting Intensity

Adjusting Contrast

436

Printing a Color Document in Monochrome

The procedure for printing a color document in monochrome is as follows:

You can also set a grayscale printing in Additional Features on the Quick Setup tab.


2. Set grayscale printing

Check the Grayscale Printing check box on the Main tab.


Click OK.

When you execute print, the document is converted to grayscale data. It allows you to print the color document in monochrome.

Important

• When the Grayscale Printing check box is checked, the printer driver processes image data as sRGB data. In this case, actual colors printed may differ from those in the original image data.

When using the grayscale printing function to print Adobe RGB data, convert the data to sRGB data using an application software.

437

Note

• During Grayscale Printing, inks other than black ink may be used as well.

Related Topic

Adjusting Tone

438

Adjusting Tone

When printing black and white photos, you can produce the cooling effects of cool colors and the warming effects of warm colors.

Cool is selected Standard is selected

The procedure for adjusting tone is as follows:


Warm is selected


For Media Type on the Main tab, select Photo Paper Plus Glossy II, Photo Paper Pro Platinum,

Photo Paper Pro Luster, Photo Paper Plus Semi-gloss, or Other Fine Art Paper.

3. Set grayscale printing

Check the Grayscale Printing check box.

4. Select the manual color adjustment

Select Manual for Color/Intensity, and click Set....

The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens.

5. Adjusting monochrome tones

439

Moving the Tone slider to the right brings out the warm colors (warm tones), and moving it to the left brings out the cool colors (cool tones).

You can also directly enter a value linked to the slider. Enter a value in the range from -50 to 50.

After adjusting the tones, click OK.



When you execute print, the color document is converted to grayscale data with adjusted tones. It allows you to print the color document in monochrome.

Related Topics

Printing a Color Document in Monochrome


Adjusting Intensity

Adjusting Contrast

440

Specifying Color Correction

You can specify the color correction method suited to the type of document to be printed.

Normally, the printer driver adjusts the colors by using Canon Digital Photo Color so that data is printed with color tints that most people prefer. This method is suitable for printing sRGB data.

When you want to print by using the color space (Adobe RGB or sRGB) of the image data effectively, select

ICM (ICC Profile Matching). When you want to use an application software to specify a printing ICC profile, select None.

The procedure for specifying color correction is as follows:

You can also set color correction on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly

Used Settings, and then choosing Color/Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features.



On the Main tab, select Manual for Color/Intensity, and click Set....


3. Select color correction

Click Matching tab, select Color Correction setting that matches your purpose from the following, and click OK.

441

Driver Matching

With Canon Digital Photo Color, you can print sRGB data with color tints that most people prefer.

ICM (ICC Profile Matching)

Adjusts the colors by using an ICC profile when printing.

Specify the input profile or rendering intent to be used.

None

The printer driver does not perform color correction. Select this value when you are specifying an individually created printing ICC profile or a printing ICC profile for special Canon paper in an application software to print data.



When you execute print, the document data is printed with the specified color correction.

Important

• When ICM is disabled in the application software, ICM is unavailable for Color Correction and the printer may not be able to print the image data properly.

• When the Grayscale Printing check box on the Main tab is checked, Color Correction appears grayed out and is unavailable.

Related Topics

Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data

Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver

Printing with ICC Profiles

Interpreting the ICC Profile

442

Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data

When people print images taken with digital cameras, they sometimes feel that the printed color tones differ from those of actual image or those displayed on the monitor.

To get the print results as close as possible to the desired color tones, you must select a printing method that is best suited to the application software used or to your purpose.

Color Management

Devices such as digital cameras, scanners, monitors, and printers handle color differently. Color management (color matching) is a method that manages device-dependent "colors" as a common color space.

For Windows, a color management system called "ICM" is built into the operating system.

Adobe RGB and sRGB are popularly used as common color spaces. Adobe RGB has a wider color space than sRGB.

ICC profiles convert device-dependent "colors" into a common color space. By using an ICC profile and carrying out color management, you can draw out the color space of the image data within the color reproduction area that the printer can express.

Selecting a Printing Method Suited to the Image Data

The recommended printing method depends on the color space (Adobe RGB or sRGB) of the image data or the application software to be used.

There are two typical printing methods.

Check the color space (Adobe RGB or sRGB) of the image data and the application software to be used, and then select the printing method suited to your purpose.


Describes the procedure for printing sRGB data by using the color correction function of the printer driver.

• To print using Canon Digital Photo Color

The printer prints data with color tints that most people prefer, reproducing colors of the original image data and producing three-dimensional effects and high, sharp contrasts.

• To print by directly applying editing and touch-up results of an application software

When printing the data, the printer brings out subtle color difference between dark and light areas, while leaving the darkest and lightest areas intact.

When printing the data, the printer applies fine adjustment results, such as brightness adjustments made with an application software.


Describes the procedure for printing by using the color space of Adobe RGB or sRGB effectively.

You can print with a common color space by setting up the application software and the printer driver so that the color management matches the input ICC profile of the image data.

The method for setting up the printer driver differs depending on the application software to be used.

Related Topic

Interpreting the ICC Profile

443


You can specify the color correction function of the printer driver to print sRGB data with color tints that most people prefer through the use of Canon Digital Photo Color.

When printing from an application software that can identify ICC profiles and allows you to specify them, use a printing ICC profile in the application software, and select settings for color management.

The procedure for adjusting colors with the printer driver is as follows:






Click Matching tab, and select Driver Matching for Color Correction.

4. Set the other items

If necessary, click Color Adjustment tab, and adjust the color balance (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow) and adjust Brightness, Intensity, and Contrast settings, and then click OK.



When you execute print, the printer driver adjusts the colors when printing the data.

Related Topics

Setting the Print Quality Level (Custom)



444


Adjusting Intensity

Adjusting Contrast

445


When the image data has a specified input ICC profile, you can print by using the color space (Adobe RGB or sRGB) of the data effectively.

The printer driver setting procedure varies depending on the application software used to print.

Specify an ICC Profile from the Application Software and Print the Data

When you print the editing and touch-up results of Adobe Photoshop, Canon Digital Photo Professional, or any application software that allows you to specify input and printing ICC profiles, you print by effectively using the color space of the input ICC profile specified in the image data.

To use this printing method, use your application software to select color management items and specify an input ICC profile and a printing ICC profile in the image data.

Even if you print using a printing ICC profile that you created yourself or one for special Canon paper, be sure to select color management items from your application software.

For instructions, refer to the manual of the application software you are using.






Click Matching tab, and select None for Color Correction.


If necessary, click Color Adjustment tab, and adjust the color balance (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow) and adjust Brightness, Intensity, and Contrast settings, and then click OK.

446



When you execute print, the printer uses the color space of the image data.

Specify an ICC Profile with the Printer Driver, and then Print

Print from an application software that cannot identify input ICC profiles or does allow you to specify one by using the color space of the input ICC profile (sRGB) found in the data. When printing Adobe RGB data, you can print the data with the Adobe RGB color space even if the application software does not support Adobe RGB.






Click Matching tab, and select ICM (ICC Profile Matching) for Color Correction.

4. Select the input profile

Select an Input Profile that matches the color space of the image data.

• For sRGB data or data without an input ICC profile:

Select Standard.

• For Adobe RGB data:

Select Adobe RGB (1998).

447

Important

• When the application software specifies an input profile, the input profile setting of the printer driver becomes invalid.

• When no input ICC profiles are installed on your computer, Adobe RGB (1998) will not be displayed.

5. Select the rendering intent

Select the coloring adjustment method in Rendering Intent.

• Saturation

This method reproduces images even more vividly than the Perceptual method.

• Perceptual

This method reproduces images by focusing on color tints that most people prefer. Select this method to print photos.

• Relative Colorimetric

When image data is converted to the color space of the printer, this method converts the image data so the color reproduction approximates the shared color regions. Select this method to print image data with colors that are close to the original colors.

The white spots are reproduced as white spots (background color) on the paper.

• Absolute Colorimetric

This method uses the white spot definitions in the input and output ICC profiles to convert the image data.

Although the color and color balance of the white spots change, you may not be able to get the desired output results because of the profile combination.

Important

• Depending on the media type, you may obtain the same print results even when you change the Rendering Intent setting.

• When Windows XP SP2 or Windows XP SP3 is used, this function is disabled.


If necessary, click Color Adjustment tab, and adjust Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Brightness, Intensity, and Contrast settings, and then click OK.



When you execute print, the printer uses the color space of the image data.

Related Topics





Adjusting Intensity

Adjusting Contrast

448

Interpreting the ICC Profile

When you need to specify the printer profile, select the ICC profile for the paper to print on.

The ICC profiles installed for this printer appear as follows.

• (1) is the model name of the printer.

• (2) is the media type. This notation corresponds to the following media type:

◦ GL: Photo Paper Plus Glossy II

◦ PT: Photo Paper Pro Platinum

◦ SG/LU: Photo Paper Plus Semi-gloss / Photo Paper Pro Luster

◦ MP: Matte Photo Paper

◦ Other Fine Art Paper: Other Fine Art Paper

• (3) is the print quality.

The print quality is divided into 5 levels, ranging from high speed to high quality. As the number decreases, the print quality becomes higher. This value corresponds to the slider bar position in the

Custom dialog box of the printer driver.

449

Adjusting Color Balance

You can adjust the color tints when printing.

Since this function adjusts color balance of the output by changing the ink ratios of each color, it changes the total color balance of the document. Use the application software when you want to change the color balance significantly. Use the printer driver only when you want to adjust the color balance slightly.

The following sample shows the case when color balance is used to intensify cyan and to diminish yellow so that the overall colors are more uniform.

No adjustment Adjust color balance

The procedure for adjusting color balance is as follows:

You can also set color balance on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly

Used Settings, and then choosing Color/Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features.





3. Adjust color balance

450

There are individual sliders for Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow. Each color becomes stronger when the corresponding slider is moved to the right, and becomes weaker when the corresponding slider is moved to the left. For example, when cyan becomes weaker, the color red becomes stronger.

You can also directly enter a value linked to the slider. Enter a value in the range from -50 to 50. The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver.

After adjusting each color, click OK.



When you execute print, the document is printed with the adjusted color balance.

Important

• When the Grayscale Printing check box on the Main tab is checked, the color balance (Cyan,

Magenta, Yellow) appear grayed out and are unavailable.

Related Topics



Adjusting Color Balance Using Sample Patterns (Printer Driver)


Adjusting Intensity

Adjusting Contrast

Adjusting Intensity/Contrast Using Sample Patterns (Printer Driver)

451

Adjusting Color Balance Using Sample Patterns (Printer Driver)

You can look at the print results of pattern print and adjust the color balance.

When you change the color balance or intensity/contrast of a document, the pattern print function prints the adjustment results in a list, together with the adjustment values.

Described below is the procedure for adjusting the color balance while looking at the pattern.





3. Selecting pattern print

On the Color Adjustment tab, select the Print a pattern for color adjustment check box, and click

Pattern Print preferences....

452

4. Setting pattern print

When the Pattern Print dialog box opens, set the following items, and then click OK.

Parameters to Adjust

Select Cyan/Magenta/Yellow.

Important

• When the Grayscale Printing check box on the Main tab is checked, Cyan/Magenta/Yellow appear grayed out and are unavailable.

Printer Paper Size

Select the paper size to be used for pattern printing.

Note

• Depending on the paper size selected on the Page Setup tab, there may be sizes that cannot be selected.

Amount of Pattern Instances

Select Largest, Large, or Small to set the number of patterns to be printed.

Note

• Largest and Large cannot be selected when certain paper sizes or output paper sizes are selected.

Color Variation Between Instances

Set the amount of color change between neighboring patterns.

453

Note

• Large is about double the size of Medium, and Small is about half the size of Medium.

5. Checking the print results of pattern print

On the Color Adjustment tab, select OK to close the Manual Color Adjustment dialog box.

On the Main tab, select OK, and then execute printing. The printer then prints a pattern in which the color balance that you set is the center value.

6. Adjusting the color balance

Look at the print results and select the image that you like best. Then enter the color balance numbers indicated at the bottom of that image into the Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow fields on the Color

Adjustment tab.

Clear the Print a pattern for color adjustment check box, and click OK.

454

Note

• You can also set color balance on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under

Commonly Used Settings, and then choosing Color/Intensity Manual Adjustment under

Additional Features.



Then when you execute printing, the document is printed with the color balance that was adjusted by the pattern print function.

Important

• When Print a pattern for color adjustment is selected on the Color Adjustment tab, the following items are grayed out and cannot be set:

• Preview before printing on the Main tab

• Stapling Side and Specify Margin... on the Page Setup tab (When Duplex Printing is set, only

Stapling Side can be set.)

• You can print a pattern only if the Page Layout setting on the Page Setup tab is Normal-size or

Borderless.

• When the Grayscale Printing check box on the Main tab is checked, Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow appear grayed out and are unavailable.

• Depending on your application software, this function may not be available.

Related Topics


Adjusting Intensity

Adjusting Contrast


455

Adjusting Brightness

You can change the brightness of the overall image data during printing.

This function does not change pure white or pure black but it changes the brightness of the intermediate colors.

The following sample shows the print result when the brightness setting is changed.

Light is selected Normal is selected Dark is selected

The procedure for adjusting brightness is as follows:

You can also set brightness on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly Used

Settings, and then choosing Color/Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features.





3. Specify the brightness

Select Light, Normal, or Dark for Brightness, and click OK. The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver.

456



When you execute print, the data is printed at the specified brightness.

Related Topics




Adjusting Intensity

Adjusting Contrast

457

Adjusting Intensity

You can dilute (brighten) or intensify (darken) the colors of the overall image data during printing.

The following sample shows the case when the intensity is increased so that all colors become more intense when the image data is printed.

No adjustment Higher intensity

The procedure for adjusting intensity is as follows:

You can also set intensity on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly Used






3. Adjust intensity

Moving the Intensity slider to the right intensifies (darkens) the colors, and moving the slider to the left dilutes (brightens) the colors.



458



When you execute print, the image data is printed with the adjusted intensity.

Related Topics






Adjusting Contrast


459

Adjusting Contrast

You can adjust the image contrast during printing.

To make the differences between the light and dark portions of images greater and more distinct, increase the contrast. On the other hand, to make the differences between the light and dark portions of images smaller and less distinct, reduce the contrast.

No adjustment Adjust the contrast

The procedure for adjusting contrast is as follows:

You can also set contrast on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly Used






3. Adjust the contrast

Moving the Contrast slider to the right increases the contrast, and moving the slider to the left decreases the contrast.


460




When you execute print, the image is printed with the adjusted contrast.

Related Topics






Adjusting Intensity


461

Adjusting Intensity/Contrast Using Sample Patterns (Printer Driver)

You can look at the print results of pattern print and adjust the intensity/contrast.

When you change the color balance or intensity/contrast of a document, the pattern print function prints the adjustment results in a list, together with the adjustment values.

Described below is the procedure for adjusting the intensity/contrast while looking at the pattern.





3. Selecting pattern print

On the Color Adjustment tab, select the Print a pattern for color adjustment check box, and click

Pattern Print preferences....

462

4. Setting pattern print

When the Pattern Print dialog box opens, set the following items, and then click OK.


Select Intensity/Contrast.


Select the paper size to be used for pattern printing.

Note



Select Largest, Large, or Small to set the number of patterns to be printed.

Note



Set the amount of color change between neighboring patterns.

Note


5. Checking the print results of pattern print

463

On the Color Adjustment tab, select OK to close the Manual Color Adjustment dialog box.

On the Main tab, select OK, and then execute printing. The printer then prints a pattern in which the intensity/contrast that you set is the center value.

6. Adjusting the intensity/contrast

Look at the print results and select the image that you like best. Then enter the intensity/contrast numbers indicated at the bottom of that image into the Intensity and Contrast fields on the Color

Adjustment tab.

Clear the Print a pattern for color adjustment check box, and click OK.

464

Note

• You can also set intensity/contrast on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under

Commonly Used Settings, and then choosing Color/Intensity Manual Adjustment under




Then when you execute printing, the document is printed with the intensity/contrast that was adjusted by the pattern print function.

Important

• When Print a pattern for color adjustment is selected on the Color Adjustment tab, the following items are grayed out and cannot be set:

• Preview before printing on the Main tab

• Stapling Side and Specify Margin... on the Page Setup tab (When Duplex Printing is set, only

Stapling Side can be set.)

• You can print a pattern only if the Page Layout setting on the Page Setup tab is Normal-size or

Borderless.

• Depending on your application software, this function may not be available.

Related Topics



Adjusting Intensity

Adjusting Contrast

465

Overview of the Printer Driver

Canon IJ Printer Driver

How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window

Canon IJ Status Monitor


Canon IJ Preview

Deleting the Undesired Print Job

Instructions for Use (Printer Driver)

466

Canon IJ Printer Driver

The Canon IJ printer driver (called printer driver below) is a software that is installed on your computer for printing data with this printer.

The printer driver converts the print data created by your application software into data that your printer can understand, and sends the converted data to the printer.

Because different models support different print data formats, you need a printer driver for the specific model you are using.

Printer Driver Types

On Windows Vista SP1 or later, you can install the XPS printer driver in addition to the regular printer driver.

The XPS printer driver is suited to print from an application software that supports XPS printing.

Important

• To use the XPS printer driver, the standard printer driver must already be installed on your computer.

Installing the Printer Driver

• To install the regular printer driver, load the Setup CD-ROM that comes with the printer, and then install the driver from Start Setup Again.

• To install the XPS printer driver, load the Setup CD-ROM that comes with the printer, and then select

XPS Driver from Add Software.

Specifying the Printer Driver

To specify the printer driver, open the Print dialog box of the application software you are using, and select "XXX Printer" (where "XXX" is your model name) to specify the regular printer driver or select "XXX

Printer XPS" (where "XXX" is your model name) to specify the XPS printer driver.

Displaying the Manual from the Printer Driver

To display a description of a tab in the printer driver setup window, click the Help button found on the tab.

Related Topic

How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window

467

How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window

You can display the printer driver setup window from the application software in use or from the printer icon.

Open the Printer Driver Setup Window through the Application Software

Follow the procedure below to configure printing profile when printing.

1. Select the command that you perform printing on the application software

In general, select Print on the File menu to open the Print dialog box.

2. Select your model name and click Preferences (or Properties)

The printer driver setup window appears.

Note

• Depending on application software you use, command names or menu names may vary and there may be more steps. For details, refer to the user's manual of your application software.

Opening the Printer Driver Setup Window from the Printer Icon

Follow the procedure below to perform printer maintenance operations such as print head cleaning, or to configure a printing profile that is common to all application software.

1. Select as described below:

• If you are using Windows 8.1 or Windows 8, from the Desktop charms, select Settings ->

Control Panel -> Hardware and Sound -> Devices and Printers.

• If you are using Windows 7, select the Start menu -> Devices and Printers.

• If you are using Windows Vista, select the Start menu -> Control Panel -> Hardware and

Sound -> Printers.

• If you are using Windows XP, select the start menu -> Control Panel -> Printers and Other

Hardware -> Printers and Faxes.

2. Right-click your model name icon, and then select Printing preferences from the displayed menu

The printer driver setup window appears.

Important

• Opening the printer driver setup window through Printer properties (Windows 8.1, Windows 8,

Windows 7) or Properties (Windows Vista, Windows XP) displays such tabs regarding the

Windows functions as the Ports (or Advanced) tab. Those tabs do not appear when opening through Printing preferences or application software. For tabs regarding Windows functions, refer to the user's manual for the Windows.

468

Canon IJ Status Monitor

The Canon IJ Status Monitor is an application software that shows the status of the printer and the progress of printing. You will know the status of the printer with graphics, icons, and messages.

Launching the Canon IJ Status Monitor

The Canon IJ Status Monitor launches automatically when print data is sent to the printer. When launched, the Canon IJ Status Monitor appears as a button on the task bar.

Click the button of the status monitor displayed on the task bar. The Canon IJ Status Monitor appears.

Note

• To open the Canon IJ Status Monitor when the printer is not printing, open the printer driver setup window and click View Printer Status on the Maintenance tab.

• The information displayed on the Canon IJ Status Monitor may differ depending on the country or region where you are using your printer.

When Errors Occur

The Canon IJ Status Monitor is automatically displayed if an error occurs (e.g., if the printer runs out of paper or if the ink is low).

In such cases, take the appropriate action as described.

469


You can check the remaining ink level and the ink tank types for your model.


2. Launching the Canon IJ Status Monitor

On the Maintenance tab, click View Printer Status.

The Canon IJ Status Monitor opens and displays an image of the ink status.

Note

• The information displayed on the Canon IJ Status Monitor may differ depending on the country or region where you are using your printer.

3. If necessary, click Ink Details

You can check the ink-related information.

If a warning or error related to the remaining ink amount occurs, a notification icon is displayed at the top of the image in the Ink Details dialog box.

In such cases, take the appropriate action as described on the screen.

Note

• You can also display the Ink Details dialog box by selecting the ink icon on the Canon IJ Status

Monitor.

470

Canon IJ Preview

The Canon IJ Preview is an application software that displays what the print result will look like before a document is actually printed.

The preview reflects the information that is set within the printer driver and allows you to check the document layout, print order, and number of pages. You can also change the media type settings.

When you want to display a preview before printing, open the printer driver setup window , click the Main tab, and check the Preview before printing check box.

When you do not want to display a preview before printing, uncheck the check box.

Important

• If you are using the XPS printer driver, see " Editing the Print Document or Reprinting from the Print

History ."

Related Topic


471

Deleting the Undesired Print Job

If you are using the XPS printer driver, replace "Canon IJ Status Monitor" with "Canon IJ XPS Status

Monitor" when reading this information.

If the printer does not start printing, canceled or failed print job data may be remaining.

Delete the undesired print job by using the Canon IJ Status Monitor.

1. Display the Canon IJ Status Monitor

Click the icon of the Canon IJ Status Monitor displayed on the task bar.

The Canon IJ Status Monitor appears.

2. Display the print jobs

Click Display Print Queue.

The print queue window opens.

3. Delete the print jobs

Select Cancel All Documents from the Printer menu.

When the confirmation message appears, click Yes.

The deletion of the print job is complete.

Important

• Users who have not been granted access permission for printer management cannot delete the print job of another user.

Note

• When you perform this operation, all print jobs are deleted. If the print queue list contained a necessary print job, start the printing process over from the beginning.

472

Instructions for Use (Printer Driver)

This printer driver is subject to the following restrictions. Keep the following points in mind when using the printer driver.

Restrictions on the Printer Driver

• With some applications, the Copies setting in the Page Setup tab of the printer driver may not be enabled.

In this case, use the copies setting in the Print dialog box of the application software.

• If the selected Language in the About dialog box of the Maintenance tab does not match the operating system interface language, the printer driver setup window may not be displayed properly.

• Do not change the Advanced tab items of the printer properties. If you change any of the items, you will not be able to use the following functions correctly.

Also, if Print to file is selected in the Print dialog box of the application software and with applications that prohibit EMF spooling, such as Adobe Photoshop LE and MS Photo Editor, the following functions will not operate.

◦ Preview before printing on the Main tab

◦ Prevention of Print Data Loss in the Print Options dialog box on the Page Setup tab

◦ Page Layout, Tiling/Poster, Booklet, Duplex Printing, Specify Margin..., Print from Last

Page, Collate, and Stamp/Background... (Stamp...) on the Page Setup tab

◦ Print a pattern for color adjustment on the Color Adjustment tab in the Manual Color

Adjustment dialog box

• Since the resolution in the preview display differs from the printing resolution, text and lines in the preview display may appear different from the actual print result.

• With some applications, the printing is divided into multiple print jobs.

To cancel printing, delete all divided print jobs.

• If image data is not printed correctly, display the Print Options dialog box from the Page Setup tab and change the setting of Disable ICM required from the application software. This may solve the problem.

Note

• Disable ICM required from the application software cannot be used when the XPS printer driver is used.

• Do not start up the Canon IJ Network Tool while printing.

• Do not print when the Canon IJ Network Tool is running.

• The card slot of the printer may become inaccessible. In such cases, restart the printer or turn it off and reconnect the USB cable.

Points to Note About Applications with Restrictions

• There are following restrictions in Microsoft Word (Microsoft Corporation).

◦ When Microsoft Word has the same printing functions as the printer driver, use Word to specify them.

◦ When Fit-to-Page, Scaled, or Page Layout is used for Page Layout on the Page Setup tab of the printer driver, the document may not print normally in certain versions of Word.

◦ When Page Size in Word is set to "XXX Enlarge/Reduce", the document may not print normally in certain versions of Word.

If this happens, follow the procedure below.

473

1. Open Word's Print dialog box.

2. Open the printer driver setup window , and on the Page Setup tab, set Page Size to the same paper size that you specified in Word.

3. Set the Page Layout that you want, and then click OK to close the window.

4. Without starting printing, close the Print dialog box.

5. Open Word's Print dialog box again.

6. Open the printer driver setup window and click OK.

7. Start printing.

• If bitmap printing is enabled in Adobe Illustrator (Adobe Systems Incorporated), printing may take time or some data may not be printed. Print after unchecking the Bitmap Printing check box in the Print dialog box.

474

Printer Driver Description

Quick Setup tab Description

Main tab Description

Page Setup tab Description

Maintenance tab Description

Canon IJ Preview Description

Canon IJ XPS Preview Description

Canon IJ Status Monitor Description

475

Quick Setup tab Description

The Quick Setup tab is for registering commonly used print settings. When you select a registered setting, the printer automatically switches to the preset items.

Commonly Used Settings

The names and icons of frequently used printing profiles are registered. When you select a printing profile according to the purpose of the document, settings that match the purpose are applied.

In addition, functions that are thought to be useful for the selected printing profile are displayed in


You can also change a printing profile and register it under a new name. You can delete the registered printing profile.

You can rearrange the profiles either by dragging the individual profiles or by holding down the Ctrl key and pressing the up or down arrow keys.

Standard

These are the factory settings.

If Page Size, Orientation, and Copies were set from the application software, those settings have priority.

Photo Printing

If you select this setting when printing a photo, the photo paper and photo size generally used are set. The Borderless Printing check box is checked automatically.

If Orientation and Copies were set from the application software, those settings have priority.

Business Document

Select this setting when printing a general document.


Paper Saving

Select this setting to save paper when printing a general document. The 2-on-1 Printing and

Duplex Printing check boxes are checked automatically.


476

Envelope

If you select this setting for printing an envelope, Media Type is set automatically to Envelope. In the Envelope Size Setting dialog box, select the size of the envelope to be used.

Note

• The combination of the Additional Features that was displayed for the printing profile that had been selected when the added printing profile was saved is also displayed when that added printing profile is selected.

Save...

Displays the Save Commonly Used Settings dialog box .

Click this button when you want to save the information that you set on the Quick Setup, Main, and

Page Setup tabs to Commonly Used Settings.

Delete

Deletes a registered printing profile.

Select the name of the setting to be deleted from Commonly Used Settings, and click Delete. When a confirmation message is displayed, click OK to delete the specified printing profile.

Note

• Printing profiles that are registered in the initial settings cannot be deleted.

Settings Preview

The paper illustration shows how the original will be laid out on a sheet of paper.

You can check an overall image of the layout.

Preview before printing

Shows what the print result will look like before you actually print the data.

Check this check box to display a preview before printing.

Uncheck this check box if you do not want to display a preview.

Important

• To use the Canon IJ XPS Preview, you must have Microsoft .NET Framework 4 Client Profile installed on your computer.

Additional Features

Displays the frequently used, convenient functions for the printing profile that you selected for

Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup tab.

When you move the mouse pointer near a function that can be changed, a description of that function is displayed.

To enable a function, check the corresponding check box.

For some functions, you can set detailed settings from the Main and Page Setup tabs.

Important

• Depending on the printing profiles, certain function may be grayed out and you will not be able to change them.

2-on-1 Printing

Prints two pages of the document, side by side, on one sheet of paper.

To change the page sequence, click the Page Setup tab, select Page Layout for Page Layout, and click Specify.... Then in the Page Layout Printing dialog box that appears, specify the Page

Order.

477

4-on-1 Printing

Prints four pages of the document, side by side, on one sheet of paper.

To change the page sequence, click the Page Setup tab, select Page Layout for Page Layout, and click Specify.... Then in the Page Layout Printing dialog box that appears, specify the Page

Order.

Duplex Printing

Selects whether to print the document on both sides or one side of a sheet of paper.

To change the staple side or the margins, set the new values from the Page Setup tab.

Borderless Printing

Performs borderless printing without any margins on the paper.

With the borderless printing function, the document to be printed is enlarged, so that it extends slightly off the paper. In other words, the document is printed without any margin.

To adjust the amount that the document extends beyond the paper, click the Page Setup tab, choose Borderless, and enter the value in Amount of Extension.

Grayscale Printing

This function converts the data to monochrome data when printing your document.

Draft

This setting is appropriate for test printing.

Rotate 180 degrees

Prints the document by rotating it 180 degrees against the paper feed direction.

The width of print area and the amount of extension that are configured in other application software will be reversed vertically and horizontally.

Color/Intensity Manual Adjustment

Select when you set the Color Correction method and individual settings such as Cyan, Magenta,

Yellow, Tone, Brightness, Intensity, and Contrast, etc.

Media Type

Selects a type of printing paper.

Select a media type that matches the paper that is loaded in the printer. This ensures that printing is carried out properly for the specified paper.


Selects the size of paper actually loaded into the printer.

Normally, the paper size is set automatically according to the output paper size setting, and the document is printed with no scaling.

When you set 2-on-1 Printing or 4-on-1 Printing in Additional Features, you can manually set the paper size with Page Size on the Page Setup tab.

If you select a paper size that is smaller than the Page Size, the document size will be reduced. If you select a paper size that is larger, the document size will be enlarged.

Also if you select Custom..., the Custom Paper Size dialog box opens and allows you to specify any vertical and horizontal dimensions for the paper size.

Orientation

Selects the printing orientation.

If the application used to create your document has a similar function, select the same orientation that you selected in that application.

Portrait

Prints the document so that its top and bottom positions are unchanged relative to the paper feed direction. This is the default setting.

478

Landscape

Prints the document by rotating it 90 degrees relative to the paper feed direction.

You can change the rotation direction by going to the Maintenance tab, opening the Custom

Settings dialog box, and then using Rotate 90 degrees left when orientation is [Landscape] check box.

To rotate the document 90 degrees to the left when printing, select the Rotate 90 degrees left

when orientation is [Landscape] check box.

Print Quality

Selects your desired printing quality.

Select one of the following to set the print quality level that is appropriate for the purpose.

To set the print quality level individually, click the Main tab, and for Print Quality, select Custom. The

Set... becomes enabled. Click Set... to open the Custom dialog box , and then specify the desired settings.

High

Gives priority to print quality over printing speed.

Standard

Prints with average speed and quality.

Draft


Paper Source

Shows the source from which paper is supplied.

Cassette

The cassette to be used is determined by the paper size. The cassette to be used is displayed below Paper Source.

Copies

Specifies the number of copies you want to print. You can specify a value from 1 to 999.

Important

• When the application software that you used to create the document has the same function, specify the settings on the printer driver. However, if the print results are not acceptable, specify the function settings on the application software.

Always Print with Current Settings

Prints documents with the current settings starting from the next print execution.

When you select this function and then close the printer driver setup window , the information that you set on the Quick Setup, Main, and Page Setup tabs are saved and printing with the same settings is possible starting from the next print execution.

Important

• If you log on with a different user name, the settings that were set when this function was enabled are not reflected in the print settings.

• If a setting was specified on the application software, it has priority.

Defaults

Restores all the settings you have changed to their default values.

Click this button to return all settings on the Quick Setup, Main, and Page Setup tabs to their default values (factory settings).

479

Save Commonly Used Settings dialog box

This dialog box allows you to save the information that you set on the Quick Setup, Main, and Page

Setup tabs and add the information to the Commonly Used Settings list on the Quick Setup tab.

Name

Enter the name for the printing profile you wish to save.

Up to 255 characters can be entered.

The name appears, with its associated icon, in the Commonly Used Settings list on the Quick

Setup tab.

Options...

Opens the Save Commonly Used Settings dialog box .

Changes the details of printing profile to be saved.

Save Commonly Used Settings dialog box

Select the icons of the printing profiles to be registered to Commonly Used Settings, and change the items to be saved in the printing profiles.

Icon

Select the icon for the printing profile you wish to save.

The selected icon appears, with its name, in the Commonly Used Settings list on the Quick

Setup tab.

Save the paper size setting

Saves the paper size to the printing profile in Commonly Used Settings.

To apply the saved paper size when the printing profile is selected, check this check box.

If this check box is unchecked, the paper size is not saved, and consequently the paper size setting is not applied when the printing profile is selected. Instead the printer prints with the paper size specified with the application software.

Save the orientation setting

Saves the Orientation to the printing profile in Commonly Used Settings.

To apply the saved print orientation when the printing profile is selected, check this check box.

If this check box is unchecked, the print orientation is not saved, and consequently the Orientation setting is not applied when the printing profile is selected. Instead the printer prints with the print orientation specified with the application software.

Save the copies setting

Saves the Copies setting to the printing profile in Commonly Used Settings.

To apply the saved copies setting when the printing profile is selected, check this check box.

If this check box is unchecked, the copies setting is not saved, and consequently the Copies setting is not applied when the printing profile is selected. Instead the printer prints with the copies setting specified with the application software.

Custom Paper Size dialog box

This dialog box allows you to specify the size (width and height) of the custom paper.

Units

Select the unit for entering a user-defined paper size.

480

Paper Size

Specifies the Width and the Height of the custom paper. Measurement is shown according to the units specified in Units.

Related Topics

Printing with Easy Setup

Setting a Page Size and Orientation

Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order

Execute Borderless Printing

Duplex Printing

Setting Up Envelope Printing

Printing on Postcards


Setting Paper Dimensions (Custom Size)






Adjusting Intensity

Adjusting Contrast


Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile

481

Main tab Description

The Main tab allows you to create a basic print setup in accordance with the media type. Unless special printing is required, normal printing can be performed just by setting the items on this tab.




The printer illustration shows how to load paper to match the printer driver settings.

Check whether the printer is set up correctly by looking at the illustration before you start printing.

Media Type

Selects a type of printing paper.

Select a media type that matches the paper that is loaded in the printer. This ensures that printing is carried out properly for the specified paper.

Paper Source

Shows the source from which paper is supplied.

Cassette

The cassette to be used is determined by the paper size. The cassette to be used is displayed below Paper Source.

Print Quality

Selects your desired printing quality.

Select one of the following to set the print quality level that is appropriate for the purpose.

Important

• Depending on the Media Type settings, the same print results may be produced even if the Print

Quality is changed.

High

Gives priority to print quality over printing speed.

Standard

Prints with average speed and quality.

482

Draft


Custom

Select this when you want to set the printing quality level individually.

Set...

Select Custom for Print Quality to enable this button.

Open the Custom dialog box . You can then individually set the print quality level.

Color/Intensity

Selects color adjustment method.

Auto

Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Brightness, Intensity, and Contrast, and so on are adjusted automatically.

Manual

Select when you set the individual settings such as Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Tone, Brightness,

Intensity, and Contrast, etc. and Color Correction method.

Set...

Select Manual for Color/Intensity to enable this button.

In the Manual Color Adjustment dialog box, you can adjust individual color settings such as

Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Tone, Brightness, Intensity, and Contrast on the

Color Adjustment

tab , and select the Color Correction method on the Matching tab .

Note

• If you want to use an ICC profile to adjust colors, use the Manual Color Adjustment dialog box to set the profile.


This function converts the data to monochrome data when printing your document.

Check this check box to print a color document in monochrome.

Preview before printing

Shows what the print result will look like before you actually print the data.

Check this check box to display a preview before printing.

Important


Defaults


Clicking this button restores all the settings on the current screen to their default values (factory settings).

Custom dialog box

Set the quality level, and select the desired print quality.

Quality

You can use the slider bar to adjust the print quality level.

Important

• Certain print quality levels cannot be selected depending on the settings of Media Type.

483

Note

• The High, Standard, or Draft print quality modes are linked with the slider bar. Therefore when the slider bar is moved, the corresponding quality and value are displayed on the left. This is the same as when the corresponding radio button is selected for Print Quality on the Main tab.

Color Adjustment Tab

This tab allows you to adjust the color balance by changing the settings of the Cyan, Magenta, Yellow,

Tone, Brightness, Intensity, and Contrast options.

Preview

Shows the effect of color adjustment.

The color and brightness change when each item is adjusted. You can check the color adjustment status easily by changing the preview image to one similar to the results to be printed with Sample

Type.

Note

• The graphic is in monochrome when the Grayscale Printing check box is checked.

Sample Type

Selects a preview image displayed on the Color Adjustment tab.

If necessary, select a preview image from Standard, Portrait, Landscape, or Graphics, whichever is most similar to the print results.

View Color Pattern

Displays a pattern for checking color changes produced by color adjustment.

If you want to display the preview image with a color pattern, check this check box.

Cyan / Magenta / Yellow

Adjusts the strengths of Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow.

Moving the slider to the right makes a color stronger, and moving the slider to the left makes a color weaker.


This adjustment changes the relative amount of ink of each color used, which alters the total color balance of the document. Use your application if you want to change the total color balance significantly. Use the printer driver only if you want to adjust the color balance slightly.

Important

• When Grayscale Printing is checked on the Main tab, Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow appear grayed out and are unavailable.

Tone

Sets the color adjustment for monochrome printing.

Moving the slider to the right produces warm colors (Warm), and moving the slider to the left produces cool colors (Cool).


Important

• This function is not available for certain Media Type settings.

484

Brightness

Selects the brightness of your print.

You cannot change the levels of pure white and black. However, the brightness of the colors between white and black can be changed.

Intensity

Adjusts the overall intensity of your print.

Moving the slider to the right increases the intensity, and moving the slider to the left decreases the intensity.


Contrast

Adjusts the contrast between light and dark in the image to be printed.

Moving the slider to the right increases the contrast, moving the slider to the left decreases the contrast.


Print a pattern for color adjustment

When the color balance or intensity/contrast is changed, the pattern printing function prints a list of the adjustment results along with the adjustment values.

Select this function when printing a pattern for color adjustment.

Pattern Print preferences...

Check Print a pattern for color adjustment to enable this button.

The Pattern Print dialog box opens and allows you to set pattern printing settings.

Pattern Print dialog box

Performs the setup for printing of patterns that allow you to check the color balance and intensity/ contrast of documents.


Select the item to be checked by pattern printing.

Cyan/Magenta/Yellow

Prints a pattern that allows you to check the cyan/magenta/yellow balance.

Important

• When Grayscale Printing is checked on the Main tab, Cyan/Magenta/Yellow appear grayed out and are unavailable.

Intensity/Contrast

Prints a pattern that allows you to check the intensity/contrast balance.


Selects the paper size to be used for pattern printing.

This setting is linked to Printer Paper Size on the Page Setup tab.

Note



Sets the number of patterns to be printed.

You can select from Largest, Large, and Small. When you select a pattern size, the number of patterns that can be printed is as follows:

485

Note


• The setting preview on the Main tab displays an image that allows you to check the overall layout.

Largest

Cyan/Magenta/Yellow 37

Intensity/Contrast 49

Large



Small




Sets the amount of color change between neighboring patterns.

Select from Large, Medium, and Small. Large produces a large amount of change, and Small produces a small amount of change.

Note


Matching Tab

Allows you to select the method for adjusting colors to match the type of document to be printed.

Color Correction

Allows you to select Driver Matching, ICM (ICC Profile Matching), or None to match the purpose of the print operation.

Important

• When Grayscale Printing is checked on the Main tab, Color Correction appears grayed out and is unavailable.

Driver Matching

With Canon Digital Photo Color, you can print sRGB data with color tints that most people prefer.

ICM (ICC Profile Matching)

Adjusts the colors by using an ICC profile when printing.

Specify the input profile and rendering intent to be used.

Important

• If the application software is set so that ICM is disabled, ICM (ICC Profile Matching) is unavailable for Color Correction and the printer may not be able to print the image data properly.

None

Disables color adjustment with the printer driver.

486

Input Profile

Specifies the input profile to be used when you select ICM (ICC Profile Matching) for Color

Correction.

Standard

The standard printer profile (sRGB), which supports the color space of ICM, is used. This is the default setting.

Adobe RGB (1998)

The Adobe RGB profile, which supports a wider color space than sRGB, is used.

Important

• Adobe RGB (1998) is not displayed when input profiles of Adobe RGB are not installed.

Rendering Intent

Specifies the matching method to be used when you select ICM (ICC Profile Matching) for Color

Correction.

Saturation

This method reproduces images even more vividly than the Perceptual method.

Perceptual

This method reproduces images by focusing on colors that most people find desirable. Select this method to print photos.

Relative Colorimetric

When image data is converted to the color space of the printer, this method converts the image data so the color reproduction approximates the shared color regions. Select this method to print image data with colors that are close to the original colors.

The white spots are reproduced as white spots (background color) on the paper.

Absolute Colorimetric

This method uses the white spot definitions in the input and output ICC profiles to convert the image data.

Although the color and color balance of the white spots change, you may not be able to get the desired output results because of the profile combination.

Important

• Depending on the media type, you may obtain the same print results even when you change the

Rendering Intent setting.

Note

• In the XPS printer driver, ICM has become ICC Profile Matching.

Related Topics




Adjusting Intensity

Adjusting Contrast




Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver

487

Printing with ICC Profiles



488

Page Setup tab Description

The Page Setup tab allows you to determine how a document is to be arranged on the paper. Also, this tab allows you to set the number of copies and the order of printing. If the application which created the document has a similar function, set them with the application.




Page Size

Selects a page size.

Ensure that you select the same page size as you selected within the application.

If you select Custom..., the Custom Paper Size dialog box opens and allows you to specify any vertical and horizontal dimensions for the paper size.

Orientation

Selects the printing orientation.

If the application used to create your document has a similar function, select the same orientation that you selected in that application.

Portrait

Prints the document so that its top and bottom positions are unchanged relative to the paper feed direction. This is the default setting.

Landscape

Prints the document by rotating it 90 degrees relative to the paper feed direction.

You can change the rotation direction by going to the Maintenance tab, opening the Custom

Settings dialog box, and then using Rotate 90 degrees left when orientation is [Landscape] check box.

To rotate the document 90 degrees to the left when printing, select the Rotate 90 degrees left

when orientation is [Landscape] check box.

489

Rotate 180 degrees

Prints the document by rotating it 180 degrees against the paper feed direction.

The width of print area and the amount of extension that are configured in other application software will be reversed vertically and horizontally.


Selects the size of paper actually loaded into the printer.

The default setting is Same as Page Size to perform normal-sized printing.

You can select a printer paper size when you select Fit-to-Page, Scaled, Page Layout, Tiling/Poster, or Booklet for Page Layout.

If you select a paper size that is smaller than the Page Size, the document size will be reduced. If you select a paper size that is larger, the document size will be enlarged.

Also if you select Custom..., the Custom Paper Size dialog box opens and allows you to specify any vertical and horizontal dimensions for the paper size.

Page Layout

Selects the size of the document you want to print and the type of printing.

Normal-size

This is the normal printing method. Select this when you do not specify any page layout.

Automatically reduce large document that the printer cannot output

If the printer cannot print the paper size of a document, the printer can automatically reduce the size when it prints the document.

Check this check box to reduce the size when printing the document.

Borderless

Chooses whether you are printing on a full page without any page margins or printing with page margins.

In borderless printing, originals are enlarged to extend slightly off the paper. Thus, printing can be performed without any margins (border).

Use Amount of Extension to adjust how much of the document extends off the paper during borderless printing.

Amount of Extension

Adjusts how much of the document extends off the paper during borderless printing.

Moving the slider to the right increases the amount of extension and allows you to perform borderless printing with no problems.

Moving the slider to the left reduces the amount of extension and expands the range of the document to print.

Fit-to-Page

This function enables you to automatically enlarge or reduce documents to fit to the paper size loaded in the printer without changing the paper size you specified in your application software.

Scaled

Documents can be enlarged or reduced to be printed.

Specify the size in Printer Paper Size, or enter the scaling ratio in the Scaling box.

Scaling

Specifies an enlargement or reduction ratio for the document you want to print.

Page Layout

Multiple pages of document can be printed on one sheet of paper.

Specify...

Opens the Page Layout Printing dialog box .

Click this button to set details on page layout printing.

490

Tiling/Poster

This function enables you to enlarge the image data and divide the enlarged data into several pages to be printed. You can also glue together these sheets of paper to create large printed matter, such as a poster.

Specify...

Opens the Tiling/Poster Printing dialog box .

Click this button to set details on tiling/poster printing.

Booklet

The booklet printing function allows you to print data for a booklet. Data is printed on both sides of the paper. This type of printing ensures that pages can be collated properly, in page number order, when the printed sheets are folded and stapled at the center.

Specify...

Opens the Booklet Printing dialog box .

Click this button to set details on booklet printing.

Duplex Printing

Selects whether to print the document automatically on both sides or one side of a sheet of paper.

Check this check box to print the document on both sides.

This function can be used only when Plain Paper , Hagaki A, or Hagaki is selected for Media Type and one of Normal-size, Fit-to-Page, Scaled, or Page Layout is selected.

Automatic

Selects whether duplex printing is to be performed automatically or manually.

This check box will be enabled if Booklet is selected from the Page Layout list or the Duplex

Printing check box is checked.

To perform duplex printing automatically, check this check box.

To perform duplex printing manually, uncheck this check box.

Print Area Setup...

Opens the Print Area Setup dialog box in which you can configure the print area for automatic duplex printing.

This button will be enabled if automatic duplex printing is set when Borderless is not selected.

Stapling Side

Selects the stapling margin position.

The printer analyzes the Orientation and Page Layout settings, and automatically selects the best stapling margin position. Check Stapling Side, and select from the list to change it.

Specify Margin...

Opens the Specify Margin dialog box .

You can specify the width of the margin.

Copies


Important

• If the application used to create your document has a similar function, specify the number of copies with the application without specifying it here.

Print from Last Page

Check this check box when you want to print from the last page in order. If you do this, you do not need to sort the pages into their correct order after printing.

Uncheck this check box to print your document in normal order, starting from the first page.

491

Collate

Check this check box to group together the pages of each copy when you want to print multiple copies.

Uncheck this check box when you want to print with all pages of the same page number grouped together.

Important

• When the application software that you used to create the document has the same function, give priority to the printer driver settings. However, if the print results are not acceptable, specify the function settings on the application software. When you specify the number of copies and the printing order with both the application and this printer driver, the number of copies may be multiplied numbers of the two settings or the specified printing order may not be enabled.

Print Options...

Opens the Print Options dialog box .

Changes detailed printer driver settings for print data that is sent from applications.

Stamp/Background... (Stamp...)

Opens the Stamp/Background (Stamp) dialog box .

The Stamp function allows you to print a stamp text or a bitmap over or behind document data. It also allows you to print date, time and user name. The Background function allows you to print a light illustration behind the document data.

Note


Depending on the type of printer driver you are using and the environment, Stamp and Background may not be available.

Custom Paper Size dialog box

This dialog box allows you to specify the size (width and height) of the custom paper.

Units

Select the unit for entering a user-defined paper size.

Paper Size

Specifies the Width and the Height of the custom paper. Measurement is shown according to the units specified in Units.

Page Layout Printing dialog box

This dialog box allows you to select the number of document pages to be placed on one sheet of paper, the page order, and whether a page border line is to be printed around each document page.

The settings specified in this dialog box can be confirmed in the settings preview on the printer driver.

Preview Icon

Shows the settings made on the Page Layout Printing dialog box.

You can check what the print result will look like before you actually print the data.

Pages

Specifies the number of document pages to fit on one sheet.

Page Order

Specifies the document orientation to be printed on a sheet of paper.

492

Page Border

Prints a page border line around each document page.

Check this check box to print the page border line.

Tiling/Poster Printing dialog box

This dialog box allows you to select the size of the image to be printed. You can also make settings for cut lines and paste markers which are convenient for pasting together the pages into a poster.


Preview Icon

Shows the settings of the Tiling/Poster Printing dialog box.

You can check what the print result will look like.

Image Divisions

Select the number of divisions (vertical x horizontal).

As the number of divisions increases, the number of sheets used for printing increases. If you are pasting pages together to create a poster, increasing the number of divisions allows you to create a larger poster.

Print "Cut/Paste" in margins

Specifies whether to print the words "Cut" and "Paste" in the margins. These words serve as guidelines for pasting together the pages into a poster.

Check this check box to print the words.

Note

• Depending on the type of printer driver you are using and the environment, this function may not be available.

Print "Cut/Paste" lines in margins

Specifies whether to print cut lines that serve as guidelines for pasting together the pages into a poster.

Check this check box to print the cut lines.

Print page range

Specifies the printing range. Select All under normal circumstances.

Select Pages to specify a specific page or range.

Note

• If some of the pages have not been printed well, specify the pages that do not need to be printed by clicking them in the settings preview of the Page Setup tab. Only the pages shown on the screen will be printed this time.

Booklet Printing dialog box

This dialog box allows you to set how to bind the document as a booklet. Printing only on one side and printing a page border, can also be set in this dialog box.


Preview Icon

Shows the settings made on the Booklet Printing dialog box.

You can check what the document will look like when printed as a booklet.

493

Margin for stapling

Specifies which side of the booklet is to be stapled.

Insert blank page

Selects whether to print the document on one side or both sides of the booklet.

Check this check box to print the document on one side of the booklet and select the side to be left blank from the list.

Margin

Specifies the width of the stapling margin.

The specified width becomes the stapling margin from the center of the sheet.

Page Border

Prints a page border line around each document page.

Check this check box to print the page border line.

Print Area Setup dialog box

When you perform duplex printing, the print area of the document becomes slightly narrower than usual.

Therefore when a document that has small margins is printed, the document may not fit on one page.

This dialog box allows you to set whether the page is to be reduced when printed so that the document fits in one page.

Use normal-size printing

Prints the document pages without reducing them. This is the default setting.

Use reduced printing

Slightly reduces each document page so that it fits on one sheet of paper during printing.

Select this setting when using automatic duplex printing to print a document with small margins.

Specify Margin dialog box

This dialog box allows you to specify the margin width for the side to be stapled. If a document does not fit on one page, the document is reduced when printed.

Margin

Specifies the width of the stapling margin.

The width of the side specified by Stapling Side becomes the stapling margin.

Print Options dialog box

Makes changes to print data that is sent to the printer.

Depending on the type of printer driver you are using and the environment, this function may not be available.

Disable ICM required from the application software

Disables the ICM function required from the application software.

When an application software uses Windows ICM to print data, unexpected colors may be produced or the printing speed may decrease. If these problems occur, checking this check box may resolve the problems.

Important

• Uncheck this check box under normal circumstances.

494

• This function does not work when ICM is selected for Color Correction on the Matching tab of the Manual Color Adjustment dialog box.

Note

• Disable ICM required from the application software tab cannot be used with the XPS printer driver.

Disable the color profile setting of the application software

Checking this check box disables information in the color profile that was set on the application software.

When the information in the color profile set on the application software is output to the printer driver, the print result may contain unexpected colors. If this happens, checking this check box may resolve the problem.

Important

• Even when this check box is checked, only some of the information in the color profile is disabled, and the color profile can still be used for printing.


Ungroup Papers

Sets the display method of Media Type, Page Size, and Printer Paper Size.

To display the items separately, select the check box.

To display the items as a group, clear the check box.

Do not allow application software to compress print data

Compression of the application software print data is prohibited.

If the print result has missing image data or unintended colors, selecting this check box may improve the condition.

Important


Note

• Do not allow application software to compress print data tab cannot be used with the XPS printer driver.

Print after creating print data by page

The print data is created in page units, and printing starts after the processing of one page of print data is complete.

If a printed document contains unintended results such as streaks, selecting this check box may improve the results.

Important


Scale images using nearest-neighbor interpolation

When an image is to be enlarged or reduced when printed, the printer uses a simple interpolation process to enlarge or reduce the image.

If the image data in a printed document is not printed clearly, selecting this check box may improve the results.

Important


495

Note

• Scale images using nearest-neighbor interpolation can be used only with the XPS printer driver.

Prevention of Print Data Loss

You can reduce the size of the print data that was created with the application software and then print the data.

Depending on the application software being used, the image data may be cut off or may not be printed properly. In such cases, select On. If you will not be using this function, select Off.

Important

• When using this function, the print quality may drop depending on the print data.

Unit of Print Data Processing

Selects the processing unit of the print data to be sent to the printer.

Select Recommended under normal circumstances.

Important

• A large amount of memory may be used for certain settings.

Do not change the setting if your computer has a small amount of memory.

Note

• Unit of Print Data Processing tab cannot be used with the XPS printer driver.

Stamp/Background (Stamp...) dialog box

The Stamp/Background (Stamp...) dialog box allows you to print a stamp and/or background over or behind the document pages. In addition to the pre-registered ones, you can register and use your original stamp or background.

Note


Stamp

Stamp printing is a function that prints a stamp over a document.

Check this check box and select a title from the list to print a stamp.

Define Stamp...

Opens the Stamp Settings dialog box .

You can check the details of a selected stamp or save a new stamp.

Place stamp over text

Sets how the stamp is to be printed over the document.

Check the Stamp check box to enable this.

Check this check box to print a stamp over the printed document page. The printed data may be hidden behind the stamp.

Uncheck this check box to print the document data over the stamp. The printed data will not be hidden behind the stamp. However, the sections of the stamp that are overlapped by the document may be hidden.

496

Print semitransparent stamp

Sets how the stamp is to be printed over the document.


Check this check box to print a semi-transparent stamp over the printed document page.

Uncheck this check box to print the stamp over the document data. The printed data may be hidden behind the stamp.

Note

• You can use Print semitransparent stamp only with the XPS printer driver.

Stamp first page only

Selects whether the stamp is to be printed on the first page only or on all pages when the document has two or more pages.


Check this check box to print a stamp on the first page only.

Background

Background printing is a function that allows you to print an illustration or a similar object (bitmap) behind the document.

Check this check box to print a background and select a title from the list.

Select Background...

Opens the Background Settings dialog box .

You can register a bitmap as a background, and change layout method and intensity of the selected background.

Background first page only

Selects whether to print the background on the first page only or print on all pages when the document has two or more pages.

Check the Background check box to enable this.

Check this check box to print a background on the first page only.

Stamp Tab

The Stamp tab allows you to set the text and bitmap file (.bmp) to be used for a stamp.

Preview Window

Shows the status of the stamp configured in each tab.

Stamp Type

Specifies the stamp type.

Select Text to create a stamp with characters. Select Bitmap to create with a bitmap file. Select

Date/Time/User Name to display the creation date/time and user name of the printed document.

The setting items in the Stamp tab change depending on the selected type.

When Stamp Type is Text or Date/Time/User Name

Stamp Text

Specifies the stamp text string.


For Date/Time/User Name, the creation date/time and user name of the printed object are displayed in Stamp Text.

Important

• Stamp Text appears grayed out and is unavailable if Date/Time/User Name is selected.

497

TrueType Font

Selects the font for the stamp text string.

Style

Selects the font style for the stamp text string.

Size

Selects the font size for the stamp text string.

Outline

Selects a frame that encloses the stamp text string.

If a large font size is selected for Size, characters may extend outside of the stamp border.

Color/Select Color...

Shows the current color for the stamp.

To select a different color, click Select Color... to open the Color dialog box, and select or create a color you wish to use as a stamp.

When Stamp Type is Bitmap

File

Specifies the name of the bitmap file to be used as the stamp.

Select File...

Opens the dialog box to open a file.

Click this button to select a bitmap file to be used as a stamp.

Size

Adjusts the size of the bitmap file to be used as a stamp.

Moving the slider to the right increases the size, moving the slider to the left decreases the size.

Transparent white area

Specifies whether to make white-filled areas of the bitmap transparent.

Check this check box to make white-filled areas of the bitmap transparent.

Note

• Click Defaults to set Stamp Type to text, Stamp Text to blank, TrueType Font to Arial, Style to

Regular, Size to 36 points, Outline unchecked, and Color to gray with the RGB values (192, 192,

192).

Placement Tab

The Placement tab allows you to set the position where the stamp is to be printed.

Preview Window

Shows the status of the stamp configured in each tab.

Position

Specifies the stamp position on the page.

Selecting Custom from the list allows you to enter values for the X-Position and Y-Position coordinates directly.

Orientation

Specifies the angle of rotation for the stamp. The angle can be set by entering the number of degrees.

Negative values rotate the stamp clockwise.

498

Note

• Orientation is enabled only when Text or Date/Time/User Name is selected for Stamp Type on the Stamp tab.

Note

• Click Defaults to set the stamp position to Center and the orientation to 0.

Save settings Tab

The Save settings tab allows you to register a new stamp or delete an unnecessary stamp.

Title

Enter the title to save the stamp you created.


Note


Stamps

Shows a list of saved stamp titles.

Specify a title to display the corresponding stamp in Title.

Save/Save overwrite

Saves the stamp.

Enter a title in Title, and then click this button.

Delete

Deletes an unnecessary stamp.

Specify the title of an unnecessary stamp from the Stamps list, and click this button.

Background Tab

The Background tab allows you to select a bitmap file (.bmp) to be used as a background or determine how to print the selected background.

Preview Window

Shows the status of the bitmap set on the Background tab.

File

Specifies the name of the bitmap file to be used as the background.

Select File...

Opens the dialog box to open a file.

Click this button to select a bitmap file (.bmp) to be used as the background.

Layout Method

Specifies how the background image is to be placed on the paper.

When Custom is selected, you can set coordinates for X-Position and Y-Position.

Intensity

Adjusts the intensity of the bitmap to be used as a background.

Moving the slider to the right increases the intensity, and moving the slider to the left decreases the intensity. To print the background at the original bitmap intensity, move the slider to the rightmost position.

499

Note

• Depending on the type of printer driver you are using and the environment, this function may not be available.

• Click Defaults to set File to blank, Layout Method to Fill page, and the Intensity slider to the middle.

Save settings Tab

The Save settings tab allows you to register a new background or delete an unnecessary background.

Title

Enter the title to save the background image you specified.


Note


Backgrounds

Shows a list of registered background titles.

Specify a title to display the corresponding background in Title.

Save/Save overwrite

Saves the image data as a background.

After inserting the Title, click this button.

Delete

Deletes an unnecessary background.

Specify the title of an unnecessary background from the Backgrounds list, and then click this button.

500

Maintenance tab Description

The Maintenance tab allows you to perform printer maintenance or change the settings of the printer.

Cleaning

Performs print head cleaning.

Print head cleaning removes any blockage in the print head nozzles.

Perform cleaning when printing becomes faint, or a specific color fails to print, even though all ink levels are sufficiently high.

Deep Cleaning

Performs deep cleaning.

Perform deep cleaning when two cleaning attempts do not resolve the print head problem.

Note

• Deep Cleaning consumes a larger amount of ink than Cleaning.

Cleaning the print heads frequently will rapidly deplete your printer's ink supply. Therefore, perform cleaning only when necessary.

Ink Group

When you click Cleaning or Deep Cleaning, the Ink Group window is displayed.

Selects the ink group that you want to clean the print head for.

Click

Initial Check Items

to display the items that you need to check before you execute cleaning or deep cleaning.



501

Align the print head immediately after installing the print head.

When you click Print Head Alignment, the Start Print Head Alignment dialog box is displayed.

Nozzle Check

Prints a nozzle check pattern.

Perform this function if printing becomes faint or a specific color fails to print. Print a nozzle check pattern, and check whether the print head is working properly.

If the print result for a specific color is fainted, or if there are any unprinted sections, click Cleaning to clean the print head.

To display a list of items that you should check before printing the nozzle check pattern, click

Initial

Check Items

.

Print Check Pattern

This function prints a pattern that allows you to check whether the any of the ink nozzles are clogged.

Click Print Check Pattern. When the confirmation message is displayed, click OK. The Pattern

Check dialog box is then displayed.

Left-side bitmap (good)

The print head nozzles are not clogged.

Right-side bitmap (bad)

The print head nozzles may be clogged.

Exit

Closes the Pattern Check dialog box, and returns to the Maintenance tab.

Cleaning

Performs print head cleaning.

Print head cleaning removes any blockage in the print head nozzles.

Perform cleaning when printing becomes faint, or if a specific color fails to print, even though all ink levels are sufficiently high.

Power Off

Turns off the printer from the printer driver.

Perform this function to turn off the printer when you cannot press the ON button (POWER button) on the printer because the printer is out of your reach.

You must press the ON button (POWER button) on the printer to turn the printer on again after clicking this button. When you use this function, you will not be able to turn the printer on from the printer driver.

Auto Power

Opens the Auto Power Settings dialog box .

Specify settings for operating the printer power automatically. Perform this function if you want to change the auto power settings.

Note



502

Quiet Settings

Opens the Quiet Settings dialog box .

Quiet Settings dialog box allows you to specify a setting that reduces the operating noise of the printer.

This mode comes in handy when the operating noise of the printer becomes a concern, such when printing at night. Perform this operation when you want to change the quiet mode setting.

Note


Custom Settings

Opens the Custom Settings dialog box .

Perform this function to change the settings of this printer.

Note



View Print History

This function starts the Canon IJ XPS preview, and displays the print history.

Note

• You can use this function only with the XPS printer driver.

View Printer Status

Starts the Canon IJ Status Monitor.

Perform this function when you want to check the printer status and how a print job is proceeding.

Note

• If you are using the XPS printer driver, the "Canon IJ Status Monitor" becomes the "Canon IJ XPS

Status Monitor".

About

Opens the About dialog box .

The version of the printer driver, plus a copyright notice, can be checked.

In addition, the language to be used can be switched.


Before running Cleaning or Deep Cleaning, check that the printer power is on, and open the cover of the printer.

Check the following items for each ink.

• Check the amount of ink remaining in the tank.

• Make sure that you push in the ink tank completely until you hear a clicking sound.

• If an orange tape is adhered to the ink tank, peel it off completely.

Any remaining tape will hinder ink output.

• Check that the ink tanks are installed in their correct positions.

503

Start Print Head Alignment dialog box

This dialog box allows you to adjust the attachment position for the print head, or to print the current setting value for the print head position.

Align Print Head

Aligns the print head.


Align the print head immediately after installing the print head.

Print Alignment Value

Click this button to check the current setting value of the print head position.

Prints the current setting value for the print head position.

Print Head Alignment dialog box

To adjust the print head position manually, click Align Print Head in the Start Print Head Alignment dialog box, and perform the operations instructed in the messages. The Print Head Alignment dialog box is then displayed.

This dialog box allows you to check the printed pattern and adjust the print head position.

Preview Window

Displays the pattern of Print Head Alignment, and checks the position of the selected pattern.

You can also change the setting by clicking the pattern on the screen directly.

Select the Pattern Number

Compare the printed adjustment patterns, and enter the pattern number of the pattern with the least visible streaks or horizontal stripes into the corresponding box.

Note

• If you do not know how to analyze the printed pattern, see Aligning the Print Head Position from

Your Computer .


Before running Nozzle Check, check that the printer power is on, and open the cover of the printer.

Check the following items for each ink.

• Check the amount of ink remaining in the tank.

• Make sure that you push in the ink tank completely until you hear a clicking sound.

• If an orange tape is adhered to the ink tank, peel it off completely.

Any remaining tape will hinder ink output.

• Check that the ink tanks are installed in their correct positions.

Auto Power Settings dialog box

When you click Auto Power, the Auto Power Settings dialog box is displayed.

This dialog box allows you to manage the printer power from the printer driver.

Auto Power On

Selects the auto power-on setting.

Specify Disable to prevent the printer from turning on automatically when print data is sent to it.

504

Make sure the printer is on and then click OK to change the printer settings.

Specify Enable to turn the printer on automatically when print data is sent to it.

Auto Power Off

Selects the auto power-off setting.

If a printer driver operation or a printer operation is not performed within the specified time, the printer turns off.

Quiet Settings dialog box

When you click Quiet Settings, the Quiet Settings dialog box is displayed.

Quiet Settings dialog box allows you to specify a setting that reduces the operating noise of the printer.

Select when you wish to reduce the operating noise of the printer at night, etc.

Using this function may lower the print speed.


Select this option when you wish to use the printer with volume of normal operating noise.


Select this option when you wish to reduce the operating noise of the printer.


Select this option when you wish to reduce the operating noise of the printer during a specified period of time.

Set the Start time and the End time of the quiet mode you wish to be activated. If both are set to the same time, the quiet mode will not function.

Important

• You can set the quiet mode from the operation panel of the printer, the printer driver, or

ScanGear (scanner driver).

No matter how you use to set the quiet mode, the mode is applied when you perform operations from the operation panel of the printer or printing and scanning from the computer.

• If you specify a time for Use quiet mode during specified hours, quiet mode is not applied to operations (copy, direct print, etc.) performed directly from the printer.

Custom Settings dialog box

When you click Custom Settings, the Custom Settings dialog box is displayed.

If necessary, switch between various modes of printer operation.

Detects a printable disc in the disc tray

Detects whether a printable disc is loaded on the disc tray during disc label printing and displays a message if a disc is not loaded.

Check this check box to print with detecting whether a printable disc is loaded.

Important

• If you leave this check box unchecked, the printer may print to the disc tray even if a printable disc is not loaded on the disc tray. Therefore, you should check this check box under normal circumstances.

• If you load a printable disc that has already been printed onto the disc tray, the printer may detect that no printable disc is loaded on the tray. In this case, uncheck this check box.

505

Prevent paper abrasion

The printer can increase the gap between the print head and the paper during high-density printing to prevent paper abrasion.

Check this check box to enable this function.

Align heads manually

Usually, the Print Head Alignment function on the Maintenance tab is set to automatic head alignment, but you can change it to manual head alignment.


Check this check box to perform the manual head alignment.

Rotate 90 degrees left when orientation is [Landscape]

On the Page Setup tab, you can change the rotation direction of the Landscape in the Orientation.

To rotate the document 90 degrees to the left when printing, select the check box.

Don't detect mismatch of paper settings when printing from computer

When you print documents from your computer and the paper settings on the printer driver and the cassette paper information registered on the printer do not match, this setting disables the message display and allows you to continue printing.

To disable detection of paper setting mismatches, select this check box.

Ink Drying Wait Time

The printer can pause before printing a subsequent page. Moving the slider to the right increases the pause time, and moving the slider to the left decreases the time.

If the paper gets stained because the next page is ejected before the ink on the printed page dries, increase the ink drying wait time.

Reducing the ink drying wait time speeds up printing.

About dialog box

When you click About, the About dialog box is displayed.

This dialog box displays the version, copyright, and module list of the printer driver. You can select the language to be used and switch the language displayed in the setup window.

Modules

Lists the printer driver modules.

Language

Specifies the language you wish to use in the printer driver setup window .

Important

• If the font for displaying the language of your choice is not installed in your system, the characters will be garbled.

Related Topics


Aligning the Print Head Position from Your Computer



Reducing the Printer Noise


506

Canon IJ Preview Description

Canon IJ Preview is an application software that displays what the print result will look like before a document is actually printed.

The preview reflects the information that is set within the printer driver and allows you to check the document layout, print order, and number of pages. You can also change the media type and paper source settings.

When you want to display a preview before printing, open the printer driver setup window , and check the

Preview before printing check box on the Main tab.

File Menu

Selects the print operation.

Start Printing

Ends the Canon IJ Preview and then starts printing the document that is displayed on the preview screen.

This command has the same function as the Start Printing on the toolbar.

Cancel Printing

Ends the Canon IJ Preview and cancels the printing of the document that is displayed on the preview screen.

This command has the same function as the Cancel Printing on the toolbar.

Exit

Ends the Canon IJ Preview.

Page Menu

This menu includes the following commands to select page to be displayed.

All of these commands except Page Selection... can also be selected from the toolbar.

Note

• If the pages are being spooled, the last spooled page becomes the last page.

• If the Page Layout setting on the Page Setup tab is specified to Page Layout, Tiling/Poster, or

Booklet, the number of pages is the number of sheets to be used for printing, and not the number of pages in the original document created with the application software.

507

• If duplex printing manually has been set, the front pages which will be printed first are all displayed together, and then the back pages are displayed.

First Page

Displays the first page of the document.

If the currently displayed page is the first page, this command is grayed out and cannot be selected.

Previous Page

Displays the page located before the currently displayed page.


Next Page

Displays the page located after the currently displayed page.

If the currently displayed page is the last page, this command is grayed out and cannot be selected.

Last Page

Displays the last page of the document.


Page Selection...

Displays the Page Selection dialog box.

This command allows you to specify the page number of the page to be displayed.

Zoom Menu

Selects the ratio of the actual size printed on the paper to the preview display size.

You can also select the ratio from the drop-down list box located on the toolbar.

Whole

Displays the entire page of data as one page.

50%

Reduces the displayed data to 50% of the actual size to be printed.

100%

Displays the data at the actual size to be printed.

200%

Enlarges the displayed data to 200% of the actual size to be printed.

400%


Option Menu

This menu includes the following command:

Displays Print Page Information

Displays print setup information (including printer paper size, media type, and page layout) for each page at the left side of the preview screen.

This screen also allows you to change the media type and paper source settings.

Help Menu

When you select this menu item, the Help window for Canon IJ Preview is displayed, and you can check the version and copyright information.

508

Start Printing button

Prints the documents selected in the document list.

The printed documents are deleted from the list, and when all documents are printed, the Canon IJ XPS

Preview closes.

Cancel Printing button

Ends the Canon IJ Preview, and cancels the printing of the document that is displayed on the preview screen.

You can click this button while spooling.

Print Page Information Screen

Displays print setup information for each page at the left side of the preview screen.

This screen also allows you to change the media type and paper source settings.

Important

• If the media type and paper source are set from the application software, those settings have priority and the changed settings may become ineffective.


Displays the paper size of the document to be printed.

Media Type

You can select the media type of the document to be printed.

Paper Source

You can select the paper source of the document to be printed.

Page Layout

Displays the page layout of the document to be printed.

509

Canon IJ XPS Preview Description

Canon IJ XPS Preview is an application software that displays what the print result will look like before a document is actually printed.

The preview reflects the information which is set within the printer driver and allows you to check the document layout, print order, and number of pages. The preview also allows you to edit the print document, edit the print pages, change the print settings, and perform other functions.

When you want to display a preview before printing, open the printer driver setup window , and check the

Preview before printing check box on the Main tab.

Important


File Menu

Selects print operation and print history settings:

Print


The printed documents are deleted from the list, and when all documents are printed, the Canon IJ

XPS Preview closes.

This command has the same function as (Print) on the toolbar and the Print in the print settings area.

Print All Documents

Prints all documents in the document list and closes the Canon IJ XPS Preview.

Save Print History

Switches whether the documents printed from the Canon IJ XPS Preview are to be saved as print history entries.

History Entry Limit

Switches the maximum number of print history registrations.

Select 10 Entries, 30 Entries, or 100 Entries.

510

Important

• If the limit on the number of registration is exceeded, the print history registrations are deleted starting from the oldest one.

Add documents from history to the list

Adds the document saved in the print history to the document list.

Exit

Ends the Canon IJ XPS Preview. The documents remaining in the document list will be deleted from the list.

This command has the same function as the Exit in the print settings area.

Edit Menu

Selects the method for editing multiple documents or pages.

Undo

Reverses the previous change.

If the change cannot be reversed, this function is grayed out and cannot be selected.

This command has the same function as the (Undo) on the toolbar.

Documents

Selects the method for editing print documents.

Combine Documents

Combines the documents selected in the document list into one document.

If only one document is selected, this command is grayed out and cannot be selected.

This command has the same function as the (Combine Documents) on the toolbar.

Reset Documents

Returns the document selected in the document list to their status before they were added to the Canon IJ XPS Preview.

The combined documents are separated, and the original documents are restored.

This command has the same function as the (Reset Documents) on the toolbar.

Move Document

Use the following command to change the order of the documents selected in the document list.

Move to First

Moves the selected print document to the beginning of the document list.

If the currently selected document is the first document, this command is grayed out and cannot be selected.

Move Up One

Moves the selected print document one up from its current position.


Move Down One

Moves the selected print document one down from its current position.

If the currently selected document is the last document, this command is grayed out and cannot be selected.

Move to Last

Moves the selected print document to the end of the document list.


511

Delete Document

Deletes the selected document from the document list.

If the document list contains only one document, the document is grayed out and cannot be selected.

This command has the same function as the (Delete Document) on the toolbar.


Allows you to change the monochrome print settings.

This command has the same functionality as the Grayscale Printing check box in the print settings area.

Page Layout Printing...

Opens the Page Layout Printing dialog box.

This dialog box allows you to set Page Layout Printing, Pages, Page Order, and Page

Border.

Duplex Printing...

Opens the Duplex Printing dialog box.

This dialog box allows you to set Duplex Printing, Automatic, Stapling Side, and Margin.

Copies...

Opens the Copies dialog box.

This dialog box allows you to set Copies, Collate, and Print from Last Page.

Pages

Selects the method for editing print pages.

Delete Page

Deletes the currently selected page.

If page layout printing is set, the pages enclosed with red frame will be deleted.

This command has the same function as the (Delete Page) on the toolbar.

Restore Page

Restores pages that were deleted with the Delete Page function.

To restore pages, you must select the View Deleted Pages check box on the Option menu and display the deleted pages as thumbnails.

Move Page

Use the following command to change the order of the currently selected pages.

Move to First

Moves the currently selected page to the beginning of the document.

If the currently selected page is the first page, this command is grayed out and cannot be selected.

Move Forward One

Moves the currently selected page one position in front of its current position.

If the currently selected page is the first page, this command is grayed out and cannot be selected.

Move Backward One

Moves the currently selected page one position after its current position.

If the currently selected page is the last page, this command is grayed out and cannot be selected.

512

Move to Last

Moves the currently selected page to the end of the document.

If the currently selected page is the last page, this command is grayed out and cannot be selected.

View Menu

Selects the documents and pages to be displayed.

Documents

Use the following command to select the document to display.

First Document

Displays the first document in the document list.


Previous Document

Displays the document located before the currently displayed document.


Next Document

Displays the document located after the currently displayed document.


Last Document

Displays the last document in the document list.


Pages

Use the following command to select the page to be displayed.

Note

• If the Page Layout setting in the printer driver is specified to Tiling/Poster, or Booklet, the number of pages is the number of sheets to be used for printing, and not the number of pages in the original document created with the application software.

First Page

Displays the first page of the document.


Previous Page

Displays the page located before the currently displayed page.


Next Page

Displays the page located after the currently displayed page.


Last Page

Displays the last page of the document.


513

Page Selection...

Displays the Page Selection dialog box.

This command allows you to specify the page number of the page to be displayed.

Zoom Menu

Selects the ratio of the actual size printed on the paper to the preview display size.

You can also select the ratio from the drop-down list box located on the toolbar.

Whole

Displays the entire page of data as one page.

50%

Reduces the displayed data to 50% of the actual size to be printed.

100%

Displays the data at the actual size to be printed.

200%


400%


Option Menu

Toggles the show / hide status of the following information.

View Thumbnails

Reduces all pages in the document selected in the document list and displays them at the bottom of the preview window.

This command has the same function as the (View Thumbnails) on the toolbar.

View Document List

Displays the print document list at the top of the preview window.

View Print Settings Area

Displays the print settings area at the right side of the preview window.

View Deleted Pages

When the thumbnails are displayed, this function displays pages that were deleted with the Delete

Page function.

To check deleted pages, you must first select the View Thumbnails check box.

Keep printed documents on the list

Leaves the printed document in the document list.

Print Settings Displayed at Startup

Switches the tab of the print settings area to be displayed when the Canon IJ XPS Preview is started.

Select Page Information, Layout, or Manual Color Adjustment.

Help Menu

When you select this menu item, the Help window for Canon IJ XPS Preview is displayed, and you can check the version and copyright information.

(Print)


The printed documents are deleted from the list, and when all documents are printed, the Canon IJ XPS

Preview closes.

514

(Combine Documents)

Combines the documents selected in the document list into one document.

If only one document is selected, this command is grayed out and cannot be selected.

(Delete Document)

Deletes the selected document from the document list.

If the document list contains only one document, the document is grayed out and cannot be selected.

(Reset Documents)

Returns the document selected in the document list to their status before they were added to the Canon

IJ XPS Preview.

The combined documents are separated, and the original documents are restored.

(View Thumbnails)

Reduces all pages in the document selected in the document list and displays them at the bottom of the preview window.

To hide the print pages, click View Thumbnails again.

(Move to First)

Moves the selected print document to the beginning of the document list.


(Move Up One)

Moves the selected print document one up from its current position.


(Move Down One)

Moves the selected print document one down from its current position.


(Move to Last)

Moves the selected print document to the end of the document list.


(Undo)

Reverses the previous change.

If the change cannot be reversed, this function is grayed out and cannot be selected.

(Delete Page)

Deletes the currently selected page.

If page layout printing is set, the pages enclosed with red frame will be deleted.

Document list

Displays the list of the print documents.

The document selected in the document list becomes the target for preview display and editing.

Document Name

Displays the name of the print document.

If you click the name of the selected print document, a text box is displayed, and you can rename the document to any name.

515

Pages

Displays the number of pages in the print document.

Important

• The number displayed in Pages and the output page count are different.

• To check the output page count, check the status bar at the bottom of the preview window.

Status

Displays the status of the print documents.

Documents that are undergoing data processing are displayed as Processing data.

Important

• Documents showing Processing data cannot be printed or edited.

Wait until the data processing ends.

Print Settings Area Screen

Allows you to check and change the print settings of the documents selected in the document list.

Print Settings Area is displayed on the right side of the preview window.

Page Information tab

The print settings are displayed for each page.

You can change the media type and paper source settings.


Displays the paper size of the document to be printed.

Media Type

Allows you to select the media type of the document to be printed.

Paper Source

Allows you to select the paper source of the document to be printed.

Page Layout

Displays the page layout of the document to be printed.

Layout tab

You can specify settings for page layout printing.

To apply the specified settings, click Apply.

If the page layout print settings cannot be changed for the print document, the individual items are grayed out and cannot be selected.

Manual Color Adjustment tab

This tab allows you to adjust the color balance by changing the settings of the Cyan, Magenta,

Yellow, Brightness, Intensity, and Contrast options.

Cyan/Magenta/Yellow

Adjusts the strengths of Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow.

Moving the slider to the right makes a color stronger, and moving the slider to the left makes a color weaker.

You can also directly enter a value linked to the slider. Enter a value in the range from -50 to

50.

This adjustment changes the relative amount of ink of each color used, which alters the total color balance of the document.

Use your application software if you want to change the total color balance significantly. Use the printer driver only if you want to adjust the color balance slightly.

516

Important

• When Grayscale Printing is checked, Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow appear grayed out and are unavailable.

Tone

Sets the color adjustment for monochrome printing.

Moving the slider to the right produces warm colors (Warm), and moving the slider to the left produces cool colors (Cool).


50.

Important

• This function is not available for certain Media Type settings.

Brightness

Selects the brightness of your print.

Pure white and black will not change, but colors between white and black will change.

Intensity

Adjusts the overall intensity of your print.

Moving the slider to the right increases the intensity, and moving the slider to the left decreases the intensity.


50.

Contrast

Adjusts the contrast between light and dark in the image to be printed.

Moving the slider to the right increases the contrast, moving the slider to the left decreases the contrast.


50.

Defaults


Clicking this button restores all the settings on this tab to their default values (factory settings).


Allows you to change the monochrome print settings.

Duplex Printing

Selects whether to print the document on both sides or one side of a sheet of paper.

If the duplex print settings cannot be changed for the print document, this item is grayed out and is unavailable.

Important

• When you select Booklet for Page Layout, Duplex Printing of the print settings area will be set automatically. In this case, Duplex Printing is grayed out and is unavailable.

Copies


If the numbers of copies cannot be changed for the print document, this item is grayed out and is unavailable.

517

Exit

Ends the Canon IJ XPS Preview.

The documents remaining in the document list will be deleted from the list.

Print


The printed documents are deleted from the list, and when all documents are printed, the Canon IJ

XPS Preview closes.

518

Canon IJ Status Monitor Description

The Canon IJ Status Monitor displays the status of the printer and the printing progress. The monitor uses graphics, icons, and messages to let you know the printer status.

Canon IJ Status Monitor Features

The Canon IJ Status Monitor offers the following advantages:

You can check the status of the printer on the screen.

The status of the printer is shown on the screen in real time.

You can check the printing progress of each printing document (print job).

Error types and solutions are shown on the screen.

Shown when a printer error occurs.

You can immediately check how to respond.

You can check the ink status.

This function displays graphics showing the ink tank type and the estimated ink levels.

Icons and messages are displayed when ink is running low (ink level warning).

Canon IJ Status Monitor Overview

Canon IJ Status Monitor allows you to check the status of the printer and ink with graphics and messages.

You can check the information on the printing document and the printing progress during printing.

When a printer error occurs, it shows the cause and solution. Follow the instruction in the message.

Printer

Canon IJ Status Monitor shows an icon when a warning or error occurs to the printer.

: Indicates that a warning (operator call error) has occurred or the printer is working.

: There has been an error which requires a service.

Ink Tank

Canon IJ Status Monitor shows an icon when a low ink warning or a no ink error occurs.

In addition, this function displays graphics showing the estimated ink levels of the ink tank.

In this case, click the graphics to open the Ink Details dialog box. You can check the detail information such as the remaining ink level and the ink tank types for your printer.

Document Name

Shows the name of the document to be printed.

Owner

Shows the owner's name of the document to be printed.

Printing Page

Shows the number of printing page and total printing pages.

519

Display Print Queue

Shows the print window used to manage the print job that is being printed or being in the print queue.

Cancel Printing

Cancels the current print job.

Important

• The Cancel Printing button is enabled only while print data is being sent to the printer.

Once the print data has been sent, the button is grayed out and becomes unavailable.

Option Menu

If you select Enable Status Monitor, when a printer related message is generated the Canon IJ

Status Monitor starts.

When Enable Status Monitor is selected, following commands are available.

Always Display Current Job

Displays the Canon IJ Status Monitor during printing.

Always Display on Top

Displays the Canon IJ Status Monitor in front of other windows.

Display Guide Message

Displays the guide for operations in which how to set paper is complicated.

Envelope Printing

Displays the guide message when envelope printing starts.

To hide this guide message, select the Do not show this message again check box.

To display the guide messages again, click Envelope Printing on the Display Guide

Message in the Option menu and enable this setting.

Hagaki Printing

Displays the guide message before the printer begins hagaki printing.

To hide this guide message, select the Do not show this message again check box.

To display the guide messages again, click Hagaki Printing on the Display Guide

Message in the Option menu and enable this setting.


When a Low Ink Warning Occurs

Starts the Canon IJ Status Monitor window automatically and displays it in front of the other windows when a low ink warning occurs.

Start when Windows is Started

Starts the Canon IJ Status Monitor automatically when you start Windows.

Ink Details Menu

Select this menu to display the Ink Details dialog box. Check the detail information such as the remaining ink level and the ink tank types for your printer.

Ink Details dialog box

This function displays graphics and messages showing the ink tank type and the estimated ink levels.

Ink Information (displayed at left)

Shows the ink tank types with graphics.

If a warning or error related to the remaining ink level occurs, the printer driver displays an icon to let you know.

If the icon is displayed, operate the printer according to the instructions displayed on the screen.

520

Message (displayed at right)

Shows information such as the ink status and ink colors with sentences.

Ink Model Number

Shows the ink tank types for your printer.

Close

Closes the Ink Details dialog box to return to Canon IJ Status Monitor.

Help Menu

When you select this menu item, the Help window for Canon IJ Status Monitor is displayed, and you can check the version and copyright information.

521

Updating the MP Drivers

Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers

Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers

Before Installing the MP Drivers

Installing the MP Drivers

522

Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers

The MP Drivers include a printer driver and ScanGear (scanner driver).

By updating the MP Drivers to the latest version of the MP Drivers, unresolved problems may be solved.

You can access our website and download the latest MP Drivers for your model.

Important

• You can download the MP Drivers for free, but any Internet access charges incurred are your responsibility.

• Before installing the latest MP Drivers, delete the previously installed version .

Related Topics

Before Installing the MP Drivers

Installing the MP Drivers

523

Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers

The MP Drivers which you no longer use can be deleted.

When deleting the MP Drivers, first exit all programs that are running.

The procedure to delete the unnecessary MP Drivers is as follows:

1. Start the uninstaller

• If you are using Windows 8.1 or Windows 8, from the Desktop charms, select Settings -> Control

Panel -> Programs -> Programs and Features.

From the program list, select "XXX MP Drivers" (where "XXX" is your model name) and then click

Uninstall.

• If you are using Windows 7 or Windows Vista, select Start menu -> Control Panel -> Programs -

> Programs and Features.


Uninstall.

• If you are using Windows XP, select Start menu -> Control Panel -> Add or Remove Programs.


Remove.

The confirmation window for uninstalling the model appears.

Important

• In Windows 8.1, Windows 8, Windows 7, or Windows Vista, a confirmation/warning dialog box may appear when starting, installing or uninstalling software.

This dialog box appears when administrative rights are required to perform a task.

When you are logged on to an administrator account, click Yes (or Continue, Allow) to continue.

Some applications require an administrator account to continue. In such cases, switch to an administrator account, and restart the operation from the beginning.

2. Execute the uninstaller

Click Execute. When the confirmation message appears, click Yes.

When all the files have been deleted, click Complete.

The deletion of the MP Drivers is complete.

Important

• Printer driver, XPS printer driver, and ScanGear (scanner driver) will be deleted when you uninstall the

MP Drivers.

524

Before Installing the MP Drivers

This section describes the items that you should check before installing the MP Drivers. You should also refer to this section if the MP Drivers cannot be installed.

Checking the Printer Status

• Turn off the printer.

Checking the Personal Computer Settings

• Terminate all running applications.

• Log on as a user who has the administrator account.

Important


Related Topics

Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers

Installing the MP Drivers

525

Installing the MP Drivers

You can access our web site through the Internet and download the latest MP Drivers and XPS printer driver for your model.

The procedure for installing the downloaded MP Drivers is as follows:

1. Turn off the printer

2. Start the installer

Double-click the icon of the downloaded file.

The installation program starts.

Important

• In Windows 8.1, Windows 8, Windows 7, or Windows Vista, a confirmation/warning dialog box may appear when starting, installing or uninstalling software.


When you are logged on to an administrator account, click Yes (or Continue, Allow) to continue.

Some applications require an administrator account to continue. In such cases, switch to an administrator account, and restart the operation from the beginning.

3. Install the MP Drivers

Take the appropriate action as described on the screen.

4. Complete the installation

Click Complete.

Depending on the environment you are using, a message prompting you to restart the computer may be displayed. To complete the installation properly, restart the computer.

Important

• You can install the XPS printer driver with the same procedure for installing the MP Drivers. However, when installing the XPS printer driver, first complete installation of the MP Drivers.

• You can download the MP Drivers and XPS printer driver for free, but any Internet access charges incurred are your responsibility.


Related Topics

Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers

Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers

Before Installing the MP Drivers

526

Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine

Printing Photo Data

Using the Slide Show Function

Printing Template Forms Such As Lined Paper or Graph Paper

Printing Documents (PDF File) Saved on a Memory Card

About Disc Label Printing

527

Printing Photo Data

Printing Photographs Saved on a Memory Card

About Advanced photo Menu

Printing Photo with Trimming

Setting Items for Photo Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine

Using Useful Display Functions

528

Printing Photographs Saved on a Memory Card

You can print the photograph saved on the memory card easily.

This section describes the procedure to print the photograph in Photo print.

1.


2.

Load photo paper.



Photo print.

4.

Insert the memory card into the card slot.

The photo selection screen is displayed.

Note

• When you insert the memory card before you select Photo print on the HOME screen, the photo selection screen is displayed.

If both photo files and PDF files are saved on the memory card, the confirmation screen to select which file you print is displayed. Tap Print photos in the displayed screen.

• If no printable photo data is saved on the memory card, Data of supported types are not saved. is displayed on the touch screen.

• If more than 2,000 photo data are saved on the memory card, the photo data is split by group per

2,000 photos in reverse chronological order (date last modified) automatically. Check the message displayed on the touch screen, then tap OK.


• To select the photo to print:

Flick horizontally to select the photo.

You can also select the photo by tapping "A".

You can print a copy of the displayed photo by touching the Color button.

• To change the display method, the number of copies, or the print settings:

Tap near the center of the displayed photo to display menus.

529

A. Total number of copies

Total number of copies is displayed.

When tapping, the Check total no. of copies screen is displayed and you can check the number of copies for each photo. On the Check total no. of copies screen, you can change the number of copies for each photo.

B. Number of copies

Tap to specify the number of copies.

1. Flick vertically to specify the number of copies.

Tap to display the photo selection screen.

2. Tap to specify the number of copies.

Touch and hold to specify the number of copies by 10 copies.

Note

• You can specify the number of copies for each photo. Display the photo you want to print, then specify the number of copies when the desired photo is displayed.

C. Switching group

Tap to switch the photo group.

530

For details:

Using Useful Display Functions

D. Settings

Tap to display the Settings screen.

You can change the settings of page size, media type, and print quality and so on.

For details on the setting items:


E. Zooming in

Tap to zoom in on the photo.

For details:


F. Date specification

Tap to select photo with specifying the date (last modified date of data).

531

For details:


G. Multi display

Tap to display the multiple photos at once.

For details on the display method:


6. Touch the Color button.

The machine starts printing.

Note

• Touch the Stop button to cancel printing.

• While processing the print job, you can add the print job (Reserve photo print).

Adding the Print Job

Adding the Print Job

You can add the print job (Reserve photo print) while printing photos.

Follow the procedure below to add the print job.

1. Flick the photo while printing to select the next photo.

Note

• While you select the photo, the machine prints the reserved photos.

• The reserved photo icon appears on the photo included in the print job.

532

2. Specify the number of copies for each photo.

Note

• While processing the print job, you cannot change the setting for Page size or Type on print settings confirmation screen. The setting is the same as the setting for the photo included in the print job.


The reserved photo is printed next to the photo that has already been started printing.

If you want to print more photos, operate from step 1 again.

Note

• While processing the print job, you cannot display the HOME screen, change the print menu, or print from the computer or other devices.

• While processing the print job, the photo in other group is not selected.

• If you touch the Stop button while processing the print job, the screen to select a method to cancel reservation is displayed. If you tap Cancel all reservations, you can cancel printing all photos. If you tap Cancel the last reservation, you can cancel the last printing job.

• If there are many print jobs, Cannot reserve more print jobs. Please wait a while and redo the

operation. may be displayed on the touch screen. In this case, wait a while, then add the print job.

533

About Advanced photo Menu

The following menus are selectable in the Advanced print menu to print photos saved on the memory card.

Trimming print

You can edit photo displayed on the touch screen by trimming them and print.

Printing Photo with Trimming

Slide show

You can view the photos saved on the memory card with the slide show.

Printing Photo While Viewing the Slide Show

534

Printing Photo with Trimming

You can edit photo displayed on the touch screen by trimming them and print.

1.


2.

Load photo paper.



Advanced print.

4.


Note

• If you insert the memory card before you select Advanced print on the HOME screen, the photo selection screen in Photo print is displayed.

If both photo files and PDF files are saved on the memory card, the confirmation screen to select which file you print is displayed.

To display the HOME screen, touch the HOME button.

5. Tap Trimming print.

Note




6. Tap the photo you want to print.

Note

• Other Options


7. Trim the print area.

535

A. Tap to switch the aspect ratio of the trimming frame.

B. Drag to position the trimming frame.

C. Drag to set the trimming frame size.

D. Tap to finalize your selection of trimming area.

When the area to be cropped is specified, the print setting confirmation screen is displayed.


Tap Copies to display the screen to specify the number of copies.

For the setting items other than Copies:




Note


• You can add the print job by tapping Print more while printing.

Adding the Print Job

• The trimming image cannot be newly saved on the memory card.

536

Setting Items for Photo Printing Using the Operation Panel of the

Machine

You can specify the setting of page size, media type, photo fix and so on to print the photos saved on the memory card.

Print Settings Screen

How to display the print settings screen varies with the print menu.

• In Photo or Slide show:

The following screen is displayed by tapping Settings.

* In Slide show, the Print settings screen is displayed by tapping Print settings.

• In Trimming print:

The following screen is displayed before printing.

Setting Items

You can specify the following setting items.

Flick vertically to display setting items, then tap the setting item to display the settings. Tap to specify the setting.

537

Note

• Depending on the print menu, some setting items cannot be selected. This section describes the setting items in Photo print.

The setting item which cannot be selected is displayed grayed out or not displayed.

• Some settings cannot be specified in combination with the other setting items or the print menus. If the setting which cannot be specified in combination is selected, and Error details are displayed on the touch screen. In this case, tap on the upper left on the touch screen to confirm the message, then change the setting.

• The settings of the page size, media type, etc. are retained even if another print menu is selected or the machine is turned off.

1. Page size

Select the page size of the loaded paper.


Select the media type of the loaded paper.


Select print quality according to the photo.


Select bordered or borderless print.

5. Photo fix

When Auto photo fix is selected, the scene or person's face of a shot photo is recognized and the most suitable correction for each photo is made automatically. It makes a darkened face by backlight brighter to print. It also analyzes a scene such as scenery, night scene, person, etc. and corrects each scene with the most suitable color, brightness, or contrasts automatically to print.

Note

• As a default, photos on the memory card are printed with auto correction applied.

• If No correction is selected, photos are printed without correction.

6. Red-EyeCorrection

538

Corrects red eyes in portraits caused by flash photography.

Depending on the type of the photo, red eyes may not be corrected or parts other than the eyes may be corrected.

7. Print date

Activates/deactivates to print the date (shooting date) on a photo.

Note

• The shooting date is printed according to the settings of Date display format in Device user

settings under Device settings under Setup.


539

Using Useful Display Functions

You can display the multiple photos at once, specify the date (last modified date of data) to select photos, and switch the photo group.

Viewing Multiple Photos to Select Photo

Specifying Date to Select Photo

Zooming in on the Photo

Switching the Photo Group

Viewing Multiple Photos to Select Photo

The following screen is displayed by tapping on the photo selection screen.

A. Tap the photo you want to print, the touch screen returns to single photo display.

B. Tap to display photo with specifying the date.

Specifying Date to Select Photo

C. Tap to increase the display photos. (54 photos display)

D. Drag to switch the number of display photos to 6 photos, 15 photos, or 54 photos.

E. Tap to decrease the display photos. (6 photos display)

Specifying Date to Select Photo


A. Tap to select the date (last modified date of data).

B. Tap the date to display.

540

The photos on date specified are displayed.

Note

• The date is displayed according to the settings of Date display format in Device user settings under Device settings under Setup.


Zooming in on the Photo


A. Tap to switch the display magnification.

B. Drag to move the display position.

Switching the Photo Group

Note


2,000 photos in reverse chronological order (date last modified) automatically.


A. Tap to switch the photo group.

541

Using the Slide Show Function

Printing Photo While Viewing the Slide Show

542

Printing Photo While Viewing the Slide Show

You can view the photos saved on the memory card with the slide show.

In the slide show, the photos are displayed one after another automatically.

While viewing the slide show, you can print your favorite photo.

1.




Advanced print.

3.


Note

• If you insert the memory card before you select Advanced print on the HOME screen, the photo selection screen in Photo is displayed.

If both photo files and PDF files are saved on the memory card the confirmation screen to select which file you print is displayed.


4. Tap Slide show.

Note




5. Tap the effect for playback to display.

The slide show starts playing back.

Note

• To display the photos in the specified range of dates, to change the display order, or to switch the photo group to display, tap Display set..

If you display the photos in the specified range of dates, follow the on-screen instructions to specify the start and end of the date.

• Tap the touch screen while the slide show is played back, the slide show pauses.

You can print the displayed photo by touching the Color button while the slide show pauses.

When Printing Photo

When the slide show pauses by tapping the touch screen, you can print the displayed photo.

543

When starting printing, load paper, then touch the Color button.

Note

• You can change the print settings by tapping Print settings.


• To resume the slide show, tap Resume while the slide show pauses.

• You can resume the slide show by tapping Resume while printing. If the printing is not complete, you can print the displayed photo by pausing the slide show again and touching the Color button.

• To cancel the slide show, touch the HOME button.

544

Printing Template Forms Such As Lined Paper or Graph Paper

You can print a template form such as lined paper, graph paper, or checklist, etc. on A4, B5, or Letter-sized plain paper.

Printable template forms

Printing template forms

Printable template forms

The following templates are available:

• Notebook paper

You can select three line spacing formats.

Setting on the touch screen:

◦ Notebook paper 1 (8 mm)



Note

• You cannot print Notebook paper on B5 sized paper.

• Graph paper

You can select two square sizes.


◦ Graph paper 1 (5 mm grid)

◦ Graph paper 2 (3 mm grid)

Note

• You cannot print Graph paper on B5 sized paper.

• Checklist

You can print a notepad with checkboxes.


Checklist

545

• Staff paper

You can print staff paper with 10 or 12 staves.


◦ Staff paper 1 (10 staves)

◦ Staff paper 2 (12 staves)

• Handwriting paper

You can print handwriting paper.


Handwriting paper (3 lines)

• Weekly schedule

You can print a weekly schedule form.


Weekly schedule (vertical)

• Monthly schedule

You can print a monthly schedule form.


Monthly schedule(calendar)

Printing template forms

Print template form following the procedure below.

1.


2.

Load A4, B5, or Letter-sized plain paper.



4. Tap Template print.

5. Tap the template you want to print.

Advanced print.

546

Printable template forms


1. Copies

Specify the number of copies.

2. Page size

Select the page size depending on the loaded paper.

Note

• Depending on the form, some setting of page size cannot be specified. If it is selected, and Error details are displayed on the touch screen. In this case, tap on the upper left on the touch screen to confirm the message, then change the setting.


The paper type is set to Plain paper.

4. 2-sidedPrintSetting

Select two-sided printing or single-sided printing.

7. Start printing.

Touch the Color button for printing following forms.

Notebook paper 1 (8 mm)/Notebook paper 2 (7 mm)/Notebook paper 3 (6 mm)/Graph paper 1 (5

mm grid)/Graph paper 2 (3 mm grid)/Handwriting paper (3 lines)

Touch the Black button for printing following forms.

Checklist/Staff paper 1 (10 staves)/Staff paper 2 (12 staves)/Weekly schedule (vertical)/Monthly

schedule(calendar)

547

Printing Documents (PDF File) Saved on a Memory Card

You can print PDF files made using Canon IJ Scan Utility or My Image Garden (application software compatible with the machine) from a memory card.

Note

• You can print PDF files from a memory card which satisfy the following conditions. Other than the following PDF file cannot be printed even if they appear on the document list.

• PDF files made using Canon IJ Scan Utility or My Image Garden (application software compatible with the machine) (Extension: .pdf)

Except for the following data:

-Encrypted data

-Data more than 2 GB

-Data including images scanned at 9601 pixels or more in the vertical and horizontal directions

For details on making PDF files using My Image Garden (application software compatible with the machine):

Creating/Editing PDF Files

For details on making PDF files using Canon IJ Scan Utility (application software compatible with the machine):

Scanning Documents

1.


2.

Load A4 or Letter-sized plain paper.



4. Tap PDF file print.

Advanced print.

5.


The document list is displayed.

Note

• If both photo files and PDF files are saved on the memory card, when the memory card is inserted before you select PDF file print, the confirmation screen to select which file you print is displayed.

Tap Print documents in the displayed screen.

• If no printable document (PDF files) is saved on the memory card, Data of supported types are

not saved. is displayed on the touch screen.

6. Select the document to print.

548

File name list Preview display

A. Flick to display the name of documents, then tap document to print.

B. Tap to switch to the preview display.

C. Flick to display document preview, then tap document to print.

D. Tap to switch to the file name list.

E. Tap to display the Details screen.

Note

• File names may not be displayed properly on the document list if the file name is long or includes incompatible characters.

• On the preview screen, the first page of each PDF file is displayed on the touch screen. In addition, if a document is in landscape format, it will be displayed rotated by 90 degrees.

• For some PDF files, it may take longer to display the preview or part of the preview may be cropped.

• The name of the PDF files is displayed even though the PDF files cannot be printed using the operation panel of the machine. If one of the following conditions is applicable to the PDF files, they are not printable.

• PDF files saved using application software other than Canon IJ Scan Utility and My Image

Garden (application software compatible with the machine)

• PDF files for which the preview screen is not available ("?" is displayed on the preview screen.)

• It is recommended you display the Details screen and confirm whether a PDF file is printable. If one of the following conditions is applicable to the PDF file, it is not printable.

• Information on the Details screen cannot be displayed.

• Characters other than the machine name, IJ Scan Utility, or My Image Garden are displayed on Created with.

• The PDF files made using application software other than Canon IJ Scan Utility and My Image

Garden (application software compatible with the machine) are not printable even if they are saved using Canon IJ Scan Utility or My Image Garden.


549

1. Copies

Specify the number of copies.

2. Page size

Select the page size depending on the loaded paper.


The paper type is set to Plain paper.


Specify the print quality.


Select two-sided printing or single-sided printing.

If you tap Advanced with 2-sided selected, you can specify the orientation and the stapling side of the document.

Note

• When the machine name, IJ Scan Utility, or My Image Garden is displayed in Created with on the Details screen, you can select 2-sided to print onto the both sides of a single sheet of paper.

8. Touch the Color button for color printing, or the Black button for black & white printing.


Note

• You can print up to 250 pages at a time. If you try to print more than 250 pages of a PDF file, The

specified PDF file contains too many pages. The pages exceeding the number of printable pages

will not be printed. Continue? is displayed on the touch screen. To start printing, tap Yes. If you need to print more than 250 pages of a PDF file, print them from a computer.

• Depending on the PDF file, it may be printed rotated by 90 degrees.

• If the document size is larger than the page size specified on the machine, the document will be printed at a reduced size. In this case, thin lines on the document may not be printed or images may be misaligned.

• For some PDF files, an error message may be displayed before printing starts or while printing is in progress.

For details, see A Message Is Displayed .

550

About Disc Label Printing

Copying the Label Side of Disc

Printing Photo from a Memory Card onto the Disc Label

551

Copying the Label Side of Disc

You can copy the label of an existing BD/DVD/CD and print it on a printable disc.

Important

• You cannot print on 3.15 inches / 8 cm printable discs.

• Do not attach the disc tray or place the printable disc until the message asking you to set them is displayed. Doing so can damage the machine.

1.




3. Tap Copy label to disc label.

Advanced print.

The print area setting screen is displayed.

4. Specify the print area.

A. Tap to specify the outer circle.

B. Tap to specify the inner circle.

C. Tap to finalize to specify the print area.

Note


552

• For information on printable discs, contact their manufacturers.

5. Tap a printable disc type.

Note

• If your printable disc is the recommended disc, specify Recommended disc for the suitable density printing. If not, specify Other disc.

6. Follow the on-screen instructions to load the copy source BD/DVD/CD on the Platen Glass, then tap OK.

The print setting confirmation screen is displayed.

Important

• Be sure to load the copy source BD/DVD/CD with its label side down on the center of the Platen

Glass. If you load it near the edge of the Platen Glass, part of the image may be cut off.

7. Touch the Color button for color copying, or the Black button for black & white copying.

8. Follow the on-screen instructions to set the printable disc.

553

Note

• You can see the procedure to set the printable disc by tapping How to set. The next screen is displayed by tapping Next. Additionally, touching the Stop button returns to the print confirmation screen.

• For details on how to set the printable disc:


9. Tap OK.

The machine starts copying.

Note

• Touch the Stop button to cancel copying.


• To keep the print quality at an optimal level, it is recommended to stop printing discs once every ten discs when printing more than ten discs continuously. To stop the printing operation, detach the disc tray from the machine, then close the disc tray guide. After approximately three minutes have elapsed, open the disc tray guide, attach the disc tray to the machine, then resume printing.

• If printing is misaligned, adjust the printing position using Adjust disc print area in Print settings under Device settings.

Print settings

554

Printing Photo from a Memory Card onto the Disc Label

You can print a photograph saved on a memory card onto the disc label of the printable disc.

Important

• You cannot print on 3.15 inches / 8 cm printable discs.

• Do not attach the disc tray or place the printable disc until the message asking you to set them is displayed. Doing so can damage the machine.

1.




Advanced print.

3.


Note

• If you insert the memory card before you select Advanced print on the HOME screen, the photo selection screen in Photo is displayed.

If both photo files and PDF files are saved on the memory card, the confirmation screen to select which file you print is displayed.


4. Tap Print photos to disc label.

The print area setting screen is displayed.

Note




5. Specify the print area.

A. Tap to specify the outer circle.

555

B. Tap to specify the inner circle.

C. Tap to finalize to specify the print area.

Note


• For information on printable discs, contact their manufacturers.

6. Tap a printable disc type.

Note

• If your printable disc is the recommended disc, specify Recommended disc for the suitable density printing. If not, specify Other disc.

7. Tap the photo you want to print.

Note

• Other options


8. Specify the print area with trimming.

A. Drag to position the trimming frame.

B. Drag to set the trimming frame size.

C. Tap to finalize your selection of trimming area.

When the area to be cropped is specified, the print setting confirmation screen is displayed.

9. Check the print settings, then touch the Color button.

10. Follow the on-screen instructions to set the printable disc.

Note

• You can see the procedure to set the printable disc by tapping How to set. The next screen is displayed by tapping Next. Additionally, touching the Stop button returns to the print confirmation screen.

• For details on how to set the printable disc:

556


11. Tap OK.


Note



• To keep the print quality at an optimal level, it is recommended to stop printing discs once every ten discs when printing more than ten discs continuously. To stop the printing operation, detach the disc tray from the machine, then close the disc tray guide. After approximately three minutes have elapsed, open the disc tray guide, attach the disc tray to the machine, then resume printing.

• If printing is misaligned, adjust the printing position using Adjust disc print area in Print settings under Device settings.

Print settings

557

Printing with Web Service

Important

• This function may not be available depending on the country or region of purchase.


Downloading and Printing Template Forms

558


When Using Web Service

• Canon does not guarantee the continuity and reliability of the web services provided, the availability of site access, or permission to download the materials.

• Canon may at any time update, change, or delete the information provided through the web service, or may suspend or discontinue the service without prior notice. Canon shall not be held responsible for any damages resulting from such actions.

• In no event shall Canon be liable for any damages whatsoever resulting from the use of the web services.

• All or part of the web service may not be available depending on the country or region you live in.

• Depending on your network environment, some functions on web service are not available. Even if they are available, it may take a while to print or display the contents, or communication may be interrupted while operation is in progress.

Copyrights and Rights of Publicity

When printing downloaded template forms:

1. The copyright of each material (photos, illustrations, logos, or documents: hereinafter referred to as

"the materials") provided on the web template printing service belongs to their respective owners.

Issues pertaining to Rights of Publicity may arise regarding the use of any of people or characters displayed on the web template printing service.

Except as otherwise permitted (please see "2" below), copying, modifying or distributing all or a portion of any of the materials contained on the web template printing service without prior consent of the respective rights (Rights of Publicity and Copyright) holder is strictly prohibited.

2. All of the materials provided on the web template printing service can be freely used for personal and non-commercial purposes.

559

Downloading and Printing Template Forms

Important

• This function may not be available depending on the country or region of purchase.

You can download the template form you want to print from the web service.

Before using the web service, see the terms of service.

Notice for Web Service Printing

Important

• LAN connection with the machine and internet connection are required to use this function.

1.




Cloud.

3. Tap Web template print.

The category folders of the template form are displayed on the touch screen.

4. Tap the category folders to display.

The template forms in the category folder are displayed on the touch screen.

5. Tap the template form to print.


7. Check the print settings.

The print settings are determined automatically according to the specified template form.

To change the print setting, tap the setting item to change the setting.

Note

• 2-sidedPrintSetting is set to 1-sided.

• Depending on the template form, some print setting cannot be specified. If it is selected, and

Error details are displayed on the touch screen. In this case, tap on the upper left on the touch screen to confirm the message, then change the setting.

8.

Load paper according to the print settings.



560

Printing from a Digital Camera

Printing Photographs Directly from a PictBridge (Wireless LAN) Compliant

Device

About PictBridge (Wireless LAN) Print Settings

561

Printing Photographs Directly from a PictBridge (Wireless LAN)

Compliant Device

You can connect a PictBridge (Wireless LAN) compliant device such as a digital camera, camcorder, or mobile phone to the machine through LAN, and print recorded images directly without using a computer.

Connectable devices:

PictBridge (Wireless LAN) compliant device

Printable image data format:

The machine accepts images* taken with a camera compliant with the Design rule for Camera File system and PNG files.

* Exif 2.2/2.21/2.3 compliant

Important

• LAN connection with the machine is required to use this function.

Note

• PictBridge is the Standard to print your photos directly without using a computer, connecting a device such as a digital still camera, digital camcorder, or camera-equipped mobile phone.

In this manual, PictBridge printing with the wireless LAN connection is referred to as "PictBridge

(Wireless LAN)."

• When printing photos with the PictBridge (Wireless LAN) compliant device connected to the machine, we recommend the use of the AC adapter supplied with the device. If you are using the device battery, be sure to charge it fully.

• Depending on the model or brand of your device, you may have to select a print mode compliant with

PictBridge (Wireless LAN) before connecting the device. You may also have to turn on the device or select Play mode manually after connecting the device to the machine.

Perform necessary operations on the PictBridge (Wireless LAN) compliant device before connecting it to this machine according to instructions given in the device's instruction manual.

• Depending on your PictBridge (Wireless LAN) compliant device, you can print on the label side of discs.

However, you cannot print on 3.15 inches / 8 cm printable discs.

1.


2.

Load paper.

3. Connect the PictBridge (Wireless LAN) compliant device to the machine.

Detect the machine with the PictBridge (Wireless LAN) compliant device and connect the PictBridge

(Wireless LAN) compliant device to the machine with LAN.

Note

• For details on how to detect the machine, refer to your PictBridge (Wireless LAN) compliant device's instruction manual.

562

4. Specify the print settings such as the paper type and layout.

You can perform settings using the menu on the LCD of your PictBridge (Wireless LAN) compliant device. Select the size and type of paper that you loaded in the machine.


If your PictBridge (Wireless LAN) compliant device does not have a setting menu, change the setting from the machine.

Settings on the Machine

Note

• When printing from the PictBridge (Wireless LAN) compliant device, set the print quality with the operation panel on the machine. You cannot set the print quality on the PictBridge (Wireless LAN) compliant device.

• When printing onto printable disc, attach the disc tray following the on-screen instructions of


For details on how to place the printable disc on the disc tray:


5. Start printing from your PictBridge (Wireless LAN) compliant device.

563

About PictBridge (Wireless LAN) Print Settings


Settings on the Machine

Settings on a PictBridge (Wireless LAN) Compliant Device

This section describes the PictBridge (Wireless LAN) function of the machine. For the print settings on a

PictBridge (Wireless LAN) compliant device, refer to the instructions given in the device's instruction manual.

Note

• In the following description, names of setting items are given according to those used in Canon-brand

PictBridge (Wireless LAN) compliant devices. Setting item names may be different depending on the brand or model of your device.

• Some setting items explained below may not be available on some devices. In this case, the settings made on the machine are applied. Also, when some items are set to Default on a PictBridge

(Wireless LAN) compliant device, the machine settings for these items are applied.


• Depending on the PictBridge (Wireless LAN) compliant device, you can print a photo onto the disc label of the printable disc.

The following settings can be used when printing from a PictBridge (Wireless LAN) compliant device.

Paper size 4" x 6"/ 10 x 15 cm, 5" x 7"*, 8" x 10"/ 20 x 25 cm, A4, 8.5" x 11"(Letter)

* Can be selected only on certain Canon-brand PictBridge (Wireless LAN) compliant devices. (May not be selected depending on the device.)

Paper type

Layout

• Default (Selections based on the machine setting)

• Photo:

Photo Paper Plus Glossy II PP-201/Photo Stickers*

* When printing on sticker paper, select 4"x6"/10x15cm in Paper size. Do not set Layout to

Borderless.

• Fast Photo:

Photo Paper Pro Platinum PT-101

• Plain:

A4/Letter sized plain paper

When Paper type is set to Plain, borderless printing will be disabled even when Layout is set to

Borderless.

Default (Selections based on the machine setting), Index, Bordered, Borderless, N-up (2, 4, 9, 16)*1,

20-up*2, 35-up*3

*1 Layout compatible with A4 or Letter-sized paper and Canon-brand sticker above.

-A4/Letter: 4-up

-Photo Stickers: 2-up, 4-up, 9-up, 16-up.

*2 With a Canon brand PictBridge (Wireless LAN) compliant device, selecting items with "i" mark allows you to print shooting info (Exif Data) in list format (20-up) or on the margins of the specified

564

data (1-up). (May not be available with some Canon-brand PictBridge (Wireless LAN) compliant devices.)

*3 Printed in 35 mm Film Style Layout (Contact Printing Layout). Available only with a Canon-brand

PictBridge (Wireless LAN) compliant device. (May not be available with some Canon-brand

PictBridge (Wireless LAN) compliant devices.)

Print date & file no.

Default (Off: No printing), Date, File No., Both, Off

Image optimize

Trimming

Default (Selections based on the machine setting), On (Auto photo fix)*1, Off, Red-Eye*2

*1 The scene or person's face of a shot photo is recognized and the most suitable correction for each photo is made automatically. It makes a darkened face by backlight brighter to print. It also analyzes a scene such as scenery, night scene, person, etc. and corrects each scene with the most suitable color, brightness, or contrasts automatically to print.

*2 Can be selected only on certain Canon-brand PictBridge (Wireless LAN) compliant devices. (May not be selected depending on the device.)

Default (Off: No trimming), On (follow the camera's setting), Off

Settings on the Machine

You can change the PictBridge (Wireless LAN) print settings from the PictBridge print settings screen.

Set the print settings to Default on the PictBridge (Wireless LAN) compliant device when you want to print according to the settings on the machine.

This section describes the procedure to display the PictBridge print settings screen.

1.




Setup.


4. Tap PictBridge print settings.


6. Tap Photo print setting.

The PictBridge print settings screen is displayed.



Note

• If you select Disc label print setting, the Set disc print area screen is displayed to change the disc label print setting.

565


566

Paper setting for Printing

By registering the paper size and the media type loaded in the cassette, you can prevent the machine from misprinting by displaying the message before printing starts when the paper size or the media type of the loaded paper differs from the print settings.

• When you load paper in the cassette:

The screen to register the cassette paper information is displayed.

Register the paper size and the media type according to the loaded paper.

Important




• For copying, specify the paper settings for copying so that they match the cassette paper information.

Note

• Depending on the registered cassette paper information, the screen to confirm if you apply the registered information to the paper settings for copying is displayed. If you tap Yes, the information is applied to the paper settings for copying.

• When the paper settings for printing or copying are different from the cassette paper information

registered to the machine:

Ex:

◦ Paper setting for printing or copying: B5

◦ Cassette paper information registered to the machine: A4

567

When you start printing or copying, a message is displayed.

Confirm the message, then tap OK. When the screen to select the operation is displayed, select one of the operations below.

Note

• Depending on the setting, the choices below may not be displayed.

Print with paper in cass. settings

Select if you want to print on the paper loaded in the cassette without changing the paper settings.

For example, when the paper setting for printing or copying is B5 and the cassette paper information registered to the machine is A4, the machine starts printing or copying with B5 on the paper loaded in the cassette.

Replace the paper and print

Select if you want to print after replacing the paper of the cassette.

For example, when the paper setting for printing or copying is B5 and the cassette paper information registered to the machine is A4, you load B5 sized paper in the cassette before you start printing or copying.

The cassette paper information registration screen is displayed after replacing the paper and inserting the cassette. Register the cassette paper information according to the paper you loaded in the cassette.

Note

• If you do not know what paper information to register to the machine, touch the Back button when the screen to select the operation is displayed. When the previous screen is displayed, confirm the paper size and the media type, then register them to the machine.


568



Cancel

Cancels printing.

Select when you change the paper settings specified for printing or copying. Change the paper settings, then try printing again.

Important

• About the default setting for displaying the message which prevents misprinting:

The default setting is different between when you print or copy from the operation panel of the machine and when you print using the printer driver.

• When you print or copy from the operation panel of the machine, the message which prevents misprinting is enabled by default.

To change the setting for printing or copying using the operation panel of the machine:

Cassette settings

• When you print using the printer driver, the message which prevents misprinting is disabled by default.

To change the setting for printing using the printer driver:


• When the message which prevents misprinting is disabled:

The machine starts printing or copying even though the paper settings for printing or copying and the cassette paper information registered to the machine are different.

569

Copying

Making Copies

Basic

Reducing or Enlarging a Copy

Two-Sided Copying About Special Copy Menu

Copying Two Pages to Fit onto a Single

Page

Copying Four Pages to Fit onto a Single

Page

570

Making Copies

This section describes the procedure to copy with Copy.

1.


2.

Load paper.



The Copy standby screen is displayed.

4.

Load the original on the platen glass.


Copy.

A. The copy layout is displayed.

Switch the layout (single-sided/2-on-1/two-sided).

B. Tap to specify the number of copies.

1. Flick to specify the number of copies.

2. Tap to specify the number of copies.

If you keep touching here, the number scrolls by 10.

C. Tap to display the print setting items.

571


Setting Items for Copying

D. Tap to preview an image of the printout on the preview screen.

For details:

Displaying the Preview Screen

E. Tap to specify the page size.



Remove the original on the platen glass after copying is complete.

Important

• Do not open the document cover or remove the original from the platen glass until scanning is completed.

Note

• To cancel copying, touch the Stop button.

572

Adding the Copying Job (Reserve copy)

You can add the copying job while printing (Reserve copy).

The screen below is displayed when you can add the copying job.

Load the original on the platen glass and touch the same button (the Color button or the Black button) as the one which you previously touched.

Important

• When you load the original on the platen glass, move the document cover gently.

Note

• When Print qlty (print quality) is set High, you cannot add the copying job.

• When you add the copying job, the number of copies or the settings such as the page size or media type cannot be changed.

• If you touch the Stop button while reserve copying is in progress, the screen to select the method to cancel copying is displayed. If you tap Cancel all reservations, you can cancel copying all scanned data. If you tap Cancel the last reservation, you can cancel the last copying job.

• If you set a document of too many pages to add the copying job, Cannot add more copy jobs.

Please wait a while and redo the operation. may appear on the touch screen. Tap OK and wait a while, then try copying again.

• If Failed to reserve the copy job. Start over from the beginning. appears on the touch screen when scanning, tap OK, then touch the Stop button to cancel copying. After that, copy the documents that have not been finished copying.

573

Displaying the Preview Screen

When is displayed on the Copy standby screen, tapping allows you to preview an image of the printout on the preview screen.

Important

• In the following conditions, is not displayed when the Copy standby screen is displayed.

• 2-sided is selected for 2-sidedPrintSetting.

• 2-on-1 copy or 4-on-1 copy is selected for Layout.

When either of the conditions above is selected, you can set to display the preview screen after scanning the original is finished.

Two-Sided Copying

Copying Two Pages to Fit onto a Single Page

Copying Four Pages to Fit onto a Single Page

• The original will be scanned to display the preview image. Therefore, do not open the document cover until the preview screen is displayed.

• Originals are rescanned after displaying the preview screen and before copying starts. Therefore, do not open the document cover or remove the original from the platen glass while Scanning document... is displayed.

A. A frame showing the selected page size appears over the image. The inside of the frame will be printed.

B. The original that is set on the platen glass is displayed. Tap to select Fit to page. If the displayed image is skewed, refer to Loading Originals and reset the original properly, then display the preview screen again and preview the original.

C. The magnification setting, which was set when the preview screen was displayed, is displayed. If the setting other than Fit to page is selected, you can change the magnification setting by dragging the bar on the touch screen.

D. Tap to specify the magnification.

If you keep touching, the magnification is changed by 10 %.

E. Tap to return to the Copy standby screen.

F. The magnification currently specified is displayed. Tap to select Fit to page.

574

Setting Items for Copying

You can change the copy settings such as magnification and intensity.

Print Settings Screen

Note

• For details on the print setting screen or the setting item for Photo copy, see Copying Photos .

How to display the print setting screen varies with the copy menu.

• In Copy:

The following screen is displayed by tapping Settings on the Copy standby screen.

• In Borderless copy or Frame erase copy:

The following screen is displayed before copying.

Setting Items

You can specify the following setting items.

Flick to display setting items, then tap the setting item to display the settings. Tap to specify the setting.

575

Note

• Depending on the copy menu, some setting items cannot be selected. This section describes the setting items in Copy.

The setting item which cannot be selected is displayed grayed out.

For details on the setting items for Photo copy, see Copying Photos .

• Some settings cannot be specified in combination with the setting of other setting item or the copy menu. If the setting which cannot be specified in combination is selected, and Error details are displayed on the touch screen. In this case, tap on the upper left on the touch screen to confirm the message, then change the setting.

• The settings of the page size, media type, etc. are retained even if the machine is turned off.

• When copying starts in the copy menu that is not available with the specified setting, The specified

function is not available with current settings. is displayed on the touch screen. Change the setting, following the on-screen instructions.

1. Magnif. (Magnification)

Specify the reduction/enlargement method.

Reducing or Enlarging a Copy

2. Intensity

Specify the intensity.

A. Tap to activate/deactivate automatic intensity adjustment.

When ON is selected, the intensity is adjusted automatically according to the originals loaded on the platen glass.

B. Drag to specify the intensity.

C. Tap to confirm the intensity setting.

3. Page size





576

Adjust print quality according to the original.

Important

• If you use Draft with Type set to Plain paper and the quality is not as good as expected, select

Standard or High for Print qlty and try copying again.

• Select High for Print qlty to copy in grayscale. Grayscale renders tones in a range of grays instead of black or white.

6. Layout

Select the layout.




Select whether to perform two-sided copying.

Two-Sided Copying

577

Reducing or Enlarging a Copy

You can specify the magnification optionally or select the preset-ratio copying or fit-to-page copying.

The screen below is displayed when you tap Settings in the Copy standby screen and tap Magnif. to select the reduction/enlargement method.

A. Tap to display the screen below.

1. Flick to specify the magnification.

2. Tap to specify the magnification.

If you keep touching, the magnification is changed by 10 %.

B. Flick to specify the magnification.

C. Tap to confirm the magnification.

Reduction/enlargement Method

Note

• Some of the reduction/enlargement methods are not available depending on the copy menu.

• Fit to page

The machine automatically reduces or enlarges the image to fit the page size.

The setting in Magnif.: Fit to page

Note

• When you select Fit to page, the page size may not be detected correctly depending on the original. In this case, select the setting other than Fit to page.

578

• Preset ratio

You can select one of the preset ratios to reduce or enlarge copies.

Select the appropriate ratio for size of original and page size.

The setting in Magnif.: 70% A4->A5/86% A4->B5/94% A4->LTR/115% B5->A4/141% A5->A4/156%

5x7->LTR/183% 4x6->LTR

Note

• Some of the preset ratios are not available depending on the country or region of purchase.

• Ratio specified copy

You can specify the copy ratio as a percentage to reduce or enlarge copies.

Note

• 400% MAX (maximum copy ratio) and 25% MIN (minimum copy ratio) are selectable.

• If you make a copy at the same size as the original, select Same size.

579

Two-Sided Copying

When you select 2-sided for 2-sidedPrintSetting in Copy, you can copy two original pages onto the both sides of a single sheet of paper.

Select 2-sided, then tap OK.

If you tap Advanced with 2-sided selected, you can specify the orientation and the stapling side of the original.

• When you select Orientation: Portrait and Output: Long side bind:

• When you select Orientation: Portrait and Output: Short side bind:

• When you select Orientation: Landscape and Output: Long side bind:

• When you select Orientation: Landscape and Output: Short side bind:

After selecting the stapling side, you can select whether you use the preview screen. If you tap ON, the preview screen is displayed so that you can check the orientation.

Note

• If Device memory is full. Cannot continue process. appears on the touch screen when scanning, set the print quality to Standard, then try copying again. If the problem is not resolved, set the print quality to Draft and try copying again.

• Two-sided copy setting can be used in combination with 2-on-1 copy or 4-on-1 copy.



580

• If you are copying in black & white, print intensity of the Two-sided copy may differ from that of a singlesided copy.

When checking the orientation:

When you are using the preview screen, the screen below is displayed before copying starts so that you can check the orientation.

A. Tap to rotate the original by 180 degrees.

B. Tap to start scanning the original.

C. Tap to rescan the original.

When scanning is finished:

The screen below appears after scanning each sheet of original.

A. Tap to start scanning the original.

Remove the sheet of original from the platen glass after scanning and load the next sheet on the platen glass, then tap Scan.

B. Tap to start copying the original already scanned.

Note

• You can add the copying job while printing.

Adding the Copying Job (Reserve copy)

581

About Special Copy Menu

The following menus are selectable in the Advanced print menu to copy originals.

Borderless copy

You can copy images so that they fill the entire page without borders.

Copying without Borders

Frame erase copy

When copying thick originals such as books, you can make a copy without black margins around the image and gutter shadows.

Copying Thick Originals Such as Books

Photo copy

You can copy all photos you scanned.

Copying Photos

582

Copying Thick Originals Such as Books

When copying thick originals such as books, you can make a copy without black margins around the image and gutter shadows. Using this function, you can reduce unnecessary ink consumption.

1.


2.

Load paper.



Advanced print.

4. Tap Frame erase copy.

5.

Load the original document on the platen glass.





Note

• When the Copy standby screen is displayed, tapping allows you to preview an image of the printout on the preview screen.

Displaying the Preview Screen



Note

• Close the document cover.

• There may be a narrow black margin that appears around the image. This function removes the dark margins only. If a scanned book is too thin or when the machine is used near a window or in a bright environment, a faint black frame may remain. Also, if the color of an original is dark, the machine cannot distinguish the document color from the shadow and this may cause slight cropping or a shadow on the crease.

583

Copying without Borders

You can copy images on photo paper so that they fill the entire page without borders.

1.


2.

Load the photo paper.



4. Tap Borderless copy.

Advanced print.

5.








Note

• Slight cropping may occur at the edges since the copied image is enlarged to fill the whole page. You can change the width to be cropped from the borders of the original image as needed. However, the cropped area will be larger if the extension amount is large.

For details:

Extended copy amount

• For details on the paper size and the media type available for borderless copying:

Printing Area

584

Copying Photos

You can scan printed photos and print them all at one time.

1.


2.

Load the photo paper.



4. Tap Photo copy.

Advanced print.

5. Confirm the on-screen instructions, then tap OK.

6. Load the printed photo on the platen glass following the on-screen instructions, then tap

OK.

Note

• For details on loading photos on the platen glass:

Loading Originals

When scanning is complete, the print settings confirmation screen is displayed.


Flick to display setting items, then tap the setting item to display the settings. Tap to specify the setting.

Note

• Depending on the setting item, some settings cannot be specified in combination with the setting of other setting items. If the setting cannot be specified in combination is selected, and Error

details are displayed on the touch screen. In this case, tap on the upper left on the touch screen to confirm the message, then change the setting.

1. Copies

Specifies the number of copies.

585

2. Page size





Select print quality according to the original.


Select bordered or borderless print.

6. Photo fix

Select No correction, Auto photo fix, or Fade restoration.

Note

• When No correction is selected, the machine prints the scanned image without correction.

• When Auto photo fix is selected, the machine corrects the scanned image automatically.

• When Fade restoration is selected, the machine corrects the scanned image that have faded over time.

7. By tapping, you can preview an image of the printout on the preview screen. Flick the photo to change the display.

Note

• If photo.

appears on the photo, the printed photo may not be scanned properly. Rescan the printed



Note

• If the printed photo was not scanned properly, the confirmation screen asking you if you continue printing is displayed. By tapping Yes, the machine starts printing. If you rescan the photo, tap No and scan the photo again.

586

Copying Two Pages to Fit onto a Single Page

When you select 2-on-1 copy for Layout in Copy, you can copy two original pages onto a single sheet of paper by reducing each image.

Tap Settings on the Copy standby screen to display the print settings screen, then select 2-on-1 copy for

Layout.

Select 2-on-1 copy, then tap OK.

If you tap Advanced with 2-on-1 copy selected, you can specify the orientation and the order of the original.

• When you select Orientation: Portrait and Left to right:

• When you select Orientation: Portrait and Right to left:

• When you select Orientation: Landscape and Top to bottom:

• When you select Orientation: Landscape and Bottom to top:

After selecting the order, you can select whether you use the preview screen. If you tap ON, the preview screen is displayed so that you can check the orientation.

Note


• This function can be used in combination with Two-sided copy.

If you use this function in combination, you can copy four original pages on one sheet of paper. In this case, two original pages are copied on each side of paper.

587

If you use this function in combination, select 2-sided for 2-sidedPrintSetting, then select the orientation and the stapling side of print paper on the Print settings screen.

For details on two-sided copy function:

Two-Sided Copying







The screen below appears after scanning the first sheet of original.




The machine starts scanning the second sheet of original and copying.

Note



588

• If you use this function in combination with Two-sided copy, the screen above is displayed after scanning the second sheet of original is complete. Follow the on-screen instructions to scan the third and fourth sheet of original.

589

Copying Four Pages to Fit onto a Single Page

When you select 4-on-1 copy for Layout in Copy, you can copy four original pages onto a single sheet of paper by reducing each image. Four different layouts are available.

Select 4-on-1 copy, then tap OK.

If you tap Advanced with 4-on-1 copy selected, you can specify the orientation and the order of the original.

Note

• The order is the same regardless of the orientation.

• When you select Upper-left to right

• When you select Upper-right to left

• When you select Upper-left to bottom

• When you select Upper-right to bottom

590

After selecting the order, you can select whether you use the preview screen. If you tap ON, the preview screen is displayed so that you can check the orientation.

Note


• This function can be used in combination with Two-sided copy.

If you use this function in combination, you can copy eight original pages on one sheet of paper. In this case, four original pages are copied on each side of paper.

If you use this function in combination, select 2-sided for 2-sidedPrintSetting, then select the orientation and the stapling side of print paper on the Print settings screen.

For details on two-sided copy function:

Two-Sided Copying







The screen below appears after scanning each sheet of original.


591



After scanning the fourth sheet of original, the machine starts copying.

Note



• If you use this function in combination with Two-sided copy, the screen above is displayed after scanning the second sheet of original is complete. Follow the on-screen instructions to scan the rest of originals.

592

Scanning

Scanning from a Computer Scanning from the Operation Panel of the

Machine

593

Scanning from a Computer

Scanning with IJ Scan Utility

Scanning with Application Software that You are Using (ScanGear)

Useful Information on Scanning

IJ Network Scanner Selector EX Menu and Setting Screen

Other Scanning Methods

Placing Items (When Scanning from a Computer)

594

Scanning with IJ Scan Utility

What Is IJ Scan Utility (Scanner Software)?

Starting IJ Scan Utility

Easy Scanning with Auto Scan

Basic

Scanning Documents

Scanning Photos

Scanning with Favorite Settings

Scanning Items Larger than the Platen (Image Stitch)

Scanning Multiple Items at One Time

Saving after Checking Scan Results

Sending Scanned Images via E-mail

Extracting Text from Scanned Images (OCR)

IJ Scan Utility Screens

595

What Is IJ Scan Utility (Scanner Software)?

IJ Scan Utility is an application that allows you to easily scan documents, photos, etc.

You can complete from scanning to saving at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon in the IJ

Scan Utility main screen.

What You Can Do with IJ Scan Utility

Scan Easily according to Purposes

You can scan by simply clicking an icon such as Auto to scan easily, Document to sharpen text in a document or magazine for better readability, or Photo to scan with settings suitable for photos, according to the item type or your purpose.

Note

• Refer to " IJ Scan Utility Main Screen " for details on the IJ Scan Utility main screen.

Save Scanned Images Automatically

Scanned images are automatically saved in a preset folder. You can change the folder as required.

Note

• The default save folders are as follows.

• Windows 8.1: Documents folder

• Windows 8: My Documents folder


• Windows Vista: Documents folder

• Windows XP: My Documents folder

• Refer to " Settings Dialog Box " for how to specify a folder.

Integrate with Applications

You can utilize scanned images through integration with other applications; display scanned images in your favorite application, attach them to e-mails, extract text from images, and more.

596

Important

• Some functions are available only when My Image Garden is installed.

Note

• Refer to " Settings Dialog Box " for how to set the applications to integrate with.

597


Note

• If you have more than one scanner or have changed the connection from USB connection to network connection, set up the network environment from IJ Scan Utility.

Network Scan Settings

Follow the steps below to start IJ Scan Utility.

Windows 8.1/Windows 8:

Select IJ Scan Utility on the Start screen to start IJ Scan Utility.

If IJ Scan Utility is not displayed on the Start screen, select the Search charm, then search for "IJ Scan

Utility".

Windows 7/Windows Vista/Windows XP:

From the Start menu, select All Programs > Canon Utilities > IJ Scan Utility > IJ Scan Utility to start IJ

Scan Utility.

598

Easy Scanning with Auto Scan

You can scan easily by automatically detecting the item type.

Important

• The following types of items may not be scanned correctly. In that case, adjust the cropping frames

(scan areas) in whole image view of ScanGear (scanner driver) and scan again.

• Photos that have a whitish background

• Items printed on white paper, hand-written documents, business cards, etc.

• Thin items

• Thick items

1. Make sure that your scanner or printer is turned on.

2. Place items on the platen of your scanner or printer.

Placing Items (When Scanning from a Computer)

3.

Start IJ Scan Utility.

4. Click Auto.

Scanning starts.

Note

• Click Cancel to cancel the scan.

• To apply suitable corrections based on the item type, click Settings..., then select the Apply

recommended image correction checkbox in the Settings (Auto Scan) dialog box.

• Scanned images are saved in the folder set for Save in in the Settings (Auto Scan) dialog box displayed by clicking Settings.... In the Settings (Auto Scan) dialog box, you can also make advanced scan settings.

• Refer to the following pages to scan by specifying the item type.

Scanning Photos

Scanning Documents

Scanning with Favorite Settings

599

Scanning Documents

You can scan items placed on the platen with settings suitable for documents.

1. Place the item on the platen.


2.


3. Click Settings..., then set the paper size, resolution, etc. in the

Settings (Document Scan)

dialog box as required.

When setting is completed, click OK.

4. Click Document.

Scanning starts.

Note


• Scanned images are saved in the folder set for Save in in the Settings (Document Scan) dialog box displayed by clicking Settings.... In the Settings (Document Scan) dialog box, you can also make advanced scan settings.

600

Scanning Photos

You can scan photos placed on the platen with settings suitable for photos.

1. Place the photo on the platen.


2.


3. Click Settings..., then set the paper size, resolution, etc. in the

Settings (Photo Scan)



4. Click Photo.

Scanning starts.

Note


• Scanned images are saved in the folder set for Save in in the Settings (Photo Scan) dialog box displayed by clicking Settings.... In the Settings (Photo Scan) dialog box, you can also make advanced scan settings.

601

Scanning with Favorite Settings

You can scan items placed on the platen with your favorite settings saved beforehand.

This is convenient for saving frequently used settings or when specifying scan settings in detail.

1.


2. Click Settings..., then set the item type, resolution, etc. in the

Settings (Custom Scan)



Note

• Once the settings are made, you can scan with the same settings from the next time.



4. Click Custom.

Scanning starts.

Note


• Scanned images are saved in the folder set for Save in in the Settings (Custom Scan) dialog box displayed by clicking Settings.... In the Settings (Custom Scan) dialog box, you can also make advanced scan settings.

602

Scanning Items Larger than the Platen (Image Stitch)

You can scan the left and right halves of an item larger than the platen and combine them back into one image. Items up to approximately twice as large as the platen are supported.

Note

• The following explains how to scan from the item to be placed on the left side.

1.


2. Click Settings..., then set the item type, resolution, etc. in the

Settings (Scan and Stitch)



3. Click Stitch.

The Image Stitch window appears.

4. In Select Output Size, select an output size according to the paper size.

5. Make sure that Scan from Left is selected in Scan Direction.

603

6. Place the item that is to be displayed on the left side of the screen face-down on the platen.

7. Click Start Scanning Image 1.

The first item is scanned and appears in 1.

Note


8. Place the item that is to be displayed on the right side of the screen face-down on the platen.

604

9. Click Start Scanning Image 2.

The second item is scanned and appears in 2.

Note


10. Adjust the scanned images as required.

Use the Toolbar to rotate or zoom in/out, or drag the images to adjust their positions.

Note

• Select the Adjust cropping frames checkbox to specify the area to be saved.

605

Adjusting Cropping Frames in the Image Stitch Window

• To scan an item again, select the image in the Preview area or the thumbnail at the top of the screen, then click again.

(Delete). The selected image is deleted, allowing you to scan the item

11. Click Save.

The combined image is saved.

Note

• Refer to " Image Stitch Window " for details on the Image Stitch window.

• You can make advanced scan settings in the Settings (Scan and Stitch) dialog box displayed by clicking Settings....

606

Scanning Multiple Items at One Time

You can scan two or more photos (small items) placed on the platen at one time and save each image individually.

Important

• The following types of items may not be scanned correctly. In that case, adjust the cropping frames

(scan areas) in whole image view of ScanGear (scanner driver) and scan again.


• Items printed on white paper, hand-written documents, business cards, etc.

• Thin items

• Thick items

Refer to "Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver)" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for details.

Using Auto Scan:

Whether there are multiple items or not is detected automatically. Click Auto and scan.

Easy Scanning with Auto Scan

Not Using Auto Scan:

In the Settings dialog box, set Paper Size to Auto scan and scan.

Note

• The screens for scanning with favorite settings are used as examples in the following descriptions.

1. Place the items on the platen.


2.


3. Click Settings....

The Settings dialog box appears.

4. Click Custom Scan.

607

5. Select Select Source according to the items to be scanned.

6. Select Auto scan for Paper Size, then click OK.

608

The IJ Scan Utility main screen appears.

Note

• Refer to the following pages for details on the setting items in the Settings dialog box.

Settings (Document Scan) Dialog Box

Settings (Photo Scan) Dialog Box

Settings (Custom Scan) Dialog Box

7. Click Custom.

Multiple items are scanned at one time.

Note


• Scanned images are saved in the folder set for Save in in the corresponding Settings dialog box displayed by clicking Settings.... In each Settings dialog box, you can also make advanced scan settings.

609

Saving after Checking Scan Results

You can check the scan results, then save the images to a computer.

Important

• You cannot check the scan results before saving when scanned using Auto scan or the operation panel.

Note

• The screens for scanning photos are used as examples in the following descriptions.

1.




3. Click Photo Scan.

4. Select the Check scan results checkbox, then click OK.

610


Note





Settings (Scan and Stitch) Dialog Box

Settings (ScanGear) Dialog Box

5. Click Photo.

Scanning starts.

When scanning is completed, the Save Settings dialog box appears.

Note


6. Change the image order or file save options as required.

You can change the image order or file save options in the Save Settings dialog box .

611

Note

• The default save folders are as follows.






7. Click OK.

Scanned images are saved according to the settings.

612

Sending Scanned Images via E-mail

You can send scanned images via e-mail.

Note

• The screens for scanning photos are used as examples in the following descriptions.

1.




3. Click Photo Scan.

4. Select Attach to e-mail in Application Settings, then select an e-mail client.

613

Note

• You can add e-mail clients to use for attachments from the pull-down menu.

• If None (Attach Manually) is selected, manually attach scanned and saved images to e-mail.

5. Click OK.


Note


Settings (Auto Scan) Dialog Box


614




6. Click Photo.

Scanning starts.

When scanning is completed, the specified e-mail client starts and the images will be attached to a new message.

Note


• The scanned images are saved according to the settings made in the Settings dialog box.

• When the Check scan results checkbox is selected in the Settings dialog box, the

Save Settings

dialog box appears. After you set the save options and click OK, the scanned images are saved and automatically attached to a new message of the specified e-mail client.

7. Specify the recipient, enter the subject and message, then send e-mail.

Refer to the manual of your e-mail client for e-mail settings.

615

Extracting Text from Scanned Images (OCR)

Scan text in scanned magazines and newspapers and display it in your text editor.

Note

• You can extract text when scanning via Document, Custom, or ScanGear.

• The screens for scanning documents are used as examples in the following descriptions.

1.




3. Click Document Scan.

Note

• For Resolution, only 300 dpi or 400 dpi can be set when Start OCR is selected in Application

Settings.

4. Select Start OCR for Application Settings, then select the application in which you want to display the result.

616

Note

• If a compatible application is not installed, the text in the image is extracted and appears in your text editor.

Text to be displayed is based on Document Language in the Settings (General Settings) dialog box . Select the language you want to extract in Document Language and scan.

• You can add the application from the pull-down menu.

5. Click OK.


617

Note





6. Click Document.

Scanning starts.

When scanning is completed, the scanned images are saved according to the settings, and the extracted text appears in the specified application.

Note


• Text displayed in your text editor is for guidance only. Text in the image of the following types of documents may not be detected correctly.

• Documents containing text with font size outside the range of 8 points to 40 points (at 300 dpi)

• Slanted documents

• Documents placed upside down or documents with text in the wrong orientation (rotated characters)

• Documents containing special fonts, effects, italics, or hand-written text

• Documents with narrow line spacing

• Documents with colors in the background of text

• Documents containing multiple languages

618

IJ Scan Utility Screens

IJ Scan Utility Main Screen

Settings Dialog Box







Settings (Save to PC (Auto)) Dialog Box

Settings (Save to PC (Photo)) Dialog Box

Settings (Save to PC (Document)) Dialog Box

Settings (Attach to E-mail (Photo)) Dialog Box

Settings (Attach to E-mail (Document)) Dialog Box

Settings (General Settings) Dialog Box

Save Settings Dialog Box

Image Stitch Window

619

IJ Scan Utility Main Screen

Follow the steps below to start IJ Scan Utility.

Windows 8.1 / Windows 8:

Select IJ Scan Utility on the Start screen to start IJ Scan Utility.

If IJ Scan Utility is not displayed on the Start screen, select the Search charm, then search for "IJ Scan

Utility".

Windows 7/Windows Vista/Windows XP:

From the Start menu, select All Programs > Canon Utilities > IJ Scan Utility > IJ Scan Utility to start IJ

Scan Utility.

You can complete from scanning to saving at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon.

Product Name

Displays the name of the product that IJ Scan Utility is currently set to use.

If the displayed product is not the one you want to use, select the desired product from the list.

In addition, for network connection, select one with "Network" after the product name.

Note

• Refer to " Network Scan Settings " for how to set up a network environment.

Auto

Detects the item type automatically and saves them to a computer. The data format for saving will also be set automatically.

Save settings and the response after scanning can be specified in the Settings (Auto Scan) dialog box .

Document

Scans items as documents and saves them to a computer.

Scan/save settings and the response after scanning can be specified in the

Settings (Document Scan)

dialog box .

Photo

Scans items as photos and saves them to a computer.


Settings (Photo Scan)

dialog box .

Custom

Scans items with your favorite settings and saves the images to a computer. The item type can be automatically detected.


Settings (Custom Scan)

dialog box .

620

Stitch

Displays the Image Stitch window in which you can scan the left and right halves of an item larger than the platen and combine the scanned images back into one image.


Settings (Scan and Stitch)

dialog box .

ScanGear

Starts ScanGear (scanner driver) in which you can make image corrections and color adjustments when scanning.

Scan/save settings and applications can be specified in the Settings (ScanGear) dialog box .

Instructions

Opens this guide.

Settings...

Displays the Settings dialog box in which you can specify the scan/save settings and the response after scanning.

621

Settings Dialog Box

There are three tabs in the Settings dialog box: (Scanning from a Computer), (Scanning from the

Operation Panel), and (General Settings). When you click a tab, the view in the red frame switches and you can make advanced settings to functions on each tab.

(Scanning from a Computer) Tab

You can specify how to respond when scanning from IJ Scan Utility or My Image Garden.







(Scanning from the Operation Panel) Tab

You can specify how to respond when scanning from the operation panel.






622

Important

• When the Settings dialog box is displayed from My Image Garden, the

Operation Panel) tab does not appear.

(Scanning from the

(General Settings) Tab

You can set the product to use, file size restriction on e-mail attachment, language to detect text in images, and folder in which to save images temporarily.


623

Settings (Auto Scan) Dialog Box

Click Auto Scan on the box.

(Scanning from a Computer) tab to display the Settings (Auto Scan) dialog

In the Settings (Auto Scan) dialog box, you can make advanced scan settings to scan by automatically detecting the item type.

(1) Scan Options Area

(2) Save Settings Area

(3) Application Settings Area

Important

• When the Settings dialog box is displayed from My Image Garden, the setting items for Application

Settings do not appear.

Supported Items

Photos, postcards, business cards, magazines, newspapers, documents, and BD/DVD/CD.

Important

• To scan the following types of items, specify the item type and size in the Settings (Document Scan) dialog box, Settings (Photo Scan) dialog box, or Settings (Custom Scan) dialog box, then click

Photo, Document, or Custom in the IJ Scan Utility main screen. You cannot scan correctly with Auto.

• A4 size photos

• Text documents smaller than 2L (5 inches x 7 inches) (127 mm x 178 mm), such as paperback pages with the spine cut off

• Items printed on thin white paper

• Long narrow items such as panoramic photos

624

• Reflective disc labels may not be scanned as expected.

• Place items to be scanned on the platen correctly. Otherwise, items may not be scanned correctly.

Refer to " Placing Items (When Scanning from a Computer) " for how to place items.

Note

• To reduce moire in scans, set Select Source to Magazine in the Settings (Document Scan) dialog box or Settings (Custom Scan) dialog box, then click Document or Custom in the IJ Scan Utility main screen.

(1) Scan Options Area

Apply recommended image correction

Applies suitable corrections automatically based on the item type.

Important

• The color tone may differ from the source image due to corrections. In that case, deselect the checkbox and scan.

Note

• Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable this function.

(2) Save Settings Area

File Name

Enter the file name of the image to be saved. When you save a file, the date and four digits are appended to the set file name in the "_20XX0101_0001" format.

Note

• When you select the Save to a subfolder with current date checkbox, the date and four digits are appended to the set file name.

Save in

Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To change the folder, specify the destination folder in the Select Destination Folder dialog box displayed by selecting Add... from the pull-down menu.

The default save folders are as follows.






Important

• When the Settings dialog box is displayed from My Image Garden, this option does not appear.

Data Format

Auto is selected. The following data formats are automatically applied according to the item type when saving.

• Photos, postcards, BD/DVD/CD, and business cards: JPEG

625

• Magazines, newspapers, and documents: PDF

Important

• The save format may differ depending on how you place the item.


JPEG Image Quality

You can specify the image quality of JPEG files.

PDF Compression

Select the compression type for saving PDF files.

Standard

It is recommended that you normally select this setting.

High

Compresses the file size when saving, allowing you to reduce the load on your network/server.

Create a PDF file that supports keyword search

Select this checkbox to convert text in images into text data and create PDF files that support keyword search.

Note

• PDF files that are searchable in the language selected in Document Language on the

(General Settings) tab of the Settings dialog box are created.

Save to a subfolder with current date

Select this checkbox to create a current date folder in the folder specified in Save in and save scanned images in it. The folder will be created with a name such as "20XX_01_01"

(Year_Month_Date).

If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.

(3) Application Settings Area

Open with an application

Select this when you want to enhance or correct the scanned images.

You can specify the application from the pull-down menu.

Send to an application

Select this when you want to use the scanned images as they are in an application that allows you to browse or organize images.


Send to a folder

Select this when you also want to save the scanned images to a folder other than the one specified in

Save in.

You can specify the folder from the pull-down menu.

Attach to e-mail

Select this when you want to send e-mails with the scanned images attached.

You can specify the e-mail client you want to start from the pull-down menu.

626

Do not start any application

Saves to the folder specified in Save in.

Note

• Specify the application or folder in the Select Application or Select Destination Folder dialog box displayed by selecting Add... from the pull-down menu.

Instructions

Opens this guide.

Defaults

You can restore the settings in the displayed screen to the default settings.

627

Settings (Document Scan) Dialog Box

Click Document Scan on the

Scan) dialog box.

(Scanning from a Computer) tab to display the Settings (Document

In the Settings (Document Scan) dialog box, you can make advanced scan settings to scan items as documents.




Important

• When the Settings dialog box is displayed from the Scan screen of My Image Garden, the setting items for Application Settings do not appear.


Select Source

Select the type of item to be scanned.

• Scanning documents: Document

• Scanning magazines: Magazine

Color Mode

Select the color mode in which to scan the item.

628

Paper Size

Select the size of the item to be scanned.

When you select Custom, a screen in which you can specify the paper size appears. Select a Unit, then enter the Width and Height, and then click OK.

Note

• Click Defaults to restore the specified settings to the default settings.

Resolution

Select the resolution of the item to be scanned.

The higher the resolution (value), the more detail in your image.

Resolution

Note

• Only 300 dpi or 400 dpi can be set when Start OCR is selected in Application Settings.

Image Processing Settings

Click (Plus) to set the following.

Note

• When Color Mode is Black and White, only Reduce gutter shadow, Correct slanted text

document, and Detect the orientation of text document and rotate image appear.

Apply Auto Document Fix

Select this checkbox to sharpen text in a document or magazine for better readability.

Important


Note


Sharpen outline

Emphasizes the outline of the subjects to sharpen the image.

Reduce show-through

Sharpens text in an item or reduces show-through in newspapers, etc.

Reduce moire

Reduces moire patterns.

629

Printed materials are displayed as a collection of fine dots. "Moire" is a phenomenon where uneven gradation or a stripe pattern appears when such photos or pictures printed with fine dots are scanned.

Note

• Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Reduce moire.

Reduce gutter shadow

Reduces gutter shadows that appear between pages when scanning open booklets.

Note

• Use ScanGear (scanner driver)'s Advanced Mode tab to correct gutter shadows when scanning non-standard size items or specified areas.

Refer to "Gutter Shadow Correction" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for details.

• When you enable this function, scanning may take longer than usual with network connection.

Correct slanted text document

Detects the scanned text and corrects the angle (within -0.1 to -10 degrees or +0.1 to +10 degrees) of the document.

Important

• The following types of documents may not be corrected properly since the text cannot be detected correctly.

• Documents in which the text lines are inclined more than 10 degrees or the angles vary by line

• Documents containing both vertical and horizontal text

• Documents with extremely large or small fonts

• Documents with small amount of text

• Documents containing figures/images

• Hand-written text

• Documents containing both vertical and horizontal lines (tables)

Note

• Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Correct slanted text document.

Detect the orientation of text document and rotate image

Automatically rotates the image to the correct orientation by detecting the orientation of text in the scanned document.

Important

• Only text documents written in languages that can be selected from Document Language in the Settings (General Settings) dialog box are supported.

• The orientation may not be detected for the following types of settings or documents since the text cannot be detected correctly.

• Resolution is outside the range of 300 dpi to 600 dpi

• Font size is outside the range of 8 points to 48 points


• Documents with patterned backgrounds

630

In that case, select the Check scan results checkbox and rotate the image in the

Save

Settings dialog box .


File Name


Note


Save in








Important


Data Format

Select the data format in which to save the scanned images.

You can select JPEG/Exif, TIFF, PNG, PDF, or PDF (Multiple Pages).

Important

• You cannot select JPEG/Exif when Color Mode is Black and White.

• When Start OCR is selected in Application Settings, you cannot select PDF or PDF (Multiple

Pages).

Note

• With network connection, scanning may take longer than usual when you set TIFF or PNG in

Data Format.

PDF Compression


Standard


High


Important

• This appears only when PDF or PDF (Multiple Pages) is selected in Data Format.

631

• When Black and White is selected in Color Mode, this option does not appear.



Important

• This appears only when JPEG/Exif is selected in Data Format.



Important


Note





(Year_Month_Date).


Check scan results

Displays the Save Settings dialog box after scanning.

Important











Save in.





632

Start OCR

Select this when you want to convert text in the scanned image into text data.




Note


Instructions

Opens this guide.

Defaults


633

Settings (Photo Scan) Dialog Box

Click Photo Scan on the dialog box.

(Scanning from a Computer) tab to display the Settings (Photo Scan)

In the Settings (Photo Scan) dialog box, you can make advanced scan settings to scan items as photos.




Important




Select Source

Photo is selected.

Color Mode


Paper Size



634

Note

• Click Defaults to restore the specified settings to the default settings.

Resolution



Resolution



Important

• When Color Mode is Black and White, Image Processing Settings is not available.

Sharpen outline



File Name


Note


Save in








Important


635

Data Format


You can select JPEG/Exif, TIFF, or PNG.

Important


Note


Data Format.



Important




(Year_Month_Date).




Important











Save in.







636

Note


Instructions

Opens this guide.

Defaults


637

Settings (Custom Scan) Dialog Box

Click Custom Scan on the dialog box.

(Scanning from a Computer) tab to display the Settings (Custom Scan)

In the Settings (Custom Scan) dialog box, you can make advanced scan settings to scan according to your preference.




Important



Select Source

Select the type of item to be scanned. Select Auto to detect the item type automatically and to set

Color Mode, Paper Size, and Resolution automatically as well.

Important

• Item types supported by Auto are photos, postcards, business cards, magazines, newspapers, documents, and BD/DVD/CD.

638

• To scan the following types of items, specify the item type or size. You cannot scan correctly with

Auto.

• A4 size photos

• Text documents smaller than 2L (5 inches x 7 inches) (127 mm x 178 mm), such as paperback pages with the spine cut off

• Items printed on thin white paper

• Long narrow items such as panoramic photos


• Place items correctly according to the type of item to be scanned. Otherwise, items may not be scanned correctly.


Note

• To convert text in the image into text data after scanning, specify Select Source instead of selecting Auto.

• To reduce moire, set Select Source to Magazine.

Color Mode


Note

• Only Color is available when Select Source is Auto.

Paper Size



Note

• Only Auto is available when Select Source is Auto.

• Click Defaults in the screen in which you can specify the paper size to restore the specified settings to the default settings.

Resolution



Resolution

Note

• Only Auto is available when Select Source is Auto.

• Only 300 dpi or 400 dpi can be set when Start OCR is selected in Application Settings.

639


Click (Plus) to set the following. Available setting items vary by Select Source.

• When Select Source is Auto:



Important


Note


• When Select Source is Photo:

Important


Sharpen outline


• When Select Source is Magazine or Document:

Note

• When Color Mode is Black and White, only Reduce gutter shadow, Correct slanted text

document, and Detect the orientation of text document and rotate image appear.



Important


Note


Sharpen outline




Reduce moire



Note


640



Note

• Use ScanGear (scanner driver)'s Advanced Mode tab to correct gutter shadows when scanning non-standard size items or specified areas.

Refer to "Gutter Shadow Correction" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for details.




Important









Note




Important

• Only text documents written in languages that can be selected from Document

Language in the Settings (General Settings) dialog box are supported.






In that case, select the Check scan results checkbox and rotate the image in the

Save

Settings dialog box .

641


File Name


Note


Save in








Important


Data Format


You can select JPEG/Exif, TIFF, PNG, PDF, PDF (Multiple Pages), or Auto.

Important

• When Auto is selected, the save format may differ depending on how you place the item.



• When Start OCR is selected in Application Settings, you cannot select PDF, PDF (Multiple

Pages), or Auto.

Note

• Auto appears only when Auto is selected for Select Source.


Data Format.



Important

• This appears only when JPEG/Exif or Auto is selected in Data Format.

PDF Compression


Standard


642

High


Important

• This appears only when PDF, PDF (Multiple Pages), or Auto is selected in Data Format.




Important

• This appears only when PDF, PDF (Multiple Pages), or Auto is selected in Data Format.

Note





(Year_Month_Date).




Important

• This does not appear when Select Source is Auto.











Save in.





643

Start OCR





Note


Instructions

Opens this guide.

Defaults


644

Settings (Scan and Stitch) Dialog Box

Click Scan and Stitch on the

Stitch) dialog box.

(Scanning from a Computer) tab to display the Settings (Scan and

In the Settings (Scan and Stitch) dialog box, you can make advanced scan settings for scanning items larger than the platen.




Important



Select Source

Select the type of item to be scanned.

• Scanning photos: Photo

• Scanning documents: Document

• Scanning magazines: Magazine

Note

• To reduce moire, set Select Source to Magazine.

645

Color Mode


Resolution



Resolution


Click (Plus) to set the following. Available setting items vary by Select Source.

Important


• When Select Source is Photo:

Sharpen outline


• When Select Source is Magazine or Document:

Sharpen outline




Reduce moire



Note



File Name


Note


Save in





646




Important


Data Format



Important


Note


Data Format.

PDF Compression


Standard


High


Important





Important


Note





Important




(Year_Month_Date).

647




Important











Save in.




Note


Instructions

Opens this guide.

Defaults


648

Settings (ScanGear) Dialog Box

Click ScanGear on the box.

(Scanning from a Computer) tab to display the Settings (ScanGear) dialog

In the Settings (ScanGear) dialog box, you can specify how to save images when scanning items by starting ScanGear (scanner driver) and how to respond after saving them.



Important




File Name


Note


Save in



649






Important


Data Format



Note

• When PDF or PDF (Multiple Pages) is selected, images up to 9600 pixels x 9600 pixels can be scanned.

• When the Enable large image scans checkbox is selected in Save Settings, or when Start

OCR is selected in Application Settings, you can select JPEG/Exif, TIFF, or PNG.


Data Format.



Important


PDF Compression


Standard


High


Important




Important


Note



650



(Year_Month_Date).


Enable large image scans

Select this checkbox to scan images up to 21000 pixels x 30000 pixels and 1.8 GB.

Important

• When this checkbox is selected, you cannot select Send to an application, Send to a folder,

Attach to e-mail, or Start OCR.


Note

• When this checkbox is not selected, images up to 10208 pixels x 14032 pixels can be scanned.


Displays the

Save Settings

dialog box after scanning.

Important











Save in.





Start OCR





651

Note


Instructions

Opens this guide.

Defaults


652

Settings (Save to PC (Auto)) Dialog Box

Click Save to PC (Auto) on the

to PC (Auto)) dialog box.

(Scanning from the Operation Panel) tab to display the Settings (Save

In the Settings (Save to PC (Auto)) dialog box, you can specify how to respond when saving images to a computer after scanning them from the operation panel by automatically detecting the item type.





Paper Size

Auto is selected.

Resolution

Auto is selected.





Important


653

Note



File Name


Note


Save in








Data Format

Auto is selected. The following data formats are automatically applied according to the item type when saving.

• Photos, postcards, BD/DVD/CD, and business cards: JPEG

• Magazines, newspapers, and documents: PDF

Important

• The save format may differ depending on how you place the item.




PDF Compression


Standard


High




654

Note





(Year_Month_Date).











Save in.




Note


Instructions

Opens this guide.

Defaults


655

Settings (Save to PC (Photo)) Dialog Box

Click Save to PC (Photo) on the

(Save to PC (Photo)) dialog box.

(Scanning from the Operation Panel) tab to display the Settings

In the Settings (Save to PC (Photo)) dialog box, you can specify how to respond when saving images to a computer as photos after scanning them from the operation panel.





Paper Size

Set from the operation panel.

Resolution



File Name


Note


656

Save in








Data Format






(Year_Month_Date).











Save in.




Note


Instructions

Opens this guide.

Defaults


657

Settings (Save to PC (Document)) Dialog Box

Click Save to PC (Document) on the

(Save to PC (Document)) dialog box.


In the Settings (Save to PC (Document)) dialog box, you can specify how to respond when saving images to a computer as documents after scanning them from the operation panel.





Paper Size


Resolution






Important


658

Note




Note




Important









Note




Important








File Name


659

Note


Save in








Data Format






Note





(Year_Month_Date).











Save in.


660



Note


Instructions

Opens this guide.

Defaults


661

Settings (Attach to E-mail (Photo)) Dialog Box

Click Attach to E-mail (Photo) on the

(Attach to E-mail (Photo)) dialog box.


In the Settings (Attach to E-mail (Photo)) dialog box, you can specify how to respond when attaching images to an e-mail as photos after scanning them from the operation panel.





Paper Size


Resolution



File Name


Note


662

Save in








Data Format






(Year_Month_Date).



E-mail Client

Specify the e-mail client to use for attaching scanned images.


Note

• Specify the e-mail client in the Select Application dialog box displayed by selecting Add... from the pull-down menu.

Instructions

Opens this guide.

Defaults


663

Settings (Attach to E-mail (Document)) Dialog Box

Click Attach to E-mail (Document) on the (Scanning from the Operation Panel) tab to display the

Settings (Attach to E-mail (Document)) dialog box.

In the Settings (Attach to E-mail (Document)) dialog box, you can specify how to respond when attaching images to an e-mail as documents after scanning them from the operation panel.





Paper Size


Resolution






Important


Note


664



Note




Important









Note




Important








File Name


665

Note


Save in








Data Format






Note





(Year_Month_Date).



E-mail Client

Specify the e-mail client to use for attaching scanned images.


Note

• Specify the e-mail client in the Select Application dialog box displayed by selecting Add... from the pull-down menu.

Instructions

Opens this guide.

Defaults


666

Settings (General Settings) Dialog Box

Click the (General Settings) tab to display the Settings (General Settings) dialog box.

In the Settings (General Settings) dialog box, you can set the product to use, file size restriction on e-mail attachment, language to detect text in images, and folder in which to save images temporarily.

Important

• When the Settings dialog box is displayed from My Image Garden, some options may not appear.

Product Name

Displays the name of the product that IJ Scan Utility is currently set to use.

If the displayed product is not the one you want to use, select the desired product from the list.

In addition, for network connection, select one with "Network" after the product name.

Note

• With network connection, Select appears on the right side of the product name. Click Select to display IJ Network Scanner Selector EX from which you can change the scanner to use. Refer to

" Network Scan Settings " for the setting procedure.

E-mail Attachment Size

You can restrict the size of scanned images to be attached to an e-mail.

You can select Small (Suitable for 640 x 480 Windows), Medium (Suitable for 800 x 600 Windows),

Large (Suitable for 1024 x 768 Windows), or No Change.

Document Language

Select the language for detecting text in images.

Folder to Save Temporary Files

Displays the folder in which to save images temporarily. Click Browse... to specify the destination folder.

667

Instructions

Opens this guide.

Defaults


668

Save Settings Dialog Box

Select the Check scan results checkbox in Save Settings of the Settings dialog box to display the Save

Settings dialog box after scanning.

You can specify the data format and destination while viewing the thumbnails of scan results.

Important

• After scanning from My Image Garden or the operation panel, the Save Settings dialog box does not appear.

(1) Preview Operation Buttons

(2) Scan Results Area


(1) Preview Operation Buttons

/ (Rotate Left 90°)/(Rotate Right 90°)

Rotates scanned images 90 degrees counter-clockwise or clockwise.

Select the image you want to rotate, then click (Rotate Left 90°) or (Rotate Right 90°).

Important

• The preview operation buttons do not appear when the Enable large image scans checkbox is selected in the Settings (ScanGear) dialog box.

(2) Scan Results Area

Displays the thumbnails of the scanned images. You can change the save order of images via drag-anddrop. The file names for saving appear below the thumbnails.

669


File Name


Note


Save in








Data Format



Important

• You cannot select PDF or PDF (Multiple Pages) in the following cases.

• When scanned by clicking Photo in the IJ Scan Utility main screen

• The Enable large image scans checkbox is selected in Save Settings of the Settings

(ScanGear) dialog box

• Start OCR is selected in Application Settings of the Settings (Document Scan), Settings

(Custom Scan), or Settings (ScanGear) dialog box


Note


Data Format.



Important


PDF Compression


Standard


High


670

Important





Important


Note





(Year_Month_Date).


671

Image Stitch Window

Click Stitch in the IJ Scan Utility main screen to display the Image Stitch window.

You can scan the left and right halves of an item larger than the platen and combine them back into one image. You can scan items up to approximately twice as large as the platen.

(1) Settings and Operation Buttons

(2) Toolbar

(3) Thumbnail View Area

(4) Preview Area

Note

• The displayed items vary depending on the select source and view.

(1) Settings and Operation Buttons

Select Output Size

B4 (B5 x 2)

Scans the left and right halves of a B4 size item separately.

A3 (A4 x 2)

Scans the left and right halves of an A3 size item separately.

11 x 17 (Letter x 2)

Scans the left and right halves of an item twice as large as Letter size separately.

Full Platen x 2

Scans the left and right halves of an item twice as large as the platen separately.

Scan Direction

Scan from Left

Displays the first scanned image on the left side.

Scan from Right

Displays the first scanned image on the right side.

672

Scan Image 1

Start Scanning Image 1

Scans the first item.

Scan Image 2

Start Scanning Image 2

Scans the second item.

Adjust cropping frames

You can adjust the scan area in preview.

If no area is specified, the image of the size selected in Select Output Size will be saved. If an area is specified, only the image in the cropping frame will be scanned and saved.


Save

Save

Saves the two scanned images as one image.

673

Cancel

Cancels Stitch scan.

(2) Toolbar

You can delete the scanned images or adjust the previewed images.

(Delete)

Deletes the scanned image.

(Enlarge/Reduce)

Allows you to enlarge or reduce the preview image.

Left-clicking the Preview area enlarges the displayed image.

Right-clicking the Preview area reduces the displayed image.

(Rotate Left)

Rotates the preview image 90 degrees counter-clockwise.

(Invert Vertically)

Rotates the preview image 180 degrees.

(Rotate Right)

Rotates the preview image 90 degrees clockwise.

(Open Guide)

Opens this page.

(3) Thumbnail View Area

Displays the thumbnails of the scanned images. Appears blank if none has been scanned.

(4) Preview Area

Displays the scanned images. You can adjust the layout by dragging the scanned image or check the results of the settings made in " (1) Settings and Operation Buttons ."

674

When no image has been scanned:

After scanning the first item by clicking Start Scanning Image 1:

The image is scanned in the direction specified in Scan Direction, and 2 appears next to it.

After scanning the second item by clicking Start Scanning Image 2:

The two scanned images appear.

675

Related Topic

Scanning Items Larger than the Platen (Image Stitch)

676

Scanning with Application Software that You are Using (ScanGear)

What Is ScanGear (Scanner Driver)?

Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear (Scanner Driver)

Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver)

Scanning in Basic Mode

Scanning in Advanced Mode

Scanning Multiple Documents from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder) in

Advanced Mode

Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver)

Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear (Scanner Driver)

ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens


Adjusting Cropping Frames (ScanGear)

General Notes (Scanner Driver)

Important

• Available functions and settings vary depending on your scanner or printer.

677

What Is ScanGear (Scanner Driver)?

ScanGear (scanner driver) is software required for scanning documents. It enables you to specify the output size and make image corrections when scanning.

ScanGear can be started from IJ Scan Utility or applications that are compatible with a standard interface called TWAIN. (ScanGear is a TWAIN-compatible driver.)

What You Can Do with This Software

This software enables you to preview scan results or set document type and output size, etc. when scanning documents. It is useful when you want to scan in a specific color tone, as it allows you to make various corrections and adjust brightness, contrast, etc.

Screens

There are two modes: Basic Mode and Advanced Mode.

Switch modes by clicking a tab on the upper right of the screen.

Note

• ScanGear starts in the last used mode.

• Settings are not retained when you switch modes.

Basic Mode

Use the Basic Mode tab to scan easily by following three simple on-screen steps ( , , and

).

678

Advanced Mode

Use the Advanced Mode tab to specify the color mode, output resolution, image brightness, color tone, etc. when scanning.

679

Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear (Scanner

Driver)




Scanning Multiple Documents from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder) in

Advanced Mode

Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver)

680


Use ScanGear (scanner driver) to make image corrections and color adjustments when scanning. ScanGear can be started from IJ Scan Utility or other applications.

Note

• Set up the network environment if you have more than one scanner or have a network compatible model and changed the connection from USB connection to network connection.


Follow these steps to start ScanGear from IJ Scan Utility.

1. Start IJ Scan Utility.

Refer to "Starting IJ Scan Utility" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for how to start IJ

Scan Utility.

2. Click ScanGear in the IJ Scan Utility main screen.

The ScanGear screen appears.

Starting from an Application

Follow these steps (example) to start ScanGear from an application.

The procedure varies depending on the application. For details, refer to the application's manual.

1. Start the application.

2. On the menu of the application, select the machine.

Note

• When you want to use a network compatible model by connecting to a network, select one with

"Network" displayed after the product name.

3. Select the command to scan a document.

The ScanGear screen appears.

681


Use the Basic Mode tab to scan easily by following the on-screen steps.

Refer to " Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver) " to scan multiple documents at one time from the Platen.

When scanning from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder), documents are scanned without preview.

Important

• The following types of documents may not be scanned correctly. In that case, click on the Toolbar to switch to whole image view and scan.


• Documents printed on white paper, hand-written text, business cards, etc.

• Thin documents

• Thick documents

• The following types of documents may not be scanned correctly.

• Documents smaller than 1.2 inches (3 cm) square

• Photos that have been cut to various shapes

(Thumbnail)

Note

• When using a model supporting ADF duplex scanning, you can scan both sides of the documents automatically from the ADF.

1. Place the document on the Platen or ADF, then start ScanGear (scanner driver).


Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver)

2. Set Select Source according to the document placed on the Platen or ADF.

682

Important

• Some applications do not support continuous scanning from the ADF. For details, refer to the application's manual.

Note

• To scan magazines containing many color photos, select Magazine (Color).

3. Click Preview.

Preview image appears in the Preview area.

Important

• Preview is not displayed when an ADF type is selected for Select Source.

Note

• Colors are adjusted based on the document type selected in Select Source.

4. Set Destination.

Note

• Skip ahead to Step 7 when an ADF type is selected for Select Source.

5. Set Output Size according to purpose.

Output size options vary by the item selected in Destination.

6. Adjust the cropping frames (scan areas) as required.

Adjust the size and position of the cropping frames on the preview image.

Adjusting Cropping Frames (ScanGear)

7. Set Image corrections as required.

683

8. Click Scan.

Scanning starts.

Note

• Click (Information) to open a dialog box in which you can check the current scan settings

(document type, etc.).

• A response of ScanGear after scanning can be specified in Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning on the Scan tab of the Preferences dialog box.

Related Topic

Basic Mode Tab

684


Use the Advanced Mode tab to specify the color mode, output resolution, image brightness, color tone, etc.

when scanning.

Refer to " Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver) " to scan multiple documents at one time.

Refer to " Scanning Multiple Documents from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder) in Advanced Mode " to scan multiple documents placed on the ADF (Auto Document Feeder).

Important

• The following types of documents may not be scanned correctly. In that case, click on the Toolbar to switch to whole image view and scan.



• Thin documents

• Thick documents




(Thumbnail)

1. Place the document on the Platen, then start ScanGear (scanner driver).



2. Click the Advanced Mode tab.

The tab switches to Advanced Mode.

Note


685

3. Set

Input Settings

according to the document or purpose.


Preview images appear in the Preview area.

5. Set

Output Settings

.

6. Adjust the cropping frame (scan area), correct image, and adjust colors as required.


Image Settings

Color Adjustment Buttons

7. Click Scan.

Scanning starts.

Note




Related Topic

Advanced Mode Tab

686

Scanning Multiple Documents from the ADF (Auto Document

Feeder) in Advanced Mode

Use the Advanced Mode tab to specify the image brightness, color tone, etc. and scan multiple documents placed on the ADF (Auto Document Feeder) at one time. When using a model supporting ADF duplex scanning, you can scan both sides of the documents automatically from the ADF.

When scanning from the ADF, documents are scanned without preview.

1. Place the documents on the ADF of the machine, then start ScanGear (scanner driver).

Placing Documents (ADF (Auto Document Feeder))


2. Click the Advanced Mode tab and select Document (ADF Simplex) or Document (ADF

Duplex) for Select Source.

Note


• You can select Document (ADF Duplex) when using a model supporting ADF duplex scanning.

3. Set

Input Settings

according to the document or purpose.

4. Set

Output Settings

.

5. Make image corrections and color adjustments as required.

Image Settings


6. Click Scan.

Scanning starts.

687

Note




Related Topic


688

Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear

(Scanner Driver)

You can scan two or more photos (small documents) on the Platen at one time on the Basic Mode tab and

Advanced Mode tab.

This section explains how to scan multiple documents from the Basic Mode tab.

Important

• To scan multiple documents as a single image, scan in whole image view.

• The following types of documents may not be cropped correctly. In that case, adjust the cropping frames (scan areas) in whole image view and scan.



• Thin documents

• Thick documents

Scanning Multiple Documents in Whole Image View




Note

• You can also scan multiple documents at one time from the Advanced Mode tab. Use the Advanced

Mode tab to make advanced scan settings such as the color mode, output resolution, image brightness, and color tone.

• Refer to the corresponding sections below for details on the Basic Mode tab and Advanced Mode tab.

Basic Mode Tab


1. Place the document on the Platen, then start ScanGear (scanner driver).



2. Set Select Source according to the document placed on the Platen.

689


Thumbnails of the preview images appear in the Preview area. Cropping frames are specified automatically according to the document size.



6. Adjust the cropping frames and set Image corrections as required.

Note

• You can correct each image separately. Select the frame you want to correct.

• In thumbnail view, you can only create one cropping frame per image. To create multiple cropping frames in an image, scan in whole image view.

Scanning Multiple Documents in Whole Image View

690

7. Select the images you want to scan.

Select the checkboxes of the images you want to scan.

8. Click Scan.

Scanning Multiple Documents in Whole Image View

Follow these steps if thumbnails are not displayed correctly when previewed or if you want to scan multiple documents as a single image.

Note

• Positions of slanted documents are not corrected in whole image view.

1. After previewing images, click

Switch to whole image view.

(Thumbnail) on the Toolbar.

Note

• When the whole image is displayed, the icon changes to (Whole Image).



Invert aspect ratio will be enabled when Output Size is set to anything but Flexible. Click this button to rotate the cropping frame. Click again to return it to the original orientation.

4. Adjust the cropping frames.

691

Adjust the size and position of the cropping frames on the preview image. You can also create two or more cropping frames.

If an area is not specified, the document will be scanned at the document size (Auto Crop). If an area is specified, only the portion in the specified area will be scanned.


5. Set Image corrections as required.

6. Click Scan.

Areas framed by broken lines are scanned.

Note


692

Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear (Scanner

Driver)

Correcting Images (Unsharp Mask, Reduce Dust and Scratches, Fading

Correction, etc.)

Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern

Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance

Adjusting Brightness and Contrast

Adjusting Histogram

Adjusting Tone Curve

Setting Threshold

693

Correcting Images (Unsharp Mask, Reduce Dust and Scratches,

Fading Correction, etc.)

The Image Settings functions on the Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear (scanner driver) allow you to enhance the outline of the subjects, reduce dust/scratches, and correct faded colors when scanning images.

Setting Items

Click (Arrow) of a function and select an item from the pull-down menu.

Important

• Do not apply these functions to images without moire, dust/scratches, or faded colors. The color tone may be adversely affected.

• Refer to "

Image Settings

" for details and precautions on each function.

Note

• Refer to " Scanning in Advanced Mode " to start the Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear and scan.

Adjusting the image brightness and color tone

Set Image Adjustment to Auto, Photo, Magazine, or Document according to the document type.

None Auto

694

Reducing show-through in text documents or lightening the base color in recycled paper, newspapers, etc. when scanning documents

Set Reduce Show-through to ON.

OFF ON

Sharpening slightly out-of-focus images

Set Unsharp Mask to ON.

OFF ON

Reducing gradations and stripe patterns

Set Descreen to ON.

OFF ON

695

Note

• Printed photos and pictures are displayed as a collection of fine dots. "Moire" is a phenomenon where uneven gradation or a stripe pattern appears when such photos or pictures printed with fine dots are scanned. Descreen is the function for reducing this moire effect.

Reducing dust and scratches

Set Reduce Dust and Scratches to Low, Medium, or High according to the degree of dust and scratches.

None Medium

Correcting photos that have faded with time or due to colorcast

Set Fading Correction to Low, Medium, or High according to the degree of fading or colorcast.

None Medium

Reducing graininess

Set Grain Correction to Low, Medium, or High according to the degree of graininess.

None Medium

Correcting shadows that appear between pages when scanning open booklets

Set Gutter Shadow Correction to Low, Medium, or High according to the degree of shadows.

None Medium

696

697

Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern

You can preview color changes and reproduce natural colors by using the color pattern function in

ScanGear (scanner driver)'s Basic Mode tab.


Correct colors that have faded with time or due to colorcast. "Colorcast" is a phenomenon where a specific color affects the entire picture due to the weather or ambient strong colors.

Click an arrow in Color Adjustment to emphasize the corresponding color.

Cyan & red, magenta & green, and yellow & blue are complementary color pairs (each pair produces a shade of gray when mixed). You can reproduce the natural colors of the scene by reducing the cast color and increasing the complementary color.

It is recommended that you find a portion in the image where it should be white, and adjust the colors so that the portion turns white.

698

Preview image appears in the center. Preview image colors change as you adjust them.

Below is an example of correcting a bluish image.

Since Blue and Green are too strong, click the Yellow and Magenta arrows to correct.

Before After

Note

• Color adjustments are applied only to the cropping frames (scan areas) or the frame selected in thumbnail view.

• You can select multiple frames or cropping frames by clicking them while pressing the Ctrl key.

• You can also select a color tone from the color pattern displayed on the left of the Color Pattern screen.

• You can also use this function to add a specific tint to an image. Increase the magenta to add a warm tint, and increase the blue to add a cool tint.

699

Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance

You can brighten colors that have faded with time or due to colorcast by using

Balance) in ScanGear (scanner driver)'s Advanced Mode tab.

(Saturation/Color

Note

• Click Defaults to reset all adjustments in the current window.

Saturation

Adjust the image's saturation (vividness). You can brighten colors that have faded with time, etc.

Move (Slider) under Saturation to the left to decrease the saturation (darken the image), and to the right to increase the saturation (brighten the image). You can also enter a value (-127 to 127).

Saturation decreased Original image Saturation increased

Note

• The natural color tone of the original image may be lost if you increase saturation too much.

Color Balance

Adjust images that have a colorcast. "Colorcast" is a phenomenon where a specific color affects the entire picture due to the weather or ambient strong colors.

700

Move (Slider) under Color Balance to the left or right to emphasize the corresponding color.

Cyan & Red

Magenta & Green

Yellow & Blue

These are complementary color pairs (each pair produces a shade of gray when mixed). You can reproduce the natural colors of the scene by reducing the cast color and increasing the complementary color.

It is usually difficult to correct the image completely by adjusting only one color pair. It is recommended that you find a portion in the image where it should be white, and adjust all three color pairs so that the portion turns white.

You can also enter a value (-127 to 127).

Below is an example of an image in which the "Cyan & Red" pair has been adjusted.

Cyan is increased Red is increased

701

Adjusting Brightness and Contrast

You can adjust images that are too dark or bright, or too flat due to lack of contrast by using

(Brightness/Contrast) in ScanGear (scanner driver)'s Advanced Mode tab.

Note

• Click (Down arrow) to switch to detailed view. Click (Up arrow) to return to the previous view.


Channel

Each dot of an image is a mixture of Red, Green, and Blue in various proportions (gradation). These colors can be adjusted individually as a "channel."

Master

Adjust the Red, Green, and Blue combined.

Red

Adjust the Red channel.

Green

Adjust the Green channel.

Blue

Adjust the Blue channel.

Note

• Only Grayscale will be displayed in Channel when Color Mode is Grayscale.

702

Brightness

Adjust the image brightness.

Move (Slider) under Brightness to the left to darken and right to brighten the image. You can also enter a value (-127 to 127).

Darkened Original image Brightened

Note

• Highlights may be lost if you brighten the image too much, and shadows may be lost if you darken the image too much.

Contrast

"Contrast" is the degree of difference between the brighter and darker parts of an image. Increasing contrast will increase the difference, thus sharpening the image. Decreasing contrast will decrease the difference, thus softening the image.

Move (Slider) under Contrast to the left to decrease and right to increase the contrast of the image.


Decreased contrast Original image Increased contrast

Note

• Increasing the contrast is effective in adding a three-dimensional feel to soft images. However, shadows and highlights may be lost if you increase the contrast too much.

703

Adjusting Histogram

You can adjust the image color tone by using a graph (histogram) showing brightness distribution, via

(Histogram) in ScanGear (scanner driver)'s Advanced Mode tab.

Note


Channel


Master


Red


Green


Blue


Note


Reading Histograms

You can see the histogram of a specified area for each Channel. The higher the histogram peak, the more data is distributed to that level.

704

(1) Bright area (2) Dark area (3) Whole image

More data is distributed to the highlight side.

More data is distributed to the shadow side.

Data is widely distributed between the highlight and shadow.

Adjusting Histograms (Using the Slider)

Select a Channel, then move (Black-point Slider) or (White-point Slider) to specify the level to be set as the shadow or highlight.

• All parts to the left of (Black-point Slider) will be black (level 0).

• The parts at (Mid-point Slider) will turn to the color exactly between the black-point and whitepoint.

• All parts to the right of (White-point Slider) will turn white (level 255).

When Image Adjustment is set to anything but None, the adjustments shown below are performed automatically.

Moving the Black-point and White-point Sliders

Move the Black-point Slider or White-point Slider to adjust brightness.

Images with more data distributed to the highlight side

Move the Black-point Slider toward the highlight side.

Images with more data distributed to the shadow side

Move the White-point Slider toward the shadow side.

Images with widely distributed data

Move the Black-point Slider toward the highlight side, and White-point Slider toward the shadow side.

705

Moving the Mid-point Slider

Move the Mid-point Slider to specify the level to be set as the middle of the tonal range.

Images with more data distributed to the highlight side

Move the Mid-point Slider toward the highlight side.

Images with more data distributed to the shadow side

Move the Mid-point Slider toward the shadow side.

Adjusting Histograms (Using the Droppers)

When you select a Channel and click the Black-point, Mid-point, or White-point Dropper, the mouse pointer on the preview image changes to a dropper. Click a Dropper displayed below the histogram to change the setting.

• The point clicked with

(0 to 245).

(Black-point Dropper) will be the darkest point. You can also enter a value

• The point clicked with enter a value (5 to 250).

(Mid-point Dropper) will be the middle of the tonal range. You can also

706

• The point clicked with value (10 to 255).

(White-point Dropper) will be the brightest point. You can also enter a

• Click image.

(Dropper) for Gray Balance and click the area you want to adjust the color in the preview

The clicked point will be set as the achromatic color reference, and the rest of the image is adjusted accordingly. For instance, if snow in a photo appears bluish, click the bluish part to adjust the whole image and reproduce natural colors.

707


You can adjust the brightness of an image by selecting the type of graph (tone curve) showing the balance of tone input and output, via tab.

(Tone Curve Settings) in ScanGear (scanner driver)'s Advanced Mode

Note


Channel


Master


Red


Green


Blue


Note


Reading Tone Curves

With ScanGear, scanning images via a scanner is the input, and displaying to a monitor is the output.

"Tone Curve" shows the balance of tone input and output for each Channel.

708


In Select Tone Curve, select a tone curve from No correction, Overexposure, Underexposure, High

contrast, Reverse the negative/positive image, and Edit custom curve.

No correction (No adjustment)

Overexposure (Convex curve)

The midtone data of the input side is stretched toward the highlight of the output side, resulting in a brighttoned image when viewed on a monitor.

Underexposure (Concave curve)

The midtone data of the input side is stretched toward the shadow of the output side, resulting in a darktoned image when viewed on a monitor.

High contrast (S curve)

The highlight and shadow of the input side are enhanced, resulting in a high-contrast image.

Reverse the negative/positive image (Downward-sloping line)

The input and output sides are reversed, resulting in a negative-positive inverted image.

709

Edit custom curve

You can drag specific points on the Tone Curve to freely adjust the brightness of the corresponding areas.

710

Setting Threshold

You can sharpen text in a document or reduce show-through in newspapers by adjusting the threshold level via (Threshold) in ScanGear (scanner driver)'s Advanced Mode tab.

Note

• This function is available when Color Mode is Black and White.


Adjusting Threshold

The brightness of color and grayscale images is expressed in a value between 0 and 255. However, in creating black and white images, all colors are mapped to either black (0) or white (255). "Threshold" is the borderline value that determines a color as black or white.

Move (Slider) to the right to increase the threshold value and thus increase the black areas. Move the slider to the left to decrease the value and thus increase the white areas. You can also enter a value (0 to

255).

711

ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens

Basic Mode Tab

Advanced Mode Tab

Input Settings

Output Settings

Image Settings


Preferences Dialog Box

Scanner Tab

Preview Tab

Scan Tab

Color Settings Tab

712

Basic Mode Tab

This mode allows you to scan easily by following the on-screen steps.

This section describes the settings and functions available on the Basic Mode tab.


(2) Toolbar

(3) Preview Area

Note

• The displayed items vary by document type and view.

• The preview function is not available when scanning from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder).


Select Source

Photo (Color)

Scan color photos.

Magazine (Color)

Scan color magazines.

Document (Color)

Scan documents in color.

Document (Grayscale)

Scan documents in black and white.

Document (Color) ADF Simplex

Scan documents from the ADF in color.

Document (Grayscale) ADF Simplex

Scan documents from the ADF in black and white.

Document (Color) ADF Duplex (only for models supporting ADF duplex scanning)

Scan both sides of documents from the ADF in color.

Document (Grayscale) ADF Duplex (only for models supporting ADF duplex scanning)

Scan both sides of documents from the ADF in black and white.

713

Important


Note

• When you select a document type, the unsharp mask function will be active.

• When you select an option other than the ADF types, the image adjustment function which adjusts images based on the document type will also be active.

• If you select Magazine (Color), the descreen function will be active.

Display Preview Image

Preview

Performs a trial scan.

Note

• When using the machine for the first time, scanner calibration starts automatically. Wait a while until the preview image appears.

Destination

Select what you want to do with the scanned image.

Print

Select this to print the scanned image on a printer.

Image display

Select this to view the scanned image on a monitor.

OCR

Select this to use the scanned image with OCR software.

"OCR software" is software that converts text scanned as an image into text data that can be edited in word processors and other programs.

Output Size

Select an output size.

Output size options vary by the item selected in Destination.

714

Flexible

Allows you to freely adjust the cropping frames (scan areas).

In thumbnail view:

Drag the mouse over a thumbnail to display a cropping frame. When a cropping frame is displayed, the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned. When no cropping frame is displayed, each frame is scanned individually.

In whole image view:

When no cropping frame is displayed, the entire Preview area will be scanned. When a cropping frame is displayed, the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned.

Paper Size (L, A4, etc.)

Select an output paper size. The portion within the cropping frame will be scanned at the size of the selected paper size. You can drag the cropping frame to enlarge/reduce it while maintaining the aspect ratio.

Monitor Size (1024 x 768 pixels, etc.)

Select an output size in pixels. A cropping frame of the selected monitor size will be displayed and the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned. You can drag the cropping frame to enlarge/reduce it while maintaining the aspect ratio.

Add/Delete...

Opens the Add/Delete the Output Size dialog box, in which you can specify custom output sizes. You can select this option when Destination is Print or Image display.

In the Add/Delete the Output Size dialog box, you can specify multiple output sizes and save them at one time. Saved items will be registered to the Output Size list and can be selected, along with the predefined items.

Adding:

Enter Output Size Name, Width, and Height, then click Add. For Unit, you can select inches or

mm when Destination is Print but you can only select pixels when Destination is Image

display. The name of the added size appears in Output Size List. Click Save to save the items listed in Output Size List.

Deleting:

Select the output size you want to delete in Output Size List, then click Delete. Click Save to save the items listed in Output Size List.

Important

• You cannot delete predefined output sizes such as A4 and 1024 x 768 pixels.

715

Note

• Save up to 10 items.

• An error message appears when you enter a value outside the setting range. Enter a value within the setting range.

Note

• For details on whether or how the cropping frame is initially displayed on a preview image, refer to Cropping Frame on Previewed Images in " Preview Tab " (Preferences dialog box).

Invert aspect ratio

Available when Output Size is set to anything but Flexible.

Click this button to rotate the cropping frame. Click again to return it to the original orientation.

Adjust cropping frames

You can adjust the scan area within the Preview area.

If an area is not specified, the document will be scanned at the document size (Auto Crop). If an area is specified, only the portion in the cropping frame will be scanned.


Image corrections

Allows you to apply corrections to images.

Important

• Apply Auto Document Fix and Correct fading are available when Recommended is selected on the Color Settings tab of the Preferences dialog box.

Note

• Available functions vary by the document type selected in Select Source.


Sharpens text in a document or magazine for better readability.

Important

• Scanning may take longer than usual when this checkbox is selected.

• The color tone may change from the source image due to corrections. In that case, deselect the checkbox and scan.

• Correction may not be applied properly if the scan area is too small.

Correct fading

Corrects and scans photos that have faded with time or have a colorcast.


Corrects shadows that appear between pages when scanning open booklets.

Important

• For precautions on using this function, refer to "

Gutter Shadow Correction

."

Color Pattern...

Allows you to adjust the image's overall color. You can correct colors that have faded due to colorcast, etc. and reproduce natural colors while previewing color changes.

Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern

716

Important

• This setting is not available when you select Color Matching on the Color Settings tab of the Preferences dialog box.

Perform Scan

Scan

Starts scanning.

Note

• When scanning starts, the progress will be displayed. Click Cancel to cancel the scan.

Preferences...

Opens the Preferences dialog box in which you can make scan/preview settings.

Close

Closes ScanGear (scanner driver).

(2) Toolbar

You can adjust or rotate preview images. The buttons displayed on the Toolbar vary by view.



(Thumbnail) / (Whole Image)

Switches the view in the Preview area.

(3) Preview Area

(Rotate Left)


• The result will be reflected in the scanned image.

• The image returns to its original state when you preview again.

(Rotate Right)




(Auto Crop)

Displays and adjusts the cropping frame automatically to the size of the document displayed in the

Preview area. The scan area is reduced every time you click this button if there are croppable areas within the cropping frame.

717

(Check All Frames)

Available when two or more frames are displayed.

Selects the checkboxes of the image in thumbnail view.

(Uncheck All Frames)


Deselects the checkboxes of the image in thumbnail view.

(Select All Frames)


Selects the images in thumbnail view and outlines them in blue.

(Select All Cropping Frames)

Available when two or more cropping frames are specified.

Turns the cropping frames into thick broken lines and applies the settings to all of them.

(Remove Cropping Frame)

Removes the selected cropping frame.

(Information)

Displays the version of ScanGear and the current scan settings (document type, etc.).

(Open Guide)

Opens this page.


This is where a trial image appears after you click Preview. You can also check the results of the settings

(image corrections, color adjustments, etc.) made in " (1) Settings and Operation Buttons ."

When (Thumbnail) is displayed on the Toolbar:

Cropping frames are specified according to the document size, and thumbnails of scanned images are displayed. Only the images with the checkbox selected will be scanned.

718

Note

• When multiple images are previewed, different outlines indicate different selection status.

• Focus Frame (thick blue outline): The displayed settings will be applied.

• Selected Frame (thin blue outline): The settings will be applied to the Focus Frame and Selected

Frames simultaneously. You can select multiple images by clicking them while pressing the Ctrl key.

• Unselected (no outline): The settings will not be applied.

• Double-click a frame to zoom in on the image. Click (Frame Advance) at the bottom of the screen to display the previous or next frame. Double-click the frame again to return the display to its non-magnified state.

When (Whole Image) is displayed on the Toolbar:

Items on the Platen are scanned and displayed as a single image. All portions in the cropping frames will be scanned.

Note

• You can specify the cropping frame on the displayed image. In thumbnail view, you can only create one cropping frame per image. In whole image view, you can create multiple cropping frames.


719

Related Topic

Scanning in Basic Mode

720

Advanced Mode Tab

This mode allows you to make advanced scan settings such as the color mode, output resolution, image brightness, and color tone.

This section describes the settings and functions available on the Advanced Mode tab.


(2) Toolbar

(3) Preview Area

Note

• The displayed items vary by document type and view.

• The preview function is not available when scanning from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder).


Favorite Settings

You can name and save a group of settings (Input Settings, Output Settings, Image Settings, and

Color Adjustment Buttons) on the Advanced Mode tab, and load it as required. It is convenient to save a group of settings if you will be using it repeatedly. You can also use this to reload the default settings.

Select Add/Delete... from the pull-down menu to open the Add/Delete Favorite Settings dialog box.

721

Enter Setting Name and click Add; the name appears in Favorite Settings List.

When you click Save, the item appears in the Favorite Settings list and can be selected, along with the predefined items.

To delete an item, select it in Favorite Settings List and click Delete. Click Save to save the settings displayed in Favorite Settings List.

Note

• You can set Add/Delete... in Favorite Settings after preview.


Input Settings

Specify the input settings such as the document type and size.

Output Settings

Specify the output settings such as the output resolution and size.

Image Settings

Enable/disable various image correction functions.

Color Adjustment Buttons

Fine corrections to the image brightness and color tones can be made including adjustments to the image's overall brightness or contrast and adjustments to its highlight and shadow values (histogram) or balance (tone curve).

Zoom

Zooms in on a frame, or zooms in on the image in the area specified with a cropping frame (scan area). When zoomed in, Zoom changes to Undo. Click Undo to return the display to its nonmagnified state.


When multiple images are displayed in thumbnail view, clicking this button zooms in on the selected frame. Click frame.

(Frame Advance) at the bottom of the screen to display the previous or next

Note

• You can also zoom in on an image by double-clicking the frame. Double-click the frame again to return the display to its non-magnified state.


Rescans the image in the area specified with a cropping frame at higher magnification.

Note

• Zoom rescans the document and displays high-resolution image in Preview.

• (Enlarge/Reduce) on the Toolbar zooms in on the preview image quickly. However, the resolution of the displayed image will be low.

Preview

Performs a trial scan.

722

Scan

Starts scanning.

Note

• When scanning starts, the progress will be displayed. Click Cancel to cancel the scan.

• When scanning is completed, a dialog box prompting you to select the next action may appear.

Follow the prompt to complete. For details, refer to Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning in Scan Tab (Preferences dialog box).

• It will take time to process the images if the total size of the scanned images exceeds a certain size. In that case, a warning message appears; it is recommended that you reduce the total size.

To continue, scan in whole image view.

Preferences...

Opens the Preferences dialog box in which you can make scan/preview settings.

Close

Closes ScanGear (scanner driver).

(2) Toolbar

You can adjust or rotate preview images. The buttons displayed on the Toolbar vary by view.



(Thumbnail) / (Whole Image)

Switches the view in the Preview area.

723

(3) Preview Area

(Clear)

Deletes the preview image from the Preview area.

It also resets the Toolbar and color adjustment settings.

(Crop)

Allows you to specify the scan area by dragging the mouse.

(Move Image)

Allows you to drag the image until the part you want to see is displayed when an image enlarged in the Preview area does not fit in the screen. You can also move the image using the scroll bars.

(Enlarge/Reduce)

Allows you to zoom in on the Preview area by clicking the image. Right-click the image to zoom out.

(Rotate Left)




(Rotate Right)




(Auto Crop)

Displays and adjusts the cropping frame automatically to the size of the document displayed in the

Preview area. The scan area is reduced every time you click this button if there are croppable areas within the cropping frame.

(Check All Frames)


Selects the checkboxes of the image in thumbnail view.

(Uncheck All Frames)


Deselects the checkboxes of the image in thumbnail view.

(Select All Frames)


Selects the images in thumbnail view and outlines them in blue.

(Select All Cropping Frames)

Available when two or more cropping frames are specified.

Turns the cropping frames into thick broken lines and applies the settings to all of them.

724

(Remove Cropping Frame)

Removes the selected cropping frame.

(Information)

Displays the version of ScanGear and the current scan settings (document type, etc.).

(Open Guide)

Opens this page.


This is where a trial image appears after you click Preview. You can also check the results of the settings

(image corrections, color adjustments, etc.) made in " (1) Settings and Operation Buttons ."

When (Thumbnail) is displayed on the Toolbar:

Cropping frames are specified according to the document size, and thumbnails of scanned images are displayed. Only the images with the checkbox selected will be scanned.

Note

• When multiple images are previewed, different outlines indicate different selection status.

• Focus Frame (thick blue outline): The displayed settings will be applied.

• Selected Frame (thin blue outline): The settings will be applied to the Focus Frame and Selected

Frames simultaneously. You can select multiple images by clicking them while pressing the Ctrl key.

• Unselected (no outline): The settings will not be applied.

When (Whole Image) is displayed on the Toolbar:

Items on the Platen are scanned and displayed as a single image. All portions in the cropping frames will be scanned.

725

Note

• You can specify the cropping frame on the displayed image. In thumbnail view, you can only create one cropping frame per image. In whole image view, you can create multiple cropping frames.


Related Topic

Scanning in Advanced Mode

Scanning Multiple Documents from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder) in Advanced Mode

726

Input Settings

Input Settings allows you to set the following items:

Select Source

The type of document to be scanned is displayed. To scan from the Platen, select Platen; to scan from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder), select Document (ADF Simplex) or Document (ADF Duplex).

Important


Note

• You can select Document (ADF Duplex) when using a model supporting ADF duplex scanning.

Paper Size

Select the size of the document to be scanned. This setting is available in whole image view only.

When scanning both sides of the documents automatically from the ADF, select A4 or Letter.

When you select a size, the Preview area size changes accordingly.

Important

• Some applications have a limit to the amount of scan data they can receive. Available scan range is as follows.

• 21000 pixels x 30000 pixels or less

• If you change Paper Size after previewing, the preview image will be deleted.

Note

• If you are not sure which size you should select for Paper Size, set Paper Size to Full Platen, then measure the size of the document and enter the values into (Width) and (Height).

Original Orientation

Set the orientation and stapling side of the documents to scan from the ADF.

727

Click Settings... to open the Orientation dialog box.

Important

• The Orientation dialog box can only be opened when Select Source is Document (ADF

Simplex) or Document (ADF Duplex).

• Binding Location is displayed when using a model supporting ADF duplex scanning.

• Binding Location cannot be specified when Select Source is Document (ADF Simplex).

Color Mode

Select how to scan the document.

Color

Select this mode to scan color documents or to create color images. This mode renders the image in 256 levels (8 bit) of R(ed), G(reen), and B(lue).

Grayscale

Select this mode to scan black and white photos or to create black and white images. This mode renders the image in 256 levels (8 bit) of black and white.

Black and White

Select this mode to scan photos and documents in black and white. This mode renders the image in black and white. The contrast in the image is divided at certain levels (threshold level) into black and white and is rendered in two colors. The threshold level can be set with

Input Size

In thumbnail view, the cropped document size is displayed after preview.

(Threshold).

In whole image view, the Paper Size is displayed before preview, and the cropping frame (scan area) size is displayed after preview.

You can adjust the cropping frame size by entering the values into (Width) and (Height).

Click (Change Aspect Ratio) and change it to (Keep Aspect Ratio) to maintain the aspect ratio when you specify the cropping frame size.

Important

• Input size settings are available only when Output Size in Output Settings is Flexible. If you select a size other than Flexible, a cropping frame calculated from Output Size and Output

Resolution is displayed, and its aspect ratio is fixed.

728

Note

• The values you can enter will be within the range of the selected document size. The minimum size is 96 pixels x 96 pixels when Output Resolution is 600 dpi, scaled at 100 %.

• When Auto Crop is performed in whole image view, the aspect ratio will not be maintained since the size will be prioritized.

• Refer to " Adjusting Cropping Frames (ScanGear) " for details on cropping frames.

729

Output Settings

Output Settings allows you to set the following items:

Output Resolution

Select the resolution to scan at.


Select a resolution from the options displayed by clicking the button, or enter a value in 1 dpi increments.

Refer to "Resolution" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for details.

When Select Source is Platen:

You can enter a value within the range of 25 dpi to 19200 dpi.

When Select Source is Document (ADF Simplex) or Document (ADF Duplex):

You can enter a value within the range of 25 dpi to 600 dpi.

Output Size

Select an output size.

Select Flexible to set custom sizes or select a size for printing or displaying. Select Add/Delete... to set custom size and save it as a new output size option.

Flexible

You can specify the output resolution and scale, and adjust the cropping frames (scan areas).


Drag the mouse over a thumbnail to display a cropping frame. When a cropping frame is displayed, the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned. When no cropping frame is displayed, each frame is scanned individually.

730


When no cropping frame is displayed, the entire Preview area will be scanned. When a cropping frame is displayed, the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned.

Note

• To enlarge/reduce the scanned image, enter values into (Width) and (Height) in

Output Settings or specify a value (by 1 %) for %. Although the maximum value available for

% depends on the Output Resolution, it can be specified for up to 19200 dpi (the maximum available output resolution).

Paper Size (L, A4, etc.) & Monitor Size (1024 x 768 pixels, etc.)

(Width), (Height), and scale cannot be specified. The preview image will be cropped according to the selected output size and resolution. The portion within the cropping frame will be scanned at the size of the selected paper/monitor size. You can drag the cropping frame to enlarge, reduce, or move it while maintaining the aspect ratio.

Add/Delete...

Opens the Add/Delete the Output Size dialog box, in which you can specify custom output sizes.

In the Add/Delete the Output Size dialog box, you can specify multiple output sizes and save them at one time. Saved items will be registered to the Output Size list and can be selected, along with the predefined items.

Adding:

Select Print or Image display for Destination, then enter Output Size Name, Width, and Height, then click Add. For Unit, you can select inches or mm when Destination is Print but you can only select pixels when Destination is Image display. The name of the added size appears in Output

Size List. Click Save to save the items listed in Output Size List.

Deleting:

Select the output size you want to delete in Output Size List, then click Delete. Click Save to save the items listed in Output Size List.

Important

• You cannot delete predefined output sizes such as A4 and 1024 x 768 pixels.

Note

• Save up to 10 items for each destination.

• An error message appears when you enter a value outside the setting range. Enter a value within the range displayed in the message.

731

Note

• Refer to " Adjusting Cropping Frames (ScanGear) " for details on cropping frames.

• For details on whether or how the cropping frame is initially displayed on a preview image, refer to

Cropping Frame on Previewed Images in " Preview Tab " (Preferences dialog box).

(Switch Aspect Ratio)

Available when Output Size is set to anything but Flexible.

Click this button to rotate the cropping frame. Click again to return it to the original orientation.

Data Size

The data size when scanned with the current settings is displayed.

Note

• When the data size exceeds a certain size, the value appears in red. In that case, a warning message appears when you click Scan. It is recommended that you adjust the settings to reduce

Data Size. To continue, scan in whole image view.

732

Image Settings

Important

• Do not apply these functions to images without moire, dust/scratches, or faded colors. The color tone may be adversely affected.

• Image correction results may not be reflected in the preview image.

Note

• Selectable settings depend on Color Mode settings.

• Scanning may take longer than usual when you use Image Settings.

Image Settings allows you to set the following items:

Image Adjustment

When Image Adjustment is set, the brightness of the specified portion of the image is optimized. Images can be adjusted according to the automatically detected document type or the specified document type.

The result of the adjustment will be reflected in the entire image.

None

Image Adjustment will not be applied.

Auto

Applies Image Adjustment by automatically detecting the document type. It is recommended that you normally select this setting.

Photo

Applies Image Adjustment suitable for photos.

Magazine

Applies Image Adjustment suitable for magazines.

Document

Applies Image Adjustment suitable for text documents.

733

Important

• You can set Image Adjustment after preview.

• You can set this setting when Recommended is selected on the Color Settings tab of the

Preferences dialog box.

Note

• If the image is not adjusted properly with Auto, specify the document type.

• The color tone may change from the source image due to the Image Adjustment. In that case, set

Image Adjustment to None.

Reduce Show-through

Use this function to reduce show-through in duplex documents or lighten the base color in recycled paper and other colored paper when scanning documents.

OFF

Show-through will not be reduced.

ON

Select this to reduce show-through in duplex documents or lighten the base color. It is recommended that you normally select this setting.

Important

• Reduce Show-through can be set when Recommended is selected on the Color Settings tab of the Preferences dialog box and Document or Magazine is selected for Image Adjustment.

Unsharp Mask

Emphasizes the outline of the subjects to sharpen the image when scanning photos.

OFF

Unsharp Mask will not be applied.

ON

Emphasizes the outline of the subjects to sharpen the image. It is recommended that you normally select this setting.

Descreen

Printed photos and pictures are displayed as a collection of fine dots. "Moire" is a phenomenon where uneven gradation or a stripe pattern appears when such photos or pictures printed with fine dots are scanned. Descreen is the function for reducing this moire effect.

OFF

Moire will not be reduced.

ON

Reduces moire. It is recommended that you normally select this setting.

Note

• Even if Descreen is set to ON, some moire effects may remain if Unsharp Mask is set to ON. In that case, set Unsharp Mask to OFF.

Reduce Dust and Scratches

Scanned photos may contain white dots caused by dust or scratches. Use this function to reduce such noise.

None

Dust and scratches will not be reduced.

734

Low

Select this to reduce small dust particles and scratches. Large ones may remain.

Medium


High

Select this to reduce large dust particles and scratches; however, evidence of the reduction process may remain or delicate parts of the image may be removed.

Important

• This function may not be effective for some types of photos.

Note

• It is recommended that you select None when scanning printed materials.

Fading Correction

Use this function to correct photos that have faded with time or have a colorcast. "Colorcast" is a phenomenon where a specific color affects the entire picture due to the weather or ambient strong colors.

None

Fading Correction will not be applied.

Low

Select this to correct a small amount of fading and colorcast.

Medium


High

Select this to correct a large amount of fading and colorcast. This can affect the tone of the image.

Important

• You can set Fading Correction after preview.

• You can set this setting when Recommended is selected on the Color Settings tab of the

Preferences dialog box.


Grain Correction

Use this function to reduce graininess (roughness) in photos taken with high-speed or sensitized film.

None

Graininess will not be reduced.

Low

Select this when the photo is slightly grainy.

Medium


High

Select this when the photo is very grainy. This can affect the gradation and sharpness of the image.

Important


735

Gutter Shadow Correction

Use this function to correct shadows that appear between pages when scanning open booklets.

When you set the Gutter Shadow Correction setting in the preview image, the result will be reflected.

Preview the effects before scanning, as results vary depending on the type of document and how it is pressed.

Unclear or blurred text/lines caused by curved pages are not corrected.

None

Gutter shadow will not be corrected.

Low

Select this when the effect level is too strong with the medium setting.

Medium


High

Select this when the effect level is too weak with the medium setting.

Important

• You can set Gutter Shadow Correction after preview.

• Do not place objects that weigh 4.4 lbs (2.0 kg) or more on the platen. Also, do not press on the document with a force exceeding 4.4 lbs (2.0 kg). If you press heavily, the scanner may not work correctly or you might break the glass.

• Align the document with the edge of the Platen. If not, the shadow will not be corrected properly.

• Shadows may not be corrected properly depending on the document. If the page background is not white, shadows may not be detected correctly or may not be detected at all.

• While scanning, press down on the spine with the same amount of pressure you used to preview the scan. If the binding part is not even, the shadow will not be corrected properly.

• How to place the document depends on your model and the document to be scanned.

Note

• Cover the document with black cloth if white spots, streaks, or colored patterns appear in scan results due to ambient light entering between the document and the Platen.

736

• If the shadow is not corrected properly, adjust the cropping frame (scan area) on the preview image.


737

Color Adjustment Buttons

The Color Adjustment Buttons allow you to make fine corrections to the image brightness and color tones including adjustments to the image's overall brightness or contrast and adjustments to its highlight and shadow values (histogram) or balance (tone curve).

Important

• The Color Adjustment Buttons are not available when you select Color Matching on the Color

Settings tab of the Preferences dialog box.

Note

• Selectable settings depend on Color Mode settings.

• When you adjust the image via the Color Adjustment Buttons, the results will be reflected in the preview image.

Click a Color Adjustment Button to set the following items:

(Saturation/Color Balance)

Adjust the saturation (vividness) and color tone of the image. Use this function to brighten colors that have faded with time or due to colorcast. "Colorcast" is a phenomenon where a specific color affects the entire picture due to the weather or ambient strong colors.

Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance

(Brightness/Contrast)

Adjust the brightness and contrast of the image. If the image is too dark or too bright, or if the image quality is flat due to lack of contrast, you can adjust the levels of brightness and contrast.

Adjusting Brightness and Contrast

738

(Histogram)

A histogram allows you to see the data concentration at each brightness level of an image. You can specify the brightest level (highlight) and darkest level (shadow) within an image, cut the levels and expand the middle of the tonal range of the image.

Adjusting Histogram

(Tone Curve Settings)

Adjust the brightness of an image by selecting the type of graph (tone curve) showing the balance of tone input and output. You can make fine adjustments to the brightness of a specific area.

Adjusting Tone Curve

(Final Review)

Make a final check of color adjustments. The final synthesized tone curve and the histogram derived from the subsequent image processing will be displayed. There are no settings to make in this screen.

• For a color image, select a color in Channel to check either Red, Green, or Blue, or select Master to check three colors together.

• If you place the cursor on the preview image, the portion will be enlarged and its RGB values (only

L when Color Mode is Grayscale) before and after the adjustments will be displayed.

(Threshold)

Set the boundary (threshold) at which black and white are divided. By adjusting the threshold level, you can sharpen text in a document or reduce show-through in newspapers.

Setting Threshold

Custom

You can name and save a set of tone curve and threshold settings of the Color Adjustment Buttons.

Select Add/Delete... from the pull-down menu; when Color Mode is set to anything but Black and

White, the Add/Delete Tone Curve Settings dialog box opens; when Color Mode is Black and

White, the Add/Delete Threshold Settings dialog box opens.

739

Enter Setting Name and click Add; the name appears in Tone Curve Settings List or Threshold

Settings List. Click Save to save.

To delete an item, select it in Tone Curve Settings List or Threshold Settings List and click Delete.

Click Save to save the settings displayed in Tone Curve Settings List or Threshold Settings List.

You can load and apply the saved tone curve/threshold settings to a preview image. To load the settings, select the saved item from the pull-down menu.

Note


Defaults

Reset all adjustments (saturation/color balance, brightness/contrast, histogram, and tone curve).

740

Preferences Dialog Box

In the Preferences dialog box, you can make advanced settings to ScanGear (scanner driver) functions via the Scanner, Preview, Scan, and Color Settings tabs.

Click Preferences... in the ScanGear screen to open the Preferences dialog box.

Scanner Tab

Allows you to set the quiet mode, specify the folder in which to save images temporarily, and set the music file to play during or at the end of a scan.

Preview Tab

Allows you to select what to do with Preview when ScanGear is started, how to display cropping frames after previewing images, and the cropping size for thumbnails of scanned documents.

Scan Tab

Allows you to select what to do with ScanGear after scanning image.

Color Settings Tab

Allows you to select how to adjust color, and specify the monitor gamma value.

741

Scanner Tab

On the Scanner tab, you can specify the following settings.

Important

• Available functions and settings vary depending on your scanner or printer.

Auto Power Settings

You can set to turn the machine on or off automatically.

Click Settings... to display the Auto Power Settings dialog box.

Note

• If the machine is off or bi-directional communication is disabled, a message may appear because the computer cannot collect the machine status. In that case, click OK to exit ScanGear (scanner driver).

Auto Power On

Select Enable to turn on the machine automatically when data is received.

Auto Power Off

Specify the amount of time you want to set from the list. When this time lapses without any data being received, the machine turns off automatically.

Important

• When using a network compatible model by connecting to a network, the power does not turn off automatically even if Auto Power Off is set.

742

Quiet Settings

The silent function allows you to reduce the operating noise of this machine. Use this when you wish to reduce the operating noise such as when scanning or printing at night.

Click Settings... to set the quiet mode.

Note

• You can set the quiet mode from the operation panel of the machine, the printer driver, or

ScanGear.

No matter how the setting is made, it applies to operations from the operation panel of the machine or when printing/scanning from a computer, etc.

• Scanning or printing may take longer than usual when this function is used.


Select this option when you wish to use the machine with volume of normal operating noise.


Select this option when you wish to reduce the operating noise of the machine.


Select this option when you wish to reduce the operating noise of the machine during a specified period of time.

Set the Start time and End time during which quiet mode is to be activated.

Important

• The time specified in Start time and in End time must be different.

• If your scanner or printer does not support fax functions, quiet mode is not applied to operations (copy, direct print, etc.) performed directly from the machine even if the hours are specified.

Select Folder Where Temporary Files are Saved

Displays the folder in which to save images temporarily. To change the folder, click Browse... to specify another one.

Sound Settings

You can set the machine to play music during/at the end of a scan.

Select the Play Music During Scanning or Play Sound When Scanning is Completed checkbox, then click Browse... and specify a sound file.

You can specify the following files.

• MIDI file (*.mid, *.rmi, *.midi)

• Audio file (*.wav, *.aif, *.aiff)

• MP3 file (*.mp3)

743

Calibration Settings

When you set Execute at Every Scan to ON, the scanner will be calibrated every time before previewing and scanning, to reproduce correct color tones in scanned images.

Note

• Even when Execute at Every Scan is set to OFF, the scanner may be calibrated automatically in some cases (such as immediately after you turn the machine on).

• Calibration may take time depending on your computer.

744

Preview Tab

On the Preview tab, you can specify the following settings.

Preview at Start of ScanGear

Select what to do with Preview when ScanGear (scanner driver) is started.

Automatically Execute Preview

ScanGear will automatically start previewing at startup.

Display Saved Preview Image

The previously previewed image will be displayed.

The Color Adjustment Button settings, the Toolbar settings, and the Advanced Mode tab settings are also saved.

None

No preview image will be displayed at startup.

Note

• Select None if you do not want to save the preview image.

Cropping Frame on Previewed Images

Select how to display cropping frames after previewing images.

Execute Auto Cropping on Previewed Images

The cropping frame (scan area) will automatically be displayed in the document size after previewing.

Display the Last Frame on Previewed Images

A cropping frame of the same size as the last used cropping frame will be displayed after previewing.

None

No cropping frame will be displayed after previewing.

Cropping Size for Thumbnail View

Select the cropping size for thumbnails of scanned documents.

745

Larger

Displays 105 % (in width and height) of the area displayed for the standard size.

Standard

The standard size.

Smaller

Displays 95 % (in width and height) of the area displayed for the standard size.

Note

• When you change the Cropping Size for Thumbnail View setting, the preview images will be refreshed and cropped to the new size. As the preview images are refreshed, the color adjustments and other settings applied to them are reset.

746

Scan Tab

On the Scan tab, you can specify the following settings.

Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning

Select what to do with ScanGear (scanner driver) after scanning images.

Close ScanGear automatically

Select this to return to the original application when scanning is completed.

Do not close ScanGear automatically

Select this to return to the ScanGear screen for another scan when scanning is completed.

Display the dialog to select next action

Select this to open a screen and select what to do when scanning is completed.

Note

• Even if Do not close ScanGear automatically or Display the dialog to select next action is set, some applications may not support it.

747

Color Settings Tab

On the Color Settings tab, you can specify the following settings.


Select one of the following.

Recommended

Select this to vividly reproduce the tone of a document on the screen. It is recommended that you normally select this setting.

Color Matching

Select this to automatically match the scanner, monitor, and color printer colors, thus reducing time and trouble to manually match the monitor and printer colors.

Source(Scanner)

Select scanner profile.

Target

Select target profile.

Monitor

Select this checkbox to display preview image with optimum correction for monitor.

Defaults

Returns to the default Color Matching settings.

Note

• The Color Adjustment Buttons on the Advanced Mode tab are not available when you select

Color Matching.

• This function is available when Color Mode is Color.

None

Select this to disable color correction provided by ScanGear (scanner driver).

748

Note

• Depending on your scanner or printer, this setting may not be available when scanning from the ADF

(Auto Document Feeder).

• You can select one when Color Mode is Color or Grayscale.

• Color Matching is available when ScanGear, monitor, color management-compliant application (such as

Adobe Photoshop), and printer are set up correctly.

Refer to the corresponding manual for the monitor, printer, and application settings.

Monitor Gamma

By setting the gamma value of a monitor, you can adjust the input data to the brightness characteristics of the monitor. Adjust the value if your monitor's gamma value does not match the default value set in

ScanGear, and the colors of the original image are not accurately reflected in the monitor.

Click Defaults to return to the default Monitor Gamma value (2.20).

Note

• Refer to the manual of your monitor to check its gamma value. If it is not written in the manual, contact the manufacturer.

749


Learn how to place items on the platen or ADF (Auto Document Feeder) of your scanner or printer. Place items correctly according to the type of item to be scanned. Otherwise, items may not be scanned correctly.

Important

• Do not place objects on the document cover. When you open the document cover, the objects may fall into your scanner or printer, resulting in malfunction.

• Close the document cover when scanning.

• Do not touch the operation panel buttons or LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) when opening/closing the document cover. May result in unintended operation.

Placing Items (Platen)

Placing Documents (ADF (Auto Document Feeder))

Placing Items (Platen)

Place items as described below to scan by detecting the item type or size automatically.

Important

• When scanning by specifying the paper size in IJ Scan Utility or ScanGear (scanner driver), align an upper corner of the item with the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the platen.

• Photos that have been cut to various shapes and items smaller than 1.2 inches (3 cm) square cannot be cropped accurately when scanning.


For Photos, Postcards, Business Cards, or BD/DVD/CD For Magazines, Newspapers, or Documents

Placing a Single Item:

Place the item face-down on the platen, with 0.4 inch (1 cm) or more space between the edges (diagonally striped area) of the platen and the item. Portions placed on the diagonally striped area cannot be scanned.

Place the item face-down on the platen and align an upper corner of the item with the corner at the arrow

(alignment mark) of the platen. Portions placed on the diagonally striped area cannot be scanned.

Important

• Large items (such as A4 size photos) that cannot be placed away from the edges/arrow (alignment mark) of

Important

• Refer to "Loading Originals" for your model from

Home of the Online Manual for details on the portions in which items cannot be scanned.

750

the platen may be saved as PDF files. To save in a format other than PDF, scan by specifying the data format.

Placing Multiple Items:

Allow 0.4 inch (1 cm) or more space between the edges

(diagonally striped area) of the platen and items, and between items. Portions placed on the diagonally striped area cannot be scanned.

more than 0.4 inch (1 cm)

Note

• You can place up to 12 items.

• You can place up to four items when the Compress

scanned images upon transfer checkbox is selected in the Settings dialog box of IJ Scan Utility.

• With network connection, items may not be scanned correctly when five or more items are placed. In that case, reduce the number of items placed on the platen to four or less, then scan again.

• Positions of slanted items (10 degrees or less) are corrected automatically.

Placing Documents (ADF (Auto Document Feeder))

Important

• Do not leave thick items on the platen when scanning from the ADF. May result in paper jam.

• Place and align documents of the same size when scanning two or more documents.

• Refer to "Originals You Can Load" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for details on supported document sizes when scanning from the ADF.

1. Open the document tray.

751

2. Place the documents on the ADF, then adjust the document guides to the width of the documents.

Insert the documents face-up until a beep sounds.

Note

• When scanning duplex documents, place the front sides facing up. They will not be scanned in the correct page order if placed the other way around.

752

Adjusting Cropping Frames (ScanGear)

"Cropping" is the act of selecting the area you want to keep in an image and discarding the rest when scanning it.

On the Basic Mode tab and Advanced Mode tab, you can specify cropping frames (scan areas) on the image(s) displayed in the Preview area of the screen.

When you perform a scan, each area specified with a cropping frame will be scanned as a separate image.

Note

• In whole image view, you can specify multiple cropping frames on the preview image.

• Refer to "Adjusting Cropping Frames in the Image Stitch Window" for your model from Home of the

Online Manual for how to adjust cropping frames with IJ Scan Utility.

Initial Cropping Frame


No cropping frame is specified. You can drag the mouse over a thumbnail to specify a cropping frame.


An active cropping frame is automatically specified around the preview image. You can drag the cropping frame in the Preview area to specify the area.

Note

• You can change the auto crop setting in the Preferences dialog box. Refer to Cropping Frame on

Previewed Images in " Preview Tab " for details.

Cropping Frame Types

(1) Thick cropping frame (rotating or stationary)

Represents a selected cropping frame. Appears only in whole image view. You can select multiple cropping frames by clicking them while pressing the Ctrl key. Output size, image corrections, and other settings on the Basic Mode tab or Advanced Mode tab will be applied to all the selected cropping frames.

(2) Thin cropping frame


Output size, image corrections, and other settings on the Basic Mode tab or Advanced Mode tab will be applied.

753


Represents an unselected cropping frame. The settings on the Basic Mode tab or Advanced Mode tab will not be applied.

Adjusting a Cropping Frame

The cursor will change into (Arrow) when it is positioned over a cropping frame. If you click and drag the mouse in the direction of the arrow, the cropping frame will expand or contract accordingly.

The cursor will change into (Crosshair Arrow) when it is positioned within a cropping frame. Click and drag the mouse to move the entire cropping frame.

Note

• On the Advanced Mode tab, you can specify the cropping frame size by entering the values into

(Width) and (Height) in

Input Settings

.

• You can rotate a cropping frame 90 degrees by clicking (Switch Aspect Ratio). However,

(Switch Aspect Ratio) is not available when Output Size is Flexible.

Creating Multiple Cropping Frames


You can only create one cropping frame per image.

754


Click and drag the mouse in a space outside the existing cropping frame to create a new cropping frame in the Preview area. The new cropping frame will be the active cropping frame, and the old cropping frame will be the unselected cropping frame.

You can create multiple cropping frames and apply different scan settings to each cropping frame.

You can also select multiple cropping frames by clicking them while pressing the Ctrl key.

If you select multiple cropping frames and change the settings on a tab at the right of ScanGear, the settings will be applied to all the selected cropping frames.

When you create a new cropping frame, it retains the settings of the latest cropping frame.

Note

• Create up to 12 cropping frames.

• Scanning takes longer than usual when multiple cropping frames are selected.

Deleting Cropping Frames


To delete a cropping frame, click an area outside the cropping frame on an image.

755


To delete a cropping frame, select it and click

Alternatively, press the Delete key.

(Remove Cropping Frame) on the Toolbar.

When there are multiple cropping frames, all the selected cropping frames (active cropping frame and selected cropping frames) are deleted simultaneously.

756

General Notes (Scanner Driver)

ScanGear (scanner driver) is subject to the following restrictions. Keep these points in mind when using it.

Scanner Driver Restrictions

• When using the NTFS file system, the TWAIN data source may not be invoked. This is because the

TWAIN module cannot be written to the winnt folder for security reasons. Contact the computer's administrator for help.

• Some computers (including laptops) connected to the machine may not resume correctly from standby mode. In that case, restart the computer.

• Do not connect two or more scanner or multifunction printers with scanner function to the same computer simultaneously. If multiple scanning devices are connected, you cannot scan from the operation panel of the machine and also may experience errors while accessing the devices.

• Scanning may fail if the computer has resumed from sleep or standby mode. In that case, follow these steps and scan again.

1. Turn off the machine.

2. Exit ScanGear, then disconnect the USB cable from the computer and reconnect it.

3. Turn on the machine.

• ScanGear cannot be opened in multiple applications at the same time. Within an application,

ScanGear cannot be opened for the second time when it is already open.

• Be sure to close the ScanGear window before closing the application.

• When using a network compatible model by connecting to a network, the machine cannot be accessed from multiple computers at the same time.

• When using a network compatible model by connecting to a network, scanning takes longer than usual.

• Make sure that you have adequate disk space available when scanning large images at high resolutions. For example, at least 300 MB of free space is required to scan an A4 document at 600 dpi in full-color.

• ScanGear and WIA driver cannot be used at the same time.

• Do not enter the computer into sleep or hibernate state during scanning.

Applications with Restrictions on Use

• If you start Media Center included in Windows XP Media Center Edition 2005, you may not be able to scan using the operation panel of the machine. In that case, restart the computer.

• You cannot scan images with Media Center included in Windows XP Media Center Edition 2005.

Scan with other applications such as IJ Scan Utility.

• Some applications may not display the TWAIN user interface. In that case, refer to the application's manual and change the settings accordingly.

• Some applications do not support continuous scanning of multiple documents. In some cases, only the first scanned image is accepted, or multiple images are scanned as one image. For such applications, do not scan multiple documents from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder).

• To import scanned images into Microsoft Office 2000, first save them using IJ Scan Utility, then import the saved files from the Insert menu.

• When scanning Platen size images into Microsoft Office 2003 (Word, Excel, PowerPoint, etc.), click

Custom Insert in the Insert Picture from Scanner or Camera screen. Otherwise, images may not be scanned correctly.

757

• When scanning images into Microsoft Office 2007/Microsoft Office 2010 (Word, Excel, PowerPoint, etc.), use Microsoft Clip Organizer.

• Images may not be scanned correctly in some applications. In that case, increase the operating system's virtual memory and retry.

• When image size is too large (such as when scanning large images at high resolution), your computer may not respond or the progress bar may remain at 0 % depending on the application. In that case, cancel the action (for example by clicking Cancel on the progress bar), then increase the operating system's virtual memory or reduce the image size/resolution and retry. Alternatively, scan the image via IJ Scan Utility first, then save and import it into the application.

758

Useful Information on Scanning

Adjusting Cropping Frames in the Image Stitch Window

Resolution

Data Formats

Color Matching

759

Adjusting Cropping Frames in the Image Stitch Window

"Cropping" is the act of selecting the area you want to keep in an image and discarding the rest when scanning it.

In the Image Stitch window, you can specify a cropping frame on the image displayed in the Preview area.

Note

• Refer to "Adjusting Cropping Frames (ScanGear)" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for how to adjust cropping frames with ScanGear (scanner driver).

Initial Cropping Frame

No cropping frame is specified. When you select the Adjust cropping frames checkbox, an active cropping frame is automatically specified around the image in the Preview area. You can drag the cropping frame to specify the area.

When you perform a scan, the image in the area specified with the cropping frame will be scanned.

Adjusting a Cropping Frame

The cursor will change into (Arrow) when it is positioned over a cropping frame. Click and drag the mouse to expand or contract the cropping frame.

The cursor will change into (Crosshair Arrow) when it is positioned within a cropping frame. Click and drag the mouse to move the entire cropping frame.

Deleting Cropping Frames

To delete the cropping frame, deselect the Adjust cropping frames checkbox.

760

Resolution

The data in the image you have scanned is a collection of dots carrying information about brightness and color. The density of these dots is called "resolution", and resolution will determine the amount of detail your image contains. The unit of resolution is dots per inch (dpi). Dpi is the number of dots per inch (2.5 cm).

The higher the resolution (value), the more detail in your image; the lower the resolution (value), the less detail.

How to Set the Resolution

You can set the resolution in the following screens.

IJ Scan Utility:

Resolution on the (Scanning from a Computer) tab of the Settings dialog box

ScanGear (Scanner Driver):

Output Resolution in Output Settings on the Advanced Mode tab

Appropriate Resolution Settings

Set the resolution according to the use of the scanned image.

Item Type Use Color Mode

Color photo

Black and white photo

Text document (document or magazine)

Copying

(Printing)

Creating a postcard

Saving to a computer

Using on a website or attaching to e-mail

Saving to a computer

Using on a website or attaching to e-mail

Color

Color

Color

Color

Grayscale

Grayscale

Copying

Attaching to e-mail

Scanning text using OCR

Color, Grayscale, or

Black and White

Color, Grayscale, or

Black and White

Color or Grayscale

300 dpi

150 dpi

300 dpi

Appropriate

Resolution

300 dpi

300 dpi

300 dpi

150 dpi

300 dpi

150 dpi

761

Important

• If you double the resolution, the data size of the scanned image quadruples. If the file is too large, the processing speed will slow down significantly, and you will experience inconvenience such as lack of memory. Set the minimum required resolution according to the use of the image.

Note

• When you will be printing the scanned image by enlarging it, scan by setting a higher resolution than the recommended one above.

762

Data Formats

You can select a data format when saving scanned images. You should specify the most suitable data format according to how you want to use the image on which application.

Available data formats vary by application and operating system (Windows or Mac OS).

See below for the characteristics of each image data format.

PNG (Standard File Extension: .png)

A data format often used on websites.

PNG is suitable for editing saved images.

JPEG (Standard File Extension: .jpg)

A data format often used on websites and for digital camera images.

JPEG features high compression rates. JPEG images slightly degrade every time they are saved, and cannot be returned to their original state.

JPEG is not available for black and white images.

TIFF (Standard File Extension: .tif)

A data format featuring a relatively high compatibility between various computers and applications.

TIFF is suitable for editing saved images.

Note

• Some TIFF files are incompatible.

• IJ Scan Utility supports the following TIFF file formats.

• Uncompressed, black and white binary

• Uncompressed, RGB (8 bits per channel)

• Uncompressed, Grayscale

PDF (Standard File Extension: .pdf)

A data format for electronic documents, developed by Adobe Systems Incorporated.

It can be used on various computers and operating systems, and fonts can be embedded as well; therefore, people in different environments can exchange the files without being aware of the differences.

763

Color Matching

"Color Matching" is the act of making adjustments so that the color tones match between the original item, the monitor display, and the color printout. On your scanner or printer, the color tones are adjusted as shown below.

Example: When sRGB is selected as the output profile (target):

The image's color space is converted from the scanner's color space to sRGB by ScanGear.

When displaying on a monitor, the image's color space is converted from sRGB to the monitor's color space based on the operating system's monitor settings and the application's working space settings.

When printing, the image's color space is converted from sRGB to the printer's color space based on the application's print settings and the printer driver's settings.

764

IJ Network Scanner Selector EX Menu and Setting Screen

IJ Network Scanner Selector EX allows you to select the scanners or printers to be used for scanning or printing over a network from your computer or the operation panel.

After installation, IJ Network Scanner Selector EX appears in the notification area on the desktop.

Important

• If you cannot scan over a network, download and upgrade to the latest MP Drivers from our website.

• While IJ Network Scanner Selector EX is enabled, it periodically transmits packets to check whether it can communicate with your scanner or printer over the network. When using the computer in a network environment other than the one used to set up your scanner or printer, disable IJ Network Scanner

Selector EX.

Note

• If the icon is not displayed in the notification area on the desktop, follow the procedure below to start.

• Windows 8.1/Windows 8:

Click IJ Network Scanner Selector EX on the Start screen.

If IJ Network Scanner Selector EX is not displayed on the Start screen, select the Search charm, then search for "IJ Network Scanner Selector EX".

• Windows 7/Windows Vista/Windows XP:

From the Start menu, click All Programs > Canon Utilities > IJ Network Scanner Selector EX >

IJ Network Scanner Selector EX.

Menu

Displays a menu when you right-click (IJ Network Scanner Selector EX) in the notification area on the desktop.

Disable Canon IJ Network Scanner Selector EX / Enable Canon IJ Network Scanner Selector EX

Enables or disables IJ Network Scanner Selector EX.

When you select Disable Canon IJ Network Scanner Selector EX, you will not be able to scan over a network from the operation panel.

Enabled: , Disabled:

Important

• When using a model with which you cannot scan over a network from the operation panel, you cannot scan using the operation panel even if this setting is enabled.

Settings...

The Scan-from-PC Settings screen appears. You can select the model you want to use.

About

Displays the version information.

In the displayed dialog box, you can change the language to be used in the application. The change will be reflected after restarting the computer.

765

Exit

Exits IJ Network Scanner Selector EX; (Enabled) or (Disabled) disappears from the notification area on the desktop.

Scan-from-PC Settings Screen

Right-click the icon from the notification area on the desktop, then select Settings... to display the Scanfrom-PC Settings screen.

Your scanner or printer must be selected with IJ Network Scanner Selector EX before scanning over a network.

Scanners

MAC addresses of the scanners or printers that can be used over the network are displayed.

You can select one scanner or printer per model. Selecting a scanner or printer automatically enables scanning from the operation panel.

Instructions

Opens this guide.

Scan-from-Operation-Panel Settings

The Scan-from-Operation-Panel Settings screen appears. You can select up to three scanners and printers in total for scanning from the operation panel. You can scan items using the operation panel of the selected scanner or printer, and send the scanned images to your computer over a network.

Important

• When using a model with which you cannot scan over a network from the operation panel, that model does not appear in Scanners and the setting is not available.

Scan-from-Operation-Panel Settings Screen

Click Scan-from-Operation-Panel Settings in the Scan-from-PC Settings screen to display the Scanfrom-Operation-Panel Settings screen.

Scanners

MAC addresses of the scanners or printers that can be used over the network are displayed.

You can select up to three scanners and printers in total at the same time. Selecting a scanner or printer automatically enables scanning from the operation panel.

Instructions

Opens this guide.

Important

• When using a model with which you cannot scan over a network from the operation panel, Scan-

from-Operation-Panel Settings may appear in the Scan-from-PC Settings screen; however, the setting is not available.

Note

• If your scanner or printer does not appear, check the following, click OK to close the screen, then reopen it and try selecting again.

• MP Drivers is installed

• Network settings of your scanner or printer is completed after installing the MP Drivers

766

• Network communication between your scanner or printer and computer is enabled

If your scanner or printer still does not appear, refer to "Problems with Network Communication" for your model from Home of the Online Manual.

• You do not need to use this software when scanning via USB. Refer to " Uninstalling IJ Network

Scanner Selector EX " to delete it. You can scan via USB even if it is not deleted.

767

Uninstalling IJ Network Scanner Selector EX

Follow the procedure below to uninstall IJ Network Scanner Selector EX from your computer.

Important

• You cannot scan over a network after uninstalling IJ Network Scanner Selector EX.

• Log into a user account with administrator privilege.

1. Uninstall IJ Network Scanner Selector EX.

• Windows 8.1/Windows 8:

1. Click the Settings charm > Control Panel > Programs > Programs and

Features.

2. Double-click Canon IJ Network Scanner Selector EX.

Note

• If the User Account Control screen appears, click Continue.

• Windows 7/Windows Vista:

1. From the Start menu, select Control Panel > Programs > Programs and

Features.

2. Select Canon IJ Network Scanner Selector EX, then click Uninstall/Change.

Note

• If the User Account Control screen appears, click Continue.

• Windows XP:

1. From the Start menu, select Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs.

2. Select Canon IJ Network Scanner Selector EX, then click Change/Remove.

2. Click Yes when the confirmation message appears.

3. When uninstallation is complete, click OK.

Note

• When the message prompting you to restart your computer appears, click OK to restart your computer.

768

Other Scanning Methods

Scanning with WIA Driver

Scanning Using the Control Panel (Windows XP Only)

769

Scanning with WIA Driver

You can scan an item from a WIA (Windows Image Acquisition)-compliant application.

WIA is a driver model implemented in Windows XP or later. It allows you to scan items without using an application.

The procedure varies depending on the application. The following procedures are examples only.

Refer to the application's manual for details.

Important

• In Windows XP, you cannot scan using the WIA driver via a network connection.

• Follow these steps to enable scanning over a network.

The setting may have been completed already depending on your environment. In that case, Uninstall appears.

1. Follow the procedure below to open Network.

• Windows 8.1/Windows 8: Select the Search charm, then click Network displayed by searching for "Network".

• Windows 7: From the Start menu, select Computer > Network.

• Windows Vista: From the Start menu, select Network.

2. Right-click XXX_MAC address (where "XXX" is the model name) in the displayed screen, then select Install.

Scanning with WIA Driver 2.0

The following is an example of scanning using "Windows Fax and Scan."



2. Select New on the File menu of "Windows Fax and Scan," then click Scan....

The scan setting screen appears.

Note

• If you have more than one scanner or printer, a scanner selection screen may appear. Doubleclick the scanner you want to use.

• For USB connection: Canon XXX series (where "XXX" is the model name)

• For network connection: XXX series_MAC address (where "XXX" is the model name)

3. Specify the settings.

Scanner

The currently set product name is displayed. To change the scanner, click Change... and select the product you want to use.

Profile

Select Photo (Default) or Documents according to the type of item to be scanned. To save a new Profile, select Add profile.... You can specify the details in the Add New Profile dialog box.

770

Source

Select a scanner type.

Paper size

This setting is not available for your scanner or printer.

Color format


File type

Select a data format from JPEG, BMP, PNG, and TIFF.

Resolution (DPI)

Enter the resolution. Specify a value between 50 dpi and 600 dpi.

Resolution

Note

• When using the scanner or printer with network connection, the following resolutions can be specified.

150 dpi / 300 dpi / 600 dpi

Brightness

Move the slider to adjust the brightness. Move it to the left to darken and right to brighten the image. You can also enter a value (-100 to 100).

Contrast

Move the slider to adjust the contrast. Moving it to the left will decrease the contrast of the image, thus softening the image. Moving it to the right will increase the contrast of the image, thus sharpening the image. You can also enter a value (-100 to 100).

Preview or scan images as separate files

Select this checkbox to preview or scan multiple images as separate files.

Important

• When using the scanner or printer with network connection, you cannot specify Brightness,

Contrast, and Preview or scan images as separate files.

4. Click Preview to preview the image.

The preview image appears on the right.

5. Click Scan.

When scanning is completed, the scanned image appears in the application.

Scanning with WIA Driver 1.0

The following is an example of scanning using "Paint."



2. Click From scanner or camera from the File menu of Paint. (Select the command to scan an item in the application.)

771

Note

• If you have more than one scanner or printer, a scanner selection screen may appear. Doubleclick the scanner you want to use.

• For USB connection: Canon XXX series (where "XXX" is the model name)

• For network connection: XXX series_MAC address (where "XXX" is the model name)

3. Select the type of picture according to the item to be scanned.

Select from Color picture, Grayscale picture, Black and white picture or text, and Custom

Settings.

Note

• When using the scanner or printer with network connection, the options for the type of picture may differ from those displayed with USB connection.

• To scan with the values previously set in Adjust the quality of the scanned picture, select

Custom Settings.

4. Click Adjust the quality of the scanned picture and set the preferences as required.

Brightness

Move the slider to adjust the brightness. Move it to the left to darken and right to brighten the image. You can also enter a value (-127 to 127).

Contrast




Resolution

Note

• When using the scanner or printer with network connection, the following resolutions can be specified.

150 dpi / 300 dpi / 600 dpi

Picture type

Select the type of scan you want for your item.

Reset

Click to restore the original settings.

Important

• When using the scanner or printer with network connection, you cannot specify Brightness and

Contrast.


The preview image appears on the right. Drag to specify the scan area.

6. Click Scan.

772

When scanning is completed, the scanned image appears in the application.

773

Scanning Using the Control Panel (Windows XP Only)

You can scan images via the Control Panel of Windows XP using the WIA driver.

Important

• When using the scanner or printer with network connection, you cannot scan using the WIA driver.

1. From the Start menu, select Control Panel.

2. Click Printers and Other Hardware > Scanners and Cameras, then double-click Canon

XXX series (where "XXX" is the model name).

The Scanner and Camera Wizard dialog box appears.

3. Click Next.

4. Select Picture type according to the item to be scanned.

Note

• To scan with the values previously set in Custom settings, select Custom.

5. Click Custom settings to set the preferences as required.

774

Brightness

Move the slider to adjust the brightness. Move it to the left to darken and right to brighten the image.


Contrast




Resolution

Picture type

Select the type of scan you want for your item.

Reset

Click to restore the original settings.


The preview image appears on the right. Drag to specify the scan area.

7. Click Next and follow the instructions.

775


Learn how to place items on the platen of your scanner or printer. Place items correctly according to the type of item to be scanned. Otherwise, items may not be scanned correctly.

Important

• Do not place objects on the document cover. When you open the document cover, the objects may fall into your scanner or printer, resulting in malfunction.

• Close the document cover when scanning.

Placing Items

Place items as described below to scan by detecting the item type or size automatically.

Important

• When scanning by specifying the paper size in IJ Scan Utility or ScanGear (scanner driver), align an upper corner of the item with the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the platen.

• Photos that have been cut to various shapes and items smaller than 1.2 inches (3 cm) square cannot be cropped accurately when scanning.


For Photos, Postcards, Business Cards, or BD/DVD/CD For Magazines, Newspapers, or Documents

Placing a Single Item:

Place the item face-down on the platen, with 0.4 inch (1 cm) or more space between the edges (diagonally striped area) of the platen and the item. Portions placed on the diagonally striped area cannot be scanned.

Place the item face-down on the platen and align an upper corner of the item with the corner at the arrow

(alignment mark) of the platen. Portions placed on the diagonally striped area cannot be scanned.

Important

• Large items (such as A4 size photos) that cannot be placed away from the edges/arrow (alignment mark) of the platen may be saved as PDF files. To save in a format other than PDF, scan by specifying the data format.

Important

• Refer to "Loading Originals" for your model from

Home of the Online Manual for details on the portions in which items cannot be scanned.

776

Placing Multiple Items:

Allow 0.4 inch (1 cm) or more space between the edges

(diagonally striped area) of the platen and items, and between items. Portions placed on the diagonally striped area cannot be scanned.

more than 0.4 inch (1 cm)

Note

• You can place up to 12 items.

• Positions of slanted items (10 degrees or less) are corrected automatically.

777

Scanning from the Operation Panel of the Machine

Forwarding Scanned Data to the Computer Using the Operation Panel of the

Machine Basic

Attaching the Scanned Data to E-mail Using the Operation Panel of the Machine

Setting Items for Scanning Using the Operation Panel of the Machine

Network Scan Settings

Selecting a Response to Commands from the Operation Panel Using IJ Scan

Utility

778

Forwarding Scanned Data to the Computer Using the Operation

Panel of the Machine

Before forwarding scanned data to the computer, confirm the following:

• MP Drivers are installed.

If MP Drivers are not yet installed, install MP Drivers with the Setup CD-ROM or install them from our website.

• The machine is connected to a computer correctly.

Make sure that the machine is connected to the computer correctly.

Do not plug in or unplug the USB cable or LAN cable while the machine is in operation, or when the computer is in the sleep or standby mode.

If you perform scanning via a network connection, make sure that all the required settings have been specified.


• The destination and the file name are specified in Canon IJ Scan Utility.

You can specify the destination and the file name in Canon IJ Scan Utility. For details on settings of

Canon IJ Scan Utility:

Settings Dialog Box

1.


2. Flick the HOME screen, then tap Scan.


If you forward the data to the USB-connected computer:

The Scan standby screen is displayed.

Go to step 3.

Note

• If the screen for selecting to which you save the data is displayed, tap PC, then tap Local (USB).


If you forward the data to the network-connected computer:

The screen for selecting to which you save the data is displayed.

779

Note

• If the Scan standby screen for forwarding the data to the USB-connected computer is displayed on the touch screen, tap to display the screen for selecting to which you save the data.

Select the computer to forward the scanned data following the procedure below.

1. Tap PC.

2. Tap the computer to forward the scanned data.


Note

• If you tap Local (USB) on the Select PC screen, the data is forwarded to the USB-connected computer.

• When you forward the scanned data to the computer using WSD (one of the network protocols supported in Windows 8.1, Windows 8, Windows 7, and Windows Vista), select

Enable for WSD scan from this device on WSD setting on Other settings in LAN settings under Device settings.

WSD setting

If you tap Search again, the machine starts searching for the connected computers again.


780

A. Tap to select the document type.

Note

• When you forward the scanned data to the computer searched using WSD, you cannot select the document type.

Auto scan

This item is available only when the machine is connected to the computer using a USB cable.

The machine detects the type of the originals automatically and the image is forwarded in the optimized size, resolution and data format.

Important

• You can select Auto scan only when you forward the scanned data to the USB-connected computer.

• Load originals properly according to their type; otherwise, some originals may not be scanned properly.

For details on how to load the original:

Loading Originals

• The following items can be scanned:

Photos, postcards, visiting cards, magazines, newspapers, documents, BD/DVD/CDs

• The following items cannot be scanned properly.

• A4 sized photos

• Documents smaller than 5 inches x 7 inches (127 mm x 178 mm) such as a paperback with its backbone cut off

• Originals on thin white paper

• Long and narrow originals such as panoramic photographs

Document

Scans the original on the platen glass as a document data applying the settings specified in

Scan settings.

Photo

Scans the original on the platen glass as a photo data applying the settings specified in Scan

settings.

B. Tap to display Scan settings screen.


Setting Items for Scanning Using the Operation Panel of the Machine

781

C. Tap to display how to load the original.

D. Tap to display the screen to select the destination.

4.


5. Touch the Color button for color scanning, or the Black button for black & white scanning.

Note

• When you forward the scanned data to the computer using WSD, touch the Color button.

• If you select JPEG or TIFF for Format on the scan setting screen:

The machine starts scanning and scanned data is forwarded to the computer.

• When you select PDF or Compact PDF for Format on the scan setting screen:

The confirmation screen asking you if you continue scanning is displayed after scanning is complete.

If you continue scanning, load the original on the platen glass and start scanning.

If you do not continue scanning, tap End. The scanned data is forwarded to the computer.

Scanned data is forwarded to the computer according to the settings specified in Canon IJ Scan Utility.

Remove the original on the platen glass after scanning is complete.

Important

• If the scanning result with Auto scan is not satisfactory, select the document type or size according to the original in step 3.

When the program selection screen is displayed:

• If you are using Windows 8.1, Windows 8, Windows 7, or Windows Vista:

The program selection screen may be displayed after touching the Color or Black button. In this case, select Canon IJ Scan Utility and click OK.

• If you are using Windows XP:

The program selection screen may be displayed after touching the Color or Black button for the first time. In this case, specify Canon IJ Scan Utility as the application software to use, select Always

use this program for this action, then click OK. From the next time, Canon IJ Scan Utility is automatically started.

782

If you want to scan originals with advanced settings, or if you want to edit or print the scanned images:

If you scan originals from a computer using My Image Garden, My Image Garden enables you to edit the scanned images, such as optimizing or trimming.

In addition, you can edit or print the scanned images using the compatible application software to make better use of them.

Scanning Photos and Documents

Note

• You can use a WIA-compliant application software and the Control Panel (Windows XP only) to scan originals with this machine.

For details:

Other Scanning Methods

• If you want to convert a scanned document to text:

Extracting Text from Scanned Images (OCR)

783

Attaching the Scanned Data to E-mail Using the Operation Panel of the Machine

Before attaching scanned data to an e-mail, confirm the following:

• MP Drivers are installed.

If MP Drivers are not yet installed, install MP Drivers with the Setup CD-ROM or install them from our website.

• The machine is connected to a computer correctly.

Make sure that the machine is connected to the computer correctly.

Do not plug in or unplug the USB or LAN cable while the machine is in operation, or when the computer is in the sleep or standby mode.

If you perform scanning via a network connection, make sure that all the required settings have been specified.


• The mail software and the file name are specified in Canon IJ Scan Utility.

You can specify the destination and the file name in Canon IJ Scan Utility. For details on settings of

Canon IJ Scan Utility:

Settings Dialog Box

1.


2. Flick the HOME screen, then tap Scan.


The screen for selecting to which you save the data is displayed.

Note

• If the Scan standby screen for forwarding the data to the USB-connected computer is displayed on the touch screen, tap to display the screen for selecting to which you save the data.

3. Tap Attach to E-mail.

784

4. Tap the computer to forward the scanned data.

Tap Local (USB) for a USB-connected computer, or tap the computer to forward the scanned data for a network-connected computer.



A. Tap to select the document type.

Document

Scans the original on the platen glass as a document data applying the settings specified in

Scan settings.

Photo

Scans the original on the platen glass as a photo data applying the settings specified in Scan

settings.

B. Tap to display Scan settings screen.


Setting Items for Scanning Using the Operation Panel of the Machine

C. Tap to display how to load the original.

D. Tap to display the screen to select the destination.

6.


7. Touch the Color button for color scanning, or the Black button for black & white scanning.

• If you select JPEG for Format on the scan setting screen:

The machine starts scanning and scanned data is forwarded to the computer and attached to an email.

• If you select PDF or Compact PDF for Format on the scan setting screen:

785

The confirmation screen asking you if you continue scanning is displayed after scanning is complete.

If you continue scanning, load the original on the platen glass and start scanning.

If you do not continue scanning, tap End. The scanned data is forwarded to the computer.

Scanned data is forwarded to the computer and attached to an e-mail according to the settings specified in Canon IJ Scan Utility.

For the settings or how to send an e-mail, refer to the mail software's instruction manual.

Remove the original on the platen glass after scanning is complete.

When the program selection screen is displayed:

• If you are using Windows 8.1, Windows 8, Windows 7, or Windows Vista:

The program selection screen may be displayed after touching the Color or Black button. In this case, select Canon IJ Scan Utility and click OK.

• If you are using Windows XP:

The program selection screen may be displayed after touching the Color or Black button for the first time. In this case, specify Canon IJ Scan Utility as the application software to use, select Always

use this program for this action, then click OK. From the next time, Canon IJ Scan Utility is automatically started.

786

Setting Items for Scanning Using the Operation Panel of the

Machine

You can change the scan settings such as the scan size, resolution, or data format.

When the Scan standby screen is displayed, tap Settings to select the setting item. Flick to display setting items, then tap the setting item to display the settings. Tap to specify the setting.

Note

• The scan setting cannot be specified under the following conditions:

• When Auto scan is selected for Doc.type to forward the scanned data to the computer

• When you forward the scanned data to the computer using WSD (one of the network protocols supported in Windows 8.1, Windows 8, Windows 7, and Windows Vista)

• The setting item which cannot be selected is displayed grayed out.

• Some settings cannot be specified in combination with the setting of other setting item, the document type selected for Doc.type, or the scan menu on the screen for selecting to which you save the data. If the setting which cannot be specified in combination is selected, and Error details are displayed on the touch screen. In this case, tap on the upper left on the touch screen to confirm the message, then change the setting.

• The specified scan settings such as the scan size, resolution, and data format are retained even if the machine is turned off.

• When scanning starts in the scan menu that is not available with the specified setting, The specified

function is not available with current settings. is displayed on the touch screen. Change the setting, following the on-screen instructions.

• When you forward the scanned data to the computer or attach the data to an e-mail, you can specify the destination and file name using Canon IJ Scan Utility.

Settings Dialog Box

• If you scan originals from the computer, you can scan with advanced settings. For details on scanning from the computer:

Scanning Photos and Documents

1. Scan size

Select the size of the original.

2. Format

787

Select the data format of the scanned data.

3. Scan res (Scan resolution)

Select the resolution for scanning.

4. Preview

This setting is not available.

5. Reduce show-thru (Reducing show-through)

Characters on the back may show through when scanning a thin document such as a newspaper. Select

ON if characters seem to show through on the scanned document.

This setting item is not available when Photo is selected for Doc.type.

6. Descreen

A printout consists of minute dots to make characters or graphs. Interfering with each dot may result in uneven shades or a striped pattern. Select ON if you notice any uneven shades or a striped pattern on the scanned image.

This setting item is not available when Photo is selected for Doc.type.

Note

• Even if ON is selected for this setting, some moire effects may remain if Unsharp mask is set to

ON. In that case, select OFF for Unsharp mask.

7. Unsharp mask

The outline of small characters or thin objects such as a hair or leaves on a photo can be accentuated.

Select ON if you want to accentuate the outline of the scanned data.

788

Network Scan Settings

You can connect your scanner or printer to a network to share it among multiple computers or scan images into a specified computer.

Important

• Multiple users cannot scan at the same time.

Note

• Complete the network settings of your scanner or printer beforehand from the Setup CD-ROM or by following the instructions on the web page.

• With network connection, scanning takes longer than USB connection.

Complete the following settings to enable scanning over a network.

Specifying Your Scanner or Printer

Use IJ Network Scanner Selector EX to specify the scanner you want to use. By specifying the scanner, you can scan over a network from your computer or the operation panel.

Important

• If the product you want to use is changed with IJ Network Scanner Selector EX, the product used for scanning with IJ Scan Utility changes as well. The product for scanning from the operation panel also changes.

If your scanner or printer is not selected in IJ Scan Utility, check that it is selected with IJ Network

Scanner Selector EX.

Refer to "IJ Network Scanner Selector EX Menu and Setting Screen" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for details.

• To scan from the operation panel, specify your scanner or printer with IJ Network Scanner Selector

EX beforehand.

1. Check that IJ Network Scanner Selector EX is running.

If IJ Network Scanner Selector EX is running, (IJ Network Scanner Selector EX) appears in the notification area on the desktop. Click to check the hidden icons as well.

Note


• Windows 8.1 / Windows 8:




From the Start menu, click All Programs > Canon Utilities > IJ Network Scanner

Selector EX > IJ Network Scanner Selector EX.

789

The icon appears in the notification area on the desktop, and the Scan-from-PC Settings screen appears. In that case, skip ahead to Step 3.

2. In the notification area on the desktop, right-click (IJ Network Scanner Selector EX), then select Settings....

The Scan-from-PC Settings screen appears.

3. Select your scanner or printer from Scanners.

Normally, the MAC address of your scanner or printer is already selected after the network setup. In that case, you do not need to select it again.

Important

• If multiple scanners exist on the network, multiple model names appear. In that case, you can select one scanner per model.

4. Click OK.

Note

• The scanner selected in the Scan-from-PC Settings screen will be automatically selected in the Scanfrom-Operation-Panel Settings screen as well.

Setting for Scanning with IJ Scan Utility

To scan from IJ Scan Utility using a scanner or printer connected to a network, specify your scanner or printer with IJ Network Scanner Selector EX, then follow the steps below to change the connection status between it and the computer.

1.


2. Select "Canon XXX series Network" (where "XXX" is the model name) for Product

Name.

Note

• For USB connection, select "Canon XXX series" (where "XXX" is the model name) for Product

Name.

3. Click Settings... to use another scanner connected to a network.

4. Click (General Settings), then click Select in Product Name.

The Scan-from-PC Settings screen of IJ Network Scanner Selector EX appears.

Select the scanner you want to use and click OK.

5. In the Settings (General Settings) dialog box, click OK.

The IJ Scan Utility main screen reappears. You can scan via a network connection.

790

Setting for Scanning from the Operation Panel

You can make the setting for scanning from the operation panel.

Important

• Set IJ Scan Utility to use your scanner or printer via a network connection beforehand.

Setting for Scanning with IJ Scan Utility

1. Check that IJ Network Scanner Selector EX is running.

If IJ Network Scanner Selector EX is running, (IJ Network Scanner Selector EX) appears in the notification area on the desktop. Click to check the hidden icons as well.

Note






From the Start menu, click All Programs > Canon Utilities > IJ Network Scanner

Selector EX > IJ Network Scanner Selector EX.

The icon appears in the notification area on the desktop, and the Scan-from-PC Settings screen appears. In that case, skip ahead to Step 3.

2. In the notification area on the desktop, right-click (IJ Network Scanner Selector EX), then select Settings....

The Scan-from-PC Settings screen appears.

3. Click Scan-from-Operation-Panel Settings.

The Scan-from-Operation-Panel Settings screen appears.

4. Select your scanner or printer from Scanners and click OK.

Select the MAC address of your scanner or printer.

Note

• When multiple scanners are connected via a network, you can select up to three scanners.

5. In the Scan-from-PC Settings screen, click OK.

Note

• If your scanner or printer does not appear, check the following, click OK to close the screen, then reopen it and try selecting again.

791

• MP Drivers is installed

• Network settings of your scanner or printer is completed after installing the MP Drivers

• Network communication between your scanner or printer and computer is enabled

If your scanner or printer still does not appear, refer to "Problems with Network Communication" for your model from Home of the Online Manual.

792

Selecting a Response to Commands from the Operation Panel

Using IJ Scan Utility

IJ Scan Utility allows you to specify how to respond when scanning from the operation panel.

Note

• The screens for scanning with Auto Scan from the operation panel are used as examples in the following descriptions.

1.




3. Select a scan mode on the (Scanning from the Operation Panel) tab.

793

Note

• Refer to the following for details.






4. Set Scan Options.

5. Specify the file name and other settings in Save Settings.

794

6. Select the application you want to start after scanning in Application Settings.

7. Click OK.

795

The responses will be executed according to the specified settings when you start scanning from the operation panel.

796

Troubleshooting

The Machine Cannot Be Powered On

Printing Does Not Start

Paper Does Not Feed Properly/"No Paper" Error Occurs

Print Results Not Satisfactory

Ink Is Not Ejected

Paper Jams

If an Error Occurs

Cannot Print on the Disc Label

Search Each Function

Problems with Network Communication

Problems with Printing

Problems with Printing Quality

Problems with Scanning

Problems with the Machine

Problems with Installation/Downloading

About Errors/Messages Displayed

If You Cannot Resolve the Problem

797

Problems with Network Communication

Problems with the Machine While Using with Network

Cannot Detect a Machine on a Network

Other Problems with Network

798

Problems with the Machine While Using with Network

The Machine Stopped Working Suddenly

Ink Remaining Level Is Not Displayed on Printer Status Monitor of the Machine

Printing Speed Is Slow

Cannot Use the Card Slot via Network

Cannot Use the Machine on Replacing an Access Point or Changing Its settings

799

The Machine Stopped Working Suddenly

Cannot Communicate with the Machine After the Network Settings Are Changed

Cannot Communicate with the Machine over the Wireless LAN

Cannot Communicate with the Machine Using the Access Point Mode

Cannot Communicate with the Machine over the Wired LAN

Cannot Print, Scan, or Access the Card Slot from a Computer Connected to the Network

Cannot Communicate with the Machine After the Network Settings Are

Changed

It may take a while for the computer to obtain the IP address, or you may need to restart your computer.

Search for the machine again after confirming a valid IP address is assigned to the computer.

Cannot Communicate with the Machine over the Wireless LAN

Check1


Check2

Make sure that the network settings in the machine are identical with those of the access point.

Refer to the instruction manual provided with the access point or contact its manufacturer to check the access point settings, and then modify the machine settings.

How to Set an Encryption Key

Check3

Make sure that the machine is not placed far away from the access point.

The access point is located indoors within the effective range for wireless communication. Locate the machine within 164 ft. / 50 m from the access point.

Check4

Make sure that there is no obstruction.

Wireless communication between different rooms or floors is generally poor. Adjust the location of the devices.

Check5

Make sure that there is no source of radio wave interference in your vicinity.

If a device (e.g. microwave oven) using the same frequency bandwidth as the wireless station is placed nearby, the device may cause interference. Place the wireless station as far away from the interference source as possible.

Check6

Make sure that the network settings of the computer are correct.

For the procedures to connect a network device to the computer and set them up, refer to the instruction manual of your network device or contact its manufacturer.

Check7

Make sure that the radio status is good and adjust the installation positions while monitoring the radio status with IJ Network Tool.

Monitoring Wireless Network Status

Check8

Make sure that a valid wireless channel is used.

800

The wireless channel to be used may be limited depending on wireless network devices installed in the computer. Refer to the instruction manual provided with your computer or your wireless network device to specify the valid wireless channel.

Check9

computer.

Make sure that the channel confirmed in Check 8 can communicate with the

If not, change the channel set to the access point.

Check10

Make sure that the firewall of the security software is disabled.

If the firewall function of your security software is turned on, a message may appear warning that Canon software is attempting to access the network. If the warning message appears, set the security software to always allow access.

If using any programs that switch the network environment, check their settings. Some programs will enable a firewall by default.

Check11

When using a router, connect the machine and computer to the LAN side

(same network segment).

If the problem is not resolved, perform setup with the Setup CD-ROM or perform it according to the instructions on our website.

• For placement:

Make sure that there is no barrier or obstacle between the access point and the machine.

Note

• When you connect the machine to a Windows XP computer by cableless setup:

Follow the procedure below to perform settings of the machine and the computer.

1.

Enable the access point mode of the machine.

2. Right-click the Wireless Network Connections icon on the notification area on the desktop, then click View Available Wireless Networks.

3. Select the network name on the screen displayed, then click Connect.

Select "XXXXXX-MGXXXXseries" ("XX" represents alphanumeric characters.) as the network name.

4. Enter the network key on the screen displayed, then click Connect.

As a default, the serial number of the machine is used as a network key. Confirm the serial number on the rear of the machine.

5. Perform setup with the Setup CD-ROM or perform it according to the instructions on our website.

Cannot Communicate with the Machine Using the Access Point Mode

Check1


Check2

Is Change LAN in LAN settings under Device settings set to Disable LAN,

Wireless LAN active, or Wired LAN active?

Select Access point mode active.

801

Check3

Is the machine selected to connect external communication devices (e.g.

computers, smartphones, or tablets)?

Select an access point name (SSID) specified for the machine as a destination for external communication devices.

Check4

Enter a password if you specify it for the machine.

Check5

Make sure that external communication devices are not placed far away from the machine.

Do not locate external communication devices too far away from the machine.

Check6



Check7



Check8

Are you trying to connect 6 devices or more?

You can connect up to 5 devices using the access point mode.

Cannot Communicate with the Machine over the Wired LAN

Check1


Check2

Make sure that the LAN cable is connected properly.

Make sure that the machine is connected to the router with the LAN cable. If the LAN cable is loose, connect the cable properly.

If the LAN cable is connected to the WAN side of the router, connect the cable to the LAN side of the router.

If the problem is not resolved, perform setup with the Setup CD-ROM or perform it according to the instructions on our website.

Cannot Print, Scan, or Access the Card Slot from a Computer Connected to the Network

Check1


For the procedures to set up the computer, refer to the instruction manual of your computer or contact its manufacturer.

Check2

If the MP Drivers are not installed, install them.

Install the MP Drivers with the Setup CD-ROM or install them from our website.

802

Check3

When using wireless LAN, make sure that access control is not set to the access point.

For the procedures to connect an access point and set it up, refer to the instruction manual of your access point or contact its manufacturer.

Note

• To check the MAC address or the IP address of the computer, see Checking the IP Address or the MAC

Address of the Computer .

803

Ink Remaining Level Is Not Displayed on Printer Status Monitor of the Machine

Use the printer driver with bidirectional communication.

Select Enable bidirectional support in the Ports sheet of the properties dialog box of the printer driver.


804

Printing Speed Is Slow

Check1

The machine may be printing out a large job issued from another computer.

Check2

When using wireless LAN, make sure that the radio status is good and adjust the installation positions while monitoring the radio status with IJ Network Tool.

Monitoring Wireless Network Status

Make sure that there is no barrier or obstacle between the access point and the machine. Wireless communication between different rooms or floors is generally poor. The metal, concrete, or timber including the metallic material, mud wall, or insulator may interrupt a wireless communication. If the machine cannot communicate with the computer over a wireless LAN for the wall material, place the machine and the computer in the same room or floor.

Check3

Make sure that there is no source of interference in your vicinity.


805

Cannot Use the Card Slot via Network

Cannot Mount the Card Slot

Cannot Use the Card Slot

Cannot Access to the Card Slot Because of Some Security Settings on the

Computer

806

Cannot Mount the Card Slot

The Available Drive Letter Cannot Be Selected on the Network Setup of the Card Slot Screen

The Card Slot Cannot Be Mounted with IJ Network Tool

The Available Drive Letter Cannot Be Selected on the Network Setup of the

Card Slot Screen

On this screen, only D to Z can be selected as the network drive for the card slot.

When the card slot has been set up to be used over network, you cannot select a drive letter. If you want to assign another drive letter to the network drive for the card slot, disconnect it from the network, then set up the card slot again using IJ Network Tool.


The Card Slot Cannot Be Mounted with IJ Network Tool

If you cannot mount the card slot to use it over network with IJ Network Tool, follow the procedure below to mount the card slot manually.

Important

• If you change the printer name with Set printer name on Other settings in LAN settings under

Device settings using the operation panel of the machine before you mount the card slot with IJ

Network Tool, you cannot mount the card slot with IJ Network Tool. In this case, follow the procedure below and input the specified printer name in place of the Default Name to mount the card slot manually.

1. Check the Default Name of the machine by selecting Network Information on the View menu of IJ Network Tool.

2. Select items as shown below.

• In Windows 8.1 or Windows 8, select Run from the Start screen. If Run is not displayed on the

Start screen, select the Search charm, then search for "Run".

• In Windows 7 or Windows Vista, click Start > All Programs > Accessories > Run.

• In Windows XP, click Start > Run.

3. Input "\\xxxxxxxxxxxx\", then click OK.

For example, if the Default Name is "0000000847B6\canon_memory", then input only "\

\0000000847B6\".

Note

• If you cannot mount the card slot with the method above, input the IP address of the machine instead of the 12 alphanumeric characters of the Default Name, and try again. For example, "\

\192.168.1.1\canon_memory\". If you mount the card slot with the IP address, you have to remount it whenever the machine's IP address changes.

807

4. When the

Network Drive.

"canon_memory" icon appears, right-click the icon, then select Map

5. Select the drive letter, then click Finish.

808

Cannot Access to the Card Slot Because of Some Security

Settings on the Computer

Check1

Make sure that Read/write attribute in Device user settings under Device

settings is set to Writable from LAN PC.


Check2

Make sure that the memory card is inserted in the card slot.

Check3

To share the printer's card slot with multiple computers over a network, set Set

memory card sharing on Other settings in LAN settings under Device settings to

Enable.

LAN settings

Check4

Disable the Windows Firewall function, or open port 137:139 to allow communication with the machine following the procedure below.

For information on other security software, refer to its instruction manual or manufacturer.

Important

• If you disabled the firewall function, disconnect your network from the Internet. You can do this by configuring your access point or router not to connect to the Internet or WAN.

• To disable the Windows Firewall:

◦ If you are using Windows 8.1, Windows 8, or Windows 7:

1. Select Windows Firewall as shown below.

■ In Windows 8.1 or Windows 8, select Control Panel from the Settings charm on Desktop >

System and Security > Windows Firewall.

■ In Windows 7, click Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Windows Firewall.

2. Click Turn Windows Firewall on or off.

3. Select Turn off Windows Firewall.

◦ If you are using Windows Vista or Windows XP:

1. Select items from the Start menu as shown below.

■ In Windows Vista, click Start > Control Panel > Security > Windows Firewall > Change

settings.

■ In Windows XP, click Start > Control Panel > Security Center > Windows Firewall.

2. Select Off and click OK.

• To open port 137:139:

◦ If you are using Windows 8.1, Windows 8, or Windows 7:

1. Select Windows Firewall as shown below.

■ In Windows 8.1 or Windows 8, select Control Panel from the Settings charm on Desktop >

System and Security > Windows Firewall.

■ In Windows 7, click Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Windows Firewall.

809

2. Click Advanced settings.

If the User Account Control screen is displayed, click Yes.

3. Select and right-click Inbound Rules, then select New Rule.

If you set outbound rules, right-click Outbound Rules.

4. Select Port, then click Next.

5. Select TCP, then select Specific local ports: and input "137", then click Next.

If you open UDP ports, select UDP.

If you open other ports, input the other port's number in Specific local ports:.

6. Select Allow the connection, then click Next.

7. Choose the profile for which this rule applies, then click Next.

8. Input any name and description, then click Finish.

9. Repeat steps 3 to 8 to open the other ports (138TCP, 138UDP, 139TCP, and 139UDP).

10. Confirm that the port names are added on the Inbound Rules screen, then close Windows

Firewall.

◦ If you are using Windows Vista or Windows XP:

1. Select items from the Start menu as shown below.

■ In Windows Vista, click Start > Control Panel > Security > Windows Firewall > Change

settings.

■ In Windows XP, click Start > Control Panel > Security Center > Windows Firewall.

2. Click the Exceptions tab, and click Add port.

3. On the Add a Port screen, input the following information, and click OK.

Name: Input any name for the port.

Port number: Input "137".

Protocol: Select TCP.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3.

On the Add a Port screen, input the same information as you did in step 3 except for selecting

UDP in Protocol.

5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 to open the other ports (138TCP, 138UDP, 139TCP, and 139UDP).

6. Confirm that the port names are added on the Exceptions sheet, and click OK.

Check5

below.

Change the workgroup name to "WORKGROUP" following the procedure

Note

• Changing the workgroup name may have an effect on the network, so you need to ask the administrator to change it.

1. Display the System properties screen as shown below.

• In Windows 8.1 or Windows 8, select the Explorer icon in Taskbar on Desktop, right-click Computer from the list on the left, select Properties, then click Change settings.

• In Windows 7 or Windows Vista, right-click Computer, select Properties, then click Change settings.

• In Windows XP, right-click My Computer, then select Properties.

810

2. Click the Computer Name tab, then click Change.

3. Change the workgroup name to "WORKGROUP", then click OK.

Check6

Disconnect the network drive for the card slot and mount it again following the procedure below.

1. Select Disconnect Network Drive as shown below.

• In Windows 8.1 or Windows 8, select the Explorer icon in Taskbar on Desktop, right-click Computer from the list on the left, and select Disconnect Network Drive.

• In Windows 7 or Windows Vista, right-click Computer, and select Disconnect Network Drive.

• In Windows XP, right-click My Computer, and select Disconnect Network Drive.

2. Select the network drive to disconnect, then click OK.

3. Remount the card slot using IJ Network Tool.


811

Cannot Use the Card Slot

Check1

Is the icon of the card slot displayed?

To use the card slot over network, you have to mount the card slot as the network drive of the computer.

The "canon_memory (\\xxxxxxxxxxxx)" (or "canon_memory" on `xxxxxxxxxxxx') icon with the mapped drive letter appears on Computer (or My Computer).

• "xxxxxxxxxxxx" is a string of 12 alphanumeric characters.

• The icon name may vary depending on the language version of Windows you are using.

If the icon is not displayed, mount the card slot.


Check2

Is the memory card inserted in the card slot?

Make sure that a memory card is inserted in the card slot. If it is not inserted, insert it.


Check3

Is Read/write attribute set to Writable from USB PC?

When Read/write attribute in Device user settings under Device settings is set to Writable from USB PC, you cannot access the memory card over network. Set Read/write attribute to Writable from LAN PC to write data to the memory card over network.


Check4

Is Read/write attribute set to Not writable from PC?

When Read/write attribute in Device user settings under Device settings is set to Not writable from PC, you can read data on the memory card, but cannot write data to it. To write data to the memory card in the card slot over network, set Read/write attribute to Writable from LAN PC.


Check5

To share the printer's card slot with multiple computers over a network, set Set

memory card sharing on Other settings in LAN settings under Device settings to

Enable.

LAN settings

Check6

Is another computer writing data to the memory card?

While one computer is writing a file into the memory card, other computers cannot access the same file. Wait for a while, then try again.

812

Cannot Use the Machine on Replacing an Access Point or

Changing Its settings

When you replace an access point, perform network setup of the machine again.

Perform network setup again with the Setup CD-ROM or perform it again according to the instructions on our website.

If the problem is not resolved, see below.

Cannot Communicate with the Machine After Applying MAC/IP Address Filtering or Entering an

Encryption Key to the Access Point

When Encryption Is Enabled, Cannot Communicate With the Machine After the Encryption Type Was

Switched on the Access Point

Cannot Communicate with the Machine After Applying MAC/IP Address

Filtering or Entering an Encryption Key to the Access Point

Check1

Confirm the access point setting.

Refer to the instruction manual provided with the access point or contact its manufacturer to confirm the access point setting. Make sure that the computer and the access point can communicate with each other under this setting.

Check2

If you are performing MAC address filtering or IP address filtering at the access point, confirm that the MAC address or IP address for both the computer or the network device and the machine are registered.

Check3

If you are using a WEP or WPA/WPA2 key, make sure that the encryption key for the computer or the network device and the machine matches that set to the access point.

Besides the WEP key itself, the key length, key format, the key ID to use, and the authentication method must match among the machine, the access point, and the computer.

Normally, select Auto for the authentication method. If you want to specify the method manually, select Open

System or Shared Key according to the setting of the access point.


When Encryption Is Enabled, Cannot Communicate With the Machine After the Encryption Type Was Switched on the Access Point

If the machine cannot communicate with the computer after the encryption type of the machine was switched, make sure that encryption types for the computer and the access point matches that set to the machine.

Cannot Communicate with the Machine After Applying MAC/IP Address Filtering or Entering an

Encryption Key to the Access Point

813

Cannot Detect a Machine on a Network

Cannot Detect the Machine When Setting up Network Communication

The Machine Cannot Be Detected in the Wireless LAN

The Machine Cannot Be Detected in the Wired LAN

Note

• You cannot use the wireless LAN and the wired LAN at the same time.

814

Cannot Detect the Machine When Setting up Network

Communication

If the machine could not be detected on the network when setting up the network communication, confirm the network settings before redetecting the machine.

Cannot Detect the Machine during Wireless LAN Setup: Check 1

Cannot Detect the Machine during Wired LAN Setup: Check 1

Note

• You can set up the network communication via USB. To set up via USB, select the Set up the network

connection via USB check box on the Check Printer Settings screen and click Next.

815

Cannot Detect the Machine during Wireless LAN Setup: Check 1

Are the machine and network device (router, access point, etc.) turned on?



Make sure that the network device (router, access point, etc.) is turned on.

If the machine or the network device is turned off:

Turn on the machine or the network device.

After turning on the machine or the network device, it may take some time until ready for use. After a while just turning on the machine or the network device, click Redetect on the Check Printer Settings screen.

When the machine is detected, follow the instructions on the screen to continue to set up the network communication.

If the machine and the network device are turned on:

If the machine could not be detected after clicking Redetect even when the machine and the network device are turned on, or when you have turned them on, go to check 2.


816


Is the wireless LAN setting of the machine enabled?

Make sure that the Wi-Fi lamp of the machine is lit.

If the Wi-Fi lamp is off:

The wireless LAN setting of the machine is disabled. Enable the wireless LAN setting of the machine.

After enabling the wireless LAN setting, click Back to Top on the Check Printer Settings screen to try to set up the network communication from the beginning.

If the Wi-Fi lamp is lit:

Go to check 3.


817


Is the machine connected to the access point?

By using the operation panel of the machine, make sure that the machine is connected to the access point.

Select Setup on the HOME screen, then select Device settings > LAN settings > Confirm LAN

settings > WLAN setting list.

Make sure that Connection on the touch screen is set to Active.

If Connection is set to Inactive:

The machine may be placed far away from the access point. Place the machine near the access point temporarily, then click Redetect on the Check Printer Settings screen.


If the machine cannot be detected, the machine is not connected to the access point. Connect the machine to the access point.

Click Back to Top on the Check Printer Settings screen to try to set up the network communication from the beginning.

If Connection is set to Active:

Go to check 4.


818


Are the SSID of the access point connected to your computer and that of the machine the same?

You can confirm the SSID of the access point connected to the machine on the touch screen.


settings > WLAN setting list.

From your computer, you can confirm the SSID of the access point connected to your computer. In

Windows 8.1, Windows 8, Windows 7, or Windows Vista, confirm the SSID from the wireless network communication icon of the notification area on the desktop.

Note

• If the SSID of the access point is not displayed on your computer, check the settings of your computer.

If the SSIDs are different:

Click Back to Top on the Check Printer Settings screen to try to set up the network communication from the beginning. When you try to set up, specify the same SSID of the access point for the machine and your computer.

If the SSIDs are the same:

Go to check 5.


819


Does the firewall function of your security software or operation system for computer interfere with setting up the network communication?

The firewall function of your security software or operation system for computer may limit communications between the machine and your computer. Confirm the setting of firewall function of your security software or operation system or the message appearing on your computer.

If the firewall function interferes with setting up:

• When the message appears on your computer:

If the message warning that Canon software is attempting to access the network appears on the computer, set the security software to allow access.

Then click Redetect on the Check Printer Settings screen.


• When the message does not appear on your computer:

Cancel to set up, then set the security software to allow Canon software* to access the network.

* On the Setup CD-ROM, select win > Driver > DrvSetup, then set the security software to allow the file Setup.exe or Setup64.exe to access the network.

After setting the security software, try to set up the network communication from the beginning.

Note


If there is no problem with the firewall settings:

Go to check 6.


820


Check the settings of the access point.

Check the settings of the access point for the network connection such as IP address filtering, MAC address filtering, or DHCP function.

Make sure that the radio channel of the access point and that assigned to the machine are the same.

For details on how to check the settings of the access point, refer to the instruction manual supplied with the access point or contact its manufacturer.

After checking the settings of the access point, click Redetect on the Check Printer Settings screen.


If the problem is not resolved, select the Set up the network connection via USB check box on the

Check Printer Settings screen and click Next to set up the network communication via USB.

821

Cannot Detect the Machine during Wired LAN Setup: Check 1

Is the LAN cable connected, and are the machine and the router turned on?

Make sure that the LAN cable is connected.



Make sure that the router is turned on.

If the LAN cable is connected and the machine or the network device is turned off:

Turn on the machine or the network device.

After turning on the machine or the network device, it may take some time until ready for use. After a while just turning on the machine or the network device, click Redetect on the Check Printer Settings screen.


If the LAN cable is connected and the machine and the network device are turned on:

If the machine could not be detected after clicking Redetect even when the machine and the network device are turned on, or when you have turned them on, go to check 2.


822


Are the computer and the router configured and can the computer connect to the network?

Make sure that you can view any web pages on your computer.

If you cannot view any web pages:

Click Cancel on the Check Printer Settings screen to cancel to set up the network communication. After that, configure the computer and network device.

For the procedures, refer to the instruction manuals supplied with the computer and network device, or contact their manufacturers.

If you can view any web page after configuring the computer and network device, try to set up the network communication from the beginning.

If you can view any web page:

Go to check 3.


823


Is the wired LAN setting of the machine enabled?

By using the operation panel of the machine, confirm the wired LAN setting of the machine.

Select Setup on the HOME screen, then select Device settings > LAN settings > Change LAN.

Make sure that Wired LAN active is selected on the touch screen.

If Wired LAN active is not selected:

The wired LAN setting of the machine is disabled. Enable the wired LAN setting of the machine.

After enabling the wired LAN setting, click Back to Top on the Check Printer Settings screen to try to set up the network communication from the beginning.

If Wired LAN active is selected:

Go to check 4.


824


Is the machine connected to the router?

By using the operation panel of the machine, make sure that the machine is connected to the router.


settings > LAN setting list.

Make sure that Connection on the touch screen is set to Active.

If Connection is set to Inactive:

The machine is not connected to the router. Connect the machine to the router.

Click Back to Top on the Check Printer Settings screen to try to set up the network communication from the beginning.

If Connection is set to Active:

Go to check 5.


825


Does the firewall function of your security software or operation system for computer interfere with setting up the network communication?

The firewall function of your security software or operation system for computer may limit communications between the machine and your computer. Confirm the setting of firewall function of your security software or operation system or the message appearing on your computer.

If the firewall function interferes with setting up:

• When the message appears on your computer:

If the message warning that Canon software is attempting to access the network appears on the computer, set the security software to allow access.

Then click Redetect on the Check Printer Settings screen.


• When the message does not appear on your computer:

Cancel to set up, then set the security software to allow Canon software* to access the network.

* On the Setup CD-ROM, select win > Driver > DrvSetup, then set the security software to allow the file Setup.exe or Setup64.exe to access the network.

After setting the security software, try to set up the network communication from the beginning.

Note


If there is no problem with the firewall settings:

Go to check 6.


826


Check the settings of the router.

Check the settings of the router for the network connection such as IP address filtering, MAC address filtering, or DHCP function.

For details on how to check the settings of the router, refer to the instruction manual supplied with the router or contact its manufacturer.

After checking the settings of the router, click Redetect on the Check Printer Settings screen.


If the problem is not resolved, select the Set up the network connection via USB check box on the

Check Printer Settings screen and click Next to set up the network communication via USB.

827

The Machine Cannot Be Detected in the Wireless LAN

Check1


Check2

Is Change LAN in LAN settings under Device settings set to Disable LAN?

Check3

When the machine is connected to the computer temporarily using a USB cable, make sure that the USB cable is connected properly.

When you set up the wireless LAN connection or change the wireless LAN settings using IJ Network Tool through USB connection, make sure that the machine is connected to the computer with a USB cable securely.

Connecting the Machine to the Computer Using a USB Cable

Check4

Make sure that the machine setup is completed.

If not, perform setup with the Setup CD-ROM or perform it according to the instructions on our website.

Check5

When using IJ Network Tool, click Update to search for the machine again.

Canon IJ Network Tool Screen

Check6

When searching for a machine over a network, make sure that the machine is associated with the port.

When No Driver is displayed under Name in IJ Network Tool, there is no association. Select Associate Port on the Settings menu, then associate the port with the machine.


Check7

Make sure that the network settings in the machine are identical with those of the access point.

Refer to the instruction manual provided with the access point or contact its manufacturer to check the access point settings, and then modify the machine settings.


Check8



Check9

Make sure that the machine is not placed far away from the access point.

The access point is located indoors within the effective range for wireless communication. Locate the machine within 164 ft. / 50 m from the access point.

Check10



Check11


Make sure that the computer can communicate with the machine and the access point over the wireless LAN.

828

Check12

Make sure that Enable bidirectional support is selected in the Ports sheet of the properties dialog box of the printer driver.

Check13

Make sure that the firewall of the security software is disabled.

If the firewall function of your security software is turned on, a message may appear warning that Canon software is attempting to access the network. If the warning message appears, set the security software to always allow access.

If using any programs that switch the network environment, check their settings. Some programs will enable a firewall by default.

Check14

When using a router, connect the machine and computer to the LAN side

(same network segment).

If the problem is not resolved, perform setup again with the Setup CD-ROM or perform it according to the instructions on our website.

829

The Machine Cannot Be Detected in the Wired LAN

Check1


Check2

Is Change LAN in LAN settings under Device settings set to Disable LAN?

LAN settings

Check3

Make sure that the LAN cable is connected properly.

Make sure that the machine is connected to the router with the LAN cable. If the LAN cable is loose, connect the cable properly.

If the LAN cable is connected to the WAN side of the router, connect the cable to the LAN side of the router.

830

Other Problems with Network

Forgot an Access Point Name, SSID, or a Network Key

The Message Is Displayed on the Computer Screen During Setup

The Administrator Password Set to the Machine Was Forgotten

Checking Information about the Network

Packets Are Sent Steadily

Date Modified of Files Changes When Saving Them on the Memory Card over

Network

How to Restore the Machine's Network Settings to Factory Default

831

Forgot an Access Point Name, SSID, or a Network Key

Cannot Connect with an Access Point to Which a WEP or WPA/WPA2 Key Is Set (You Forgot the WEP or

WPA/WPA2 Key)


Cannot Connect with an Access Point to Which a WEP or WPA/WPA2 Key

Is Set (You Forgot the WEP or WPA/WPA2 Key)

For information on how to set up the access point, refer to the instruction manual provided with the access point or contact its manufacturer. Make sure that the computer and the access point can communicate with each other.

After that, set up the machine to match the settings of the access point using IJ Network Tool.

How to Set an Encryption Key

For information on how to set up the access point, refer to the instruction manual provided with the access point or contact its manufacturer. Make sure that the computer and the access point can communicate with each other.

After that, set up the machine to match the settings of the access point using IJ Network Tool.

• When using WEP

The key length, key format, the key to use (one of 1 to 4), and the authentication method must match among the access point, the machine, and the computer.

In order to communicate with an access point that uses automatically generated WEP keys, you must configure the machine to use the key generated by the access point by entering it in hexadecimal format.

Normally, select Auto for the authentication method. Otherwise, select Open System or Shared Key according to the setting of the access point.

When the WEP Details screen appears after clicking Set on the Search screen, follow the on-screen instructions and set the key length, the key format, the key number, and the authentication to enter a

WEP key.

For details, see Changing the WEP Detailed Settings .

• When using WPA/WPA2

The authentication method, passphrase, and dynamic encryption type must match on the access point, the machine, and the computer.

Enter the passphrase configured on the access point (a sequence of between 8 and 63 alphanumeric characters, or a 64-character hexadecimal number).

Either TKIP (basic encryption) or AES (secure encryption) is selected automatically for the dynamic encryption method.

For details, see Changing the WPA/WPA2 Detailed Settings .

Note

• This machine supports WPA/WPA2-PSK (WPA/WPA2-Personal) and WPA2-PSK (WPA2-

Personal).

832

The Message Is Displayed on the Computer Screen During Setup

The Enter Password Screen Is Displayed During Setup

The Screen for Setting the Encryption Is Displayed After Selecting the Access Point in the Search Screen

"You are connecting the machine to the non encrypted wireless network" Is Displayed

The Enter Password Screen Is Displayed During Setup

The following screen is displayed if an administrator password is set to the machine which has already been set up to use via a network.

Enter the administrator password you have set.

Note

• An administrator password is already specified for the machine at the time of purchase.

For details:

About the Administrator Password

For improving security, it is recommended to change the administrator password.

Changing the Settings in the Admin Password Sheet

The Screen for Setting the Encryption Is Displayed After Selecting the

Access Point in the Search Screen

This screen is displayed automatically if the selected access point is encrypted. In this case, configure the details to use the same encryption settings set to the access point.

For information on the encryption settings, see Changing the Settings in the Wireless LAN Sheet .

"You are connecting the machine to the non encrypted wireless network" Is

Displayed

Security is not configured on the access point. The machine can still be used, so continue the setup procedure to complete it.

Important


833

The Administrator Password Set to the Machine Was Forgotten

Initialize the machine settings.

Select Reset all, then the administrator password reverts to the default.

Reset setting

After initializing the machine settings, perform setup with the Setup CD-ROM or perform it according to the instructions on our website.

834

Checking Information about the Network

Checking the IP Address or the MAC Address of the Machine

Checking the IP Address or the MAC Address of the Computer

Checking If the Computer and the Machine, or Computer and the Access Point Can Communicate

Checking the Network Setting Information

Checking the IP Address or the MAC Address of the Machine

To check the IP address or the MAC address of the machine, display the network setting information using the operation panel of the machine or print out the network setting information of the machine.

LAN settings


To display the network setting information using IJ Network Tool, select Network Information on the

View menu.

Canon IJ Network Tool Screen

Checking the IP Address or the MAC Address of the Computer

To check the IP address or MAC address assigned to the computer, follow the procedure below.

1. Select Command Prompt as shown below.

• In Windows 8.1 or Windows 8, select Command Prompt from the Start screen. If Command

Prompt is not displayed on the Start screen, select the Search charm, then search for

"Command Prompt".

• In Windows 7, Windows Vista, or Windows XP, click Start > All Programs > Accessories >

Command Prompt.

2. Enter "ipconfig/all" and press the Enter key.

The IP addresses and the MAC addresses of the network devices installed on your computer are displayed. When the network device is not connected to the network, the IP address is not displayed.

Checking If the Computer and the Machine, or Computer and the Access

Point Can Communicate

To check that communication is available, perform the ping test.

1. Select Command Prompt as shown below.

• In Windows 8.1 or Windows 8, select Command Prompt from the Start screen. If Command

Prompt is not displayed on the Start screen, select the Search charm, then search for

"Command Prompt".

• In Windows 7, Windows Vista, or Windows XP, click Start > All Programs > Accessories >

Command Prompt.

835

2. Type the ping command and the IP address of the target machine or the target access point, and then press the Enter key.

ping XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

"XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX" is the IP address of the target device.

If the communication is available, a message such as the following is displayed.

Reply from XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX: bytes=32 time=10ms TTL=255

When Request timed out is displayed, the communication is not available.

Checking the Network Setting Information

To check the IP address or the MAC address of the machine, display the network setting information using the operation panel of the machine or print out the network setting information of the machine.

LAN settings


836

Packets Are Sent Steadily

While IJ Network Scanner Selector EX is enabled, it periodically transmits packets to check whether it can communicate with the machine over the network. When using the computer in a network environment other than the one used to set up the machine, disable IJ Network Scanner Selector EX.

To disable IJ Network Scanner Selector EX, right-click the icon on the notification area on the desktop, then select Disable Canon IJ Network Scanner Selector EX.

837

Date Modified of Files Changes When Saving Them on the Memory

Card over Network

Check

Does IJ Network Scanner Selector EX run?

If you write files to a memory card over a network when IJ Network Scanner Selector EX is not running, the Date

Modified of the files will change. Make sure to start up IJ Network Scanner Selector EX before you write files to a memory card over the network.

838

How to Restore the Machine's Network Settings to Factory Default

Important

• Note that initialization erases all network settings on the machine, and printing or scanning operation from a computer over network may become impossible. To use the machine over network, perform setup with the Setup CD-ROM or perform it according to the instructions on our website.

Initialize the network setting using the operation panel of the machine.

Reset setting

839

Problems with Printing


Paper Jams



Cannot Print Properly with Automatic Duplex Printing

Copying/Printing Stops Before It Is Completed

840


Check1

Make sure that the power plug is securely plugged in, then touch the ON button to turn the machine on.

While the POWER lamp is flashing, the machine is initializing. Wait until the POWER lamp stops flashing and remains lit.

Note

• When printing large data such as a photo or graphics, it may take longer to start printing. While the

POWER lamp is flashing, the computer is processing data and sending it to the machine. Wait until printing starts.

Check2

Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer properly.

When the machine is connected to your computer with a USB cable, make sure that the USB cable is securely plugged in to the machine and the computer, then check the followings:

• If you are using a relay device such as a USB hub, disconnect it, connect the machine directly to the computer, and try printing again. If printing starts normally, there is a problem with the relay device. Consult the reseller of the relay device for details.

• There could also be a problem with the USB cable. Replace the USB cable and try printing again.

When you use the machine over LAN, make sure that the machine is connected to the network with a LAN cable or is set up correctly.

Check3

Is the access point mode enabled?

When you print using a mode other than the access point mode, disable the access point mode in advance.

Check4

Are the paper settings identical with those registered to the cassette?

When the paper settings are not identical with those registered to the cassette, an error message is displayed.

Resolve the error according to the instructions on the touch screen.

Paper Setting for Printing

Note

• You can disable the message which prevents misprinting.

• To change the setting using the operation panel:

Cassette settings

• To change the setting using the printer driver:


Check5

If you are printing from the computer and there are any unnecessary print jobs, delete them.

Deleting the Undesired Print Job

Check6

Make sure that the disc tray guide is closed.

If the disc tray guide is opened, close the disc tray guide and tap OK on the touch screen.

841

Check7

Are the Media Type and the Page Size settings of the printer driver correct?

When using non Canon genuine specialty paper, be sure to select the proper media type or page size correctly in the printer driver.

Confirm the settings following the procedure below, and try printing again.

1. Make sure that either A4 (Art Paper Margin 35) or Letter (Art Paper Margin 35) is selected in the application.

If the page size you want to use is not displayed, open the File menu of the application and select Print.

Then make sure that the name of your printer is selected.

2. Make sure that the paper selected for Media Type in the Main sheet in the printer driver matches the paper loaded in the machine.

3. Make sure that the Page Size setting in the Page Setup sheet in the printer driver is the same as the size set in step 1.

Check8

Make sure that your machine's name is selected in the Print dialog box.

The machine will not print properly if you are using a printer driver for a different printer.

Make sure that "Canon XXX series Printer" (where "XXX" is your machine's name) is selected in the Print dialog box.

Note

• To make the machine the one selected by default, select Set as Default Printer.

Check9

Configure the printer port appropriately.

Make sure that the printer port is configured appropriately.

1. Log on as a user account with administrator privilege.


• In Windows 8.1 or Windows 8, select Control Panel from the Settings charm on Desktop > Hardware

and Sound > Devices and Printers.

• In Windows 7, select Devices and Printers from the Start menu.

• In Windows Vista, select the Start menu > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers.

• In Windows XP, select the Start menu > Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware > Printers

and Faxes.

3. Open the properties of the printer driver for the machine.

• In Windows 8.1, Windows 8, or Windows 7, right-click the "Canon XXX series Printer" icon (where

"XXX" is your machine's name), then select Printer properties.

• In Windows Vista or Windows XP, right-click the "Canon XXX series Printer" icon (where "XXX" is your machine's name), then select Properties.

4. Click the Ports tab to confirm the port settings.

Make sure that a port named "USBnnn" (where "n" is a number) with "Canon XXX series Printer" appearing in the Printer column is selected for Print to the following port(s).

Note

• When the machine is used over LAN, the port name of the machine is displayed as

"CNBJNP_xxxxxxxxxx". "xxxxxxxxxx" is the character string generated from the MAC address or a character string specified by the user when setting up the machine.

842

• If the setting is incorrect:

Reinstall the MP Drivers with the Setup CD-ROM or install them from our website.

• Printing does not start even though the machine is connected to the computer using a USB cable and the port named "USBnnn" is selected:

In Windows 8.1 or Windows 8, select My Printer on the Start screen to start My Printer. If My Printer is not displayed on the Start screen, select the Search charm, then search for "My Printer".

Set the correct printer port on Diagnose and Repair Printer. Follow the on-screen instructions to set the correct printer port, then select your machine's name.

In Windows 7, Windows Vista, or Windows XP, click Start and select All programs, Canon Utilities,

Canon My Printer, Canon My Printer, then select Diagnose and Repair Printer. Follow the onscreen instructions to set the correct printer port, then select your machine's name.

If the problem is not resolved, reinstall the MP Drivers with the Setup CD-ROM or install them from our website.

• Printing does not start even though the port named "CNBJNP_xxxxxxxxxx" is selected when the machine is used over LAN:

Launch IJ Network Tool, and select "CNBJNP_xxxxxxxxxx" as you confirmed in step 4, then associate the port with the printer using Associate Port in the Settings menu.


Check10

Is the size of the print data extremely large?

Click Print Options on the Page Setup sheet on the printer driver. Then, set Prevention of Print Data Loss in the displayed dialog to On.

* When On is selected for Prevention of Print Data Loss, print quality may be reduced.

Check11

Restart your computer if you are printing from the computer.

843

Paper Jams

When paper is jammed, a troubleshooting message is displayed automatically. Take the appropriate action described in the message.

Watch the movie

• When a Support Code and a message are displayed on the computer screen:

• When a Support Code and a message are displayed on the touch screen:

For details on how to remove the jammed paper, refer to Support Code List (When Paper Is Jammed) .

Note

• You can confirm the actions against errors with Support Codes on your computer or on the touch screen by searching a Support Code.

Click Here to Search

844


Check1

Make sure that paper is loaded.

Loading Paper

Check2

Make sure of the following when you load paper.

• When loading two or more sheets of paper, flip through the paper before loading.

• When loading two or more sheets of paper, align the edges of the sheets before loading.

• When loading two or more sheets of paper, make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the paper load limit.

However, proper feeding of paper may not be possible at this maximum capacity depending on the type of paper or environmental conditions (either very high or low temperature and humidity). In such cases, reduce the sheets of paper you load at a time to less than half of the paper load limit.

• Always load the paper in portrait orientation, regardless of the printing orientation.

Important

• When loading paper in the cassette, slide the paper guide on the front side to align with the corresponding mark of page size. Load the paper with the print side facing DOWN, load the paper stack in the center of the cassette, then slide the paper guides to align with the both edges of the paper stack.

Loading Paper

Check3

Check to see if the paper you are printing on is not too thick or curled.

Media Types You Cannot Use

Check4

Make sure of the following when you load Hagakis or envelopes.

• If a Hagaki is curled, it may not feed properly even though the paper stack does not exceed the paper load limit.

Load Hagakis with a zip code column toward the far end of the cassette 1.

• When printing on envelopes, refer to Loading Paper , and prepare the envelopes before printing.

Once you have prepared the envelopes, load them in portrait orientation. If the envelopes are placed in landscape orientation, they will not feed properly.

Check5

Confirm that the media type and the paper size settings correspond with the loaded paper.

Check6

Make sure that the disc tray guide is closed completely.

Paper does not feed properly if the disc tray guide is even slightly open.


845

Check7

Clean the paper feed roller.

Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller

Note

• Cleaning the paper feed roller will wear the roller, so perform this procedure only when necessary.

Check8

If two or more sheets of paper feed from the cassette at once, clean the inside of the cassette.

For information on cleaning the inside of the cassette, refer to Cleaning the Pad in the Cassette .

Check9

Are the transport unit cover and the rear cover attached properly?

Refer to Rear View for the position of the rear cover.

If you cannot remove the paper or the paper tears inside the machine, or if the paper jam error continues after removing the paper, contact the service center.

846


Disc Label Printing Does Not Start

Disc Tray Does Not Feed Properly

Disc Tray Jammed

Disc Label Printing Does Not Start

Check1

Is the disc tray placed properly?

Open the disc tray guide, properly place the disc tray again, then tap OK on the touch screen to dismiss the error.

Use the disc tray supplied with this machine ("J" is on the upper side).

For details on how to place the disc tray, refer to Placing a Printable Disc .

Check2

Is the printable disc placed on the disc tray?

Place the printable disc on the disc tray properly, then tap OK on the touch screen to dismiss the error.

Use the disc tray supplied with this machine ("J" is on the upper side).


Check3

If disc label printing stops before it is complete, try the operation again.

If a certain period of time has elapsed while disc label printing is in progress, the machine stops initializing.

The machine resumes initializing by tapping OK on the touch screen.

Try the operation again following the on-screen instructions.

Disc Tray Does Not Feed Properly

Check1

Is the disc tray placed properly?

Open the disc tray guide, properly place the disc tray again, then tap OK on the touch screen to dismiss the error.

Make sure that you are using the disc tray supplied with the machine ("J" is on the upper side).


Check2

Unrecognizable printable disc may be placed.

Canon recommends that you use printable discs specially processed to be printed on by an inkjet printer.

Disc Tray Jammed

Pull out the disc tray gently.

If the disc tray cannot be pulled out, turn the machine off, then turn the machine back on again. The disc tray will automatically be ejected.

When the disc tray is pulled out, place the disc tray ("J" is on the upper side) again, then retry printing.

Place the printable disc properly referring to Placing a Printable Disc .

If the disc tray is still jammed, check if there is a problem with the printable disc.

847

Disc Tray Does Not Feed Properly

848

Cannot Print Properly with Automatic Duplex Printing

Check1

Is the setting for automatic duplex printing selected?

Make sure that the Duplex Printing and Automatic check boxes are selected on the Page Setup sheet in the printer driver setup window.

Duplex Printing

Check2

printing.

Make sure that the actual size of the paper is suitable for automatic duplex

The sizes of media suitable for automatic duplex printing are A4, Letter, A5, B5, and Hagaki.

Load paper of suitable size, then tap OK on the touch screen.

Check3

Make sure that the paper size setting is correct.

Make sure that the paper size setting matches the actual size of the paper with a size suitable for automatic duplex printing.

First, check the paper size setting in the application software you are printing from.

Then, check the Page Size setting on the Page Setup sheet in the printer driver setup window.

Note

• Duplex printing may not be available depending on the version of the application software.

Check4

Make sure that the media type setting is correct.

Make sure that the media type setting matches the actual size of the paper with a size suitable for automatic duplex printing.

Make sure that the type of loaded paper is suitable for automatic duplex printing on the Main sheet in the printer driver setup window.

Note

• To switch to manual duplex printing, follow the procedure below.

Open the printer driver setup window, clear the Automatic check box on the Page Setup sheet, and reprint.

When performing manual duplex printing, note the following.

• If you are printing three or more pages of a document with manual duplex printing, one side of all sheets of paper will be printed first. Turn over the paper and reload the paper in the machine, and then the reverse side of all sheets of paper will be printed. Be careful not to change the order of paper in the stack.

• The procedure for reversing the paper varies depending on the staple side and printing orientation.

Follow the on-screen instructions.

849

Copying/Printing Stops Before It Is Completed

Check1

Is the disc tray guide opened while printing on paper?

Close the disc tray guide, then tap OK on the touch screen.

Check2

Is the paper loaded?

Make sure that paper is loaded.

If the machine has run out of paper, load paper.

Check3

Do the printing documents have lots of photographs or illustrations?

As printing large data such as photos or graphics takes time for the machine and the computer to process, the machine may appear to have stopped operating.

In addition, when printing data that uses a large amount of ink continuously on plain paper, the machine may pause temporarily. In either case, wait until the process is complete.

Note

• If you are printing a document with a large printing area or printing multiple copies of a document, printing may pause to allow the ink to dry.

Check4

Has the machine been printing continuously for a long period?

If the machine has been printing continuously for a long time, the print head or other parts around it may overheat. The machine may stop printing at a line break for a period of time and then resume printing.

In this case, wait for a while without operation. If the printing still does not resume, interrupt your print session at a convenient time and turn the machine off for at least 15 minutes.

Caution

• The print head and the surrounding area can become extremely hot inside the machine. Never touch the print head or nearby components.

850

Problems with Printing Quality



851


If the print result is not satisfactory due to white streaks, misaligned lines, or uneven colors, confirm the paper and print quality settings first.

Check1

paper?

Do the page size and media type settings match the size and type of the loaded

When these settings are incorrect, you cannot obtain a proper print result.

If you are printing a photograph or an illustration, incorrect paper type settings may reduce the quality of the printout color.

Also, if you print with an incorrect paper type setting, the printed surface may be scratched.

In borderless printing, uneven coloring may occur depending on the combination of the paper type setting and the loaded paper.

The method of confirming the paper and print quality settings differs depending on what you do with your machine.

To copy by operating the machine Confirm by using the operation panel on the machine.


To copy photo by operating the machine Confirm by using the operation panel on the machine.

Copying Photos

To print from your memory card by operating the machine

Confirm by using the operation panel on the machine.


To print from a PictBridge (Wireless

LAN) compliant device

To print from a computer

Confirm by using your PictBridge (Wireless LAN) compliant device.

About PictBridge (Wireless LAN) Print Settings

Confirm by using the operation panel on the machine.


Confirm by using the printer driver.

Printing with Easy Setup

Check2

Check 1.

Make sure that the appropriate print quality is selected referring to the table in

Select a print quality option suitable for the paper and image for printing. If you notice blurs or uneven colors, increase the print quality setting and try printing again.

Note

• When printing from a PictBridge (Wireless LAN) compliant device, set the print quality setting by using the operation panel on the machine.

You cannot make this setting from a PictBridge (Wireless LAN) compliant device.

Check3

If the problem is not resolved, there may be other causes.

See also the sections below:

Cannot Print to End of Job

852

Part of the Page Is Not Printed

No Printing Results/Printing Is Blurred/Colors Are Wrong/White Streaks

Lines Are Misaligned

Line Does Not Print or Prints Partially

Image Does Not Print or Prints Partially

Printed Paper Curls or Has Ink Blots

Paper Is Smudged/Printed Surface Is Scratched

Back of the Paper Is Smudged

Vertical Lines Are Printed on the Sides of the Printout

Colors Are Uneven or Streaked

853

Cannot Print to End of Job

Check1

Select the setting not to compress the printing data.

If you select the setting not to compress the printing data with an application software you are using, the printing result may be improved.

Click Print Options on the Page Setup sheet on the printer driver. Select the Do not allow application

software to compress print data check box, then click OK.

* Deselect the check box after printing is complete.

Check2




Check3

Is the space of your computer's hard disk sufficient?

Delete unnecessary files to free disk space.

854

Part of the Page Is Not Printed

Check

When performing automatic duplex printing, the reason below is possible.

When performing automatic duplex printing, the printable area at the top of the page will be 0.08 inches / 2 mm narrower than the usual.

For this reason, the bottom of the page may not be printed. To prevent this, select the setting to reduce printing from the printer driver.

Important

• Reduced printing may affect the layout depending on your document.

Apply the print setting specified with the application software if the software has a enlarge/reduce printing function.

1. Open the printer driver setup window.


2. Check the Duplex Printing check box in the Page Setup sheet.

3. Click Print Area Setup, then select Use reduced printing.

855

No Printing Results/Printing Is Blurred/Colors Are Wrong/White

Streaks

No Printing Results

Printing Is Blurred

Colors Are Wrong

White Streaks

Watch the movie

856

Check1

Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings?

Print Results Not Satisfactory

Check2

Check the status of ink tanks. Replace the ink tank if the ink has run out.


Check3

Is the orange tape or protective film remaining?

Make sure that all of the protective film is peeled off and the Y-shape air hole is exposed, as illustrated in (A).

If the orange tape is left as in (B), pull the orange tape and remove it.

Check4

Print the Nozzle Check Pattern and perform any necessary maintenance operations such as Print Head Cleaning.

Print the Nozzle Check Pattern to determine whether the ink ejects properly from the print head nozzles.

Refer to When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect for the Nozzle Check Pattern printing, Print Head

Cleaning, and Print Head Deep Cleaning.

• If the Nozzle Check Pattern is not printed correctly:

Check to see if a particular color's ink tank is not empty.

If the Nozzle Check Pattern is not printed correctly though ink is sufficient, perform the Print Head Cleaning and try printing the Nozzle Check Pattern again.

• If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Cleaning twice:

Perform the Print Head Deep Cleaning.

If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning, turn off the machine and perform another Print Head Deep Cleaning after 24 hours.

• If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning twice:

If Print Head Deep Cleaning does not resolve the problem, the print head may be damaged. Contact the service center.

Check5

When using paper with one printable surface, make sure that the paper is loaded with the printable side facing down.

Printing on the wrong side of such paper may cause unclear prints or prints with reduced quality.

Load paper with the printable side facing down.

Refer to the instruction manual supplied with the paper for detailed information on the printable side.

857

• When copying, see also the sections below:

Check6

Is the platen glass dirty?

Clean the platen glass.

Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document Cover

Check7

Make sure that the original is properly loaded on the platen glass.

Loading Originals

Check8

glass?

Is the original loaded with the side to be copied facing down on the platen

Check9

Did you copy a printout done by this machine?

If you use a printout done by this machine as the original, print quality may be reduced depending on the condition of the original.

Print from the machine directly, or reprint from the computer if you can reprint from it.

858

Lines Are Misaligned

Check1



Check2

Perform Print Head Alignment.

If printed lines are misaligned or print results are otherwise unsatisfactory, adjust the print head position.


Note

• If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Alignment, perform Print Head Alignment manually referring to Aligning the Print Head Manually .

Check3

Increase the print quality and try printing again.

Increasing the print quality on the operation panel of the machine or in the printer driver may improve the print result.

859

Line Does Not Print or Prints Partially

Check1

Is the Page Layout Printing performed or the Binding margin function used?

When the Page Layout Printing or Binding margin function is being used, thin lines may not be printed. Try thickening the lines in the document.

Check2




860

Image Does Not Print or Prints Partially

Check1

Select the setting not to compress the printing data.

If you select the setting not to compress the printing data with an application software you are using, the printing result may be improved.

Click Print Options on the Page Setup sheet on the printer driver. Select the Do not allow application

software to compress print data check box, then click OK.

* Deselect the check box after printing is complete.

Check2




861

Printed Paper Curls or Has Ink Blots

Printed Paper Has Ink Blots

Printed Paper Curls

Check1



Check2

If the intensity is set high, reduce the intensity setting and try printing again.

If you are using plain paper to print images with high intensity, the paper may absorb too much ink and become wavy, causing paper abrasion.

• When printing from your computer

You can confirm the intensity using the printer driver.

Adjusting Intensity

• When copying


Check3

Is Photo Paper used for printing photographs?

When printing data with high color saturation such as photographs or images in deep color, we recommend using Photo Paper Plus Glossy II or other Canon speciality paper.


862

Paper Is Smudged/Printed Surface Is Scratched

Paper Is Smudged

The Edges of Paper Are Smudged Printed Surface Is Smudged

Printed Surface Is Scratched

Check1



Check2

Is the appropriate type of paper used? Check the followings:

• Check to see if the paper you are printing on is suitable for your printing purpose.


• When performing Borderless Printing, make sure that the paper you are using is suitable for Borderless

Printing.

If the paper you are using is not suitable for Borderless Printing, the print quality may be reduced at the top and bottom edges of the paper.

Printing Area

Check3

Load the paper after correcting its curl.

When using Photo Paper Plus Semi-gloss, even if the sheet is curled, load one sheet at a time as it is. If you roll up this paper to flatten, this may cause cracks on the surface of the paper and reduce the print quality.

We recommend putting unused paper back into the package and keeping it on a level surface.

• For Plain Paper

Turn the paper over and reload it to print on the other side.

• For Other Paper

If the curl on the four corners of the paper is more than 0.1 inch / 3 mm (A) in height, the paper may be smudged or may not be fed properly. In such cases, follow the procedure described below to correct the paper curl.

863

1. Roll up the paper in the opposite direction to the paper curl as shown below.

2. Check that the paper is now flat.

We recommend printing curl-corrected paper one sheet at a time.

Note

• Depending on the media type, the paper may be smudged or may not be fed properly even if it is not curled inward. In such cases, follow the procedure described below to curl the paper outward within 0.1

inch / 3 mm (B) in height before printing. This may improve the print result.

(C) Printing side

We recommend printing paper that has been curled outward one sheet at a time.

Check4

Adjust the setting to prevent paper abrasion.

Adjusting the setting to prevent paper abrasion will widen the clearance between the print head and the loaded paper. If you notice abrasion even with the media type set correctly to match the loaded paper, set the machine to prevent paper abrasion by using the operation panel or the computer.

Print speed may be reduced if you apply the setting to prevent paper abrasion setting.

* Readjust the setting not to prevent paper abrasion once printing is complete. If not, this setting remains enabled for all subsequent print jobs.

• To set by using the operation panel

Touch the HOME button, select Setup, Device settings, and Print settings in this order, and then set

Prevent paper abrasion to ON.

Changing the Machine Settings Using the Operation Panel

• To set by using your computer

Open the printer driver setup window, and in Custom Settings in the Maintenance sheet, select the

Prevent paper abrasion check box, and then click OK.

To open the printer driver setup window, see How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window .

Check5

If the intensity is set high, reduce the intensity setting and try printing again.

864

If you are using plain paper to print images with high intensity, the paper may absorb too much ink and become wavy, causing paper abrasion.

• When printing from your computer

1. Reduce the intensity setting in the printer driver and try printing again.



3. On the Main sheet, select Manual for Color/Intensity, and then click Set....

4. Drag the Intensity slide bar on the Color Adjustment sheet to adjust the intensity.

• When copying


Check6

Is printing performed beyond the recommended printing area?

If you are printing beyond the recommended printing area of your printing paper, the lower edge of the paper may become stained with ink.

Resize your original document in your application software.

Printing Area

Check7

Is the platen glass dirty?

Clean the platen glass.

Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document Cover

Check8

Is the inside of the machine dirty?

When performing duplex printing, the inside of the machine may become stained with ink, causing the printout to become smudged.

Perform the Bottom Plate Cleaning to clean the inside of the machine.

Cleaning the Inside of the Machine (Bottom Plate Cleaning)

Note

• To prevent the inside of the machine from stains, set the paper size correctly.

Check9

Set the time to dry the printed surface longer.

Doing so gives the printed surface enough time to dry so that paper smudged and scratched are prevented.

1. Make sure that the machine is turned on.



3. Click the Maintenance tab and then Custom Settings.

4. Drag the Ink Drying Wait Time slide bar to set the wait time, and then click OK.

5. Confirm the message and click OK.

865

Back of the Paper Is Smudged

Check1



Check2

Is the paper feed roller dirty?

Clean the paper feed roller.

Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller

Note

• Cleaning the paper feed roller will wear the roller, so perform this procedure only when necessary.

Check3

Perform the Bottom Plate Cleaning to clean the inside of the machine.

Cleaning the Inside of the Machine (Bottom Plate Cleaning)

Note

• When performing borderless printing, duplex printing, or too much printing, the inside may become stained with ink.

866

Vertical Lines Are Printed on the Sides of the Printout

Check

Is the size of the loaded paper correct?

The vertical lines may be printed in the margin if the size of the loaded paper is larger than that you have specified.

Set the paper size correctly according to the paper you loaded.


Note

• The direction of the vertical line pattern may vary depending on the image data or the print setting.

• This machine performs automatic cleaning when necessary to keep printouts clean. A small amount of ink is ejected for cleaning.

Although ink is usually ejected on the ink absorber, it may be ejected on the paper if you load paper larger than that you have specified.

867

Colors Are Uneven or Streaked

Colors Are Uneven

Colors Are Streaked

Watch the movie

Check1



Check2

Print the Nozzle Check Pattern and perform any necessary maintenance operations such as Print Head Cleaning.










868



Check3

Perform Print Head Alignment.


Note

• If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Alignment, perform Print Head Alignment manually referring to Aligning the Print Head Manually .

869


Check1

Has the ink run out?

Open the operation panel, then check the status of ink lamp.

Checking the Ink Status

Check2

Is the orange tape or protective film remaining?

Make sure that all of the protective film is peeled off and the Y-shape air hole is exposed, as illustrated in (A).

If the orange tape is left as in (B), pull the orange tape and remove it.

Check3

Are the print head nozzles clogged?












870



Scan Results Not Satisfactory

Software Problems

871


Scanner Does Not Work

ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Does Not Start

Error Message Appears and the ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screen Does Not

Appear

Cannot Scan Multiple Items at One Time

Cannot Scan Properly with Auto Scan

Slow Scanning Speed

"There is not enough memory." Message Is Displayed

Computer Stops Operating during Scanning

Scanner Does Not Work after Upgrading Windows

Scanned Image Does Not Open

872

Scanner Does Not Work

Check 1

Make sure that your scanner or printer is turned on.

Check 2

Connect the USB cable to a different USB port on the computer.

Check 3

If the USB cable is connected to a USB hub, remove it from the USB hub and connect it to a USB port on the computer.

Check 4

Restart the computer.

873

ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Does Not Start

Check 1

Make sure that MP Drivers is installed.

If not installed, install MP Drivers from the Setup CD-ROM or the web page.

Check 2

Select your scanner or printer on the application's menu.

Important

• If your scanner or printer name is displayed multiple times, select the one that does not include WIA.

Note

• The operation may differ depending on the application.

• Use the WIA driver when scanning from a WIA-compliant application.

Scanning with WIA Driver

Check 3

Make sure that the application supports TWAIN.

You cannot start ScanGear (scanner driver) from applications not supporting TWAIN.

Check 4

Scan and save images with IJ Scan Utility and open the files in your application.

874

Error Message Appears and the ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screen

Does Not Appear

Check 1

Make sure that your scanner or printer is turned on.

Check 2

Turn off your scanner or printer, then reconnect the USB cable and replug the power cord.

Check 3

Connect the USB cable to a different USB port on the computer.

Check 4

If the USB cable is connected to a USB hub, remove it from the USB hub and connect it to a USB port on the computer.

Check 5

Make sure that MP Drivers is installed.

If not installed, install MP Drivers from the Setup CD-ROM or the web page.

Check 6

Select your scanner or printer on the application's menu.

Note

• The operation may differ depending on the application.

Check 7

Make sure that the application supports TWAIN.

You cannot start ScanGear (scanner driver) from applications not supporting TWAIN.

Check 8

Exit ScanGear if it is running on another application.

875

Cannot Scan Multiple Items at One Time

Check 1

Make sure that the items are placed correctly.


Check 2

Check if you can properly scan one item.

Some applications do not support multiple image scanning. In that case, scan each item individually.

876

Cannot Scan Properly with Auto Scan

Check 1



Check 2

Multiple items scanning may not be supported.

Some applications do not support multiple image scanning. In that case, scan each item individually.

877

Slow Scanning Speed

Check 1

To view the image on a monitor, set the output resolution to around 150 dpi. To print, set it to around 300 dpi.

Resolution

Check 2

Set Fading Correction, Grain Correction, etc. to None.

Refer to "Image Settings" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for details.

Check 3

In IJ Scan Utility, deselect the Correct slanted text document / Detect the

orientation of text document and rotate image checkbox and scan again.



878

"There is not enough memory." Message Is Displayed

Check 1

Exit other applications and try again.

Check 2

Reduce the resolution or output size and scan again.

Resolution

879

Computer Stops Operating during Scanning

Check 1

Restart the computer, reduce the output resolution in ScanGear (scanner driver) and scan again.

Refer to "Output Settings" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for details.

Check 2

again.

Delete unnecessary files to obtain sufficient free hard disk space, then scan

Error message may appear if there is not enough hard disk space to scan and save, when the image size is too large (such as when scanning a large item at high resolution).

Check 3

In Folder to Save Temporary Files of IJ Scan Utility, specify a folder on a drive with sufficient free space.


Check 4

Multiple devices may be connected to USB ports.

Disconnect devices other than your scanner or printer.

880

Scanner Does Not Work after Upgrading Windows

Check

Disconnect the USB cable, then uninstall (delete) and reinstall MP Drivers and IJ

Scan Utility.

Step 1: Uninstall MP Drivers.

Refer to "Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for how to delete MP Drivers.

Step 2: Uninstall IJ Scan Utility.


1. Click the Settings charm > Control Panel > Programs > Programs and Features.

2. Double-click Canon IJ Scan Utility.

3. When a confirmation appears, click Yes.


IJ Scan Utility is deleted.

Note

• In Windows 8.1 and Windows 8, a confirmation/warning dialog box may appear when installing, uninstalling, or starting up software.


If you are logged on to an administrator account, follow the on-screen instructions.

• Windows 7 / Windows Vista:

1. From the Start menu, select Control Panel > Programs > Programs and Features.

2. Double-click Canon IJ Scan Utility.




Note

• In Windows 7 and Windows Vista, a confirmation/warning dialog box may appear when installing, uninstalling, or starting up software.



• Windows XP:

1. From the Start menu, select Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs.

2. Select Canon IJ Scan Utility, then click Change/Remove.




Step 3: Reinstall MP Drivers and IJ Scan Utility.

Reinstall MP Drivers and IJ Scan Utility from the Setup CD-ROM or the web page.

881

Scanned Image Does Not Open

Check

If the data format is not supported by the application, scan the image again and select a popular data format such as JPEG when saving it.

Refer to the application's manual for details. If you have any questions, contact the manufacturer of the application.

882

Scan Results Not Satisfactory

Scan Quality (Image Displayed on the Monitor) Is Poor

Scanned Image Is Surrounded by Extra White Areas

Cannot Scan at the Correct Size

Position or Size of the Image Cannot be Detected Correctly When Scanning from the Operation Panel

Item Is Placed Correctly, but the Scanned Image Is Slanted

Scanned Image Is Enlarged (Reduced) on the Computer Monitor

883

Scan Quality (Image Displayed on the Monitor) Is Poor

Check 1

If the image is jagged, increase the scanning resolution, or select TIFF or PNG in Data Format of the Settings dialog box.

Resolution

Settings Dialog Box

Check 2

Set the display size to 100 %.

Some applications do not display images clearly if the display size is too small.

Check 3

If moire (stripe pattern) appears, take the following measures and scan again.

• Set one of the following settings in the Settings (Document Scan) dialog box, Settings (Custom Scan) dialog box, or Settings (Scan and Stitch) dialog box of IJ Scan Utility, then scan from the IJ Scan Utility main screen.

◦ Set Select Source to Magazine and set Color Mode to Color

◦ Select the Reduce moire checkbox in Image Processing Settings




• On the Basic Mode tab of ScanGear (scanner driver), select Magazine (Color) in Select Source.

Refer to "Basic Mode Tab" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for details.

• On the Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear, set Descreen in Image Settings to ON.


Note

• If moire appears when you scan a digital print photo, take the above measures and scan again.

Check 4

Check the monitor's color depth.

Refer to Help of Windows or the monitor's manual for details on how to check the monitor's color depth.

Check 5

Clean the platen and document cover.

Check 6

If the document is in poor condition (dirty, faded, etc.), then set Reduce Dust

and Scratches, Fading Correction, Grain Correction, etc. in Image Settings on the

Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear.


Check 7

If the color tone of images is different from the original document, take the following measures and scan again.

• On the Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear, set Image Adjustment in Image Settings to None.


• On the Color Settings tab in the Preferences dialog box of ScanGear, set Color Matching.

Refer to "Color Settings Tab" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for details.

884

Scanned Image Is Surrounded by Extra White Areas

Check

Specify the scan area.

Click (Auto Crop) in whole image view of ScanGear (scanner driver) to automatically display the cropping frame (scan area) according to the item size.

You can also manually specify the scan area in thumbnail view or when there are white margins along the item

(for example, in photos), or when you want to create custom cropping frames.


Note

• Refer to "Adjusting Cropping Frames (ScanGear)" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for how to adjust cropping frames with ScanGear (scanner driver).

885

Cannot Scan at the Correct Size

Check



886

Position or Size of the Image Cannot be Detected Correctly When

Scanning from the Operation Panel

Check 1



Check 2

Check that the settings match the item to be scanned.

If you cannot scan properly by automatically detecting the item type, specify the item type and size.

When Scanning from the Operation Panel:

Refer to "Setting Items for Scanning Using the Operation Panel of the Machine" for your model from Home of the

Online Manual for details on the setting items when scanning from the operation panel.

When Scanning with IJ Scan Utility:

Scanning Documents

Scanning Photos

Scanning with Favorite Settings

887

Item Is Placed Correctly, but the Scanned Image Is Slanted

Check

When Document or Magazine is selected for Select Source, deselect the

Correct slanted text document checkbox and scan the item again.



888

Scanned Image Is Enlarged (Reduced) on the Computer Monitor

Check 1

Change the display setting in the application.

Refer to the application's manual for details. If you have any questions, contact the manufacturer of the application.

Note

• You cannot reduce the image size in Paint. To reduce the display size, open the images in an application.

Check 2

Change the resolution setting in ScanGear (scanner driver) and scan again.

The higher the resolution, the larger the resulting image will be.

Resolution

889

Software Problems

The E-mail Client You Want to Use Does Not Appear in the Screen for Selecting an E-mail Client

890

The E-mail Client You Want to Use Does Not Appear in the Screen for Selecting an E-mail Client

Check

Check that the e-mail client's MAPI is enabled.

Refer to the e-mail client's manual for how to set MAPI.

If the problem is not solved even when MAPI is enabled, select None (Attach Manually) in the screen for selecting an e-mail client, then manually attach the image to the outgoing e-mail.

891

Problems with the Machine


The Machine Turns Off Unintentionally

Cannot Connect to Computer with a USB Cable Properly

Cannot Communicate with the Machine with USB Connection

The Display on the Touch Screen Cannot Be Seen At All

An Unintended Language Is Displayed on the Touch Screen

Cannot Remove a Memory Card

Print Head Holder Does Not Move to the Position for Replacing

Printer Status Monitor Is Not Displayed

If the Output Tray Extension Comes Off

Cannot Print/Scan from NFC Compliant Device

892


Check1

Touch the ON button.

Check2

Make sure that the power plug is securely plugged into the power cord connector of the machine, then turn it back on.

Check3

Unplug the machine from the power supply, then plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on after leaving it for at least 2 minutes.


893

The Machine Turns Off Unintentionally

Check

Deactivate the setting to turn the unit off automatically.

The machine turns off automatically according to the elapsed time you specified if you activate the setting to turn the unit off automatically.

If you do not want the machine to turn off automatically, open the printer driver setup window and in Auto Power under the Maintenance sheet, select Disable for Auto Power Off.

Note

• You can activate the setting to turn the machine on/off automatically from the operation panel of the machine or ScanGear (scanner driver).

• From the operation panel of the machine:

About ECO settings

• From ScanGear (scanner driver):

Scanner Tab

894

Cannot Connect to Computer with a USB Cable Properly

Printing or Scanning Speed Is Slow/Hi-Speed USB Connection Does Not

Work/"This device can perform faster" Message Is Displayed

If your system environment is not fully compatible with Hi-Speed USB, the machine will operate at a lower speed provided under USB 1.1. In this case, the machine operates properly but printing or scanning speed may slow down due to communication speed.

Check

Check the following to make sure that your system environment supports Hi-

Speed USB connection.

• Does the USB port on your computer support Hi-Speed USB connection?

• Does the USB cable or the USB hub support Hi-Speed USB connection?

Be sure to use a certified Hi-Speed USB cable. We recommend that the cable is no longer than around

10 feet / 3 meters.

• Does the operating system of your computer support Hi-Speed USB connection?

Obtain and install the latest update for your computer.

• Does the Hi-Speed USB driver operate properly?

Obtain the latest version of the Hi-Speed USB driver compatible with your hardware and reinstall it on your computer.

Important

• For details on Hi-Speed USB of your system environment, contact the manufacturer of your computer,

USB cable, or USB hub.

895

Cannot Communicate with the Machine with USB Connection

Check1


Check2

Make sure that the USB cable is connected properly.

See Connecting the Machine to the Computer Using a USB Cable to connect the USB cable properly.

Check3

Do not start up IJ Network Tool while printing.

Check4

Do not print while IJ Network Tool is running.

Check5

Make sure that Enable bidirectional support is selected in the Ports sheet of the properties dialog box of the printer driver.


896

The Display on the Touch Screen Cannot Be Seen At All

• If the POWER lamp is off:

The machine is not powered on. Connect the power cord and touch the ON button.

• If the POWER lamp is lit:

The touch screen may be in the screen-saver mode. Tap the touch screen.

897

An Unintended Language Is Displayed on the Touch Screen

Select the language you want to be displayed according to the following procedure.

1. Touch the HOME button and wait for about 5 seconds.



Setup.


4. Tap the fifth setting item from the top.

5. Tap the language for the touch screen.

898

Cannot Remove a Memory Card

Contact the service center.

Important

• Never attempt to remove a memory card using a thin stick or tweezers. Doing so may damage the machine.

Note

• Exclusive adapters are required for the following memory cards. Insert these cards in the machine with adapters attached.

miniSD Card/miniSDHC Card/microSD Card/microSDHC Card/Memory Stick Micro

899

Print Head Holder Does Not Move to the Position for Replacing

Check1

Is the POWER lamp off?

Check if the POWER lamp is lit.

The print head holder will not move unless the power is on. If the POWER lamp is off, close the operation panel and turn the machine on.

While the POWER lamp is flashing, the machine is initializing. Wait until the POWER lamp stops flashing and remains lit, and then open the operation panel again.

Check2

Is an error message displayed on the touch screen?

Close the operation panel, follow the Support Code (error number) displayed in the error message to resolve the error, and then reopen it. For details on how to resolve the error, refer to Support Code List .

Check3

Has the operation panel been left open for 10 minutes or longer?

If the operation panel is left open for more than 10 minutes, the print head holder moves to the position to protect it to prevent the print head from drying out. Close and reopen the operation panel to return the print head holder to the position for replacing.

Check4

Has the machine been printing continuously for a long period?

Close the operation panel, wait a while, then reopen it.

If the machine has been printing continuously for a long time, the print head holder may not move to the position for replacing since the print head may overheat.

Note

• Opening the operation panel while printing moves the print head holder to the position to protect it.

Close the operation panel, and reopen it after printing finishes.

900

Printer Status Monitor Is Not Displayed

Check

Is the printer status monitor enabled?

Make sure that Enable Status Monitor is selected on the Option menu of the printer status monitor.



2. On the Maintenance sheet, click View Printer Status.

3. Select Enable Status Monitor on the Option menu if it is not selected.

901

If the Output Tray Extension Comes Off

If the output tray extension comes off, the paper output tray is not closed properly.

Note

• The output tray extension comes off easily to avoid it being damaged.

Hold the paper output tray and move the output tray extension slowly until it clicks into place.

902

Cannot Print/Scan from NFC Compliant Device

Check1

Is NFC setting set to Enable?

When you print or scan from a NFC compliant device, select Enable for NFC setting.

Check2

Is PIXMA Printing Solutions installed in the NFC compliant device?

When you print or scan from a NFC compliant device, install PIXMA Printing Solutions in the NFC compliant device and operate from the device.

Check3

Are you touching the NFC compliant device to the machine properly?

When you touch a NFC compliant device to the machine, make sure that you touch the device to the NFC port on the machine properly.

Check4

Is the NFC function of the NFC compliant device enabled?

Confirm the setting of the NFC compliant device and enable the NFC function of the device.

903

Problems with Installation/Downloading

Cannot Install the MP Drivers

Easy-WebPrint EX Does Not Start Up or Easy-WebPrint EX Menu Does Not

Appear

How to Update MP Drivers in Network Environment

Uninstalling IJ Network Tool

904

Cannot Install the MP Drivers

• If the installation does not start even after the Setup CD-ROM is inserted into your computer's

disc drive:

Start the installation following the procedure below.


◦ In Windows 8.1 or Windows 8, select the Explorer icon in Taskbar on Desktop, then select

Computer from the list on the left.

◦ In Windows 7 or Windows Vista, click Start then Computer.

◦ In Windows Vista, click Start then Computer.

◦ In Windows XP, click Start then My Computer.

2. Double-click the CD-ROM icon on the displayed window.

If the contents of the CD-ROM are displayed, double-click MSETUP4.EXE.

If you cannot install the MP Drivers with the Setup CD-ROM, install them from our website.

Note

• If the CD-ROM icon is not displayed, try the following:

• Remove the CD-ROM from your computer, then insert it again.

• Restart your computer.

If the icon is not yet displayed, try different discs and see if they are displayed. If other discs are displayed, there is a problem with the Setup CD-ROM. In this case, contact the service center.

• If you are unable to proceed beyond the Printer Connection screen:

905

Note

• The printer is not detected. Check the connection. may be displayed depending on the computer you use.

Check1

computer.

Make sure that the USB cable is securely plugged in to the machine and the

Check2

again.

Follow the procedure below to connect the machine and the computer


2. Unplug the USB cable from the machine and the computer, then connect it again.

3. Turn the machine on.

Check3

If you cannot resolve the problem, follow the procedure below to reinstall the

MP Drivers.

1. Click Cancel.

2. Click Start Over on the Installation Failure screen.

3. Click Exit on the "PIXMA XXX" screen (where "XXX" is your machine's name), then remove the CD-

ROM.


5. Restart the computer.

6. Make sure that you have no application software running.

7. Insert the CD-ROM again, then install the MP Drivers.

• In other cases:

Reinstall the MP Drivers.

If the MP Drivers were not installed correctly, uninstall the MP Drivers, restart your computer, and then reinstall the MP Drivers.

Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers

If you reinstall the MP Drivers, install the MP Drivers with the Setup CD-ROM or install them from our website.

Note

• If the installer was forced to be terminated due to a Windows error, the system may be in an unstable condition and you may not be able to install the drivers. Restart your computer before reinstalling.

906

Easy-WebPrint EX Does Not Start Up or Easy-WebPrint EX Menu

Does Not Appear

If Easy-WebPrint EX does not start up or its menu does not appear on Internet Explorer, confirm the following.

Check1

Is Canon Easy-WebPrint EX displayed on the Toolbars menu in the Internet

Explorer's View menu?

If Canon Easy-WebPrint EX is not displayed, Easy-WebPrint EX is not installed on your computer. Install the latest Easy-WebPrint EX onto your computer from our website.

Note

• If Easy-WebPrint EX is not installed on your computer, a message asking you to install it may be displayed on the notification area on the desktop. Click the message, then follow the instructions on the computer screen to install Easy-WebPrint EX.

• While the installation or download Easy-WebPrint EX is in progress, it is necessary to access the Internet.

Check2

Is Canon Easy-WebPrint EX selected on the Toolbars menu in the Internet

Explorer's View menu?

If Canon Easy-WebPrint EX is not selected, Easy-WebPrint EX is disabled. Select Canon Easy-WebPrint EX to enable it.

907

How to Update MP Drivers in Network Environment

Download the latest MP Drivers in advance.

To obtain the latest MP Drivers, access our web site through the Internet and download the latest MP

Drivers for your model.

After uninstalling the MP Drivers, install the latest MP Drivers according to the regular procedure. When the connection method selection screen is displayed, select Use the printer with wireless LAN connection or

Use the printer with wired LAN connection according to the connection method you use. The machine will be detected automatically in the network.

After making sure that the machine is detected, install the MP Drivers following the on-screen instructions.

Note

• You can use the machine over a LAN without performing setup again.

908

Uninstalling IJ Network Tool

Follow the procedure below to uninstall IJ Network Tool from your computer.

Important

• Even if IJ Network Tool is uninstalled, you can print over network or scan from the computer. However, you cannot change the network settings and use the card slot of the machine over network.

• Log into a user account with administrator privilege.

1. Perform the procedure to uninstall IJ Network Tool.

• In Windows 8.1 or Windows 8:

1. Select Control Panel from the Settings charm on Desktop > Programs > Programs and

Features.

2. Select Canon IJ Network Tool from the program list, then click Uninstall.

If the User Account Control screen appears, click Continue.

• In Windows 7 or Windows Vista:

1. Click Start > Control Panel > Programs > Programs and Features.

2. Select Canon IJ Network Tool from the program list, then click Uninstall.

If the User Account Control screen appears, click Continue.

• In Windows XP:

1. Click Start > Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs.

2. Select Canon IJ Network Tool from the program list, then click Remove.

2. Click Yes when the confirmation message appears.

When the message prompting you to restart your computer is displayed, click OK to restart your computer.

909

About Errors/Messages Displayed


A Message Is Displayed

Error Message Appears on a PictBridge (Wireless LAN) Compliant Device

910


When an error occurs in printing such as the machine is out of paper or paper is jammed, a troubleshooting message is displayed automatically. Take the appropriate action described in the message.

When an error occurs, a Support Code (error number) is displayed on the computer screen or the touch screen.

• When a Support Code and a message are displayed on the computer screen:

• When a Support Code and a message are displayed on the touch screen:

For details on how to resolve errors with Support Codes, refer to Support Code List .

Note

• You can confirm the actions against errors with Support Codes on your computer or on the touch screen by searching a Support Code.

Click Here to Search

For details on how to resolve errors without Support Codes, see A Message Is Displayed .

911

A Message Is Displayed

This section describes some of the errors or messages.

Note

• A Support Code (error number) is displayed on the computer or on the touch screen for some error or message. For details on errors with Support Codes, refer to Support Code List .

If a message is displayed on the touch screen, see below.

• A Message Is Displayed on the touch screen

If a message is displayed on the computer, see below.

• Error Regarding Automatic Duplex Printing Is Displayed

• Error Regarding the Power Cord Being Unplugged Is Displayed

• Writing Error/Output Error/Communication Error

• Other Error Messages

• The Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program Screen Is Displayed

A Message Is Displayed on the touch screen

Confirm the message and take an appropriate action.

•

Data of supported types are not saved.

◦ There is no image data or document saved on the memory card that can be read by this machine.

◦ The machine may not recognize the file if the file name or folder path contain certain characters.

Use only alphanumeric characters.

◦ Photo data edited or processed on a computer must be printed from the computer.

Note

• When a photo which has been processed on a computer is selected, "?" is displayed on the touch screen.

•

Cannot print the specified PDF file. An error has occurred while scanning the file, or the format is not supported, or the file is too large.

◦ Make sure the PDF file is printable from a memory card. See Printing Documents (PDF File)

Saved on a Memory Card for more information.

Note

• The names of the PDF files are displayed even though they cannot be printed from the memory card. It is recommended you confirm whether they are printable. If one of the following conditions applies to the PDF files, they are not printable.

• The Details screen is not displayed for the PDF file you want to print.

• Characters other than machine name, IJ Scan Utility, or My Image Garden are displayed on Created with on the Details screen.

• "?" is displayed on the preview screen.

◦ Data edited or processed on a computer must be printed from the computer.

912

•

The specified PDF file contains unprintable data. Some portions may not be printed.

PDF file which contain lot of graphics or hi-resolution images may lose that data or stop before printing is completed. In this case, print from the computer.

•

The card is currently writable from PC. Set to [Not writable from PC].

The card slot is set to Writable from USB PC or Writable from LAN PC.

You cannot print from the memory card when the card slot is set to Writable from USB PC or

Writable from LAN PC. After writing on the memory card, select Not writable from PC in Read/

write attribute under Device user settings.

• Power was not turned off correctly the last time. Press the

button when turning power off.

The power cord may have been unplugged last while the machine was still on.

Tap OK on the touch screen to dismiss the error.

Note

• See Notice for Unplugging the Power Cord for unplugging the power cord.

•

Cannot connect to the server. Please wait a while and try again.

You cannot connect to the server due to some communication error. When you have tried to access a photo sharing site, it is possible that your photos have been deleted.

Tap OK on the touch screen to dismiss the error, then try again after a while.

Error Regarding Automatic Duplex Printing Is Displayed

Check

See

Cannot Print Properly with Automatic Duplex Printing

and take the appropriate action.

Error Regarding the Power Cord Being Unplugged Is Displayed

The power cord may have been unplugged while the machine was still on.

Check the error message that appears on the computer, then click OK.


See Notice for Unplugging the Power Cord for unplugging the power cord.

Writing Error/Output Error/Communication Error

Check1

If the POWER lamp is off, make sure that the power plug is plugged in, then turn the machine on.

While the POWER lamp is flashing, the machine is initializing. Wait until the POWER lamp stops flashing and remains lit.

Check2

Make sure that the printer port is configured appropriately in the printer driver.

* In the following instructions, "XXX" signifies your machine's name.

913

1. Log on as a user account with administrator privilege.


• In Windows 8.1 or Windows 8, select Control Panel from the Settings charm on Desktop >

Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers.

• In Windows 7, select Devices and Printers from the Start menu.

• In Windows Vista, select the Start menu > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers.

• In Windows XP, select the Start menu > Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware > Printers

and Faxes.

3. Open the properties of printer driver for the machine.

• In Windows 8.1, Windows 8, or Windows 7, right-click the "Canon XXX series Printer" icon (where

"XXX" is your machine's name), then select Printer properties.

• In Windows Vista or Windows XP, right-click the "Canon XXX series Printer" icon (where "XXX" is your machine's name), then select Properties.

4. Click the Ports tab to confirm the port settings.

Make sure that a port named "USBnnn" (where "n" is a number) with "Canon XXX series Printer" appearing in the Printer column is selected for Print to the following port(s).

Note

• When the machine is used over LAN, the port name of the machine is displayed as

"CNBJNP_xxxxxxxxxx". "xxxxxxxxxx" is the character string generated from the MAC address or a character string specified by the user when setting up the machine.

• If the setting is incorrect:

Reinstall the MP Drivers with the Setup CD-ROM or install them from our website.

• Printing does not start even though the machine is connected to the computer using a USB cable and the port named "USBnnn" is selected:

In Windows 8.1 or Windows 8, select My Printer on the Start screen to start My Printer. If My

Printer is not displayed on the Start screen, select the Search charm, then search for "My Printer".

Set the correct printer port on Diagnose and Repair Printer. Follow the on-screen instructions to set the correct printer port, then select your machine's name.

In Windows 7, Windows Vista, or Windows XP, click Start and select All programs, Canon

Utilities, Canon My Printer, Canon My Printer, then select Diagnose and Repair Printer. Follow the on-screen instructions to set the correct printer port, then select your machine's name.


• Printing does not start even though the port named "CNBJNP_xxxxxxxxxx" is selected when the machine is used over LAN:

Launch IJ Network Tool, and select "CNBJNP_xxxxxxxxxx" as you confirmed in step 4, then associate the port with the printer using Associate Port in the Settings menu.


Check3


When the machine is connected to your computer with a USB cable, make sure that the USB cable is securely plugged in to the machine and the computer, then check the followings:

914

• If you are using a relay device such as a USB hub, disconnect it, connect the machine directly to the computer, and try printing again. If printing starts normally, there is a problem with the relay device.

Consult the reseller of the relay device for details.

• There could also be a problem with the USB cable. Replace the USB cable and try printing again.

When you use the machine over LAN, make sure that the machine is connected to the network with a LAN cable or is set up correctly.

Check4

Make sure that the MP Drivers are installed correctly.

Uninstall the MP Drivers following the procedure described in Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers , then reinstall the MP Drivers with the Setup CD-ROM or reinstall them from our website.

Check5

When the machine is connected to your computer with a USB cable, check the status of the device on your computer.

Follow the procedure below to check the status of the device.

1. Open the Device Manager on your computer as shown below.

If the User Account Control screen is displayed, follow the on-screen instructions.

• In Windows 8.1 or Windows 8, select Control Panel from the Settings charm on Desktop >

Hardware and Sound > Device Manager.

• In Windows 7 or Windows Vista, click Control Panel, Hardware and Sound, then Device Manager.

• In Windows XP, click Control Panel, Performance and Maintenance, System, then click Device

Manager on the Hardware sheet.

2. Double-click Universal Serial Bus controllers then USB Printing Support.

If the USB Printing Support Properties screen is not displayed, make sure that the machine is correctly connected to the computer.

Check3


3. Click the General tab and make sure that there is no indication of a problem with the device.

If a device error is displayed, refer to Windows help to resolve the error.

Other Error Messages

Check

following:

If an error message is displayed outside the printer status monitor, check the

• "Could not spool successfully due to insufficient disk space"

Delete any unnecessary files to increase the amount of free space on the disk.

• "Could not spool successfully due to insufficient memory"

Quit other running application softwares to increase available memory.

If you cannot print yet, restart your computer and retry printing.

• "Printer driver could not be found"

Uninstall the MP Drivers following the procedure described in Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers , then reinstall the MP Drivers with the Setup CD-ROM or reinstall them from our website.

• "Could not print Application name - File name"

Try printing again once the current job is complete.

915

The Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program Screen Is

Displayed

If the Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program is installed, a confirmation screen asking for permission to send the printer and application software usage information will be displayed every month for about ten years.

Read the instructions on the screen and follow the procedure below.

• If you agree to participate in the survey program:

Click Agree, then follow the on-screen instructions. The printer usage information will be sent via the

Internet. If you have followed the on-screen instructions, the information will be sent automatically from the second time onward and the confirmation screen will not be displayed again.

Note

• When the information is being sent, a caution screen such as an Internet security screen may be displayed. In this case, confirm that the program name is "IJPLMUI.exe", then allow it.

• If you deselect the Send automatically from the next time check box, the information will not be sent automatically from the second time onward and a confirmation screen will be displayed at the time of the next survey. To send the information automatically, see Changing the confirmation screen setting: .

• If you do not agree to participate in the survey program:

Click Do not agree. The confirmation screen will be closed, and the survey at that time is skipped.

The confirmation screen will be displayed again one month later.

• To uninstall the Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program:

To uninstall the Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program, click Uninstall, then follow the on-screen instructions.

• Changing the confirmation screen setting:


916

◦ In Windows 8.1 or Windows 8, select Control Panel from the Settings charm on Desktop >

Programs > Programs and Features.

◦ In Windows 7, or Windows Vista, select the Start menu > Control Panel > Programs >

Programs and Features.

◦ In Windows XP, select the Start menu > Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs.

Note

• In Windows 8.1, Windows 8, Windows 7, or Windows Vista, a confirmation/warning dialog box may appear when installing, uninstalling or starting up software.



2. Select Canon Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program.

3. Select Change.

If you select Yes after you have followed the on-screen instructions, the confirmation screen will be displayed at the time of the next survey.

If you select No, the information will be sent automatically.

Note

• If you select Uninstall (or Remove in Windows XP), the Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax

Extended Survey Program is uninstalled. Follow the on-screen instructions.

917

Error Message Appears on a PictBridge (Wireless LAN) Compliant

Device

The following are the possible errors that may occur when printing directly from a PictBridge (Wireless LAN) compliant device and the countermeasures to clear them.

Note

• This section describes errors that are indicated on Canon-brand PictBridge (Wireless LAN) compliant devices. The error messages and operations may vary depending on the device you are using. For errors on non-Canon PictBridge (Wireless LAN) compliant devices, check the Support Code (error number) on the touch screen and take the appropriate action to clear the error.

Support Code List

• For the errors indicated on the PictBridge (Wireless LAN) compliant device and their solution, also refer to the instruction manual of the device. For other troubles on the device, contact the manufacturer.

Error Message on the

PictBridge

(Wireless LAN)

Compliant

Device

"Printer in use"

Action

"No paper"

"Paper Error"

"Paper jam"

If the machine is printing from the computer or warming up, wait until the job ends.

When it is ready, the machine starts printing automatically.

If the machine is not printing from the computer or warming up, check the Support Code on the touch screen and take the appropriate action to resolve the error.

Support Code List

Load paper in the cassette, and select Continue* in the display on your PictBridge (Wireless LAN) compliant device.

* To resume printing, you can also tap OK on the touch screen instead of selecting Continue on the device.

See Cannot Print on the Disc Label for disc label printing.

• If the paper output tray is closed, open it and select Continue* in the display on your


* To resume printing, you can also tap OK on the touch screen instead of selecting Continue on the device.

• If the disc tray guide is opened, close it and select Stop in the display on your PictBridge

(Wireless LAN) compliant device to stop printing.

See Cannot Print on the Disc Label for disc label printing.

If neither of the above is applied, check the Support Code on the touch screen and take the appropriate action to resolve the error.

Support Code List

Select Stop in the display on your PictBridge (Wireless LAN) compliant device to stop printing.

Remove the jammed paper, load new paper, tap OK on the touch screen, and try printing again.

918

"Printer cover open"

Close the operation panel on the machine.

"Waste tank full"/"Ink absorber full"

The ink absorber is nearly full.

Check the Support Code on the touch screen and take the appropriate action to resolve the error.

Support Code List

"No ink"/"Ink cassette error"

• The ink tank is not installed. Install the ink tank.


• The ink tank is not compatible with this machine.

Printing cannot be executed because the ink tank is not compatible with this machine.

Install an appropriate ink tank.

If you want to cancel printing, touch the machine's Stop button.


• If the lamp on the ink tank is flashing, ink may have run out.


Support Code List

"Ink Error"

"Hardware Error" The ink tank cannot be recognized. (The lamp on the ink tank is off.)

Replace the ink tank.


"Printer error"

An ink tank that was once empty is installed.


Support Code List

An error requiring servicing may have occurred.

Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.

Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.


919

If You Cannot Resolve the Problem

If you cannot resolve the problem with any of the workarounds in this chapter, please contact the seller of the machine or the service center.

Canon support staff are trained to be able to provide technical support to satisfy customers.

Caution

• If the machine emits any unusual sound, smoke, or odor, turn it off immediately. Unplug the power cord from the outlet and contact the seller or the service center. Never attempt to repair or disassemble the machine yourself.

• Attempts by customers to repair or take apart the machine will invalidate any warranty regardless of whether the warranty has expired.

Before contacting the service center, confirm the following:

• Product name:

* Your machine's name is located on the front cover of the setup manual.

• Serial number: please refer to the setup manual

• Details of the problem

• What you tried to solve the problem, and what happened

920

Support Code List

The support code appears on the touch screen and the computer screen when an error occurs.

"Support Code" means the error number and appears with an error message.

When an error occurs, check the support code displayed on the touch screen or the computer screen and take the appropriate action.

Support Code Appears on the Touch Screen and the Computer Screen

• 1000 to 1ZZZ

1001 1002 1007 1008 1200 1250

1253 1254 1255 1256 1257 1300

1304 1310 1311 1312 1313 1315

1316 1401 1403 1405 1410 1411

1412 1413 1414 1415 1600 1660

1680 1681 1683 1684 1688 1700

1701 1710 1711 1830 1850 1851

1855 1856 1857 1858 1872 1873

• 2000 to 2ZZZ

2111 2112 2121 2122 2500 2700

• 4000 to 4ZZZ

4100 4101 4103

• 5000 to 5ZZZ

5011 5012 5100 5101 5200 5400

5B00 5B01 5B10 5B11 5C00 5C20

• 6000 to 6ZZZ

6000 6001 6003 6500 6502 6800

6801 6900 6901 6902 6910 6911

6920 6921 6930 6931 6932 6933

6934 6935 6936 6937 6938 6940

6941 6942 6943 6944 6945 6946

921

6950 6B20

• A000 to ZZZZ

B202 B203 B204 C000

About the support code for paper jam, you can also refer to Support Code List (When Paper Is Jammed) .

922

Support Code List (When Paper Is Jammed)

If the paper is jammed, remove it following the procedure appropriate for each case.

Watch the movie (Windows)

Watch the movie (Mac)

• If you can see the jammed paper at the paper output slot:

1300

• If the paper is jammed when automatic duplex printing:

1304

• If the paper loaded in the cassette 1 is jammed:

1311

• If the paper loaded in the cassette 2 is jammed:

1312

• If the paper is jammed as the machine pulled in the printed paper:

1313

• If the paper loaded in the cassette 1 is jammed because the paper output tray is closed:

1315

• If the paper loaded in the cassette 2 is jammed because the paper output tray is closed:

1316

• If the paper tears and you cannot remove it from the paper output slot or from the transport unit:

Paper Is Jammed inside the Machine

• Cases other than above:

In Other Cases

923

1300

Cause

Paper is jammed in the paper output slot.

Action

If you can see the jammed paper at the paper output slot, remove the paper following the procedure below.



Note

• If you need to turn off the machine to remove jammed paper during printing, touch the Stop button to cancel print jobs before turning off the machine.

1. Pull the paper out slowly.

Hold the paper with your hands, then pull the paper out slowly not to tear it.

Note

• If you cannot pull the paper out, turn the machine off and turn it back on. The paper may be ejected automatically.

• If the paper tears and you cannot remove the jammed paper from the paper output slot, remove the paper from inside the machine.


2. Reload the paper, and tap OK on the touch screen of the machine.

If you turned off the machine in step 1, all print jobs in the queue are canceled. Reprint if necessary.

Note

• When reloading the paper, confirm that you are using the paper suited for printing and are loading it correctly.

• We recommend you use paper other than A5 sized one to print documents with photos or graphics; otherwise, the printout may curl and cause paper exit jams.


924

1304

Cause

Paper is jammed when performing automatic duplex printing.

Action

If the paper is jammed when performing automatic duplex printing, remove the paper following the procedure below.



Note


1. Detach the rear cover.

Pull out the rear cover.

2. Detach the transport unit cover.

Lift up the transport unit cover, then pull it out.

3. Pull out the paper slowly.

925

Note

• Do not touch the inner parts of the machine.

• If you cannot pull out the paper, open the paper output tray.

4. Attach the transport unit cover.

Insert the transport unit cover to the back of the machine.

5. Attach the rear cover.

Insert the rear cover to the back of the machine.

If you were not able to remove the paper out in step 3:

6. Detach both the cassette 1 and the cassette 2.


8. If the paper protrudes from the cassette, remove the paper, then reload it after aligning the edges of the sheets.

Note


926

9. Attach the cassettes to the machine, then tap OK on the touch screen.


927

1311

Cause

The paper loaded in the cassette 1 is jammed.

Action

If the paper loaded in the cassette 1 is jammed, remove the paper following the procedure below.



Note







928

Note











Note


929



930

1312

Cause

The paper loaded in the cassette 2 is jammed.

Action

If the paper loaded in the cassette 2 is jammed, remove the paper following the procedure below.



Note





Note


• Open the paper output tray if you cannot pull out the paper.



931





Note




932

1313

Cause

The paper is jammed as the machine pulled in the printed paper.

Action

If the paper is jammed as the machine pulled in the printed paper, remove the paper following the procedure below.



Important

• If the printed paper piles up on the paper output slot, the machine may pull it in and the paper is jammed inside the machine. Remove the printed paper from the paper output tray before it amounts to 50 sheets.

Note







933

Note










934


Note




935

1315

Cause

The paper loaded in the cassette 1 is jammed because the paper output tray is closed.

Action

If the paper loaded in the cassette 1 is jammed because the paper output tray is closed, open the paper output tray then remove the paper following the procedure below.

If you can see the jammed paper at the paper output slot:

If you cannot see the jammed paper at the paper output slot:

Note




• If you can see the jammed paper at the paper output slot:




Note






936

Note


• If you cannot see the jammed paper at the paper output slot:

If you cannot see the jammed paper at the paper output slot, remove the paper following the procedure below.






Note




937







Note



Important

• Do not close the paper output tray while the machine is in operation.


938

1316

Cause

The paper loaded in the cassette 2 is jammed because the paper output tray is closed.

Action

If the paper loaded in the cassette 2 is jammed because the paper output tray is closed, open the paper output tray then remove the paper following the procedure below.

If you can see the jammed paper at the paper output slot:

If you cannot see the jammed paper at the paper output slot:

Note




• If you can see the jammed paper at the paper output slot:




Note






939

Note


• If you cannot see the jammed paper at the paper output slot:

If you cannot see the jammed paper at the paper output slot, remove the paper following the procedure below.




Note







940


Note



Important



941

Paper Is Jammed inside the Machine

If the jammed paper tears and you cannot remove the paper from the paper output slot or if the jammed paper remains inside the machine, remove the paper following the procedure below.



Note


1. Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.

2. Lift up and open the operation panel until it stops.

Important

• Do not touch the clear film (A) or the white belt (B).

If the paper or your hands touch these parts and blot or scratch them, the machine can be damaged.

3. Make sure that the jammed paper is not under the print head holder.

If the jammed paper is under the print head holder, move the print head holder to the right edge or the left edge whichever is easier to remove the paper.

When you move the print head holder, hold the top of the print head holder and slide it slowly to the right edge or the left edge.

942

4. Hold the jammed paper with your hands.

If the paper is rolled up, pull it out.

5. Pull the paper slowly not to tear it, then pull the paper out.

Keep an angle of the paper about 45 degrees and pull it slowly.

6. Make sure that all the jammed paper is removed.

If the paper is torn, a piece of paper may remain inside the machine. Check the following and remove the piece of paper if it remains.

• Does the piece of paper remain under the print head holder?

• Does the little piece of paper remain inside the machine?

• Does the piece of paper remain in the right side or the left side space (C) inside the machine?

943

7. Close the operation panel slowly.

All print jobs in the queue are canceled. Reprint if necessary.

Note

• When reloading the paper, confirm that you are using the paper suited for printing and are loading it correctly. If the message about paper jam is displayed on the touch screen of the machine or on the computer screen when you resume printing after removing all the jammed paper, a piece of paper may remain inside the machine. In this case, confirm that no piece of paper remains inside the machine.


944

In Other Cases

Make sure of the following:

Check1

Are there any foreign objects around the paper output slot?

Check2

Are the transport unit cover and the rear cover attached properly?

Check3

Is the paper curled?

Load the paper after correcting its curl.

945

1001

Cause

There is no disc tray.

Action

When printing on printable discs (BD/DVD/CD, etc.), use the disc tray supplied with this machine ("J" is on the upper side). Place a printable disc on the disc tray, attach the disc tray to the machine, then tap OK on the touch screen.

946

1002

Cause

Printable disc (BD/DVD/CD, etc.) is not set.

Action

When printing on printable discs, use the disc tray supplied with this machine ("J" is on the upper side).

Place a printable disc on the disc tray, attach the disc tray to the machine, then tap OK on the touch screen.

947

1007

Cause

Possible causes include the following.

• There is no paper in the cassette 1.

• Paper is not loaded in the cassette 1 properly.

Action

Take the corresponding actions below.

• Load paper in the cassette 1.

The small size photo paper such as 4" x 6" (10 x 15 cm) or 5" x 7" (13 x 18 cm), or Hagaki can be loaded in the cassette 1.

Important

• If you cut plain paper into small size such as 4" x 6" (10 x 15 cm) or 5" x 7" (13 x 18 cm) and try to print on it, the paper jam will occur.

• Align the paper guides with the both edges of the paper when you load paper in the cassette 1.

After carrying out the above measures, tap OK on the touch screen to dismiss the error.

Note

• If you want to cancel printing, touch the machine's Stop button.

948

1008

Cause

Possible causes include the following.

• There is no paper in the cassette 2.

• Paper is not loaded in the cassette 2 properly.

Action

Take the corresponding actions below.

• Load paper in the cassette 2.

The large size photo paper or plain paper such as A4, B5, A5, 8" x 10" (20 x 25 cm), Letter, or Legal, or envelope can be loaded in the cassette 2.

• Align the paper guides with the both edges of the paper when you load paper in the cassette 2.

After carrying out the above measures, tap OK on the touch screen to dismiss the error.

Note


949

1200

Cause

The operation panel is open.

Action

Close the operation panel and wait for a while.

Do not close it while you are replacing an ink tank.

950

1250

Cause

The paper output tray is closed.

Action

Open the paper output tray to resume printing.

951

1253

Cause

The paper output tray did not open.

Action

Confirm that there are no materials which is preventing the paper output tray from moving and that the cassette 1 is inserted properly.

Open the paper output tray, then tap OK on the touch screen.

952

1254

Cause

The paper output tray is closed or it has not opened.

Action



Important


953

1255

Cause


Action



Important


954

1256

Cause


Action



Important


955

1257

Cause


Action



Important


956

1310

Cause

The size of paper may not be compatible with automatic duplex printing.

Action

The sizes of media suitable for auto duplex printing are A4, Letter, A5, B5, and Hagaki. Make sure that the size of the paper loaded in the machine is correct. Tapping OK on the touch screen will eject the paper and restart printing from the front side of the next paper. The reverse side of the ejected sheet will not be printed.

957

1401

Cause

The print head may be damaged.

Action


958

1403

Cause


Action


959

1405

Cause


Action


960

1410

Cause

The ink tank cannot be recognized.

Action

Open the operation panel and replace the ink tank which lamp is off.

961

1411

Cause


Action


962

1412

Cause


Action


963

1413

Cause


Action


964

1414

Cause


Action


965

1415

Cause


Action


966

1600

Cause

If the lamp on the ink tank is flashing, ink may have run out.

Action

Replacing the ink tank is recommended.

If printing is in progress and you want to continue printing, tap OK on the machine with the ink tank installed. Then printing can continue. Replacing the ink tank is recommended after the printing. The machine may be damaged if printing is continued under the ink out condition.

Note

• If multiple ink lamps are flashing red, check the status of each ink tank.

967

1660

Cause

The ink tank is not installed.

Action

Install the ink tank.

968

1680

Cause

Some ink tanks are not installed in the correct position. (The lamp on the ink tank flashes.)

Action

Confirm that the ink tanks are installed in the appropriate positions.

969

1681

Cause

More than one ink tanks of the same color are installed. (The lamp on the ink tank flashes.)

Action

Confirm that the ink tanks are installed in the appropriate positions.

970

1683

Cause

The remaining ink level cannot be correctly detected. (The lamp on the ink tank flashes.)

Action

Replace the ink tank and close the operation panel.

Printing with an ink tank that was once empty may damage the machine.

If you want to continue printing in this condition, you need to release the function for detecting the remaining ink level. Touch the machine's Stop button for at least 5 seconds, and then release it.

With this operation, releasing the function for detecting the remaining ink level is memorized. Please be advised that Canon shall not be liable for any machine malfunction or damage caused by refilled ink tanks.

Note

• If the function for detecting the remaining ink level is disabled, the ink tank in gray is displayed on the touch screen when checking the current ink level.

971

1684

Cause


Action

Printing cannot be executed because the ink tank may not be installed properly or may not be compatible with this machine.

Install the appropriate ink tank.

If you want to cancel printing, touch the machine's Stop button.

972

1688

Cause

The ink has run out. (The lamp on the ink tank flashes.)

Action

Replace the ink tank and close the operation panel.

Printing under the current condition may damage the machine.

If you want to continue printing in this condition, you need to release the function for detecting the remaining ink level. Touch the machine's Stop button for at least 5 seconds, and then release it.

With this operation, releasing the function for detecting the remaining ink level is memorized. Please be advised that Canon shall not be liable for any malfunction or trouble which may be caused by continuation of printing under the ink out condition.

Note

• If the function for detecting the remaining ink level is disabled, the ink tank in gray is displayed on the touch screen when checking the current ink level.

973

1700

Cause

The ink absorber is almost full.

Action

Tap OK on the touch screen to continue printing. Contact the service center.

974

1701

Cause


Action


975

1710

Cause


Action


976

1711

Cause


Action


977

1830

Cause

A certain period of time has elapsed while disc label printing is in progress.

Action

If a certain period of time has elapsed while disc label printing is in progress, the machine stops initializing.

The machine resumes initializing by tapping OK on the touch screen.

Try the operation again following the instructions on the touch screen.

978

1850

Cause

The disc tray guide is closed.

Action

Open the disc tray guide with the operation panel closed, attach the disc tray properly, then tap OK on the touch screen.

979

1851

Cause

The disc tray guide is open.

Action

When printing other than disc label printing is started, close the disc tray guide.


980

1855

Cause

The disc tray guide has been closed.

Action

Open the disc tray guide with the operation panel closed, then tap OK on the touch screen.

Do not open or close the disc tray guide while printing is in progress. Doing so may damage the machine.

981

1856

Cause

The disc tray guide has been opened.

Action

While printing other than disc label printing, close the disc tray guide.


Do not open or close the disc tray guide while printing is in progress. Doing so may damage the machine.

982

1857

Cause

The disc tray guide is open when starting disc label printing.

Action

When starting disc label printing, close the disc tray guide for the machine to prepare to print.

Close the disc tray guide with the operation panel closed, then tap OK on the touch screen.

983

1858

Cause

The disc tray guide is open after replacing the ink tank.

Action

After replacing the ink tank, close the disc tray guide and the operation panel.

Tap OK on the touch screen of the machine to dismiss the error.

984

1872

Cause

The cassette 1 is not inserted.

Action

Insert the cassette 1.

Note

• The cassette paper information registration screen is displayed after inserting the cassette 1. Register the cassette paper information according to the paper you loaded in the cassette 1.


985

1873

Cause

The cassette 2 is not inserted.

Action

Insert the cassette 2.

Note

• The cassette paper information registration screen is displayed after inserting the cassette 2. Register the cassette paper information according to the paper you loaded in the cassette 2.


986

2111

Cause

The paper settings for printing or copying are different from the cassette paper information registered to the machine.

Note


Setting the Media Type with the Printer Driver and on the Printer (Windows)

Setting the Media Type with the Printer Driver and on the Printer (Mac)

Setting the Paper Size with the Printer Driver and on the Printer (Windows)

Setting the Paper Size with the Printer Driver and on the Printer (Mac)


• For details on the cassette paper information registering to the machine:

Paper setting for Printing (Windows)

Paper setting for Printing (Mac)

Paper setting for Printing (Smartphone and so on)

If the paper settings for printing or copying are different from the cassette paper information registered to the machine as the following, a message is displayed on the touch screen.

• Print settings specified on the printer driver:

Paper size: 4" x 6" (10 x 15 cm)

Media type: Photo Paper Plus Glossy II

• Cassette paper information registered to the machine:

Paper size: 5" x 7" (13 x 18 cm)

Media type: Plus Glossy II

Print settings specified for printing or copying is displayed below the message.

Action

Tapping OK on the touch screen, the following screen is displayed.

987

Select what to do as necessary.

Note



Select if you want to print on the paper loaded in the cassette 1 without changing the paper settings.

For example, when the paper setting for printing or copying is 4" x 6" (10 x 15 cm) and the cassette paper information registered to the machine is 5" x 7" (13 x 18 cm), the machine starts printing or copying with 4" x 6" (10 x 15 cm) on the paper loaded in the cassette 1.


Select if you want to print after replacing the paper of the cassette 1.

For example, when the paper setting for printing or copying is 4" x 6" (10 x 15 cm) and the cassette paper information registered to the machine is 5" x 7" (13 x 18 cm), you load 4" x 6" (10 x 15 cm) sized paper in the cassette 1 before you start printing or copying.

The cassette paper information registration screen is displayed after replacing the paper and inserting the cassette 1. Register the cassette paper information according to the paper you loaded in the cassette 1.

Note







Cancel

Cancels printing.


988

Note

• You can disable the message which prevents misprinting. When you disable the message, the machine starts printing or copying even though the paper settings for printing or copying and the cassette paper information registered to the machine are different.


Cassette settings (Windows)

Cassette settings (Mac)

Cassette settings (Smartphone and so on)


Changing the Printer Operation Mode (Windows)

Changing the Printer Operation Mode (Mac)

989

2112

Cause

The paper settings for printing or copying are different from the cassette paper information registered to the machine.

Note







• For details on the cassette paper information registering to the machine:

Paper setting for Printing (Windows)

Paper setting for Printing (Mac)

Paper setting for Printing (Smartphone and so on)

If the paper settings for printing or copying are different from the cassette paper information registered to the machine as the following, a message is displayed on the touch screen.

• Print settings specified on the printer driver:

Paper size: B5

Media type: Plain paper

• Cassette paper information registered to the machine:

Paper size: A4

Media type: Plain paper

Print settings specified for printing or copying is displayed below the message.

Action

Tapping OK on the touch screen, the following screen is displayed.

990

Select what to do as necessary.

Note



Select if you want to print on the paper loaded in the cassette 2 without changing the paper settings.

For example, when the paper setting for printing or copying is B5 and the cassette paper information registered to the machine is A4, the machine starts printing or copying with B5 on the paper loaded in the cassette 2.


Select if you want to print after replacing the paper of the cassette 2.

For example, when the paper setting for printing or copying is B5 and the cassette paper information registered to the machine is A4, you load B5 sized paper in the cassette 2 before you start printing or copying.

The cassette paper information registration screen is displayed after replacing the paper and inserting the cassette 2. Register the cassette paper information according to the paper you loaded in the cassette 2.

Note







Cancel

Cancels printing.


991

Note

• You can disable the message which prevents misprinting. When you disable the message, the machine starts printing or copying even though the paper settings for printing or copying and the cassette paper information registered to the machine are different.


Cassette settings (Windows)

Cassette settings (Mac)

Cassette settings (Smartphone and so on)


Changing the Printer Operation Mode (Windows)

Changing the Printer Operation Mode (Mac)

992

2121

Cause

The paper settings of the cassette 1 is not complete.

Action

If the following screen is displayed, the paper settings of the cassette 1 is not complete.

Tap Register on the touch screen of the machine to terminate the paper settings of the cassette 1.

993

2122

Cause

The paper settings of the cassette 2 is not complete.

Action

If the following screen is displayed, the paper settings of the cassette 2 is not complete.

Tap Register on the touch screen of the machine to terminate the paper settings of the cassette 2.

994

2500

Cause

The cause of following may have occurred the failure of Automatic Print Head Alignment.

• Print head nozzles are clogged.

• The paper of size other than A4 or Letter is loaded in the cassette 2.

• The paper output slot is exposed to strong light.

Action

Tap OK on the touch screen to dismiss the error, then take the actions described below.

• Print the nozzle check pattern to check the status of the print head.

• Load one sheet of A4/Letter-sized plain paper and perform Automatic Print Head Alignment again.

• Adjust your operating environment and/or the position of the machine so that the paper output slot is not exposed directly to strong light.

After carrying out the above measures, if the problem continues after aligning the print head again, tap

OK on the touch screen to dismiss the error, and then perform Manual Print Head Alignment.

995

2700

Cause

Some errors occurred while copying and a certain time passed.

Action

Tap OK on the touch screen to dismiss the error, and try to copy again.

996

4100

Cause

The specified data cannot be printed.

Action

When you print the contents on CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM, confirm the message on the computer screen, make sure that genuine Canon ink tanks are installed properly for all colors, then start printing again.

997

4101

Cause

The machine does not support the paper size you specified.

Action

Touch the Stop button, specify the proper paper size, then print again.

If you print on the non-standard size paper, you can specify a custom size within the following range to print.

• Loading in the cassette 1:

-Width: 89.0 mm to 200.0 mm (3.50 inches to 7.87 inches)

-Height: 127.0 mm to 184.9 mm (5.00 inches to 7.28 inches)

• Loading in the cassette 2:

-Width: 90.0 mm to 215.9 mm (3.54 inches to 8.50 inches)

-Height: 185.0 mm to 355.6 mm (7.29 inches to 14.00 inches)

998

4103

Cause

Cannot perform printing with the current print settings.

Action

Touch the machine's Stop button to cancel printing.

Then change the print settings and print again.

999

5011

Cause

Printer error has occurred.

Action




1000

5012

Cause


Action




1001

5100

Cause


Action

Cancel printing and turn off the machine.

Then confirm the following.

• Confirm that there are no materials (e.g. the protective material or jammed paper) that is preventing the print head holder from moving.

If any, remove the materials.

• Confirm that the ink tanks are installed properly.

Push an ink tank until it clicks into place.

After confirming the conditions above, turn on the machine again.


Important

• When you clear the jammed paper or protective material that is preventing the print head holder from moving, be careful not to touch the clear film (A) or the white belt (B).


1002

5101

Cause


Action

Remove the protective material that is preventing the print head holder from moving, turn the machine off, and turn it back on.


1003

5200

Cause


Action




1004

5400

Cause


Action




1005

5B00

Cause


Action


1006

5B01

Cause


Action


1007

5B10

Cause


Action


1008

5B11

Cause


Action


1009

5C00

Cause


Action




1010

5C20

Cause


Action




1011

6000

Cause


Action




1012

6001

Cause


Action

If the paper output tray is closed, open it.




Important

• Do not close the paper output tray while the machine is in operation; otherwise, an error will occur.

1013

6003

Cause


Action

If the paper output tray is closed, open it.




Important

• Do not close the paper output tray while the machine is in operation; otherwise, an error will occur.

1014

6500

Cause


Action




1015

6502

Cause


Action




1016

6800

Cause


Action




1017

6801

Cause


Action




1018

6900

Cause


Action




1019

6901

Cause


Action




1020

6902

Cause


Action




1021

6910

Cause


Action




1022

6911

Cause


Action




1023

6920

Cause


Action




1024

6921

Cause


Action




1025

6930

Cause


Action




1026

6931

Cause


Action




1027

6932

Cause


Action




1028

6933

Cause


Action




1029

6934

Cause


Action




1030

6935

Cause


Action




1031

6936

Cause


Action




1032

6937

Cause


Action




1033

6938

Cause


Action




1034

6940

Cause


Action




1035

6941

Cause


Action




1036

6942

Cause


Action




1037

6943

Cause


Action




1038

6944

Cause


Action




1039

6945

Cause


Action




1040

6946

Cause


Action




1041

6950

Cause


Action




1042

6B20

Cause


Action




1043

B202

Cause

An error requiring you to contact the service center has occurred.

Action



1044

B203

Cause


Action



1045

B204

Cause


Action



1046

C000

Cause


Action

Cancel printing and turn off the machine.

Then confirm the following.

• Confirm that there are no materials (e.g. the protective material or jammed paper) that is preventing the print head holder from moving.

If any, remove the materials.

• Confirm that the ink tanks are installed properly.

Push an ink tank until it clicks into place.

After confirming the conditions above, turn on the machine again.


Important

• When you clear the jammed paper or protective material that is preventing the print head holder from moving, be careful not to touch the clear film (A) or the white belt (B).


1047